85 files changed, 17577 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/20480-8.txt b/20480-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0a6ca6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5824 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Palmistry for All, by Cheiro
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Palmistry for All
+
+Author: Cheiro
+
+Release Date: January 29, 2007 [EBook #20480]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PALMISTRY FOR ALL ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier, Christine D. and
+the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: (signed) Very Faithfully yours
+
+Cheiro]
+
+
+
+
+PALMISTRY
+
+FOR ALL
+
+  CONTAINING NEW INFORMATION
+  ON THE STUDY OF THE
+  HAND NEVER BEFORE
+  PUBLISHED
+
+BY
+
+CHEIRO
+
+
+_WITH A PREFACE TO AMERICAN READERS_
+
+_AND_
+
+_WITH UPWARDS OF SIXTY ILLUSTRATIONS_
+
+  G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS
+  NEW YORK      LONDON
+
+  COPYRIGHT, 1916
+  BY
+  G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS
+
+Published, May, 1916
+
+Twenty-second Impression
+
+
+Made in the United States of America
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+TO THE AMERICAN EDITION
+
+
+There is no country in the world where the "study of character" is more
+indulged in than in the United States of America. During my many visits
+there I could not help remarking how even the "hardest headed" business
+men used any form of this study that they could get hold of to help them
+in their business dealings with other men and also in endeavouring to
+ascertain the character of their clerks and employees.
+
+In looking over the records of my career I find that in the course of my
+visits to America I gave private lessons to the heads of two hundred and
+seventy business establishments in New York, one hundred and thirty-five
+in Boston, and three hundred and forty-two in Chicago.
+
+All these men were large employers of labour and what they principally
+wanted was, to have some help beyond that of their own judgment in
+dealing with those with whom they came in contact in the regular course
+of their business careers. In no other country did I find the same
+interest taken in the study of character from a practical standpoint.
+
+It is for this reason that I write a special Preface for this Edition,
+believing as I do that my American readers will appreciate the added
+information I may be able to give regarding the obtaining by a mere
+glance at a hand a quick grasp of the leading characteristics of the
+persons with whom they are thrown into contact, or for whatever reason
+they choose to make use of this study.
+
+Everyone knows that "the face can wear a mask," that a person may be a
+good actor and put on a certain expression that may deceive even the best
+judgment.
+
+But hands cannot change as the result of a mere effort to please; _the
+character they express is the real nature of the individual_--the true
+character that has been formed by heredity or that has grown up with the
+person by long years of habit.
+
+The characteristics alluded to below are those which may be easily
+observed and which are aids to a rapid judgment of character and which I
+have never before been able to give to the public in such a concise way.
+
+The more elaborate details concerning the ultimate success of the person
+one is talking to, their more intimate character and their future
+development will be found in their proper place, in the subsequent
+chapters.
+
+
+RULES FOR RAPID OBSERVATION
+
+_The Fingers_
+
+Observe the fingers. If they look short and stumpy in proportion to the
+rest of the palm--one may be sure that the individual to whom they belong
+is of an animal nature, possessing coarse instincts, devoid of real
+intellectuality, and belonging to the lower order of humanity.
+
+If the fingers and the palm appear equal in length, the owner belongs to
+a more cultured race. He has inherited from a more intellectual line of
+ancestors and for all work requiring intelligence and a higher mentality
+he or she could be depended on, whereas the first-mentioned type could
+not--no matter how well he might talk or advocate his own superiority.
+
+If the fingers look unusually long and thin, and in this way out of
+proportion to the palm, the man or woman will err on the side of too much
+ideality and refinement and is not suited to business or work requiring
+"level headedness" and practicality. It would be useless, for example, to
+put such a person in charge of work-people or over work-rooms. His
+ideality and refinement would be thrown away in such positions, and even
+with the best will in the world he would be completely out of harmony
+with his surroundings.
+
+Such a man, however, could be depended upon in all positions requiring
+personal mental work, research, science, literature, philosophy,
+educational work or, in fact, anything relating to the higher qualities
+of the mind.
+
+If his fingers, in addition to their length, were also knotty or jointed
+(joints much pronounced), he could be depended on to a still greater
+extent for all work requiring great thoughtfulness, detail, and
+concentration of mind.
+
+If, on the other hand, these long fingers were smooth jointed, he would,
+while having the same desire for ideality and for everything
+intellectual, be impulsive and inspirational, would lack a sense of
+detail and a love for detail in his own work, would be visionary,
+artistic, emotional. Such a person would be suited to artistic work,
+such as painting, making designs, models, etc., but could not be trusted
+to perform anything requiring detail, research or science, and would be
+utterly useless in any position where discipline or control of others
+were required.
+
+
+THE FINGERS CONSIDERED SEPARATELY
+
+Let us now observe the fingers separately from the rest of the hand.
+
+The first finger is considered as the Dictator, the Lawgiver, the finger
+of Ambition, the Indicator, the Pointer, etc.
+
+If this finger is unusually long and nearly equals the second, all these
+tendencies are extremely pronounced.
+
+Therefore, if your employee has this finger long, you can safely entrust
+him with control over, and charge of others. You will be amazed how well
+he or she will make rules and regulations and see that they are obeyed;
+but beware, Mr. Employer, lest your first finger is short in proportion
+as that of your employee is long, for, if such be the case, you too will
+have "to toe the line" and you may find yourself in a very disagreeable
+position.
+
+But let me give you a further warning: Should this man or woman have a
+first finger that is long and crooked, you will assuredly find out to
+your cost that the personal ambitions of such an individual are
+"crooked." Such an employee would be perfectly unscrupulous in finding
+out your secrets and getting you into his power.
+
+If the second finger is straight and well shaped, its owner will be very
+serious, a little inclined to melancholy, but will pay due regard to
+whatever responsibilities with which he may be entrusted, but again
+beware if this finger is crooked. In this case the owner would be,
+however, more subject to what may be called "a crooked fate" than
+wilfully "wrong." Such people are, as a rule, the children of strange
+circumstances over which they seem to have no control. They are
+continually getting themselves into trouble and into false positions,
+but, I must admit, more by a strange fatality of things than by their own
+wilful actions. Nevertheless, such infelicities might be very unpleasant
+for their employer, especially if he has more heart than brains.
+
+The third finger, if extremely long and straight, indicates an
+extraordinary desire for glory, celebrity, publicity and the like; and
+although this might be an extremely good quality in the case of an actor,
+preacher, politician or public man, it may be most undesirable if such a
+person is to occupy the position of a private secretary, or the
+confidential clerk to some family lawyer.
+
+If this finger is crooked as well as very long, all the above qualities
+will be intensified and exaggerated. The love of spending money and
+fondness for show will also be more marked, the gambling tendencies very
+pronounced. No position involving the handling of money, should be
+entrusted to the possessor of such a finger.
+
+The fourth, or little finger, if long (passing the nail joint of the
+third) is indicative of power of speech and subtlety in choice of
+language--the saying "to twist a person round one's little finger"
+originated from this very sign. Such people have a marvellous gift of
+speech, eloquence and flow of language, valuable gifts, of course, for
+orators and public persons, but not desirable qualities in a wife if a
+man is fond of sleep.
+
+A short "little finger" denotes the reverse of the above. Such persons
+find the greatest difficulty in expressing what they want to say, but
+they can write better than speak and should be encouraged to do so.
+
+These individuals have, however, not much power over others and the
+shorter the "little finger" is, the more timid and sensitive they are in
+the presence of strangers. If this finger is crooked, then these
+weaknesses are all the more emphasised, but if formed _crooked and long_
+the power of eloquence is also crooked. Such people will tell any "fairy
+tale" to suit their purpose--they are natural born liars and the position
+of President of the Ananias Club is their rightful inheritance.
+
+The first and third fingers absolutely of equal length is the best sign
+of _an equally balanced mind_, but such a sign is rather rare to find.
+
+When the fingers are very supple in the joints and turn backwards or
+outwards from the palm, it is an indication of a quick wit and clever
+brain; but such persons lack continuity of purpose. They have no "hold,"
+as it were, on any one thing.
+
+Fingers slightly curved inwards towards the palm, denote persons slow to
+grasp an idea, or a subject, but such people have retentive memories and
+"hold" or grip, as it were, any one thing they may take up.
+
+
+CHARACTER SHOWN BY THE THUMB
+
+The thumb is in itself more expressive of character than any other member
+of the hand. It was D'Arpentigny who wrote "the thumb individualises the
+man."
+
+Medical science has proved that there is such a thing as a "thumb centre"
+in the brain and any pressure or disease in that part of the brain _shows
+its effect in the thumb_.
+
+A large well-made thumb is the outward and visible sign of a
+strong-willed, determined person, be he man or woman.
+
+The longer the thumb, the more the power of will rules the actions; the
+shorter the thumb, the more brute force and obstinacy sways the nature.
+
+The shorter and more thick-set the nail phalange is, giving the
+appearance of a club, the more ungovernable is the person in his or her
+temper. Such people have no control over themselves and under the least
+opposition will fly into a blind rage of fury. This curious formation has
+been called the "Murderer's Thumb" because so many who have committed
+murder in a mad fit of passion have been found with this curious
+formation.
+
+An employee with this class of thumb should never be given any position
+of authority over others, for he could not curb his ungovernable temper.
+He would also be absolutely unbalanced in his jealousy, and no woman who
+has the ambition to live to the usual "threescore-years-and-ten" should
+risk marriage to a man with one of these thumbs. But as "love is blind"
+it is useless, I know, to give advice in such a case.
+
+The first joint or nail phalange of the thumb, when long and thin,
+denotes the opposite of the above characteristics. In such cases the
+person has the most absolute control over his temper, his will power is
+also strong but quick and unobtrusive, and in a firm, determined way
+people with such a thumb manage others and bend those around them to
+their purpose.
+
+The second joint, if delicately shaped, almost "waist like," indicates
+tact, diplomacy, and gentleness, also subtlety in argument; but if this
+part of the thumb be full looking or equal in size to that of the nail
+phalange, it denotes the person who cares nothing for tact but who, on
+all occasions, will speak his mind plainly, and with brutal frankness.
+
+When the thumb looks as if it were "tied in" close to the hand, the
+person is timid, easily frightened by both people and circumstances,
+narrow-minded in his views, and miserly in his habits. It is a
+well-established fact that the thumbs of all misers are "tied in" and
+cramped-looking. It is perhaps this very fear of things and people that
+in the end makes them misers with their gold.
+
+One need never waste one's time asking a person with one of these
+cramped-looking thumbs to do a favour, and may God help the business man
+or woman who ever gets into such a person's clutches!
+
+A thumb with the nail joint supple (bending backwards or as it is also
+called "double jointed") indicates a character the exact opposite of that
+associated with the "tied in" thumb. Possessors of such a thumb are
+generous, adaptable to others, extravagant, and impetuous in their
+actions and decisions. They promise things quickly and are more often
+heard to say "Yes" than "No"; but if they have time for reflection, they
+very often go back on their promises.
+
+Individuals having a "stiff-jointed" thumb, on the contrary, cannot
+easily adapt themselves to others. They are distant and more reserved
+with strangers. When asked to do a thing, they generally first say "No,"
+but on reflection or when reasoned with, they often give in to the other
+and generally regret having done so. It is useless to oppose such
+people--if one cannot lead them, it is no use attempting to force them
+against their will.
+
+This type has more self-control than the type of people with the "supple
+jointed" formation, and is not so generous or extravagant. Individuals of
+this group, however, make more reliable friends, so their friendship,
+though difficult to obtain, is generally worth having.
+
+A thumb standing very far out from the hand (almost at right angles to
+the palm) is not a good sign for ordinary success. Such people go to
+extremes in everything they do and are generally fanatics in religion,
+social reform, or whatever line of thought occupies their attention.
+
+
+HANDS, HARD AND SOFT
+
+Even in the simple act of shaking hands, one can form conclusions about
+character.
+
+Beware of any man or woman whose hand seems to slip from yours when you
+grasp theirs in greeting. Such persons are deceptive and treacherous.
+They may smile at you with their lips, but instinctively they regard you
+as their prey and will only use you for their own object.
+
+A soft, fat hand is the indication of an indolent and more or less lazy
+person.
+
+A firm hand is the sign of an energetic, reliable nature.
+
+A very thin hand denotes a restless energetic disposition, but one that
+is given to worry, and fretting and is generally discontented.
+
+A thin hand that feels listless in one's grasp denotes a weak
+constitution that has only sufficient energy to live.
+
+A cold, clammy hand is also a sign of poor health, but generally that of
+a very sensitive and nervous person.
+
+A person who keeps his hands closed while talking, is distrustful in his
+nature, has little self-reliance and can seldom be relied on by others.
+
+A man or woman who gives a good firm grasp of the hand, is
+self-confident, energetic, and generally reliable.
+
+When all the fingers (especially if the fingers be long) are seen always
+clinging, sticking, as it were, or folding over one another it denotes
+very doubtful qualities in the nature of their possessor and a decided
+tendency towards thieving and general lack of moral principal.
+
+Remember that the hands _are the immediate servants or instruments of the
+brain_. There are more motive and sensory nerves from the brain to the
+hand than to any other portion of the body and, whether sleeping or
+waking, they continually and unconsciously reflect the thought and
+character of the mind or soul of the individual.
+
+It will, then, be seen from these observations that without looking at
+the lines of the hand, one may be able to obtain certain details of
+character that are more trustworthy than those given by the face, and
+that these rules, if followed, should be of the greatest assistance and
+value to people in all walks of life.
+
+Many of these observations are further amplified in subsequent chapters
+of this work. There is not a single one of these rules that has not been
+proved by me in my long professional career, and knowing that they will
+bear the strictest inquiry and observation, it gives me pleasure now to
+offer them to the readers of the American Edition of _Palmistry for All_.
+
+                                                               CHEIRO.
+
+LONDON.
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+It was on July 21, 1894, that I had the honour of meeting Lord Kitchener
+and getting the autographed impression of his right hand, which I now
+publish for the first time as frontispiece to this volume. The day I had
+this interview, Lord Kitchener, or, as he was then, Major-General
+Kitchener, was at the War Office, and to take this impression had to use
+the paper on his table, and, strangely enough, the imprint of the War
+Office may be seen at the top of the second finger--in itself perhaps a
+premonition that he would one day be the controlling force of that great
+department.
+
+Lord Kitchener was at that moment Sirdar of the Egyptian Army. He had
+returned to England to tender his resignation on account of some hostile
+criticism about "the Abbas affair," and so I took the opportunity of his
+being in England to ask him to allow me to add his hand to my collection,
+which even then included some of the most famous men and women of the
+day.
+
+As Mr. T.P. O'Connor, in writing recently of Lord Kitchener, said: "One
+of his greatest qualities, at once useful and charming, is his
+accessibility. Anybody who has anything to say to him can approach him;
+anybody who has anything to teach him will find a ready and grateful
+learner."
+
+My experience can indeed bear out the truth of this clear judgment of one
+of the leading traits in Lord Kitchener's character. That very year,
+1894, was a notable one in his life; his strong-willed action over the
+Abbas affair was completely vindicated; he was made a K.C.M.G., and
+returned to Egypt with more power than ever.
+
+Once in his presence he put me completely at my ease, and in a few
+moments he appeared to be deeply interested in observing the difference
+between the lines in his own clearly-marked palm and those in dozens of
+other impressions that I put before him.
+
+He was then almost forty-four years of age, and I remember well how I
+explained the still higher positions and responsibilities that his path
+of Destiny mapped out before him. The heaviest and greatest of all would,
+I told him, be undertaken in his sixty-fourth year (1914), but how little
+either of us thought then that in that year the most terrible war of the
+century would have broken out.
+
+Believing, as I do, in the Law of Periodicity playing as great a r�le in
+the lives of individuals as it does in nations, it is strange to notice
+that the same radix numbers that governed Lord Kitchener's career when he
+was planning out the Egyptian campaign, which resulted in his great
+victories of Atbara and Omdurman in 1896 and 1897, are exactly the same
+for him in 1914-1915, and 1916 gives again the same radix number that in
+1898 saw him receive a vote of thanks from both Houses of Parliament, and
+a gift of �30,000 from the State.
+
+From the standpoint of those interested in this strange study of hands,
+the accompanying impression of Lord Kitchener's cannot help but be
+regarded as of great importance. In it, the rules of Palmistry that I
+have given in the following pages are borne out in all their details.
+
+Returning to the impression of this remarkable hand; even in shape alone
+one may read by the rules of this science the following clearly-marked
+characteristics:
+
+Length of fingers--intellectuality (page 134), strong determination and
+will-power (chapter on the Thumb, page 127), mentality and firm
+determination of purpose (_see_ Line of Head, page 17).
+
+The remarkable Line of Fate running up the centre of the hand and turning
+towards the first finger, denotes ambition and domination over others
+(page 52).
+
+The Line of Success and Fame, starting on the hand from the Line of Life
+and ascending to the base of the third finger, exactly coincides with the
+period in Lord Kitchener's career when he began to find recognition and
+success (page 63).
+
+As in my larger work on this subject I published Gladstone's hand as a
+remarkable illustration of the truth that may be found in this study, so
+in this present work with the same confidence I give this illustration of
+Lord Kitchener's as another proof of character indicated in the shape and
+lines of the hand, and as it has been said so often that "Character is
+Destiny," so it is surely not illogical to point out that in following
+the rules laid down by this study one may obtain a clear idea of the
+destiny that the Character, Will, and Individuality trace out in
+advance--tracks, as it were, stretching far out into the distant future
+for the engine of purpose and achievement to find already laid and ready
+to be used at the "appointed time."
+
+In conclusion, as I have now completely retired from all professional
+work, I may be allowed to point out that I am not publishing this book
+with the idea of seeking clients. I have no desire but to see this
+strange study taken up as a useful and practical means of obtaining an
+exact judgment of the character, qualities, and hidden tendencies that
+might otherwise be ignored.
+
+I think that if all parents knew at least something of Palmistry, the
+vast majority of children would be more usefully trained and their proper
+tendencies developed.
+
+It is often too late when a child discovers--and most probably by
+accident--some tendency or talent that had never been suspected by its
+parents.
+
+It is no wonder that so few persons find their true vocations in the
+world, when it is remembered the random, haphazard way in which children
+are brought up--educated for the most part in some scholastic mill that
+grinds down all to the same dead level of mediocrity, and then turns them
+into the Army, the Church, or into trade.
+
+If, on the contrary, all these studies that teach the understanding of
+character were more encouraged, parents would have less excuse for the
+supreme ignorance they now show as to the real nature of those children
+who hold them responsible for their entry into the battlefield of
+existence.
+
+These same parents would lift up their voices in righteous indignation if
+soldiers were sent into battle untrained, without their proper equipment,
+and yet these same parents have never, in the whole course of their
+lives, made the simplest study of any one of those many subjects by which
+they could in knowing the nature of their child, have strengthened weak
+points in the fortress of character, or by developing some talent or
+gift, doubly armed him for his entry into the battle of life.
+
+It is from this standpoint that I earnestly hope this study of hands may
+some day be taken up. It was from this standpoint that I interested such
+men as Gladstone, Professor Max Muller, of Oxford, Lord Russell, when he
+was Lord Chief Justice, King Edward VII., and many others too numerous to
+mention; and lastly, it is from the same standpoint that I have now
+written this book, which under the title of _Palmistry for All_, will, I
+hope, appeal to all classes, and cause such an interest in the Study of
+Character that, instead of such an art being left in the hands of a few,
+it will, on the contrary, become universally used for the benefit of all.
+
+CHEIRO
+
+NOTE.--Cheiro retired from all professional work some time ago, and the
+public is therefore warned against persons pretending that they are the
+real "Cheiro," and endeavouring to pass themselves off as the author of
+his well-known works.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+                                                                  PAGE
+  PREFACE                                                          iii
+  INTRODUCTION                                                      xv
+
+  PART I
+  PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY
+
+  CHAPTER
+
+  I.     A BRIEF R�SUM� OF THE HISTORY OF THE STUDY
+             OF HANDS THROUGH THE CENTURIES TO THE
+             PRESENT DAY                                             1
+
+  II.    THE LINE OF HEAD OR THE INDICATIONS OF MENTALITY            8
+           The Line of Head and its Variations                      10
+           The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life              16
+           The Line of Head separated from the Line of Life         19
+           The Line of Head and its Secondary Signs                 22
+           Changes in the Line of Head                              26
+           Crosses and Squares in connection with the Line of Head  30
+           Double Lines of Head                                     31
+           The Line of Head on the Seven Types of Hands             33
+
+  III.   THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS                        36
+
+  IV.    THE LINE OF MARS OR INNER LIFE LINE                        44
+
+  V.     THE LINE OF DESTINY OR FATE                                47
+           From the Line of Life                                    50
+           From the Wrist                                           50
+           From the Mount of the Moon                               51
+           From the Middle of the Palm                              55
+           Influence Lines to the Line of Fate                      57
+           Double Lines of Fate                                     57
+
+  VI.    THE LINE OF THE SUN OR SUCCESS                             61
+           From the Line of Life                                    63
+           From the Line of Fate                                    63
+           From the Plain of Mars                                   63
+           From the Mount of the Moon                               63
+           From the Line of Head                                    63
+           From the Line of Heart                                   63
+
+  VII.   THE LINE OF HEART AS INDICATING THE AFFECTIONATE
+             AND EMOTIONAL NATURE                                   67
+
+  VIII.  SIGNS RELATING TO MARRIAGE                                 73
+
+         THE LINE OF MARRIAGE:
+           At the Base of the Fourth Finger                         73
+           Influence Lines to the Fate Line                         77
+           Influence Lines on Venus                                 79
+
+  IX.    LINES DENOTING CHILDREN, THEIR SEX, AND OTHER MATTERS
+             CONCERNING THEM                                        81
+
+  X.     THE LINE OF HEALTH OR HEPATICA                             83
+
+  XI.    THE GIRDLE OF VENUS                                        88
+           The Ring of Saturn                                       90
+           The Bracelets                                            91
+
+  XII.   THE LINE OF INTUITION                                      92
+           The Via Lasciva                                          93
+
+  XIII.  LA CROIX MYSTIQUE                                          95
+           The Ring of Solomon                                      96
+
+  XIV.   TRAVELS, VOYAGES AND ACCIDENTS                             97
+
+  XV.    THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT AND THE GRILLE           101
+
+  XVI.   THE STAR, THE CROSS, THE SQUARE                           104
+
+  XVII.  DIFFERENT CLASSES OF LINES AND RIGHT AND LEFT HANDS       107
+
+  XVIII. THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE                     110
+
+  XIX.   HOW TO TELL TIME AND DATES OF THE PRINCIPAL EVENTS IN
+             THE LIFE                                              112
+
+
+  PART II
+
+  CHEIROGNOMY--OR THE SHAPES OF THE HANDS AND FINGERS
+
+  I.     THE STUDY OF THE SHAPE OF THE HANDS                       117
+
+         THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS:
+           The Elementary                                          119
+           The Square                                              119
+           The Spatulate                                           121
+           The Philosophic                                         122
+           The Conic                                               124
+           The Psychic                                             125
+           The Mixed                                               126
+
+  II.    THE THUMB                                                 127
+           The Supple Jointed                                      128
+           The Firm Jointed                                        128
+           The First, Second and Third Phalange                    131
+
+  III.   THE FINGERS                                               133
+           Length of Fingers to one another                        133
+           Smooth Jointed                                          135
+           Knotty Jointed                                          135
+
+  IV.    THE NAILS                                                 136
+           Long Nails                                              136
+           Short Nails                                             137
+           Flat Nails                                              138
+           Their Indications of Disease                            139
+
+  V.     THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND                                    140
+
+  VI.    THE MOUNT OF MARS                                         144
+
+  VII.   THE MOUNT OF JUPITER                                      150
+
+  VIII.  THE MOUNT OF SATURN                                       154
+
+  IX.    THE MOUNT OF THE SUN                                      158
+
+  X.     THE MOUNT OF MERCURY                                      162
+
+  XI.    THE MOUNT OF THE MOON                                     168
+
+  XII.   THE MOUNT OF VENUS                                        173
+
+  XIII.  ADVICE TO THE STUDENT: THE BEST MEANS TO
+            MAKE CASTS OR TAKE IMPRESSIONS OF THE HANDS            178
+
+
+
+
+ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+                                                                  PAGE
+
+         Cheiro                                         _Frontispiece_
+
+         The Lines of the Hand                                       1
+
+         Lord Kitchener's Hand                                       2
+
+  PLATE
+
+  I.     The Three Principal Positions for the Commencement
+             of the Line of Head                                    11
+
+  II.    The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life and
+             its Terminations                                       18
+
+  III.   The Line of Head separated from the Line of
+             Life                                                   20
+
+  IV.    Islands on the Line of Head                                24
+
+  V.     More Variations of the Line of Head                        27
+
+  VI.    The Line of Head and Line of Heart running
+             together                                               29
+
+  VII.   Double Lines of Head, also Crosses and Squares             32
+
+  VIII.  The Line of Life and Sections of Influences from
+             the Mounts                                             37
+
+  IX.    The Line of Life and its Variations                        40
+
+  X.     The Line of Life and Line of Mars                          45
+
+  XI.    The Line of Destiny and its Modifications                  51
+
+  XII.   The Line of Destiny and its Variations                     53
+
+  XIII.  The Line of Destiny and its Modifications                  56
+
+  XIV.   The Line of Destiny, Islands, and other Signs              59
+
+  XV.    The Line of Sun and its Modifications                      62
+
+  XVI.   The Line of Heart and its Variations                       68
+
+  XVII.  The Line of Marriage                                       74
+
+  XVIII. Marriage Lines and Influence Lines which further
+             help in denoting Marriage                              78
+
+  XIX.   The Line of Health                                         84
+
+  XX.    The Girdle of Venus. The Ring of Saturn.
+             The Bracelets. The Line of Intuition. The
+             Via Lasciva                                            89
+
+  XXI.   Travels, Voyages, Accidents, and Descending
+           Lines from the Mounts                                    99
+
+  XXII.  The Island, the Circle, the Spot, the Grille, the
+           Star, and the Square                                    102
+
+  XXIII. Minor Marks and Signs                                     105
+
+  XXIV.  Minor Marks and Signs                                     108
+
+  XXV.   The Great Triangle and the Quadrangle                     111
+
+  XXVI.  Times and Dates of Principal Events                       113
+
+
+  CHEIROGNOMY
+
+  ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+  I.     The Elementary Hand                                       120
+         The Square or Useful Hand                                 120
+         The Spatulate Hand                                        120
+         The Philosophic Hand                                      120
+
+  II.    The Conic or Artistic Hand                                123
+         The Psychic Hand                                          123
+         The Mixed Hand                                            123
+
+  III.   Thumbs:
+         The Clubbed Thumb                                         129
+         The Supple Jointed Thumb                                  129
+         The Firm Jointed Thumb                                    129
+         The Waist-Like Thumb                                      129
+         The Straight Thumb                                        129
+         The Elementary Thumb                                      129
+
+  IV.    The Fingers:
+         The Smooth                                                134
+         The Square                                                134
+         The Knotty                                                134
+
+  V.     The Nails:
+         Delicacy of Throat                                        137
+         Chest and Bronchial                                       137
+         Spinal Weakness                                           137
+         Weak Action of the Heart                                  137
+         Paralysis                                                 137
+
+  VI.    The Mounts of the Hand:
+         The Mount of Venus                                        141
+         The Mount of Mars                                         141
+         The Mount of Jupiter                                      141
+         The Mount of Saturn                                       141
+         The Mount of the Sun                                      141
+         The Mount of Mercury                                      141
+         The Mount of the Moon                                     141
+
+[Illustration: THE LINES OF THE HAND.]
+
+
+
+
+Palmistry for All
+
+
+
+
+PART I--PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+
+A BRIEF R�SUM� OF THE HISTORY OF THE STUDY OF HANDS THROUGH THE CENTURIES
+TO THE PRESENT DAY
+
+The success I had during the twenty-five years in which I was connected
+with this study was, I believe, chiefly owing to the fact that although
+my principal study was the lines and formation of hands, yet I did not
+confine myself alone to that particular page in the book of Nature. I
+endeavoured to study every phase of thought that can throw light on human
+life; consequently the very ridges of the skin, the hair found on the
+hands, all were used as a detective would use a clue to accumulate
+evidence. I found people were sceptical of such a study only because they
+had not the subject presented to them in a logical manner.
+
+There are hundreds of facts connected with the hand that people have
+rarely, if ever, heard of, and I think it will not be out of place if I
+touch on them here. For instance, in regard to what are known as the
+corpuscles, Meissner, in 1853, proved that these little molecular
+substances were distributed in a peculiar manner in the hand itself. He
+found that in the tips of the fingers they were 108 to the square line,
+with 400 papill�; that they gave forth certain distinct crepitations, or
+vibrations, and that in the red lines of the hand they were most numerous
+and, strange to say, were found in straight individual rows in the lines
+of the palm. Experiments were made as to these vibrations, and it was
+proved that, after a little study, one could distinctly detect and
+recognise the crepitations _in relation to each individual_. They
+increased or decreased in every phase of health, thought, or excitement,
+and were extinct the moment death had mastered its victim. About twenty
+years later, experiments were made with a man in Paris, who had an
+abnormally acute sense of sound (Nature's compensation for want of sight,
+as he had been born blind). In a very short time this man could detect
+the slightest change or irregularity in these crepitations, and through
+the changes was able to tell with wonderful accuracy about how old a
+person was, and how near they were to illness, and even death.
+
+The study of these corpuscles was also taken up by Sir Charles Bell, who,
+in 1874, demonstrated that each corpuscle contained the end of a nerve
+fibre, and was in immediate connection with the brain. This great
+specialist also demonstrated that every portion of the brain was in touch
+with the nerves of the hand and more particularly with the corpuscles
+found in the tips of the fingers and the lines of the hand.
+
+[Illustration: LORD KITCHENER'S HAND.]
+
+The detection of criminals by taking impressions of the tips of the
+fingers and by thumb marks is now used by the police of almost every
+country, and thousands of criminals have been tracked down and identified
+by this means.
+
+To-day, at Scotland Yard, is to be seen almost an entire library now
+devoted to books on this side of the subject and to the collections that
+the police have made, and yet, in my short time, I remember how the idea
+was scoffed at when Monsieur Bertillon and the French police first
+commenced the detection of criminals by this method. If the ignorant
+prejudice against a complete study of the hand were overcome, the police
+would be greatly assisted by studying the lines of the palm, and
+acquiring a knowledge of what these lines mean, especially as regards
+mentality and the inclination of the brain in one direction or another.
+
+It is a well-known fact that, even if the skin be burned off the hands or
+removed by an acid, in a short time the lines will reappear exactly as
+they were before, and the same happens to the ridges or "spirals" in the
+skin of the inside tips of the fingers and thumb.
+
+The scientific use of such a study could also be made invaluable in
+foreseeing tendencies towards insanity, etc.
+
+Sir Thomas Browne, in his _Religio Medici_, after referring to
+Physiognomy, says:
+
+    "Now there are besides these characters in our faces certain
+    mystical figures in our hands, which I dare not call mere
+    dashes, strokes _� la vol�e_ or at random, because delineated
+    by a pencil that never works in vain, and hereof I take more
+    particular notice because I carry that in mine own hand which
+    I could never read nor discover in another."
+
+But prejudice is a hard thing to combat, and, in consequence, a study
+which could render untold aid to humanity has been neglected in modern
+times. Yet it cannot be denied that this strange study was practised and
+followed by some of the greatest teachers and students of other
+civilisations.
+
+Whether or no these ancient philosophers were more enlightened than we
+are has long been a question of dispute, but the one point and the most
+important one which has been admitted is, that in those days the greatest
+study of mankind was man. It is, therefore, reasonable to suppose that
+their conclusions are more likely to be correct than those of an age like
+our own--famous chiefly for its implements of destruction, its warships,
+its dynamite, and its cannon.
+
+This study of hands can be traced back to the very earliest, most
+enlightened forms of civilisation. It has been practised by the greatest
+minds in all those civilisations, minds that have left their mental
+philosophies and their monuments for us to marvel at. India, China,
+Persia, Egypt, Rome--all in their study of mankind have placed the
+greatest store in their study of the hand.
+
+During my stay in India, I was permitted by some Brahmans (descendants of
+the Joshi Caste, famous from time immemorial for their knowledge in
+occult subjects) with whom it was my good fortune to become intimately
+acquainted, to examine and make extracts from an extraordinary book on
+this subject which they regarded as almost sacred, and which belonged to
+the great past of the now despised Hindustan.
+
+As the wisdom of the Hindus spread far and wide across the earth, so the
+theories and ideas about this study spread and were practised in other
+countries. Similar to the way in which religion suits itself to the
+conditions of the country in which it is propagated, so has it divided
+itself into various systems. It is, however, to the days of the Greek
+civilisation that we owe the present clear and lucid form of the study.
+The Greek civilisation has, in many ways, been considered the highest and
+most intellectual in the world, and here it is that Palmistry or
+Cheiromancy (from the Greek [Greek: che�r], the hand) grew and found
+favour in the eyes of those who have given us laws and philosophies that
+we employ to-day and whose works are taught in all our leading colleges
+and schools.
+
+It is a well-known and undisputed fact that the philosopher Anaxagoras
+not only taught but practised this study. We also find that Hispanus
+discovered on an altar dedicated to Hermes a book on Cheiromancy, written
+in gold letters, which he sent as a present to Alexander the Great, as "a
+study worthy of the attention of an elevated and enquiring mind." Instead
+of it being followed by the "weak-minded," we find, on the contrary, that
+it numbered amongst its disciples such men of learning as Aristotle,
+Pliny, Paracelsus, Cardamis, Albertus Magnus, the Emperor Augustus, and
+many others of note.
+
+This brings us down to the period when the power of the Church was
+beginning to be felt outside the domain and jurisdiction of religion. It
+is said that the early Fathers were jealous of the influence of this
+old-world science. Whether this be true or not, we find that it was
+bitterly denounced and persecuted by the early Church. It has always
+been, that the history of any dominant creed or sect is the history of
+opposition to knowledge, unless that knowledge come through it. This
+study, therefore, the offspring of "pagans and heathens," was not even
+given a trial. It was denounced as sorcery and witchcraft; the devil was
+conjured up as the father of all such students, and the result was that
+through this bitter persecution, the study was outlawed, and fell into
+the hands of vagrants, tramps, and gipsies. In spite of this persecution
+it is interesting and significant to notice that almost the first book
+ever printed was a work on Palmistry, _Die Kunst Ciromantia_, printed in
+Augsburg, in the year 1475.
+
+In examining this subject it will be found that in the study of mankind
+it came to be recognised that, as there was a natural position on the
+face for the nose, eyes, lips, etc., so also on the hand was there a
+natural position for what is known as the Line of Head, Line of Life, and
+so on. If these were found in some unnatural position they would equally
+be the indications of unnatural tendencies. It doubtless took years of
+study to name these lines and marks, but it must be remembered that this
+curious study is more ancient than any other in the world.
+
+In the original Hebrew of the Book of Job (chap. xxxvii., ver. 7), we
+find these significant words: "God caused signs or seals on the hands of
+all the sons of men, that the sons of men might know their works."
+
+As the student of anatomy can build up the entire system from the
+examination of a single bone, so may a person by a careful study of an
+important member of the body such as the hand, apart from anything
+superstitious or even mystical, build up the entire action of the system
+and trace every effect back to its cause.
+
+To-day the science of the present is coming to the rescue of the
+so-called superstition of the past. All over the world scientists are
+little by little sweeping aside prejudice and beginning to study occult
+questions. Perhaps the "whys and wherefores" of such things may one of
+these days be as easily explained as are those wireless waves of
+electricity that carry messages from land to land.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD OR THE INDICATIONS OF THE MENTALITY
+
+The object of the following chapters is to give clear and unmistakable
+instruction on the lines and markings of the hands, both from the
+student's standpoint and from that of the general reader. This is not
+usually the course adopted in books printed on this subject which have to
+appeal to a general public.
+
+During my twenty-five years' professional experience in England, America,
+and other countries, I have carefully noted down the questions that are
+not answered in books published on this subject. I have also recorded
+what are the difficulties that arise in the minds of those students who
+meet this, that, or the other mark or line and search in vain for some
+explanation as to its meanings. I may add that there is not a single
+point on which I give information that has not been proved by me from
+probably thousands of cases that have come before me during my own
+professional experience.
+
+As regards illustrations, I have endeavoured to make these of the
+simplest and clearest kind possible. I have every confidence that if they
+are carefully studied, no student can fail to grasp this subject in a
+masterful manner, and that whoever acts upon the advice I give in these
+pages, cannot fail to become successful as an interpreter of this study.
+
+In all my work I regard the Line of Head (page 11) or the Line of
+Mentality as the most important sign that can be found in the hand.
+
+A Line of Head is like the needle in the compass, without a true
+knowledge of which it is impossible to grasp the "direction of the
+subject." I have seen more mistakes caused by a lack of grasp of this
+point than by anything else.
+
+I have seen, for example, many students make the mistake of paying great
+attention to what looked like a good Line of Sun or Success, and, at the
+same time, not noticing a weak, badly formed Line of Head, which
+contradicted the promise of success given by the various lines. If, on
+the other hand, the student had first noticed the Line of Head, he would
+have been able to tell the subject that the promise of success was not
+backed up by the intelligence or the mentality.
+
+As regards the future being foreshadowed, it has been demonstrated that
+the brain is always growing, changing, increasing, or diminishing. These
+changes commence years before the effect is shown by the thoughts or
+actions of the individual. A boy ten years old may at that point commence
+a development which will not be felt until he is thirty, and then it may
+change his whole life and career. As this development commences at ten,
+even at that age it has affected certain nerves, and they in their turn
+have already affected the Line of Head--a full twenty years before the
+point of change or action has been reached. It therefore follows that the
+future may be seen and told by a careful examination of the hand which,
+as Aristotle has said, is the "organ of all organs, the active agent of
+the passive powers of the entire system."
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS VARIATIONS
+
+The Line of Head (page 11), or indication of the Mentality of the
+subject, must in all cases be considered as the most important line on
+the hand. The greatest attention should be paid to it, so as to obtain a
+clear grasp of the Mentality under consideration.
+
+The two hands must be carefully compared--the left showing the inherited
+tendencies, the right the developed or cultivated qualities. The
+slightest change or deviation in the markings from the left to the right
+should be carefully noted down or remembered.
+
+The direction or the termination or end of the line should, above all, be
+distinctly noted, for the all-important reason that this shows the
+direction that the Mentality is inclined to develop towards. For example,
+if found with the end of the line sloping downwards in the left hand, and
+having become straight or lying across the palm in the right--the student
+is safe in concluding that the subject has not been able to follow his
+natural bent, but by the force of circumstances has been obliged to make
+himself more practical, to study business methods, and to have undertaken
+a training towards practicality and level-headedness in order to rise
+equal to the circumstances that he found himself forced to meet.
+
+In this way the student obtains an insight into the earlier conditions of
+the life under examination that is invaluable, especially when there is,
+as will be found in many cases, no Line of Destiny visible in the early
+years.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE I.
+
+THE THREE PRINCIPAL POSITIONS FOR THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE LINE OF HEAD.]
+
+If, on the contrary, the Line of Head is found exactly in the same
+position on the right hand as on the left, or even very nearly so, the
+student can be sure that there was little or no strain in the early
+years, but that the subject had easy conditions which were favourable,
+and which allowed him to develop his natural bent of Mentality.
+
+If, however, it is found that the left hand shows a forked ending to the
+Line of Head, namely, one end sloping downwards and the other end
+straight, or nearly so, and that the right hand shows only the straight
+line, then the student may decide that the subject inherited from the
+parents two natures, the imaginative and the practical, and that he chose
+to develop the latter, either in the direction of business or science.
+
+In such a case, the student may state with confidence that the parents of
+the subject were decidedly opposite in their characteristics. If the line
+has become straight in the right hand the subject takes more after the
+side that was practical.
+
+In the case of boys or men it must be remembered that they will take more
+after their mother's mental peculiarities, and in the case of girls or
+women that they more generally take after the mental qualities of the
+father.
+
+On a man's left hand that has the forked ending with the upper end
+straight, or nearly so, the student can state that the mother was the
+more practical of the parents. If on the right hand the same mark has
+become clearest the man developed, followed, or cultivated the mental
+qualities of the mother more than those of the father. When reading a
+woman's hand the reverse will apply.
+
+If, on the contrary, the lower line was the more developed on the right
+hand, then the subject, if a man, had developed the imaginative or
+artistic qualities of the mother, and _vice versa_ if the subject be a
+girl or a woman.
+
+When the Line of Head looks light or faint on the left, and strong and
+clear on the right, the student can safely state that the subject did not
+inherit any strong mental bent from either parent, but has cultivated and
+developed his own mentality.
+
+In such a case the subject has been a hard mental student, and has become
+mentally superior to his or her parents. This is often found in the case
+of "self-made" men or women, who have had little or no education in their
+early life or in their home, but who from an innate love of education
+developed themselves mentally. Such a sign would speak volumes for the
+will power and ambition of the subject under examination.
+
+If the Line of Head is lighter and poorer on the right hand than on the
+left, the student can state that the subject has not made the most of his
+opportunities mentally, and that he has not, and never will, equal the
+brain power and education of his or her parents.
+
+In such a case one may also be sure that the subject has not a very
+strong will power--at least mentally--although he might be very obstinate
+by nature, which will be seen from the quality exhibited by the nail
+phalange of the thumb (page 129).
+
+A poor or non-developed Line of Head in the right hand of any man or
+woman is also the indication of a lack of purpose or ambition--there
+being no ambition where a want of mental desire and development is so
+distinctly shown.
+
+A clean cut deep Line of Head is a more powerful sign of mentality than
+when the line is very broad, or lying, as it were, merely on the surface
+of the palm.
+
+A wide broad line shows less concentration and a more vacillating
+changeable nature. This rule applies with equal truth to all the lines on
+the palm.
+
+Broad, coarse-looking lines are more a constitutional sign than a mental
+indication. They are often found in cases where the subject leads a
+robust outdoor life, and those who have developed the physical side of
+their nature more than the mental.
+
+Great brain workers usually have thin, fine, clean-looking lines, and
+especially that of the Line of Head.
+
+It will thus be seen that by observation the student will be enabled to
+class the sort of life led by the person under examination. No matter how
+intellectual a man or woman may look, the lines on the hand will indicate
+whether or not they have developed their intellectuality. In this way it
+will be seen that a study of the hand becomes a far more accurate guide
+than the study of the face. Many men and women may have handsome,
+intellectual faces and yet prefer sport or outdoor life to any mental
+pursuit or exercise.
+
+Turning from an examination of the direction of ending of the Line of
+Head, the student must next examine the indications of the beginnings of
+this important Line. For example, the Line of Head may commence in three
+distinct different ways.
+
+  (1) From inside the Line of Life (1-1, Plate I.).
+  (2) Joined to the Line of Life (2-2, Plate I.).
+  (3) And outside the Line of Life (3-3, Plate I.).
+
+The first is the most uncertain of all. It denotes an over-sensitive,
+over-cautious, timid person. It also indicates a highly nervous, easily
+excited individual, one who has little control over himself or his
+temper, who is easily put out over trifles, and liable to do the most
+erratic things, or fly off at a tangent when irritated. Such people are
+always in trouble, generally fighting or quarrelling with those about
+them and over things that are of no consequence. They are likewise so
+easily wounded in their feelings, that even a look or an imagined slight
+will put them out of humour or upset them for days.
+
+If this Line of Head farther out in the palm become straight, it denotes
+that the subject will, later, by the development of his intelligence
+largely overcome this failing of over-sensitiveness. If the line slope
+much or bend down towards the wrist or on to the Mount of Luna (the Mount
+of Imagination), then the subject will become still worse with his
+advancing years. If the Line of Head is also poorly marked, or with
+"hairlines" from it, it is often the indication of some form of insanity
+which is likely to cause the subject to be placed under restraint in
+later life.
+
+If, with this latter indication, the student also finds all the upward
+main lines, such as the Line of Destiny, etc., fading out past the middle
+of the palm, the indication of insanity and restraint becomes all the
+more certain.
+
+This class of Head Line is largely found in cases where the subject is
+naturally inclined towards drink and intemperance of every description.
+
+Even in cases where there are good lines running up the palm, it will
+usually be found that the subject gives way to occasional fits of
+intemperance or the desire for drugs. The qualities of the fiery Mount of
+Mars, from which such a Line of Head starts inside the Life Line, is
+largely the cause of the peculiarities above indicated. The opposite
+Mount of Mars (page 141) on the side of the hand, on the contrary, gives
+mental control, so that even when the Line of Head runs out straight on
+the palm it partakes of this "Mental Mars" quality, and so denotes that
+later on in years the subject with such a Line of Head will be able to
+develop mental control. The sloping Line of Head, however, would denote
+that the subject allows himself to turn, as it were, away from mental
+control, and so lets the earlier tendencies become his master.
+
+This point alone is worthy of the consideration of all parents, and if
+observed by them would do much to help such children to develop mental
+control over themselves. The accompanying plates show this formation of
+the Line of Head in all its variations.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+The position of this line indicates in all cases a highly sensitive
+disposition, which inclines towards the side of caution and also lacks
+self-confidence (2-2, Plate I.). Even the cleverest people with this sign
+seem to rein themselves in too tightly, and are always inclined to
+undervalue their capabilities and talents.
+
+When, with the same indication, the line is also sloping slightly
+downwards, the sensitiveness is still more increased. This form is
+largely found on the hands of artists, painters, and those who even in
+other walks of life have the sensitive artistic temperament, even though
+it may not have been developed to a larger extent. If, on the contrary,
+the Line of Head joined to the Line of Life runs straight out across the
+hand towards the mental Mount of Mars (2-2, Plate I.), the subject,
+though still extremely sensitive, has got greater courage of his
+opinions. Such people do not get credit for being as highly sensitive as
+do the other people with the line sloping downwards towards the Mount of
+Imagination. The straighter the Head Line is found, the subject can be
+more relied on to carry out his determination, and often these highly
+sensitive and even nervous people are found doing very determined work in
+connection with some battle for principle or for right which they believe
+it their moral duty to carry out. If this class of Line of Head, however,
+go very far across the hand and straight on to the Mental Mount of Mars,
+it indicates an extremely strong-willed determined person who has the
+power to hide his sensitiveness and nervousness and stake everything for
+what he believes his duty to carry out.
+
+The difference in the observation of these two distinct classes of
+individuals, namely, those with the Line of Head joined but sloping, and
+the Line of Head joined and straight across the hand, has caused many
+exponents of this study to make great mistakes in the judgment of their
+subject. When, as is very often the case, the Line of Head is forked
+(3-3, Plate II.), also when joined and when these forked lines are equal
+to one another, especially in cases where the Line of Head is joined to
+the Line of Life showing the sensitive temperament, this forked mark
+often indicates a certain want of decision. The subject is inclined to
+balance too much between the two qualities of brain, the practical and
+the imaginative. As to what they should do for the best, in such cases it
+is always wise to advise the subject to act according to first impulse
+either in dealing with practical or imaginative things. By so doing they
+employ, as it were, the intuition of the brain, and by using it do not
+waver and vacillate by too much reasoning over the question or
+endeavouring to see both sides of it at once. When the sloping Line of
+Head has a gentle curve downwards towards the Mount of the Moon (1-1,
+Plate II.), distinct control over the imagination is indicated. The
+student will then know that the subject simply uses his imagination when
+he wishes to do so instead of being controlled by it. But the contrary is
+the case when the line bends too far down this Mount (4-4, Plate II.). In
+this case the subject is the slave of his imagination and generally does
+erratic and peculiar things or can only work in moods of the moment.
+People of this latter class seldom, if ever, produce the great results in
+the world of art or imagination as do those who have the line simply
+curving downwards into this Mount.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE II.
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS TERMINATIONS.]
+
+When the Line of the Head bends completely down and turns with a curve,
+as it were, under the base of the Mount of Luna (5-5, Plate II.), the
+tendency is to extreme morbid imaginings and such extreme sensitiveness,
+that people on whose hands it is found generally separate themselves from
+the rest of their fellows, and either retire from the world altogether
+and live a solitary life or else make their exit by the gate of suicide.
+The latter is, in fact, generally the ending of such lives. Their extreme
+sensitiveness evidently renders life for them almost unbearable. But this
+formation must not be confounded with the Line of Head curving downwards
+through the upper part of the Mount (4-4, Plate II.). In this latter
+case, it can even descend as far down as the wrist itself, and, unless it
+has an island or star at the end of the line, there is not the danger of
+suicide. In all such cases, however, there is extreme imagination,
+extreme sensibility, and a tendency to melancholy and morbidness, but
+there is no indication of the brain breaking down under strain as there
+is in the other case of what is known as the distinct tendency for
+self-murder.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+The Line of Head is more frequently found connected with than separated
+from the Line of Life. When the space is not very wide (3-3, Plate I.),
+it is an excellent mark to have, giving independence of thought,
+quickness of judgment, and a certain mental daring that is invaluable in
+fighting the battle of life. When the Line of Head is at the same time
+lying fairly straight across the palm, such individuals have an immense
+power over others, but their capabilities are always more distinctly
+shown if they should in any form go in for some kind of public life.
+People possessing this mark are rather less "hard students" than those
+with the Line of Head and Line of Life joined together, but they have
+such brilliancy and quickness of thought that they seem to see in a flash
+that which takes the other class hard work to attain. But these people
+with the "open Line of Head" must, above all things, have purpose in
+their life. Without purpose they are rather like a ship drifting on an
+idle sea. They may spend their life in an aimless way unless "the call"
+comes to them or the tide of ambition turns their way and carries them
+onward.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE III.
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE.]
+
+The same class of line but sloping is the more uncertain of the two
+characters, because the person is still more inclined to work only by
+moods. If the mood or the desire does not come, such people, although
+always brilliant and clever, may often waste their lives doing nothing.
+
+Those people with the Line of Head "open" and ascending slightly upwards
+towards or on to the Mental Mount of Mars (3-3, Plate III.), are
+self-appointed leaders, organizers of any public movement. They will
+sacrifice everything, home, affection, and all ties for what they believe
+is their public duty in connection with the work that they have
+undertaken.
+
+The Line of Head very open and separate from the Line of Life denotes a
+character with too little caution or sensitiveness (4-4, Plate III.). The
+subject will go to the opposite extreme of him with the Line of Head and
+Line of Life joined. When the space is very wide it denotes excessive
+impetuosity and lack of continuity of purpose, a person who pushes
+himself forward on all occasions, a great desire for notoriety and one
+continually changing his plans as far as the world is concerned. When
+this line is excessively open or separate from the Line of Life, the
+brain seems to be an extremely excitable one. The subject suffers greatly
+from excessive blood to the head, mental hysteria, sleeplessness, and all
+things that affect the brain. If the Line of Head is badly formed with
+islands, or a broad line with breaks and hair lines (1-1, Plate IV.), it
+is just as much a mark of another form of insanity as the Line of Head
+curving downwards at the wrist, but with the line mentioned the type is
+inclined to be morbid with a tendency to suicide.
+
+This other Line of Head with islands indicates the character that will be
+more likely to be excitable and fly into a temper and kill other people.
+A Line of Head not too widely separated and either one end of it
+commencing on the Mount of Jupiter, or with its main branch from the
+Mount of Jupiter (4-4, Plate III.), is one of the most brilliant marks of
+all. The student must, however, carefully establish this difference of
+the Line of Head in his own mind, as well as the termination or the
+ending of this line. Once he has these two points firmly established, he
+has gained the great keynote to this subject. When once this part is
+mastered, he has a sure foundation to work on.
+
+My next remarks will relate to the minor marks and their meaning, and to
+islands or breaks on or in the Line of Head.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS SECONDARY SIGNS
+
+What are known as "islands" in the Line of Head are very important,
+especially if they are considered both in relation to the age at which
+they occur, and also in relation to the mentality itself.
+
+In the first place the principal rule the student must bear in mind is,
+that islands must be considered as showing a weakness in any line
+wherever they may be found, and are to be considered unfortunate signs.
+
+On the Line of Head when found in the form of a continuous chain (1-1,
+Plate IV.), all through the line, they denote mental weakness, but
+generally produced by ill-health which more immediately affects the
+brain.
+
+Such mental weakness or "brain illness," if found with nails showing very
+small "moons" or none at all, denotes an an�mic condition of the blood
+that affects the brain, a low condition of vitality and bad circulation,
+which seems to starve the brain of blood and prevents such people from
+making any continuous effort in regard to study or will power, and causes
+them to act in an erratic fashion.
+
+If at the same time the Line of Head is seen placed very high on the
+hand, this sign is worse still in its meaning, and such subjects are
+inclined to be "half mad" in periods.
+
+When the Line of Head is widely separated from the Line of Life, then
+this chain formation of islands is still more accentuated and more
+difficult to cure. Such subjects have periods of mental excitability
+which it seems impossible for them to control, and in such moments they
+are liable to fly off at a tangent and commit mad or rash acts, but acts
+generally dangerous to other people.
+
+When, however, the Line of Head is very sloping (2-2, Plate IV.), with
+this formation of islands the subject is inclined to have fits of
+depression and melancholy, during which he is likely to shrink away from
+people or make an attempt against his own life. "Suicide while
+temporarily insane" is the verdict of the jury in such cases.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE IV.
+
+ISLANDS ON THE LINE OF HEAD.]
+
+Another important point of consideration in relation to the islands in
+the Line of Head, is to note their position on the line itself, or under
+what finger they make their appearance. When these islands are found at
+the commencement of the line under the first finger or Mount of Jupiter
+(3, Plate IV.), it will be found that the subject in early life was
+delicate mentally, and displayed no energy of will; no desire to study,
+was listless and without ambition.
+
+Under the second finger on the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate IV.), the
+subject, on the contrary, is inclined to suffer from severe headaches,
+morbidness, melancholy, and a tendency for inflammation, especially at
+the base of the head.
+
+If the line looks weak or frays into little hair lines from this point
+out, it shows that the subject will never recover thoroughly from this
+malady.
+
+Under the third finger, the Mount of Sun (5, Plate IV.), an island shows
+a very curious fact, namely that the person is inclined to suffer from
+weakness of the eyes and short-sight. If many of these islands are marked
+it generally foreshadows a still greater tendency to blindness and
+weakness of the sight.
+
+Islands under the fourth finger, the Mount of Mercury (6, Plate IV.), and
+the extremity of the Head Line denote weakness of the brain in old age,
+and a highly nervous worrying disposition. If very badly marked they
+denote that in the latter part of life the subject may be disposed to
+insanity proceeding from a worrying disposition, and often from the
+overstraining of the mental faculties. It will thus be seen that every
+portion of this remarkable line may be divided into sections to obtain
+marvellous detail in making predictions for the future.
+
+This line can further be divided, showing with considerable clearness the
+ages at which troubles or changes in the mentality may be expected.
+
+Under the first finger the period of the life indicated is the first 21
+years, the second period contains another section of the three 7's, and
+lasts until 42 years of age; the third period of 7's which will be found
+under the third finger indicates the section from 49 to 63, and the
+fourth section which takes in the remainder of the hand, under the fourth
+finger, stands for the period from 70 up to the end.
+
+
+CHANGES IN THE LINE OF HEAD
+
+Another extremely interesting point in studying the Line of Head is to
+take notice of certain changes in its position, or lines either dropping
+or rising from it, which will also be found to give very remarkable
+information. For example: if a sloping Line of Head at any point in its
+track seems to curve or slightly bend upwards (1-1, Plate V.), it
+indicates that about that period of the person's life some unusual strain
+will be forced upon him. If this curved line is clearly marked and not
+interfered with by things that look like blotches in it, the person,
+although of a completely opposite turn of mind to the practical, will yet
+rise superior to the occasion, and for the time being will develop a
+practical or business-like way of looking at things which may even be the
+very reverse of the nature.
+
+If, however, instead of the curve or bend a fine line is seen leaving the
+Head Line in an upward direction (2-2, Plate V.), that period will leave
+a definite mark on the subject's entire character for the remainder of
+his life. In some cases these fine lines will, after a few years, appear
+to develop more strongly, and may even become a kind of second Head Line.
+This would denote that the person continues to cultivate the practical
+side of his nature that was at that period called into existence.
+
+If one were examining a straight Line of Head and noticed a curve
+downward or a fine line growing downwards from it (3-3, Plate V.), the
+natural interpretation of such a mark would be that at that date in the
+person's career he had become less practical, or for the time being
+developed the more imaginative qualities of the mentality. In this latter
+case, curiously enough, it often denotes that the person had at that
+period of his life become more wealthy or prosperous, and so he was able
+to develop the artistic side of his nature. It is logical to assume that
+he could only have done this if the strain in the practical battle had
+been lessened about that time, but this must only be presumed if, at
+about the same date, the Sun Line (Plate XV.) were seen clearly marked or
+suddenly appearing on the hand, then the student can be positive in
+assuming that at that date greater ease and comfort came into the
+subject's life and he consequently turned to the more imaginative side of
+existence.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE V.
+
+MORE VARIATIONS OF THE LINE OF HEAD.]
+
+If the Line of Head itself should curve upward, especially at the end
+towards the fourth finger or Mount of Mercury (4-4, Plate V.), it denotes
+almost without exception that the longer the person lives the more his
+desire for money and his determination to possess it will become stronger
+every year.
+
+If the Line of Head apparently partly leaves its natural place, which
+will be seen by an examination of the left hand, and completely rises as
+it were to the Line of Heart (5-5, Plate V.), the person will develop an
+enormous fixity of purpose for some one desire. He will apparently and
+deliberately control the affectionate side of his nature by his will
+power, and will stick at nothing to obtain the realisation of whatever
+his desire may be. If this mark is found on a square thick-set material
+looking hand, it is a foregone conclusion that the subject has set his
+determination on some material object, such as wealth, and he will stop
+at nothing, even crime, in carrying out his aim. If this mark is found on
+a long hand the object of the ambition is certain to be connected with
+intellectual power over people and absolute determination to accomplish
+whatever the purpose of the career may be.
+
+This mark must not be confounded with one clear line running across the
+hand from side to side (Plate VI.), because in this case the Line of Head
+has not risen out of its position, but simply denotes tremendous
+intensity of character, for good or evil as the case may be; such a
+person would exhibit great power of concentration, and if he concentrated
+his mentality on any purpose he would unite with it his heart nature.
+But if he had set his heart or affections on any person, he would unite
+with that desire the whole force of his mental nature. In this case it is
+as if these two sides of the mentality, the sentimental and the mental,
+were linked or in some way united together. Such persons I have always
+found possess greater intensity of purpose than any other, but I have
+never found it a very happy mark to possess.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VI.
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD AND THE LINE OF HEART RUNNING TOGETHER.]
+
+In the first place, this peculiar type of person appears to be so rare in
+life that he seems to have no companions and for that reason has always
+the feeling of being intensely lonely and isolated from others. He is
+usually also in every way super-sensitive and easily wounded in his
+feelings. I have seldom found these people successful, unless when acting
+alone, but if linked with others by partnership in business, etc., they
+seem to feel their personality cramped, and the partnership as a rule
+seldom results happily. In considering this, the student must carefully
+observe whether this one line across the hand lies across the centre
+where the Head Line would naturally be, or whether it lies higher up
+towards the base of the fingers where the Heart Line is generally found.
+If the former case, one may be sure that it is a question of head and
+mentality and very little heart; but if the latter, it is a question of
+more intensity of feeling emotion and affection than of mental intensity.
+
+
+CROSSES AND SQUARES IN CONNECTION WITH THE LINE OF HEAD
+
+Small, sharply-defined crosses in any position just over or touching the
+Line of Head are generally signs of accidents to the Head itself.
+
+_Under Jupiter_ (1, Plate VII.), they usually are brought about by blows
+caused generally by the subject's desire to rule and to be too dogmatic
+or tyrannical.
+
+_Under Saturn_ (2, Plate VII.), crosses indicate injuries to the head
+from accidents by animals, blows by treachery, mine explosions, etc., and
+generally relate to accidents of a treacherous nature.
+
+_Under the Mount of the Sun_ (3, Plate VII.), these crosses have been
+found to relate to accidents to the head from sudden falls, such as the
+subject striking his head by falling, concussion of the brain, etc.
+
+_Under the Mount of Mercury_ (4, Plate VII.), these sharply defined
+crosses relate to injuries to the head due to accidents generally
+produced by scientific experiments or some hazardous business venture.
+
+Small defined squares touching the Line of Head (5, Plate VII.), are in
+all cases signs of preservation, and they relate to the particular
+qualities of the Mount of the hand under which they are found. (_See_
+chapter on Mounts, page 140.)
+
+
+DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD
+
+Double Lines of Head (6-6, Plate VII.), are as rarely found as are cases
+of the single line right across the hand. In all cases where the Double
+Line of Head stands out distinct and clear as two separate lines, the
+object will be found to have a dual mentality. He is usually capable of
+an enormous amount of mental work and is of that class of people who
+carry out two separate mental lives with success. It is often found with
+one line joined to the Line of Life and the other rising from the Mount
+of Jupiter; if such is the case, the interpretation would be that one
+side of the nature is extremely sensitive and cautious, while the other
+is self-confident with a great desire to rule or enforce its mental ideas
+on the world.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VII.
+
+DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD, ALSO CROSSES AND SQUARES.]
+
+Although such a sign as the Double Line of Head gives a remarkable degree
+of mentality, yet I have always found it a more successful sign to find
+one clear Line of Head well marked on the hand than the two Lines of Head
+in any of their positions.
+
+Another form of the Double Line of Head (7-7, Plate VII.), is one where
+the main line seems to separate about the middle of the hand, and where
+one branch goes across the hand and the other descends towards the Mount
+of the Moon. In such a case we get the double mental personality, but one
+which is more under the control of the will of the subject, whereas the
+two double distinct lines denote that the two mental personalities seem
+to act independently one from the other.
+
+It has been considered by many ancient authorities that the Double Line
+of Head, when found with two distinct lines, is a sign of the inheritance
+of great riches or power. I have generally found, however, that what it
+means is, that although the financial results of such a person's life may
+be either great wealth or power, yet he may inherit it from his mental
+right and not from his birth right.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD ON THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS
+
+There are seven distinct types of hands, bearing in their own way more or
+less relationship to the Seven Races of Humanity (page 118).
+
+These seven types of hands are as follows:
+
+  I.--The Elementary or Lowest type.
+  II.--The Square, also called the Useful or Practical.
+  III.--The Spatulate or Active.
+  IV.--The Philosophic.
+  V.--The Conic or Artistic.
+  VI.--The Psychic or Idealistic.
+  VII.--The Mixed Hand.
+
+As a rule the Line of Head is generally found in accordance with the type
+of hand on which it is seen, namely, lying straight or what is called
+"level-headed" on the Square-looking or Practical hand; or sloping, and
+thus indicating the more imaginative qualities on the Philosophic, Conic,
+or Psychic types.
+
+Consequently, if it be found on a hand in what may be called opposition
+to its class, such a Line of Head immediately possesses a greater
+significance.
+
+For example, if a sloping Line of Mentality were seen on the Square or
+Practical hand, it would indicate that though the bases of that man or
+woman's thoughts and plans were of the practical kind, yet they possessed
+a far greater power of imagination than any casual observer would at
+first sight give them credit for.
+
+On the contrary, if the Line of Head were found straight or level on the
+Spatulate, Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic types, it would denote that the
+person in question was usually level-headed and practical, even in their
+highest dreams of philosophy or idealistic creations.
+
+On the Elementary hand the Line of Head is usually found short, straight,
+and coarse-looking, often nothing more than a short deep-set furrow.
+Consequently, if found long and clear, it would indicate a superior
+mental development in a coarse brutal or animal nature.
+
+If in a Square-looking hand the Line of Head were found sloping instead
+of long and straight, it would denote an unusual development of the
+artistic and imaginative qualities, but always with the practical and
+logical basis for its support.
+
+On the Spatulate hand the natural indication of the Line of Head is
+long, clear and sloping, but if found straight or level it would indicate
+a practical development of the brain endeavouring to set off the active
+energy and originality indicated by the Spatulate formation.
+
+On the Philosophic type, the hand of the thinker and philosopher, the
+usual position of the Line of Mentality is long and sloping, but if found
+straight or level it indicates a mental development of the logical and
+practical qualities which might not be expected in such a class or type.
+
+The same rules hold good with the Conic and Psychic, but with what is
+called the Mixed type, the best Line of Head to find would be one, long
+straight and level-looking, because this class, being a mixture as it
+were of all the others, would require a practical or level-headed
+mentality to hold its own amid the mixture of tendencies which the last
+type personifies.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS
+
+The Line of Life is that line which runs round the base of the thumb and
+lies directly over a large blood-vessel called the great Palmer Arch
+(1-1, Plate VIII.). This blood-vessel is more directly connected with the
+heart, stomach, and vital organs which may have given use to its term
+"The Vital," as used by the ancients.
+
+It is reasonable to assume that it is this intimate connection with the
+vital organs of the body which enables it to foretell the length of life
+from _natural causes_.
+
+If the student will bear this in mind it will make clear and plain to him
+many difficulties in connection with predictions as to health and
+disease, and he will follow more easily the following explanations.
+
+The first rules to master are, that to be normal the Line of Life should
+be long, clearly marked, and without any irregularities or breaks of any
+kind. Such a formation would indicate length of life, vitality, freedom
+from illness, and strength of constitution (1-1, Plate VIII.).
+
+Bearing the first observation in mind it will be noticed that as the Line
+of Life represents the stomach and the vital organs, when well marked
+the stomach and digestion must necessarily be in a good condition.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VIII.
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE AND SECTIONS OF INFLUENCES FROM THE MOUNTS.]
+
+When made up of little pieces or linked like a chain, it is a certain
+sign of poor health, weak stomach and lack of vitality.
+
+At this point I must ask the most careful attention to the following
+rules--which no other book on the subject contains, and which I have not
+published in any of my other writings, viz.: as the Line of Life seems
+in every sense to be the representative on the hand of the body or trunk
+of the man--so the position of these breaks, marks, links, or islands
+denotes the portion of the body most affected.
+
+Before we go further I must also impress on the student to grasp the fact
+that every line or sign on the hand plays a dual r�le. By one of their
+r�les these lines indicate the disease the person is most liable to for
+the entire run of the life, and in another r�le these lines indicate the
+date when the illness will reach its greatest gravity.
+
+To explain carefully this strange phenomenon of nature, I have divided
+this line into sections (_see_ Plate VIII.), and although I am not
+writing on astrology in these pages, yet all believers in that science
+may be interested to find how wonderfully these twin sciences agree when
+the comparison is pointed out by an impartial observer such as I claim to
+be.
+
+In Plate VIII. are shown the Sections of the Line of Life with their
+various tendencies divided by the mounts at the base of the fingers. This
+will materially assist the student to comprehend their significance and,
+together with the influence of the month of birth as set out in the
+chapters on the Mounts of the Hand (page 140), will enable him to obtain
+an accuracy on all matters relating to health, diseases, and dangers to
+the life that up till now has never been attained.
+
+We will now proceed to consider the details as regards the Line of Life
+itself.
+
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+It is very important at the outset to consider the qualities of this very
+important line. In some hands it is broad and shallow on the surface of
+the hand, in others it is deep and fine; the appearance of this line is
+very often deceptive, and leads students astray when they have not had
+their attention called to its appearance.
+
+The broad, shallow Line of Life often leads people to suppose that it is
+a sign of a very healthy, robust constitution; but, on the contrary, such
+an indication is not nearly as good a sign as a clear, thin, deep line.
+The broad Life Line seems to belong to people who have more robust animal
+strength, whereas the finer line relates to people who have more nerve or
+will-force. Under any strain of ill-health, it is the finer line that
+will hold out, whereas the broad-looking line has not the same resisting
+force.
+
+Very broad lines on the hand denote more muscular strength than will
+power, and I cannot impress this difference too strongly on the minds of
+my readers. If the line is made of chain formation (1-1, Plate IX.), it
+is a sure sign of a tendency to bad health, and especially so if the hand
+be soft. The same marks on a hard, firm hand would not indicate as much
+delicacy, because hard, firm hands denote in themselves a robust
+constitution.
+
+Another important point to consider is, whether the Line of Life goes
+straight up to the side of the Mount of Venus and narrows that Mount
+(2-2, Plate IX.), or whether it forms a well-defined curve or semicircle
+out into the palm (3-3, Plate IX.). In the first case it indicates a
+naturally more delicate constitution, and less force of animal magnetism.
+This explanation will be readily understood by readers when I again call
+their attention to the fact that one of the most important blood-vessels
+going from the body to the hand is called the Great Palmer Arch, which
+carries the blood up to the hand towards the root of the thumb, and
+carries the circulation back on the other side of the Arch almost
+underneath the Line of Life. It will, therefore, be seen that people who
+have a weaker constitution are more likely to have this Great Palmer Arch
+narrower in construction than those who have a robust constitution and
+strong circulation of the blood. This is the reason why, when the Mount
+of Venus is large and wide on the hand, it gives rise to the idea that it
+indicates a more passionate animal nature than when this mount is thin
+and narrow.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE IX.
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS.]
+
+While speaking on this particular point, I must also call attention to
+the fact that when the Line of Head is curved downwards instead of
+running straight across the palm, that it seems to be more attracted to
+the qualities indicated by the Mount of Venus and gives more to the
+imaginative, romantic nature, showing a greater tendency to fall in love,
+than with people who possess the Line of Head running straight across the
+hand, as if it were not attracted to the qualities indicated by the Mount
+of Venus. It will thus be seen that every point of this study bearing on
+character can be reasoned out from a logical standpoint. This places the
+study upon a higher foundation than when it is considered purely from the
+superstitious standpoint with which it has so long been associated.
+
+If the Line of Life is seen to rise high on the hand towards the Mount of
+Jupiter (4-4, Plate IX.), the subject has more control over himself, and
+his life is more governed by the ambitious side of his nature. When,
+however, the Line of Life rises lower down on the palm, more from the
+Mount of Mars (5-5, Plate IX.), it gives less control over the temper.
+When this sign is noticed, especially in the case of young persons, it
+will be found that they are more quarrelsome, more disobedient, and have
+less ambition in connection with their studies.
+
+
+ASCENDING LINES
+
+When the Line of Life is found with a number of ascending lines, even if
+they are small, it denotes a life of greater energy; and the dates at
+which these lines ascend from the Line of Life may always be considered
+points at which the subject has made a particular effort towards whatever
+may have been the special purpose of his destiny at that moment. When
+these lines are seen ascending towards or on the Mount of Jupiter (1-1,
+Plate X.), it indicates the desire and ambition to rise in life,
+especially in some way that would give the subject control or authority
+over others. If one of the lines be found partly arrested or stopped at
+the Line of Head (2-2, Plate X.), it indicates that the subject has by
+some mental error of judgment or stupidity, broken or prevented the
+effort, which started well, from reaching a successful termination. If
+one of these lines reaches and stops at the Line of Heart, it indicates
+that the affections have, or will, interfere with the subject's special
+effort in whatever direction this line indicates. If one of these lines
+crosses and joins the line of Fate (3-3, Plate X.), it indicates and
+gives two distinct dates which are very curious in their meaning. The
+first date it gives is when this line leaves the Line of Life on its way
+towards the Line of Fate. The date of this start towards the Line of Fate
+will be given on the Line of Fate itself, right opposite where this line
+begins to grow from the Line of Life. This mark will denote that the
+subject has made a determined effort at that moment in his career to make
+his own destiny, and to break free from the circumstances or people that
+surround him or tie him down.
+
+It is always a successful sign when this line is found to join the Line
+of Fate, especially if the Line of Fate looks stronger at or about this
+point of the junction.
+
+The second date is given at the period in the Line of Life when one is
+reading down the Line of Life itself. The singular point about this is
+that a repetition of circumstances will be found to occur in the destiny.
+Suppose, for example, one saw this line going towards the Fate Line at
+twenty-six years of age--a circumstance or repetition of the occurrence
+will be found to occur at almost double that age, namely, fifty-two years
+of age, which would give a more or less exact date of this occurrence
+when reading the Line of Life. As an illustration to help the reader I
+may say that I have generally found that this mark will indicate that the
+subject has, in the first instance, broken free from some tie at an early
+date, and that a similar occurrence will take place at the second date,
+viz., late in life, when again the subject seems to break free from some
+tie, and goes out more into the world for himself.
+
+This curious sign very often helps in deciding matters as regards
+marriage. The man, or woman, will apparently assert his independence
+more, and leave the ties of home life, and again go out in the world and
+fight the battle for himself, as he did in the earlier part of his
+existence, when he probably left his parents' influence and forged ahead
+for himself.
+
+When the ascending line is seen crossing over towards the Mount of
+Saturn, and running as an independent line not joined to the Line of Fate
+(6, Plate X.), it will be found that the subject has carried out a kind
+of second fate. The date when this line left the Line of Life will give
+the first date of its commencement, _i.e._, opposite it on the Fate Line.
+If the line be a good one it would give its second date when reading down
+the Line of Life, where, if the line were good, it carried out this
+second fate to a successful culmination.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+
+THE LINE OF MARS OR INNER LIFE LINE
+
+What is called the Line of Mars is that line that is found only on some
+hands encircling the Mount of Venus and inside the Line of Life.
+
+This Line, which rises on the Mount of Mars, from which it derives its
+name, when found clear and strong appears to back up and reinforce the
+Line of Life (4-4, Plate X.). It indicates great vitality, power of
+resistance to illness and disease, and is not found on all hands.
+
+It is an excellent sign on the hands of soldiers, or in connection with
+all persons who follow a dangerous calling.
+
+All breaks or bad marks indicated on the Line of Life are minimized on
+the hands that have this Inner Life Line, or Line of Mars.
+
+As its name implies, in character it denotes a robust and rather fighting
+disposition, a person naturally inclined to rush into dangers and
+quarrels, and if deeply marked and reddish in colour it increases all
+indications of accidents and dangers shown on other parts of the hand.
+
+When a branch seems to shoot off from this line and runs on to the Mount
+of Luna (5-5, Plate X.), it foreshadows restlessness and an intense
+craving for excitement. With a weak-looking Line of Mentality it is a
+sure sign of a craving for drink and intemperance of all kinds, and at
+the point where it breaks through the Line of Life, it generally
+indicates death brought on by the intemperance this mark foreshadows.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE X.
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE, THE LINE OF MARS, AND OTHER SIGNS.]
+
+It is generally found on short, thick-set square hands or short hands,
+but when found on a long, thin, and narrow palm, it indicates great
+vitality and resistance to disease, a nervous, highly-strung, and rather
+irritable disposition.
+
+Any broken Life Line with this Line of Mars behind it may indicate great
+danger of death where the break appears, but a danger that will be
+overcome through the vitality indicated by this Inner Life Line or Line
+of Mars.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY OR FATE
+
+The Line of Destiny, otherwise called the Line of Fate (1-1, Plate XI.)
+is naturally one of the most important of the principal lines of the
+hand.
+
+Although one may never be able to explain why it is, this line
+undoubtedly appears to indicate at least the main events of one's career.
+
+It may be found on the hand even at the moment of birth, clearly
+indicating the class of Fate or Destiny that lies in the far distant
+future before the individual.
+
+In some cases it may look faint or shadowy, as if the path of Destiny
+were not yet clearly defined, while in other instances almost every step
+of the road is chiselled out with its milestones of failure or success,
+sorrow or joy, as the case may be.
+
+That some human beings seem to be more children of Fate than others has
+been admitted by almost all thinkers, but why they should be so has been
+the great question that baffles all students of such subjects.
+
+There are some who appear to have no Fate, and others who seem to carve
+their Destiny from day to day.
+
+I have seen hundreds of cases where every step of the journey was
+indicated from childhood to the grave; others where only the principal
+changes in the career were marked in advance. There are, again, others
+where nothing seemed decided, and where the events indicated by the Line
+of Fate appeared to change from year to year.
+
+The why and wherefore of such things may be impossible to fathom, but
+there are so many mysteries in Life itself that one more or less does not
+seem to matter.
+
+Some of the greatest teachers and philosophers have come to the
+conclusion that Fate exists for all. In the 17th Article of Religion in
+the Episcopal Church it is stated, and in no uncertain manner, that
+"Predestination to life is the everlasting purpose of God." All through
+the Bible the Destiny of nations and of men is clearly laid down, and
+from the first chapter of Genesis to the last page of Revelation the
+trials, tribulations, and pathway of the Jews was prophesied and
+predicted ages in advance.
+
+Thousands of years before the birth of Christ, it was foretold in Holy
+Writ in what manner He should be born, and in what manner He should die.
+It was predicted that a Virgin should conceive and that a Judas should
+betray, and that both were necessary "that the Scriptures might be
+fulfilled."
+
+In more recent ages thousands and thousands of predictions have been
+fulfilled, and all point to some mysterious agency that underlies the
+purpose of humanity, and that nothing from the smallest to the greatest
+is left to blind chance.
+
+It may be that the Soul--in being part of the Universal Soul of all
+things--_knows all things_, and so through the instrumentality of the
+brain writes its knowledge of the Future in advance.
+
+To the mysteries of the mind there are no limits. Medical science has, in
+late years, gone so far as to prove that there must be an advance growth
+or change in the brain cells years before action or change in character
+become the result of such development. For all we know, every deed in our
+careers is the result of some such mental change, and as there are more
+super-sensitive nerves from the brain to the hand, it may then follow
+that such changes and subsequent actions in our lives may be written in
+our hands even long years in advance.
+
+It may be, then, that to all living beings there is a Destiny "that
+shapes our ends, rough hew them as we will."
+
+I would, however, humbly suggest that each of us endeavour by knowledge
+to find what our Fate may be, and like loyal workmen accept whatever the
+task should prove, and so carry it out to the utmost of our ability,
+willing to leave the final result to the Master that thought fit to
+employ us in the working out of His design.
+
+All such questions as these the student of this subject must settle in
+his own mind, for when he or she once broaches this study of Fate, he
+will be assailed on all sides, and the student must be prepared to give
+"an answer for the faith that is in him."
+
+In studying the hand it will be found that the Line of Fate may rise from
+the following distinct positions:
+
+It may rise from and out of the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), straight
+up from the wrist (1-1, Plate XI.), from the Mount of the Moon (3-3,
+Plate XI.), or from the middle of the palm.
+
+The following is the meaning of these principal positions:
+
+
+RISING FROM THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), the subject's success will
+be made by personal effort and merit; the early years of such a Fate will
+be cramped and difficult; circumstances and the early surroundings will
+not be favourable, and such people will be greatly hampered or sacrificed
+to the wishes and plans of their parents or relatives. If the Line of
+Fate, however, should run on clear and strong from where it leaves the
+Line of Life, then the subject will overcome all such difficulties and
+win success by his own personal effort and merit, and not depend on what
+is termed luck at any time in the career.
+
+Another striking and important point is that the date or years marked on
+the Line of Fate of such a breaking out into the palm, will be found to
+coincide with the year in the subject's life in which he asserted his
+independence or launched out into what he more particularly wanted to do.
+(_See_ also end of chapter on Time, page 112.)
+
+In any case this date as indicated will be found to be one of the most
+important in his career.[1]
+
+[1] For how to obtain dates and years _see_ Chapter XIX.
+
+
+RISING FROM THE WRIST
+
+When the Line of Fate rises from the Wrist (1-1, Plate XI.) and goes
+straight up the centre of the palm to the Mount of Saturn, provided at
+the same time the Line of Sun (4-4, Plate XI.) is found well marked,
+luck, brilliance, and success will attend the Destiny, and extreme good
+fortune may be anticipated.
+
+
+RISING FROM THE MOUNT OF THE MOON
+
+Rising from the Mount of the Moon (3-3, Plate XI.) the Fate will be more
+eventful, changeable, and largely depending on the fancy and caprice of
+other people.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XI.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.]
+
+If such a line be found joining the Line of Heart (1-1, Plate XII.), it
+foretells a happy and prosperous marriage, but one in which idealism,
+romance, and some fortunate circumstances play their r�le, and one which
+results more from the caprice or fancy of the person of the other sex.
+
+If the Line of Fate be itself straight but with a line running in and
+joining it from the Mount of the Moon (5-5, Plate XI.), it indicates that
+the influence of some outside person has helped the subject's Fate, and
+it is generally an indication of the influence of another sex to the one
+on whose hand it appears.
+
+When this line of influence from the Mount of the Moon does not, however,
+blend with the Fate Line (2-2, Plate XII.), it denotes that the other
+person's life will always remain distinct, and the influence will last
+only for the length of time that it runs by the side of the subject's
+Fate.
+
+When this influence line cuts the Line of Fate and, leaving it, travels
+on for some distance towards the Mount of Jupiter (3-3, Plate XII.) it
+tells that the person whose influence it denotes will only be attracted
+to the subject by personal ambition--that this person will use the
+subject for the furthering of his own aims and ambitions, and will desert
+the subject when she is of no further use. This is more commonly seen on
+the hand of a woman than on that of a man.
+
+If the Line of Fate ascending the hand sends an offshoot from it on or
+towards any of the Mounts, such as to Jupiter, the Sun, or Mercury, then
+the Destiny will be more largely associated with the quality that the
+Mount it approaches symbolises.
+
+For example: If such a line be seen approaching or going towards Jupiter
+(6-6, Plate XI.) it denotes responsibility, power of command over others,
+or some high position which will commence to be realised from the date
+when the offshoot leaves the Line of Fate. If such a mark continues its
+course and finishes on the Mount of Jupiter, it is one of the most
+magnificent signs of success that can be found for that particular aim or
+purpose.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XII.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS VARIATIONS.]
+
+If this offshoot ascends towards the Mount of the Sun (7-7, Plate XI.)
+the success will be in the direction of riches and public life, which
+will give great publicity or renown; this is also a magnificent sign of
+success.
+
+If the offshoot goes towards the Mount of Mercury (8-8, Plate XI.), the
+success it indicates will be more in the direction of some special
+achievement either in science or commerce.
+
+If the Line of Fate itself should not ascend towards its habitual
+position on the Mount of Saturn, but, instead, run up towards or on to
+any other Mount, then the whole effort of the life will be tinged with
+whatever quality that particular Mount signifies. Such an indication must
+not, however, be considered as the certain or sure sign of success as
+when the Line of Fate keeps to its own place and sends branches to some
+particular Mount.
+
+When the Line of Fate ascends the hand without branches and runs like a
+lonely path up and on to the Mount of Saturn, such a person will be like
+a child of Fate chained to an iron road of circumstances. It will be
+impossible for him to avert the trials of his Destiny or mitigate them in
+any way. He will receive no help from others, and little will ever happen
+except to bring him sorrow or tragedy. Such a mark of Fate through the
+hand must never be considered as "a good line of Destiny."
+
+To have a really good Line of Fate it should not be too heavily marked,
+but just clear and distinct, and, above all, be accompanied by a Line of
+Sun in some form or other.
+
+If a Line of Fate run over the Mount of Saturn and up into the base of
+the finger, it is an unfortunate sign, as everything the subject
+undertakes will get out of his control, and he will not apparently know
+how or when to stop in whatever he takes up.
+
+When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Heart, the
+career will always be ruined through or by the affections being badly
+placed.
+
+When, however, it joins the Line of Heart and they together ascend the
+Mount of Jupiter (1-1, Plate XII.), the subject will have happiness
+through his affections and will be helped by love and affection to attain
+his highest ambitions. He will also be extremely lucky through the
+friendship and love of those he meets, and will be greatly benefited and
+helped by others.
+
+When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Head (4-4,
+Plate XII.), it foretells that his career will be spoiled by the
+subject's own stupidity or mental foolishness.
+
+
+RISING FROM THE MIDDLE OF THE PALM
+
+When the Line of Fate only makes its appearance far up in the centre of
+the palm, in what is called the Plain of Mars, it indicates a hard early
+life and that the subject must always have a hard fight to gain his ends;
+but should the Line ascend clearly and strongly from the Plain of Mars
+and have a branch to or on towards the Mount of the Sun, such a person
+will be the architect of his own fortunes, and without help or assistance
+will win success and fortune by his own personal hard work and merit.
+
+When the Line of Fate rises from the Line of Head and when it is well
+marked, everything will come to the subject late in life and only then by
+his own brains.
+
+When the Line of Fate is seen with one branch on the Mount of Venus and
+the other on the Mount of the Moon (1-2, Plate XIII.) it indicates a
+career of romance and passion, by which the whole of the Destiny will be
+swayed.
+
+When the Line of Fate itself rises inside the Life Line on the Mount of
+Venus (2-2, Plate XIII.), passionate love will affect the whole career,
+and such persons, it will be found, usually place their affections on
+impossible people or on those who are in some way tied up by marriage or
+who otherwise are unable to gratify the love that the other person
+demands. This is a most unlucky sign for affection to find in the hands
+of a woman.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XIII.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.]
+
+When the Line of Fate is broken or made up in little bits, the career
+will be found full of troubles, breaks, and nothing that one gets will
+last long enough to bring any settled or continuous success.
+
+A break in the Fate Line is not always a bad sign to have, provided that
+one side begins before the other ends; in such a case it foretells a
+complete change in surroundings and position, and if the new line looks
+good and straight it will be found to mean that the change will bring
+about an advancement in position commencing at the date when the second
+line first makes its appearance.[2]
+
+[2] For dates on the Line of Fate _see_ Chapter XIX.
+
+
+INFLUENCE LINES
+
+When any small line joins the Fate Line or goes on with it as an
+attendant line, such a mark usually indicates marriage at the date when
+these lines join (3-3, Plate XIII.). If, on the contrary, these lines do
+not join, marriage with the person is not likely to occur although the
+affection and influence will be present in the career.
+
+When one of these influence lines appears by the side of the Fate Line
+and crosses through it towards or on to the Mount of Mars, it indicates
+that the influence thus shown will turn to hate and will injure the
+career of the person on whose hand it is found (1-1, Plate XIV.).
+
+
+DOUBLE LINES OF FATE
+
+When the Line of Fate is itself double (2-2, Plate XIV.), it is a sign of
+what is called "a double life," but if, after running side by side for
+some length these two lines join or become one, it foretells that "the
+double life" has been caused by some great affection, that circumstances
+prevented a union, but that the preventing cause will be removed at the
+point where these two lines join.
+
+When, however, a double Line of Fate is clearly marked, especially if
+they incline towards different mounts of the hand, such a mark indicates
+that two careers would be carried out simultaneously--one perhaps as a
+hobby and the other as the principal career.
+
+When the Line of Fate is extremely faint or just barely traced through
+the palm, it will be found to indicate a general disbelief in the idea of
+Fate and Destiny. It is often found on the hands of very materialistic
+persons, those who rebel against the idea that they are governed in any
+way by Fate or by any power save themselves.
+
+When this is found, and at the same time a good clear Line of Head, such
+people will be sure to win success by their mentality alone, but the
+details of their destiny will not be able to be told, and one must
+content oneself with chiefly describing their characteristics,
+peculiarities, etc.
+
+When no Line of Fate whatever is found and only a very ordinary Line of
+Head, then there will be nothing very particular to say about the
+Destiny; such people, as a rule, lead very colourless lives, nothing
+seems to affect them much one way or the other, and they will be found to
+have very little purpose to illumine the drab monotony of their
+existence.
+
+An island (3, Plate XIV.) is an extremely bad sign to find in the Line of
+Fate.
+
+When found at the very beginning of the line (4, Plate XIV.) it
+indicates some mystery regarding the commencement of such careers, such
+as illegitimate birth.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XIV.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY, ISLANDS, AND OTHER SIGNS.]
+
+An island, when found on a woman's hand connecting the Fate Line with the
+Mount of Venus, is an almost certain indication of her seduction (5,
+Plate XIV.).
+
+An island in any part of the Plain of Mars indicates a period of great
+difficulty, loss in one's career, and in consequence, generally loss of
+money (3, Plate XIV.).
+
+An Island on the Fate and Head Lines together means loss also, but more
+brought on by the person's own stupidity or lack of intelligence (6,
+Plate XIV.).
+
+An island over the Fate and Heart Lines indicates loss and trouble
+connected with affairs of the heart or brought about by the affections.
+
+An island on the Mount of Saturn or towards the end of the Line of Fate
+(5, Plate XIV.) foreshadows that the career will finish in poverty and
+despair.[3]
+
+[3] For more details concerning the meaning of "islands" in general,
+_see_ Chapter XV.
+
+When the Line of Fate finishes suddenly with a cross, some great fatality
+may be expected, but when the cross is found on the Fate Line and on the
+Mount of Saturn, the ending of such a Destiny will be some terrible
+tragedy, generally one of public disgrace and public death.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+
+THE LINE OF THE SUN
+
+The Line of the Sun, which is otherwise called the Line of Success or the
+Line of Brilliancy (1-1, Plate XV.), is one of the most important marks
+on the hand to consider.
+
+It has in its symbolism almost the same significance as the Sun itself
+has to the Earth.
+
+Without this line the life has no happiness, no sunshine, as it were, and
+even the greatest talents lie in darkness and do not produce their fruit.
+
+Amateurs, in looking at hands, often make the greatest mistakes in seeing
+what appears to be "a good Line of Fate," and in consequence rush off and
+predict great success and fortune, whereas, as I explained in the
+preceding chapter, a Fate Line unaccompanied by the Line of Sun may
+simply mean a fatalistic life full of sorrow and darkness.
+
+The quality that the Line of Sun denotes is, what is generally called
+"luck"; with a well-marked Sun Line even a poor Line of Head promises
+more success, and it is the same with the Line of Fate.
+
+People with the Sun Line appear to have more magnetism, more influence
+over others. They more easily secure recognition, reward, riches, and
+honours.
+
+They also have a happier and brighter disposition, and this has
+naturally a great deal to do with what is called success.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XV.
+
+THE LINE OF SUN AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.]
+
+From whatever date in the hand the Line of Sun appears, things become
+brighter, more prosperous and important. The Line of the Sun may rise
+from the following positions:
+
+From the Line of Life, the Line of Fate, the Plain of Mars, the Mount of
+the Moon, the Line of Head, and from the Line of Heart, or it may only
+appear as a small line on its own Mount.
+
+Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XV.), it promises success from
+whatever the life is that is led, but not from "luck."
+
+From the Line of Fate (3-3, Plate XV.), it is a sure sign of recognition
+for the career adopted, but brought about by the personal effort of the
+subject.
+
+From the Plain of Mars, and not connected with the other lines, it
+foretells success after difficulties.
+
+From the Mount of the Moon (4-4, Plate XV.), success is more a matter due
+to the caprice of others. It is more changeable and uncertain and is by
+no means such a sure sign of riches or solid position. It is more the
+sign of success as a public favourite, and is often found in the hands of
+those who depend on the public for their livelihood, such as actors and
+actresses, singers, and certain classes of artists, speakers, clergymen,
+etc. For all such professions it is, however, fortunate, and an extremely
+lucky sign to have, as it promises in all cases luck, brilliancy, and
+recognition in the world.
+
+Rising from the Line of Head, the Sun Line gives success from the mental
+efforts and qualities, but not until after the middle of life is past. It
+is found on the hands of brain workers, students of some particular
+branch of study, writers, scientists, etc.
+
+From the Line of Heart, success will come late in life in some way
+depending on, or through, the affections. In such cases it generally
+promises a very happy marriage late in life, but it is always a certain
+sign of eventual ease, happiness, and worldly comfort.
+
+Marked only on its own Mount, the Line of Sun promises happiness and
+success, but so late in life as to make it hardly worth having.
+
+When the third finger--called the finger of the Sun--is much longer than
+the first with the Line of Sun well marked, the gambling instincts will
+be much in evidence. Nearly all successful gamblers for money have these
+two indications.
+
+When, however, the third finger is equal to the second, the love of
+amassing wealth will be the dominant passion of the life.
+
+When the third finger is extremely long and twisted or crooked, the
+person will endeavour to obtain money at any cost. This malformation is
+much seen in the hands of thieves or criminals who are likely to commit
+any crime for the sake of money. Note--if the Line of Head is very high
+on the palm, and more especially if it rises upwards at the end (3-3,
+Plate III.), these evil qualities will be still more accentuated.
+
+When a hand is found to be artistic in its shape, with pointed fingers or
+long and narrow, the Line of Sun on such a formation promises rather
+success and brilliancy in Art, on the Stage, or in Public Singing, than
+in anything else.
+
+The real musician's hand, such as the composer's or player's, is however
+rarely a long, thin-shaped hand, because such persons must have a more
+scientific nature. This quality is not found with those who possess the
+long, slender, very artistic-shaped hand, who depend more on their
+emotional temperament than on scientific study for their foundation.
+
+On extremely long, thin hands, those that belong to what is called the
+Psychic Type,[4] the Line of Sun has very little meaning except that of
+temperament, such persons being too idealistic to care for either wealth,
+position, or worldly success. They have as a rule, simply bright, happy,
+sunny dispositions if this line is marked on their hands, and they go
+through life as in a dream, and their dreams are to them the only things
+that matter.
+
+[4] _See_ Types of Hands, Part II., page 123.
+
+A curious characteristic, however, and one that has not been noticed by
+other writers on this subject, is, that on all hands where the Sun Line
+is seen, the nature of such people is much more sensitive to environment
+than that of those persons who do not possess this Line. For this reason
+the Line has been considered a sign of the artistic nature. But what is
+known as the "artistic nature" may show itself only in the love of
+beautiful things, harmony of surroundings, and such like; whereas the
+people who do not possess any mark of the Sun Line, seldom even notice
+their surroundings and would live equally happy in the most squalid
+homes. They would not trouble whether their curtains were black, green,
+yellow, or some fearful conglomeration of all three.
+
+When many lines are found on the Mount of the Sun, they show also the
+artistic nature, but one where the multiplicity of aims and ideas will
+prevent any real success.
+
+Two or three Sun Lines, when running parallel and evenly together, are
+good and indicate success in two or three different lines of work; but
+one good, straight, clear line is the best sign to have.
+
+An "island" on any part of the Line of the Sun destroys the position and
+success promised, but only during the period where the island appears (5,
+Plate XV.). In nearly all cases it denotes public scandal, and when very
+clearly marked a _cause c�l�bre_ or something of that sort.
+
+All opposition lines, viz., those that cross over from the thumb side of
+the hand, and especially those from the Mount of Mars or from its
+direction, are bad (6-6 Plate XV.). If these opposition lines pass
+through, cut, or interfere with the Line of Sun in any way, they denote
+the jealousy or interference of people against one.
+
+Curiously enough, these opposition lines from the Mount of Mars relate to
+the interference of members of the same sex as the subject; while, if
+they come from the Mount of Venus, they relate to the opposite sex of the
+individual on whose hand they appear (7-7, Plate XV.).
+
+A "star" found on the Line of Sun is one of the luckiest and most
+fortunate signs to have.
+
+A "square" is a sign of preservation against the attacks of enemies or
+efforts to assail one's position.
+
+A "cross" is an unfortunate sign, and denotes difficulties and annoyance,
+but only relating to one's name or position.
+
+On a "hollow hand," the Line of Sun loses all power, and its good
+promises are never fulfilled.
+
+The complete absence of the Line of Sun on an otherwise well-marked hand,
+indicates that no matter how clever or talented these people may be, the
+recognition of the world will be difficult or even impossible to gain. In
+other words, their life will remain in darkness; people will not see
+their work and the "Sun of Success" will never dawn on their pathway of
+labour.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEART AS INDICATING THE AFFECTIONATE AND EMOTIONAL NATURE
+
+The Line of Heart is that Line which runs across the hand under the
+fingers and generally rises under the base of the first, and runs off the
+side of the hand under the base of the fourth or little finger (1-1,
+Plate XVI.).
+
+The Line of Heart relates purely to the affectionate disposition, in
+fact, to the mental side of the love nature of the subject. It should be
+borne in mind that, by lying as it does on that part of the hand above
+the Line of Head, it is consequently on the portion of the hand that
+relates to mental characteristics and not to the physical.
+
+The Line of Heart should be deep, clear, and well coloured. It may arise
+from the extreme outside of the Mount of Jupiter (2, Plate XVI.), from
+the centre of this Mount, from the space between the first and second
+fingers (3, Plate XVI.), from the face of the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate
+XVI.), or from directly under this Mount (5, Plate XVI.).
+
+From the outside of the Mount of Jupiter, it denotes the blind enthusiast
+in affection, a man or woman who places his or her ideal of love so high
+that neither fault nor failing is seen in the being worshipped. With
+these people their pride in the object of their affection is beyond all
+reason, and all such extremists as a rule suffer terribly through their
+affections.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XVI.
+
+THE LINE OF HEART AND ITS VARIATIONS.]
+
+From the centre of the Mount of Jupiter, the Heart Line gives more
+moderation, but also great ideality, and is one of the best of the
+variations of this Line that we are about to consider.
+
+People with such a Heart Line are firm and reliable in their affections,
+they have an unusually high code of honour and morality. They are
+ambitious that the person they live with be great, noble, and successful.
+They seldom marry beneath their station in life, and they have fewer love
+affairs than any other class.
+
+If they once really love, they love for ever. They do not believe in
+second marriages, and the divorce courts are seldom troubled with their
+presence.
+
+The Heart Line rising from between the first and second fingers, gives a
+calmer but a very deep nature in all matters of the affections (3, Plate
+XVI.).
+
+These people seem to strike the happy medium between the ideality and
+pride given by Jupiter, and the more selfish love nature given when the
+line rises from Saturn.
+
+They are not very demonstrative when in love, but they are capable of the
+very greatest sacrifices for those they care for. They do not expect the
+person on whom they bestow their affection to be a god or a goddess.
+
+When the Line of Heart rises on the Mount of Saturn the subject will be
+rather selfish in all questions of affection (4, Plate XVI.). These
+people are not self-sacrificing, like the previous type. They are
+inclined to be cynical, reserved, undemonstrative but very insistent in
+trying to gain the person they want. They will let nothing stand in their
+way, but once they have obtained their object they show little tenderness
+or devotion.
+
+They are very unforgiving if they discover any lapses on the part of
+their partner, but as they are "a law unto themselves," they close their
+eyes to their own shortcomings.
+
+The Line of Heart that rises from under the base of the Mount of Saturn
+(5, Plate XVI.), exhibits all the foregoing characteristics, but in a
+much more intensified form. Such persons live for themselves, and care
+little whether those around them are happy or not.
+
+The shorter the Line of Heart is on the Hand, the less the higher
+sentiments of the affection make themselves manifest.
+
+When the Line of Heart is found in excess, namely, extremely long--it
+denotes a terrible tendency toward jealousy (2, Plate XVI.), and this is
+alarmingly increased if the Line of Head on the same hand is very sloping
+towards the Mount of the Moon (6, Plate XVI.). In such a case the
+imagination will run away with itself where jealousy is concerned.
+
+When the Line of Heart is found curving downward at the base of the Mount
+of Jupiter (7, Plate XVI.), it tells of a strange fatality in that
+person, of meeting with great disappointment in love, and even with those
+they trust in friendship. He seems to lack perception, in knowing whom to
+love. His affections are nearly always misplaced or never returned.
+
+These people have, however, as a rule, wonderfully kind, affectionate
+dispositions. They have little pride about whom they love and they
+generally marry beneath their station in life.
+
+A Line of Heart made up like a chain, or by a crowd of little lines
+running into it, denotes flirtations and inconstancy in the love nature,
+and seldom has any lasting affection.
+
+A Line of Heart from Saturn in holes or links like a chain, especially
+when it is broad, denotes an absolute contempt for the subject's opposite
+sex. It is one of the signs of mental degeneration as far as love is
+concerned.
+
+When this Line is pale and broad, without any depth, it denotes a nature
+_blas�_ and indifferent with no depth of affection.
+
+When very low down on the hand, almost touching the Line of Head, the
+heart will always interfere with the affairs of the head.
+
+When it lies very high on the hand and the space is narrowed only by the
+Head Line being abnormally high and out of its place, it indicates the
+reverse of the above, and that the affairs of the heart are ruled by the
+head. Such persons are extremely calculating in all matters of love.
+
+When only one deep, straight line is found across the hand from side to
+side, the two lines both Head and Heart appear to blend together. This
+denotes an intensely self-concentrated nature. If such a subject loves,
+he unites with it all the forces of his mind, and if he put his mind on
+any subject, he throws his whole heart and soul into whatever it may be
+(Plate VI.).
+
+These people are also terribly head-strong and self-willed in all they
+do. They do not seem to know what fear means in any sense--they are
+dangerous lovers and husbands to trifle with, for they will stop at
+nothing if their blood is once roused.
+
+They are also dangerous to themselves. They rush blindly into danger, and
+they usually meet with terrible accidents and injuries, and very often
+suffer a violent death (_see_ also page 29).
+
+When the Line of Heart commences with a fork, one branch on Jupiter and
+the other between the first and second fingers, it is an excellent sign
+of a well-balanced, happy, affectionate disposition, and a good promise
+of great happiness in all matters of affection.
+
+When the Line of Heart is very thin and with no branches, it denotes
+coldness and want of heart.
+
+When there is no Line of Heart whatever, it is a sign of a cold-blooded,
+unemotional nature. Such people can, however, be brutally sensual and
+especially so if the Mount of Venus is high (_see_ Mounts, page 140).
+
+A broken Heart Line is a certain sign that some terrible tragedy in the
+affections will at some time or other overwhelm the subject.
+
+It may not often be found nowadays, but I have seen it in some few cases,
+and these persons never recovered the loss of the loved one or ever had
+love in their lives again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+
+SIGNS RELATING TO MARRIAGE
+
+What is called the Line of Marriage is that mark or marks, as the case
+may be, found on the side of the Mount under the fourth finger (1, Plate
+XVII.).
+
+I will first proceed to give all the details possible about these lines,
+and then call my reader's attention to the other marks on the hand that
+qualify these Lines of Marriage, and further add a wealth of information
+regarding them.
+
+The Line, or Lines, of Marriage may be found as very short marks almost
+on the very side of the hand, or they may appear as quite long lines
+rising from the side of the hand into the face of the Mount of Mercury,
+or, in some cases, going farther still into the hand itself.
+
+Only the clearly formed lines relate to marriage, the short ones to deep
+affection, or marriage contemplated, but never entered into (2, Plate
+XVII.).
+
+When the deep line is found lying close to the line of Heart, the
+marriage will take place early in life, but the other marks I am going to
+explain later will give more accurate dates as to when the event will
+occur.
+
+For a happy marriage the lines on the Mount of Mercury should be
+straight and clear, without breaks or irregularities of any kind (1,
+Plate XVII.).
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XVII.
+
+MARRIAGE LINES. THE LINE OF MARRIAGE.]
+
+When the Line of Marriage curves or droops downwards (3, Plate XVII.),
+the person on whose hand this appears will outlive the other.
+
+When the line turns upward in the reverse direction, the possessor is not
+likely ever to marry (4, Plate XVII.).
+
+When the line is clear and distinct, but has a lot of little lines
+dropping from it, it foreshadows trouble and anxiety in the marriage, but
+brought on by the delicacy and ill-health of the partner (5, Plate
+XVII.).
+
+When the line has a curve at the end, and if a cross or line be found
+cutting into this curve (2, Plate XVIII.), the partner will die by
+accident or a sudden illness of some kind. But when the Marriage Line
+ends in a long, gradual curve into the Heart Line, the death of the
+partner will come about by gradual ill-health or illness of a very long
+duration.
+
+When the line has an "island" at the beginning, then the marriage will be
+for a long time delayed, and the two persons will be much separated at
+the commencement of their married life.
+
+When the "island" is found about the middle of the Marriage Line, some
+great trouble and separation will take place about the middle of the
+married life (3, Plate XVIII.).
+
+When the "island" is found towards the end of the line, the marriage will
+most probably end in trouble and separation one from the other.
+
+When the Line of Marriage divides into the form of a fork (4, Plate
+XVIII.), the two people will live apart from one another, but when the
+fork turns downwards towards the Line of Heart a legal separation may be
+anticipated (5, Plate XVIII.).
+
+When this fork is more accentuated, and turns down more into the hand,
+divorce may be expected, and especially so if one end of this fork
+stretches across the hand in the direction of the Plain of Mars, or the
+Mount of Mars (5, Plate XVIII.).
+
+In many cases a fine line may be found crossing the entire palm, from the
+Marriage Line, and in such a case the greatest animosity and bitterness
+will enter into the fight for freedom and divorce. In such an example
+there is never any hope of reconciliation.
+
+When the Line of Marriage is full of little islands, or linked like the
+loops of a chain, the subject should be warned not to marry at any time,
+as such a union would be full of the greatest unhappiness and continual
+separations.
+
+When the line, which is otherwise well marked, appears about the centre
+to break in two, it foreshadows a fatality or break-up in an otherwise
+happy married life.
+
+When the Line of Marriage itself, or an offshoot from it, goes into the
+hand, and joins or ascends upward with the Line of Sun, it promises that
+its possessor will marry some one of great wealth or distinction (6,
+Plate XVIII.).
+
+When this above-mentioned line bends downward and cuts the Line of Sun,
+it denotes that the person on whose hand it is found will lose his
+position by the marriage he will make.
+
+When any line from the top of the Mount of Mercury falls down into the
+Marriage Line, it shows that there will be great obstacles to overcome in
+whatever marriage the subject enters, but if the Line of Marriage is a
+good one, then such obstacles will be overcome.
+
+When there is another line much slighter in appearance lying close to the
+upper side of the Marriage Line, it foretells some influence that will
+come into the subject's life after marriage.
+
+All lines that cross the hand from the Mount of Mars (6, Plate XVII.),
+and rise up towards the Line of Marriage denote the interference of
+people with the marriage. These lines give the date of the interference
+when they cross the Line of Destiny; they cause quarrels when they come
+from Mars; from Venus they also denote annoyances, but not of such a
+vindictive nature (7, Plate XVII.).
+
+
+INFLUENCE LINES TO THE FATE LINE ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS, AND OTHER SIGNS
+WHICH ALSO HAVE A MEANING IN CONNECTION WITH MARRIAGE
+
+The student may also get very great help in ascertaining details about
+the likely marriage of the person whose hands he is examining by the
+following:
+
+Fine Influence Lines seen joining the Line of Fate (7, Plate XVIII.),
+relate to persons who come into and affect the Destiny.
+
+If the Line of Influence is very strong where it joins the Fate Line, and
+if at about the same date a clear Marriage Line is seen on the Mount of
+Mercury, the date of marriage may be more accurately predicted by the
+place on the Fate Line where the Influence Line joins it.
+
+A great wealth of detail may also be made out from observing these
+Influence Lines to the Destiny:
+
+Coming over from the Mount of the Moon, there is always something
+romantic about the union. The person on whose hand this Line appears will
+as a rule meet his affinity when travelling or away from his home.
+
+If the Influence Line has an "island" marked on it, the influence will
+then be a bad one, or, at least, the person will have had some scandal
+connected with his or her past life (8, Plate XVIII.). If the Line of
+Fate looks weaker or more uncertain after the union is marked, then such
+a marriage has not brought good or success to the subject. If, on the
+contrary, the Line of Fate looks better or stronger after the Influence
+Line has joined it, then this union will prove of advantage to the person
+whose hand is being examined.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XVIII.
+
+MARRIAGE LINES AND INFLUENCE LINES WHICH FURTHER HELP IN DENOTING
+MARRIAGE.]
+
+This increase of wealth or power is still more accentuated if at the same
+time it is observed that a Sun Line has made its appearance.
+
+If the Influence Line should cut through the Fate Line, and appear on the
+thumb side of it, the affection will seldom last as long, or be so happy
+(7, Plate XVIII.). If a still wider separation of the Influence Line and
+the Fate Line appear as these two lines ascend the hand together, the
+separation of interests and destiny of the two persons will be still more
+marked as the years proceed.
+
+If an Influence Line approaches close to the Line of Fate, and runs
+parallel with it for some time but does not join it, some great obstacle
+will prevent a marriage ever taking place (_see_ also page 57).
+
+If an Influence Line terminates in an "island," the influence itself will
+itself get into trouble, generally disgrace of some character (10, Plate
+XVIII.).[5]
+
+[5] For further particulars refer back to chapter on the Line of Destiny,
+where these Influence Lines are also referred to (page 57).
+
+
+INFLUENCE LINES ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS
+
+These are fine lines that run parallel with the Line of Life (11-11,
+Plate XVIII.), but they must not be confounded with the Line of Mars, or
+"Sister Life Line," which commences higher up nearer the Mount of Mars.
+
+These Venus Influence Lines are more often found with those persons who
+have what is called the "Venus temperament," or who are intensely
+emotional and passionate.
+
+When many of such lines are seen, the subject cannot live without love,
+and will have many "affairs" at the same time.
+
+As such an Influence Line runs parallel with the Life Line, or turns away
+from it, so it can be judged how long such an influence will last, and
+with fair accuracy the date when it will occur (for dates _see_ page
+113).
+
+These Influence Lines, however, never have the same importance or meaning
+as those previously ascribed to the Line of Fate.
+
+In my large work on this subject, Cheiro's _Language of the Hand_, I have
+been able to go into still greater detail with regard to all these
+Influence Lines.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+
+LINES DENOTING CHILDREN, THEIR SEX, AND OTHER MATTERS CONCERNING THEM
+
+The Lines relating to children are those finely marked upright lines
+found immediately above the Line of Marriage (12, Plate XVIII.). A very
+good plan, in trying to see these Lines, is to press this portion of the
+hand with the tips of the fingers, and then note which of these small
+lines stand out the most clearly.
+
+Sometimes they are extremely deeply marked, and as a rule much more so on
+a woman's hand than on a man's. In many cases it is necessary to employ a
+magnifying glass in order to see them.
+
+Broad and deep lines denote male children, fine and narrow lines,
+females.
+
+When they appear as straight lines they denote strong healthy children,
+but when very faint or crooked, the children indicated are always
+delicate.
+
+When the first part of the little line (taking it upward from the Line of
+Marriage) is marked with a small "island," such a child will be very
+delicate in its early life, but if the line appears well marked when the
+"island" is passed, the probability is that it will grow up strong and
+healthy. When ending or broken at the "island" the child will never grow
+up.
+
+When one line stands out very clear and distinct among the others, the
+child the mark indicates will be more to the parent, and will be more
+successful than any of the others.
+
+To know the number of children anyone will have, it is necessary to count
+these lines from the outside of the hand in towards the palm.
+
+A person with the Mount of Venus very flat on the hand, and very poorly
+developed, is not likely to have any children at all, and this is all the
+more certain if the first Bracelet is found rising up like an arch into
+or towards the palm (_see_ page 91).
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEALTH OR THE HEPATICA
+
+There has been very considerable discussion among students of this
+subject as to the part of the hand on which the Line of Health (1-1,
+Plate XIX.) commences.
+
+My own theory, and one that I have proved by over twenty-five years'
+experience and also watching its growth on the hands of children, is,
+that it rises at the base of or on the face of the Mount of Mercury, and
+as it grows across the hand and attacks the Line of Life, it foreshadows
+the development of illness or germ of disease, which, at the date of its
+coming in contact with the Line of Life, will reach the climax of its
+attack.
+
+The Line of Life, it must be remembered, merely relates to the promised
+length of life from heredity and natural causes, but the Line of Health
+denotes the effect of the class of life the subject has led. Where these
+two lines come together, if one is of equal strength to the other, will
+be the date of death, even though the Line of Life should pass this point
+and appear to be a much greater length (2, Plate XIX.).
+
+The Line of Mercury, or of Health, relating as it does to the nervous
+system, and also to the mind (Mercury), lends itself to the supposition
+that the all-knowing subconscious brain is cognisant, even at an early
+age, of the force of resistance in the nervous system. It may know how
+long this force will last, when it will be exhausted, and consequently
+may mark the hand long years in advance.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XIX.
+
+THE LINE OF HEALTH.]
+
+The Line of Health is one of the lines of the hand most subject to
+changes. It is the thermometer of the life showing its "rise and fall" as
+the case may be. I have seen this mysterious line look deep and
+threatening during the early years of a life, and completely fade away
+as greater health and strength took possession of the body.
+
+Again, I have often seen it look deeper and more ominous as the wear and
+tear, especially of the nervous system, began to make itself manifest, or
+when the subject over-taxed his mental strength.
+
+Further, it is an excellent sign to be without this line altogether. Its
+absence denotes an extremely robust, strong constitution, and a healthy
+state of the nervous system.
+
+If a hand has the Line of Health, the best position for it is to lie
+straight down the hand, and not approach or touch the Line of Life (3-3,
+Plate XIX.). When found crossing the hand, and touching or throwing
+branches across to the Line of Life, it foretells that there is some
+illness at work which is undermining the health.
+
+If it rises and seems like a branch from the Heart Line, especially if
+both these lines are broad in appearance and with the Health Line running
+down the palm coming in contact with the Line of Life, it is a certain
+indication of weakness or disease of the heart.
+
+The student should always observe the kind of nails there are on the hand
+when thinking out the diseases indicated by the Line of Health.[6]
+
+[6] _See_ Chapter on Nails, page 136.
+
+When the finger nails are short, without moons, and round, and the Line
+of Health is strongly marked, he may be sure that nervous weak action of
+the heart is decidedly threatened.
+
+When the nails are long and almond-shaped, there is danger of weakness
+and delicacy of the lungs. With the same shape of nails, and with islands
+in the upper part of the Health Line (4, Plate XIX.), consumption of the
+lungs and tuberculosis will make itself manifest.
+
+When the nails are very flat, and especially shell-shaped (_see_ Plate
+V., Part II.), and the Line of Health is deeply marked, paralysis and the
+worst forms of nerve diseases are threatening the subject.
+
+When this line is very red in small spots, especially when pressed,
+rheumatic fever is indicated.
+
+When twisted, irregular, and yellowish in colour, the subject will suffer
+from biliousness and liver complaints.
+
+When found heavily marked, and only joining the Heart and Head Lines
+together, it foreshadows brain-fever, especially when any islands are
+marked on the Line of Head.
+
+The Line of Health, running straight down the hand but not touching the
+Line of Life, indicates that though the constitution may not be robust,
+it is wiry, and there is great reserve resistance to disease.
+
+In connection with the examination of the Line of Health, the student
+must always look for other indications to the rest of the lines of the
+hand, more especially to the Line of Life and Line of Head. For instance,
+when the Line of Life looks very chained and weak, the Health Line on a
+hand will naturally increase the danger of delicate health; and when
+found with a Line of Head full of little islands, or like a chain, such a
+Health Line more clearly foreshadows brain disease, severe headaches,
+etc.
+
+By a study of this line the most valuable warnings may be given of
+approaching ill-health. Whether persons will follow the warnings or not
+is a question. My experience is that they do not and will not, and
+therefore, whatever is indicated will most probably come to pass.
+
+Providence places many signposts and warnings in our paths, but human
+nature is either too blind or too self-confident to notice them until it
+is too late.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+
+THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, AND THE BRACELETS
+
+These marks are classed among the minor lines of the hands, but they
+often have a significance that is of the greatest importance.
+
+The Girdle of Venus is that broken or sometimes unbroken kind of
+semi-circular line that is found rising from the base of the first finger
+to the base of the fourth (1-1, Plate XX.).
+
+I have not in my experience found this mark to indicate the gross
+sensuality that is so often ascribed to it by other writers. It should be
+remembered that the hand is divided by the Line of Head, as it were,
+_into two hemispheres, the lower and the upper_.
+
+The lower relates to the physical or more animal side of the nature, and
+the upper to the intellectual. Following this arrangement, it is only
+reasonable to assume that this mark under consideration, viz., the Girdle
+of Venus, relates more to the mental side of the symbolism of the Venus
+nature.
+
+I have found that persons with this sign are more mentally sensual than
+physically so. They love to read or write books on the subject of the
+"sex problem," but they are not inclined to put their theories and ideas
+into practice, at least with their own lives.
+
+The qualities, however, that this mark represents are much more active
+and dangerous when this Girdle forms itself from the Mount of Saturn to
+that of Mercury. The imaginings of such people are then morbid and
+unhealthy.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XX.
+
+THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, THE THREE BRACELETS, THE LINE OF
+INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA.]
+
+To those who study Astrology, the inference that I draw from the
+connection of these two parts of the hand will become clear and
+reasonable.
+
+When broken or made up of little pieces, the Girdle of Venus has little
+meaning except to show a hysterical temperament, with a leaning towards
+the tendencies I have mentioned above.
+
+These persons in all cases suffer enormously from moods, they are very
+difficult to live with, and when the Girdle of Venus runs off the side of
+the hand and passes out through the Marriage Lines, their moody,
+changeable natures generally make marriage for them an unusually unhappy
+experience.
+
+
+THE RING OF SATURN
+
+What is called the Ring of Saturn (2, Plate XX.) is very seldom found,
+and it is by no means a good sign to have. It is also a semi-circular
+line, but found lying across the Mount of Saturn.
+
+In all my experience I have never been able to come across any person
+with this mark who succeeded in life or was able to carry any one of his
+plans to a successful termination.
+
+These people seem cut off from their fellow beings in some peculiar and
+extraordinary way. They are isolated and alone, and they appear to
+realise their lonely position keenly. They are gloomy, morbid, and
+Saturnine in character. They seldom marry, and when they do it is always
+a ghastly failure.
+
+They are terribly obstinate and headstrong in all their actions, they
+resent the least advice or interference in their plans. Their lives
+generally close in suffering, poverty, or by some sinister tragedy or
+fatality.
+
+It is the most unfortunate mark ever to find.
+
+
+THE BRACELETS
+
+The Bracelets (3-3, Plate XX.) are of very little importance except to
+throw light on certain points of health. There are supposed to be three
+of these lines or bracelets at the wrist, which were called by the Greeks
+the Bracelets of Health, Wealth, and Happiness.
+
+It is certainly very seldom that they can be found together, for
+experience in life does not give much hope that these three
+much-sought-after possessions can ever be found together on this side of
+the grave.
+
+Delving back into the ancient legends of Greece, we find one very
+significant point in reference to the first bracelet, the one nearest the
+palm, which represents Health.
+
+It appears that at one period of the ancient Greek civilisation all women
+had to come to the priest at their Temple to have their hands examined
+before they were allowed to marry. If the priest found this first
+Bracelet out of its place and rising up into the hand in the shape of an
+arch (4, Plate XX.), he would not allow the woman possessing this sign to
+be married under any circumstance, the idea being that it represented
+some internal malformation that would prevent her bringing children into
+the world. In such cases these women were made Vestal Virgins in the
+temples. Perhaps the old Greek Priest was right in his idea, for if this
+first Bracelet is found rising into the hand in the form of an arch, both
+men and women possessing it are delicate internally, and especially so in
+matters relating to sex.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+
+THE LINE OF INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA
+
+The Line of Intuition (5, Plate XX.) is seldom found on other types of
+hand than those of the Philosophic, the Conic, and the Psychic, but it is
+sometimes found on the Spatulate.
+
+It takes more or less the formation of a semi-circle from the face of the
+Mount of Mercury to that of the Mount of the Moon, or may be found on the
+Mount of the Moon alone. It must not be confounded with the Hepatica, or
+Line of Health, but is found as a distinct mark in itself.
+
+It denotes an extra highly-strung sensitive temperament, also
+presentiments, inspiration, clairvoyance of the highest kind, clear vivid
+dreams which often come to pass, intuition as to how things should be
+done, and very often manifests itself in inspired speaking and writing of
+the loftiest character.
+
+It is much more often found on women's hands than on men's, although many
+cases have come under my notice of its being unusually clearly marked on
+some men's hands. In each case the possessor of it had most remarkable
+powers and unusual faculties, as well as the gift of intuition, even
+concerning purely mundane subjects that in an ordinary state they knew
+nothing whatever about.
+
+I use the words "ordinary state" advisably here, because such people are
+not always in the condition of mind when these strange faculties may be
+employed. Several of these men were absolutely uneducated, and yet at
+times, when thrown into an inspired state, they were able to explain the
+most intricate problems with the greatest accuracy. If asked, however,
+from where they obtained their knowledge, they were only able to reply
+that "it came to them" when in certain moods.
+
+One man I knew well had such remarkable dreams of coming events that he
+was able to warn many people weeks and months in advance of dangers that
+lay before them, and his warnings in many cases saved life.
+
+With all people who were gifted in this way I have noticed that they
+completely lost their strange powers the moment they indulged in alcohol
+of any kind.
+
+
+THE VIA LASCIVA
+
+This is a strange mark (6, Plate XX.) which takes the form also somewhat
+of a semi-circle, but in this case it connects the Mount of the Moon with
+that of Venus, or it may simply run off the hand from the lower part of
+the Mount of Luna into the wrist.
+
+The first-mentioned formation indicates unbridled sensuality and passion,
+and where it cuts through the Line of Life it indicates death, but one
+usually brought about in connection with the licentiousness that it
+denotes.
+
+This Line running from the Mount of the Moon into the wrist denotes the
+most sensual dreams, desires, and imaginings, but, unlike the other
+class, it is usually only dangerous to the person on whose hand it is
+found.
+
+In both cases there is generally a tendency towards the taking of drugs
+such as opium, morphine, especially when the hand is noted to be soft,
+full, and flabby. With a firm hard palm the subject usually indulges in
+excessive drinking fits, and when under drink seems to have no control
+whatever.
+
+If the Line of Head is found weak-looking, full of islands and descending
+downwards on the Mount of the Moon, insanity or the worst form of
+degeneracy will sooner or later destroy the whole character and career.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+
+"LA CROIX MYSTIQUE", THE RING OF SOLOMON
+
+What is called "La Croix Mystique" is found in the quadrangle of the hand
+between the Lines of Heart and Head (7, Plate XX.).
+
+It is more usually found in the centre of this part of the hand, but it
+may be also found nearer the one side of the quadrangle or the other.
+
+This mark denotes a natural gift or talent for mysticism and occultism of
+all kinds.
+
+When placed nearer Jupiter, it denotes the employment of these studies
+more to gratify the subject's own pride or ambition than the following
+out of such things for their own sake.
+
+When it is in the centre of the quadrangle, across the Line of Fate, or
+immediately under the Mount of Saturn, such studies become more of a
+religion or are followed for their own worth and the influence and truth
+of occultism will play a leading r�le in the whole career. Most likely
+the possessor of this mark will follow it as a profession, or will
+crystallise his researches into the form of books.
+
+When this mark lies lower down in the quadrangle, nearer to the Mount of
+the Moon, the subject will study some form of occultism more from a
+superstitious standpoint than any other. None the less, he will be likely
+to succeed in doing so, and influence other people through his studies,
+and with this latter form he will be more likely to write beautiful
+mystic poetry with the prophetic note running through it very strongly.
+
+
+THE RING OF SOLOMON
+
+The Ring of Solomon is also one of these strange marks of mysticism and
+occultism, but in this latter case, owing probably to the qualities
+signified by the Mount of Jupiter, its possessor will aim at having the
+power of a master or an adept in such subjects (8, Plate XX.).
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+
+TRAVELS, VOYAGES AND ACCIDENTS
+
+Travels and voyages may be seen on the hand by the little lines that
+leave the Line of Life and bend over towards the Mount of the Moon and
+also by the lines found on this Mount (2, Plate XXI.).
+
+When these fine lines of travel are seen on the Line of Life, by
+referring to the map showing dates (Plate XXVI.), it may be possible to
+obtain a very clear idea of when these travels take place.
+
+When, however, the Line of Life itself divides, and one branch of it
+leans over towards or on to the Mount of the Moon (I, Plate XXI.), it
+denotes that the entire life will be full of change and travel. In such a
+case it will not be possible, except by the use of some gift such as
+clairvoyance, to tell accurately in advance the dates of voyages that
+will be undertaken.
+
+If the Line of Life apparently leaves its ordinary course and sweeps over
+to the Mount of the Moon, the life will be one continual round of travel.
+The person will settle nowhere, and the end of the life in such a case
+will take place in some land far distant from the place of birth.
+
+If the Line of Life has no line or branch leaving it and going in an
+opposite direction, but keeps to the form of a semi-circle round the
+Mount of Venus, then such a life will be remarkably free from change and
+travel, and the person will remain all his life in the land of his birth
+(3-3, Plate XXI.).
+
+When a travel Line from the Line of Life ends in a small cross the
+journey undertaken will end in disappointment (4, Plate XXI).
+
+When the Line ends in a square, there will be great danger to the subject
+on such a journey, but he will escape, as the square is a sign of
+preservation from danger.
+
+When the Line ends in an island, the journey will end in loss (5, Plate
+XXI.).
+
+When the Travel Line crosses over near or on to the Mount of the Moon and
+ends in a fork or a circle, there will be great danger of the subject
+losing his life in undertaking such a journey.
+
+There is always more danger in travelling on water when the subject is
+found to be born in the following dates:
+
+  (1) Between the 21st of June and the 21st of July.
+  (2) The 21st of October and the 21st of November.
+  (3) Between the 21st of February and the 21st of March.
+
+There is more likelihood of danger from collision of trains and accidents
+on land when the subject is born between:
+
+  (1) The 21st of April and 21st of May.
+  (2) The 21st of August and the 21st of September.
+  (3) The 21st of December and the 21st of January.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXI.
+
+TRAVELS, VOYAGES, ACCIDENTS AND DESCENDING LINES PROM THE MOUNTS.]
+
+Danger from storms, tornadoes, thunder and lightning, is more likely to
+occur when people are travelling whose birthdays fall between:
+
+  (1) The 21st of May and the 21st of June.
+  (2) The 21st of September and the 21st of October.
+  (3) The 21st of January and the 21st of February.
+
+
+ACCIDENTS
+
+Accidents are generally marked by lines descending from the Mount of
+Saturn and touching the Line of Life (6, Plate XXI.).
+
+When falling on the Line of Head, they increase the danger to the head
+itself (7, Plate XXI.).
+
+Descending lines are those that look thicker on the Mount and taper as
+they come downwards.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+
+THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, AND THE GRILLE
+
+The Island is never a fortunate sign. Whereever it makes its appearance,
+it reduces the promise of the Line or Mount on which it may be found.
+
+On the Line of Life it shows delicacy or illness at that particular date
+where it appears (1, Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Head, weakness of the brain, danger of brain illness (2,
+Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Heart, weakness of the heart (3, Plate XXII.), and
+especially so when under the Mount of the Sun.
+
+On the Line of Fate, heavy loss in worldly matters, worry, and anxiety
+about the subject's destiny (4, Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Sun, loss of position and generally by some scandal (5,
+Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Health, serious illness (6, Plate XXII.); if on the upper
+part of the Line and with small round finger-nails, throat and bronchial
+troubles. With long nails, delicacy of the lungs and chest. With short
+nails without moons, bad circulation and weak action of the heart; and
+with very flat nails, nerve diseases and paralysis (_see_ Nails, page
+137).
+
+Lower down on the Line of Health on the Mount of the Moon, it indicates
+a grave tendency towards kidney and bladder troubles (7, Plate XXII.).
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXII.
+
+THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, THE GRILLE, THE STAR, THE SQUARE.]
+
+Any Line that forms itself into an island or that runs into one, is a bad
+sign for that Line or particular part of the hand on which it is found.
+An island on any of the Mounts weakens the qualities of what the Mount
+expresses.
+
+
+THE CIRCLE
+
+On the Mount of the Sun the Circle is favourable (8, Plate XXII.) in all
+other positions it is unfavourable. On the Mount of the Moon it threatens
+death from drowning.
+
+
+THE SPOT
+
+The Spot is a sign of temporary arrest of the qualities of any Line on
+which it may be found.
+
+On the Line of Head, shock or injury. (9, Plate XXII.)
+
+On the Line of Life, sudden illness.
+
+On the Line of Health, fever.
+
+On all the other Lines it appears to have less significance.
+
+
+THE GRILLE
+
+The Grille (10, Plate XXII.) is very often seen on the Mounts of the
+Hand. It denotes difficulties and obstacles in connection with whatever
+the Mount represents, and a lack of success in whatever quality or talent
+the Mount symbolises.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+
+THE STAR, THE CROSS, THE SQUARE
+
+The Star (11, Plate XXII.) is with only one exception a most fortunate
+mark to possess. On the Mount of Jupiter, the Star promises added honour,
+power, and position.
+
+On the Mount of Sun, it gives riches and glory, but generally associated
+with a public life.
+
+On the Mount of Mercury, unusual success in commerce, business, science,
+or great eloquence, according to other indications of the hand. (11,
+Plate XXII.)
+
+On the Mount of Mars under Jupiter, great distinction and celebrity in
+martial life or in some one decisive battle, which gives renown to the
+rest of the career, like a Wellington at Waterloo.
+
+On the Mount of Mars under Mercury, it gives honour won by the mentality
+fighting the battle of life (_see_ Mounts, page 144).
+
+On the Mount of the Moon it is a sign of great celebrity arising from the
+qualities of this Mount, viz., through the imagination or inventive
+faculties.
+
+On the Mount of Venus the Star on the centre of this Mount is also a sign
+of success, but in relation to animal magnetism and sensuality it gives
+extraordinary success with the opposite sex.
+
+On the Mount of Saturn it is the one unfavourable sign of this
+particular mark, and on this Mount it gives distinction, but one to be
+dreaded. Such a person will be the plaything of destiny, a man cast for
+some terrible part in the tragedy of life. Such a man's life will end in
+some terrible disaster, but one which will cause his name to be on
+everyone's lips. A king perhaps, but one crowned by doom.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXIII.
+
+MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS.]
+
+
+THE CROSS
+
+This sign is the direct opposite to the preceding sign, and has only one
+favourable position, viz., on the Mount of Jupiter where it indicates
+some extraordinary fortunate affection which will come into the life. On
+all the other Mounts it is evil.
+
+On the Mount of Saturn, violent death. (12, Plate XXII.)
+
+On the Mount of Sun, disappointment in riches.
+
+On the Mount of Mercury, dishonesty.
+
+On the Mount of Mars (under Mercury) great opposition.
+
+On the Mount of Mars (under Jupiter) violence and even death from
+quarrels.
+
+On the Mount of the Moon it denotes a fatal influence to the imagination.
+Such a man will deceive himself. When low down on this Mount it
+foreshadows death by drowning.
+
+On the Mount of Venus it indicates some fatal influence of the
+affections.
+
+Above the Line of Head it foretells an accident or injury to the head.
+
+Above the Line of Heart, the sudden death of some loved one.
+
+
+THE SQUARE
+
+The Square (13, Plate XXII.) is usually called the Mark of Preservation.
+It shows escape from dangers at that particular moment where it appears.
+
+When on the Line of Life it means preservation from death. (13, Plate
+XXII.)
+
+On the Line of Fate, preservation from loss, and so on with each quality
+represented by the different lines.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+
+DIFFERENT CLASSES OF LINES
+
+The lines on the palm should be clearly marked, a good pink or reddish
+colour, and they should be free from breaks, crosses, holes or
+irregularities of all kinds.
+
+When very pale in colour they show lack of force and loss of energy, and
+often poor health.
+
+When extremely red they indicate excessive energy and a rather violent
+disposition.
+
+When yellow in colour they denote a tendency to biliousness and liver
+complaints, and tell in consequence of a melancholy morose nature.
+
+Forked lines are generally good and increase the quality of the special
+indication. When at the end of the Line of Head, the fork gives more of
+what is called a dual mentality and less power of concentration on any
+one subject. (Plate XXIV.)
+
+Spots on a Line weaken it and arrest its growth.
+
+Tasselled Lines (Plate XXIV.) are not good signs. They weaken any
+indication the line itself denotes, and at the end of a Life Line they
+foreshadow loss of all nervous energy.
+
+Wavy Lines (Plate XXIV.) show uncertainty, lack of decision and want of
+force.
+
+Broken Lines (Plate XXIV.) destroy the meaning of the line at the
+particular place where the break appears, but if one line ends above the
+other, the break is not so bad and the quality of the line will be
+continued.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXIV.
+
+MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS.]
+
+Sister Lines (Plate XXIV.) increase or double the power of any line, and
+when lying close together at the Line of Head, they give it great power
+and promise.
+
+Islands (Plate XXIV.) are always evil and denote weakness or failure of
+the Line or Mount on which they may be found.
+
+Ascending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are good from any line from which they
+spring. From the Line of Life they denote increased energy wherever they
+make their appearance. If they run up to any particular Mount or part of
+the hand, they show that the increased effort or energy will be in that
+particular direction.
+
+Descending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are the reverse and mean loss of power.
+
+Chained Lines show lack of force or fixity of purpose. (Plate XXIV.).
+
+When the entire hand is covered with a network of small lines, it denotes
+a highly nervous disposition and usually great mental worry and lack of
+decision.
+
+
+RIGHT AND LEFT HANDS
+
+Both the hands should be examined together to see if they accord. When
+they do, the indication of whatever the mark is, is more decided.
+
+When something is marked on the left hand and not on the right, the
+tendency will be in the nature, but unless it is also marked on the right
+hand it will never bear fruit or come to any result. When the two hands
+are exactly alike, it denotes that the subject has not developed in any
+way from what heredity or Nature gave to him.
+
+It must be remembered that we use the left side of the brain more than we
+do the right, and the nerves cross and go to the right hand.
+Consequently, it is this hand which denotes the developed or active
+brain, the left only giving the natural tendencies or inclinations.
+
+To be scientific and accurate the student of this subject must always
+keep this rule before his mind and not be led away in his judgment by
+some "marvellously good line" that the subject may proudly call his
+attention to in the left hand, for such a mark will have no actual result
+unless it is also found on the right hand.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+
+THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE
+
+The Great Triangle is formed by the lines of Head, Life, and Health
+(Plate XXV.). The larger this triangle is, the better will be the health,
+for the reason that the Line of Health will be further removed from the
+Life Line. The views of life will also be broader and the field of action
+as it were less limited.
+
+When the upper angle (made by the Head and Life Lines) is acute, the
+subject will be more nervous, timid, and sensitive.
+
+
+THE QUADRANGLE
+
+The Quadrangle, as its name implies, is that space lying between the
+Lines of Head and Heart. (Plate XXV.)
+
+To be well marked, it should be even in shape and not narrow at either
+end.
+
+When marked in this way it denotes balance of judgment, level-headedness
+in all things, and is a most excellent sign to have.
+
+It represents man's disposition or mental attitude towards his fellow
+men. When extremely narrow it indicates narrowness of views and bigotry
+in regard to religion.
+
+When excessively wide, it denotes a lack of judgment in all things and
+too much looseness of views for one's good.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXV.
+
+THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+
+HOW TO TELL TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS IN THE LIFE
+
+The most correct way in which to tell time by the hand is to divide the
+Line of Life into periods of seven years, and also the Line of Fate,
+following the accompanying design (Plate XXVI.).
+
+The Line of Head may also be divided into sections of seven years (_see_
+page 25).
+
+This division into periods of seven is the most natural one of all, as
+the entire nature changes every seven years. Long experience has proved
+that, by dividing the hand in the manner shown in the accompanying
+illustration, the best possible results as regards dates are obtained.
+
+I have also made the following curious observation concerning the most
+important years in people's careers, which I now publish in this work for
+the first time.
+
+People born on the 1st, 10th, 19th, and 28th of any month, and especially
+in the months of July, August, and January, will find the following years
+of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    1st, 7th, 10th, 16th, 19th, 28th, 34th, 37th, 43d, 46th, 52d,
+    55th, 61st, and 70th.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXVI.
+
+TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS.]
+
+Those born on the 2d, 11th, 20th, and 29th of any month, but more
+especially in July, August, and January, will find the following years of
+their lives the most eventful:
+
+    2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th,
+    52d, 56th, and 70th.
+
+Those born on the 3d, 12th, 21st, and 30th of any month, but more
+especially in the months of December and February, will find the
+following years of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    3d, 12th, 21st, 30th, 39th, 48th, 57th, 66th, and 75th.
+
+Those born on the 4th, 13th, 22d, and 31st, especially in the months of
+July, August, and January, will find the followings years of their lives
+the most eventful:
+
+    1st, 4th, 10th, 13th, 19th, 22d, 28th, 31st, 37th, 40th, 46th,
+    49th, 55th, 58th, 64th, 67th, 73d, and 76th.
+
+Those born on the 5th, 14th, and 23d of any month, but especially in the
+months of June and September, will find the following years of their
+lives the most eventful:
+
+    5th, 14th, 23d, 32d, 41st, 50th, 59th, 68th, and 77th.
+
+Those born on the 6th, 15th, and 24th of any month, but especially in the
+months of May and October, will find the following years of their lives
+the most eventful:
+
+    6th, 15th, 24th, 33d, 42d, 51st, 60th, 69th, 78th, and 87th.
+
+Those born on the 7th, 16th, and 25th of any month, especially in the
+months of July, August, and January, will find the following years of
+their lives the most eventful:
+
+    2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th,
+    56th, 61st, 65th, 70th, 74th, and 79th.
+
+Those born on the 8th, 17th, and 26th of any month, but more especially
+in the months of January, February, July, and August, will find the
+following years of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    8th, 17th, 26th, 35th, 44th, 53d, 62d, 71st, and 80th.
+
+Those born on the 9th, 18th, and 27th of any month, but more especially
+in the months of April, October, and November, will find the following
+years of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    9th, 18th, 27th, 36th, 45th, 54th, 63d, 72d, and 81st.
+
+This curious system it will be seen has embraced every day of every month
+that people can be born on. It is based on a strange law of periodicity
+that after years of study I have found extremely accurate and wonderful
+in its meaning.
+
+
+
+
+PART II--CHEIROGNOMY
+
+OR
+
+THE SCIENCE OF INTERPRETING THE SHAPE OF HANDS
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+
+THE STUDY OF THE SHAPE OF THE HAND
+
+We now leave the domain of what must be considered Palmistry, the study
+of the Lines of the Palm--or Cheiromancy, as it was called by the Greeks
+from the word [Greek: che�r], the hand, and proceed to consider the
+meanings that can be derived from the shapes of the hands, fingers, etc.,
+which is called Cheirognomy.
+
+These two studies may be taken up separately, but by a knowledge of both
+the student will be doubly armed, especially in the reading of character.
+
+To a judge of horseflesh the limbs of the horse give him such a fund of
+information as to the animals' breed, training, etc., that it enables him
+to draw conclusions that he could not otherwise obtain.
+
+In the same way the shape of the hand gives an enormous wealth of
+information as to breed and peculiarities of human beings.
+
+In a book of this nature I shall be able to give only the leading traits
+denoted by each type, but if readers wish to carry out this study
+further, I must refer them to my larger works on the subject, in which
+the shapes of the hands are described in the fullest detail.
+
+The most casual observation of character as shown by the formation of
+hands will soon convince any person of the value of this study. Even in
+itself it possesses the most far-reaching possibilities in helping to a
+clear understanding of the difference that exists in races, their various
+blends of types, that have now spread themselves by intermarriage and
+travel over the surface of the earth.
+
+For example, the difference in the shape of the hands of the French and
+German or the French and English races would convince any thinking person
+that temperament and disposition are indeed largely indicated by the
+shape of the hand itself.
+
+It is even a remarkable thing that though work and exercise may enlarge
+and broaden the hand, yet the type to which it belongs is never
+destroyed, but can be easily detected by anyone who has made a study of
+such matters.
+
+The Seven Types or Shapes of Hands are as follows:
+
+  (1) The Elementary--or lowest type.
+  (2) The Square--or the useful hand.
+  (3) The Spatulate--or nervous active type.
+  (4) The Philosophic--or jointed hand.
+  (5) The Conic--or the artistic type.
+  (6) The Psychic--or the idealistic hand.
+  (7) The Mixed Hand.
+
+
+THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS
+
+
+THE ELEMENTARY
+
+As its name implies, the Elementary is the lowest type of all. It is just
+a little above the brute creation. This type is extremely short (Plate
+I., Part II.), thick set and brutal-looking. In passing I must draw the
+reader's attention to the fact that the shorter and thicker the hand is,
+the nearer the person is to the animal.
+
+In examining this type one can therefore only expect to find it the
+expression of all that is coarse, brutal, and animal.
+
+People having such hands naturally have very little mental development or
+ability. They are found engaged in occupations requiring only unskilled
+labour and the very lowest even of that.
+
+They are violent in temper, and have little or no control over their
+passions or their anger. They are coarse in their ideas, possess little
+or no sentiment, no imagination or feeling, and it has been found that
+even the nerve system of such types is more or less in a state of
+non-development. They do not feel pain as the higher types of humanity
+feel it, and have little ambition except to eat, drink, and sleep.
+
+Note.--The thumb is extremely short and low-set with the Elementary type.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 1--THE ELEMENTARY HAND. FIG. 2--THE SQUARE OR USEFUL
+HAND.
+
+FIG. 3--THE SPATULATE HAND. FIG. 4--THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND.
+
+PLATE I.--PART II.]
+
+
+THE SQUARE TYPE
+
+The Square type (Plate I., Part II.,) is so designated on account of the
+palm being like a square in shape, or at least nearly so. Such a hand in
+fact "looks square." It is rather straight or even at the wrist, at the
+base of the fingers, and also at the sides. The fingers themselves also
+have a "square-cut" appearance. The thumb is, however, nearly always
+long, well-shaped, and set high on the palm, and stands well out from the
+palm.
+
+The Square Hand is also called the practical or useful hand. People who
+possess this type are essentially practical, logical, and rather
+materialistic. They belong to the earth and the things of the earth. They
+have little imagination or idealism, they are solid, serious workers,
+methodical and painstaking in all they do. They believe in things only by
+proof and by their reason. They are often religious and even
+superstitious, but more from habit than from anything else.
+
+They are determined and obstinate, especially if their thumbs are long
+and the first joint stiff.[7]
+
+[7] _See_ Chapter on Thumbs, page 127.
+
+They succeed in all lines of work that do not require imagination or the
+creative faculties, and as business men, lawyers, doctors, scientists,
+they do extremely well, and are generally to be found in such callings.
+
+
+THE SPATULATE HAND
+
+The Spatulate or active nervous type (Plate I., Part II.) is usually
+crooked or irregular looking, with large tips or pads at the ends of the
+fingers, rather like the spatula chemists use and from which peculiarity
+this type gets its name. The people who possess this type are in fact
+always "pounding" at something. They are full of untiring energy,
+enormous workers in everything they take up, and generally remarkable
+for their originality.
+
+They are not built on the hard set square lines of the former type. These
+persons have enormous imagination, their creative faculties largely
+developed. They are inventive, unconventional, emotional, demonstrative,
+and in fact the complete opposite in character to the class who possesses
+the square type of hand.
+
+The Spatulate type has also the palm irregular in shape. It may be wider
+at the base of the fingers than at the wrist, or it may be found _vice
+versa_.
+
+In the first case they are then more practical in their work and views
+and less impulsive. With the larger development at the wrist, they are
+more carried away with their impulses, hasty and impetuous in temper,
+speech, and action.
+
+
+THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND
+
+The Philosophic Hand (Plate I., Part II.) received this name from the
+Greek [Greek: philos]--love, and [Greek: sophich]--wisdom. When the
+Greeks made a study of hands they noticed that all those persons who
+possessed this type had a bent for philosophy in their blood that nothing
+could eradicate.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 1.--THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND.
+
+FIG. 2.--THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND.
+
+FIG. 3.--THE MIXED HAND.
+
+PLATE II.--PART II.]
+
+The Philosophic Hand is long, bony, and angular with knotty joints, and
+is as a general rule fairly thin. People with this type of hand are
+always studious. They are great readers and usually have a strong
+tendency towards literature. They love sedentary work, and have a
+somewhat lonely, ascetic disposition. Perhaps on account of this quality
+they are very often found in church-life, or largely associated with
+religious movements. The monks of old, I mean those who compiled those
+wonderful manuscripts on doctrine, science, art, alchemy, and occult
+matters, all had this class of hand. In our modern times this type may be
+easily recognised, and the qualities it expresses remain the same even in
+the age of money-getting and machinery.
+
+It is, however, more usual nowadays to find a slight modification of the
+true philosophic hand in that of the hand with the palm square and with
+the fingers only belonging to the philosophic type. In such cases the
+practical nature is a basis or foundation on which the studious mind
+builds its theories, its religion, its literary achievements, or its
+scientific researches.
+
+As a rule the Line of Head on such hands is rather sloping, but it may
+also be found almost straight, and when it is, a more "level-headed"
+disposition will make more practical use of the studious nature. But
+speaking generally, people with this type of hand rarely accumulate as
+much wealth as those possessing the Square Hand.
+
+The knotted or jointed fingers give carefulness and detail in work or
+study. They arrest the impulse of the brain, and so acquire time for
+thought and reflection.
+
+The Philosophic Hand is one of the highest developments of the mental
+side of the human family.
+
+
+THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND
+
+The Conic, also called the Artistic, Hand (Plate II., Part II.), is
+always graceful looking, with the fingers tapering and pointed. It has,
+not only on account of its appearance but also because of the qualities
+it represents, been called the Artistic Hand.
+
+Its possessor may not always paint pictures or design beautiful things,
+but he will have the emotional, artistic temperament, which loves
+beautiful surroundings, and is most sensitive to colour, music, and all
+the fine arts. It largely depends on the kind of Head Line and the will
+power shown by it, to determine whether its owner will develop the
+natural artistic temperament that he or she possesses.
+
+Such hands being generally full, fleshy, or soft, there is always a
+decidedly pronounced indolence in the nature which, if not overcome,
+combats the hard work necessary to achieve any real result. All very
+emotional people have more or less the characteristics of this type, but
+great numbers simply squander their time in the appreciation of art,
+rather than in making the effort in themselves to create it.
+
+The harder and firmer this type of hand is, the more likely it is to find
+that its possessor will really make something out of his artistic
+temperament.
+
+
+THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND
+
+This type (Plate II., Part II.), may in many ways be considered as the
+highest development of the hand on the purely mental plane, but from a
+worldly standpoint it is the least successful of all. Its possessors live
+in a world of dreams and ideals. They know little or nothing about the
+practical or purely material side of existence, and when they have to
+earn their own bread they gain so little that they usually starve.
+
+These beautiful hands do not appear made for work in any sense. They are
+also too spiritual and frail to deal blows and hold their own in the
+battle of life. If they are supported by others, or have money of their
+own to live on, all may be well, and in such cases they will be likely to
+develop strange psychic gifts dealing with visions and ideals that some
+few may hear and understand. But if not, their fate as a rule is a sad
+one, they will easily be pushed aside by the rougher types of humanity
+or, in sheer helplessness, take their own lives, and so end the unequal
+struggle.
+
+In constitution they are seldom strong physically, and consequently they
+are doubly unfitted for the struggle for existence.
+
+
+THE MIXED HAND
+
+What is called the "Mixed Hand" (Plate II., Part II.), is an aggregation
+of all the types, or at least, some of them.
+
+It is very often found having all the fingers different from one another,
+as for example one pointed, one square, or spatulate, and so on. Or
+sometimes the palm may be of one type, say spatulate, with all the
+fingers mixed.
+
+Such persons are always versatility itself, but so changeable in purpose
+that they rarely succeed in making much out of any talents they may
+possess. They can generally do a little of everything but nothing well.
+They can talk on any subject that may crop up, but never impress their
+listeners with depth of thought on any subject.
+
+It is only when the Line of Head is found on such hands clear and
+straight that there is a likelihood of these persons developing some one
+talent out of the versatility that this type gives.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+
+THE THUMB
+
+In the judgment of character by the formation of the Hand, the Thumb is
+of about the same importance as the nose is to the face. It must be
+understood to represent the natural Will Power, whereas the Line of Head
+represents the Mental Will.
+
+In my larger works on this subject I have gone into very deeply the
+medical reasons why character should be expressed by the Thumb and the
+extraordinary r�le it has played in civilisation, and also in the various
+religions of the world.
+
+The Thumb proper represents the three great worlds of ideas, viz., Love,
+Logic, and Will (Plate VI., Part II.).
+
+Love is represented by the base of the Thumb which is covered on the hand
+by the Mount of Venus.
+
+Logic is the middle phalange, and Will is the top or nail portion.
+
+When these divisions are found large, the qualities are increased; when
+small, they play a smaller r�le in the life of the individual.
+
+There are two distinct classes of Thumbs, the supple-jointed and the
+firm-jointed.
+
+The former of these divisions is the Thumb bending outwards and supple
+at the joint underneath the nail (Fig. 2, Plate III.).
+
+This denotes a nature pliable and adaptable to others, very broad-minded,
+rather unconventional, and not obstinate in its views of life. These
+characteristics will be increased if the Head Line be found sloping and
+bending downwards. If, however, the Line of Head be found lying straight
+across the palm, they are more conventional. The "supple-jointed" thumb
+also denotes generosity of mind both as regards thought and money. In all
+ways these people are more extravagant than people who have the straight
+firm-jointed thumb. In other words they "give more" even in what they
+think as well as in what they do.
+
+The nearer the Thumb approaches the side of the hand, or the more it
+looks tied down or cramped to the palm, the more the subject is inclined
+to grasp or hold. The true miser has always a thumb cramped towards the
+hand, and the nail phalange as a rule slightly turned in, as if the mind
+wanted to grab hold or retain.
+
+The supple-jointed Thumb is more impulsive in its desire to give than is
+the stiff-jointed class, whereas the latter type demands reflection
+before he even gives an opinion.
+
+If a favour should be asked of the man with the supple-jointed Thumb, one
+should remember that he is more inclined to give in on the impulse of the
+moment, and if one does not press one's point home at once, he is likely
+first to promise, and later, on reflection, change his mind.
+
+The man with the stiff-jointed Thumb (Fig. 3, Plate III.) on the
+contrary, is more likely to refuse at first and on reflection to agree to
+the proposition; but it he does make up his mind, he will stick to his
+judgment or opinion, and the more he is opposed the more determined he
+will be to hold to his view.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 1.--THE CLUBBED THUMB.
+
+FIG. 2.--THE SUPPLE-JOINTED THUMB.
+
+FIG. 3.--THE FIRM-JOINTED THUMB.
+
+FIG. 4.--THE WAIST-LIKE THUMB.
+
+FIG. 5.--THE STRAIGHT THUMB.
+
+FIG. 6.--THE ELEMENTARY THUMB.
+
+PLATE III.--PART II.]
+
+The firm-jointed thumb is then the outward sign of a more resisting
+nature, and the longer the first or nail phalange is, the stronger and
+more powerful the Will force.
+
+These people seldom make friends so easily or rapidly as those belonging
+to the other type. On a railway journey they rarely begin a conversation
+with a fellow traveller, and if they have to do so it will generally be
+in the form of an argument that "the window must be left open or shut,"
+as the case may be. Heaven help the other poor traveller if he should
+also happen to have a stiff thumb, and oppose his ideas to those of the
+first.
+
+The supple-jointed class, on the contrary, enter readily into
+conversation with strangers, and they often make their greatest friends
+while travelling. They are affable, charming companions, and give in
+readily to the wishes of others. In fact, this quality inclines to a
+weakness that should be guarded against. Among all those men and women
+who take the "easiest way" a large majority will be found to have very
+supple-jointed thumbs. This, however, will be greatly qualified by the
+position and appearance of the Line of Head, the indicator of the
+developed mental Will.
+
+To have a supple lower or middle joint does not relate to the Will but to
+the phalange of Logic of the possessor. When this second joint is found
+supple the subject adapts himself to circumstances rather than to
+persons. He reasons out that he must bend or adapt himself to the
+conditions or circumstances of the life in which he is placed.
+
+The Clubbed Thumb (Fig. 1, Plate III.), is so called from its being thick
+like a club. People possessing this class of Thumb belong to the
+Elementary type as far as Will is concerned. They are brutal and like
+animals in their unreasonable obstinacy. If they are opposed they fly
+into ungovernable passions and blind rages. They have no control over
+themselves, and are liable to go to any extreme of violence or crime
+during one of their tempers. In fact the clubbed-shaped Thumb has also
+been designated "the murderer's thumb" on account of so many murderers
+having been found with this formation.
+
+The possessor of a Clubbed Thumb could not, however, plan out or
+premeditate a crime, for he would not have the determined Will or power
+of reason to think it out.
+
+The shorter the Thumb, the nearer the possessor is to the brute in
+passion and lack of self-control.
+
+The "waist-like" Thumb (Fig. 4, Plate III.), and the "straight" formation
+(Fig. 5), must also be considered as the opposite of one another in their
+characteristics, but in this case the difference is in the quality of
+Logic or Reason. The former will not use or depend much on such things,
+he will rely, on the contrary, on tact and diplomacy to gain his point or
+win his way. The second class have little or no tact, but in all matters
+depend on argument and reason.
+
+The third phalange of the Thumb, which is placed under the designation of
+Love (Plate VI., Part II.), when found long, denotes more control over
+the quality of Love or Sensuality; when short and thick-set, the passion
+or sensual nature is more brutal and animal.
+
+The space at my disposal in this work will not allow me to go deeper
+into all the shades of character that can be made out by a study of the
+Thumb alone, but I think I have said enough to show my readers the great
+truth in D'Arpentigny's words that "the Thumb individualises the man."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+
+THE FINGERS--LENGTH TO ONE ANOTHER
+
+
+THE SMOOTH AND THE KNOTTY
+
+The First Finger is called the Finger of Jupiter.
+
+The Second is called the Finger of Saturn.
+
+The Third is called the Finger of The Sun.
+
+The Fourth is called the Finger of Mercury.
+
+The Finger of Jupiter, when long, gives love of power and command over
+others. When short it denotes dislike of responsibility and lack of
+ambition.
+
+The Finger of Saturn when long gives prudence, love of solitude and a
+reserved, studious disposition. When short it denotes frivolity and
+general lack of seriousness in all things.
+
+The Finger of the Sun when long gives love of the beautiful, desire for
+celebrity and fame, but when excessively long, the tendency inclines more
+toward notoriety, risk in speculation, the love of money and gambling.
+When short it denotes a dislike of all these things.
+
+The Finger of Mercury when long gives mental power, grasp of languages,
+and power of expression, especially in speech. When short it denotes
+difficulty in speaking, and in the expression of thoughts. When crooked,
+with an irregular Head Line, it is an evil sign of the Mentality.
+
+The fingers should be long in proportion to the palm; they then denote
+greater intellectuality and mental power. When short and stubby looking,
+the subject is inclined to animalism and gross materialism.
+
+When the fingers lean towards one another, they take after the qualities
+expressed by the finger towards which they lean.
+
+[Illustration: _THE SQUARE WITH SMOOTH JOINTS_
+
+_THE POINTED_
+
+_THE KNOTTY_
+
+PLATE IV.--PART II.
+
+DIFFERENT SHAPES OF FINGERS.]
+
+A wide space between the thumb and first finger denotes independence of
+will and fearlessness.
+
+When wide between the first and second fingers, independence of thought;
+between the second and third fingers, independence of circumstances; and
+wide between the third and fourth fingers, independence of action.
+
+When the fingers are found loose and inclined to curve backwards, the
+subject is "open-minded" and quick to grasp ideas or suggestions. They
+will not, however, have the more methodical stick-at-it quality of those
+whose fingers are found firm and stiff.
+
+When the fingers are curved inwards, the subject is slower to grasp new
+ideas, very cautious, and inclined to hold on to what he knows or what he
+has.
+
+Smooth-jointed fingers are more impulsive than those with "knotty
+joints". The "knotty joints" arrest the impetuousness of the disposition
+and give reflection, love of detail in all their work and are more
+frequently found in the hands of all great organisers and those who
+require thought and reflection in carrying out their plans.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+
+THE NAILS OF THE HAND
+
+A study of the Nails of the Hand is a remarkably accurate guide to many
+diseases. This part of Palmistry is now recognised by the majority of
+medical men, who seldom fail quietly to observe the appearance of the
+nails on a patient's hand.
+
+They are peculiarly indicative of hereditary diseases, especially lungs,
+heart, nerves, and spine.
+
+They are divided into four very distinct classes. Long, Short, Broad, and
+Narrow.
+
+
+LONG NAILS
+
+When the Nails are found very long, the general constitution never
+appears to be so strong as when they are medium in size.
+
+Persons with long Nails are more liable to all diseases of the Lungs and
+Chest (Plate V., Part II.), and still more so when these long Nails are
+seen ribbed or fluted, with the ribs running upward from the base to the
+edge of the nail.
+
+The same type of Nail, but shorter in appearance, indicates that the
+delicacy lies higher up towards the throat, and denotes tendencies for
+laryngitis, inflammation of the throat, and all bronchial troubles.
+
+When especially long Nails are bluish in colour, they denote a still more
+delicate constitution, coupled with poor circulation of the blood.
+
+[Illustration: SHORT SQUARE NAILS. WEAK ACTION OF THE HEART.
+
+SHELL-SHAPED NAILS. STRONG TENDENCY TOWARDS PARALYSIS.
+
+DELICACY OF THROAT.
+
+CHEST DELICATE AND BRONCHIAL.
+
+LUNGS DELICATE.
+
+SPINAL WEAKNESS.
+
+SPINAL WEAKNESS.
+
+PLATE V.--PART II.]
+
+
+SHORT NAILS
+
+Nails short in appearance denote a tendency towards weak action of the
+heart, more especially so when the "moons" are very small or barely
+noticeable. When the Nails appear very flat and sunk into the flesh at
+the base they denote nerve diseases. When they are "ribbed" across the
+Nail from side to side, the danger is still more apparent.
+
+When a deep furrow is found across the Nail, it is a sign in any hand
+that an unusual call has recently been made on the nervous system by
+illness. If the following rule be studied, the date of this illness or
+strain can be very clearly indicated.
+
+As it takes about nine months for a nail to grow out from the base to the
+outer edge, the nail can easily be divided into sections. When the furrow
+or very deep "rib" is seen close to the edge, the illness took place
+about nine months ago; when the furrow is seen about the centre, the date
+was about from four to five months, and when at the base, about one month
+previously.
+
+White spots on the Nails are a sign of general delicacy, and when the
+Nail is seen covered with small white flecks, the whole nervous system is
+in a low state of health.
+
+
+LONG NARROW NAILS
+
+Very narrow Nails (Plate V., Part II.), show spinal weakness, and when
+extremely curved and very thin they indicate curvature of the spine and
+great delicacy of the constitution.
+
+
+FLAT NAILS
+
+When the Nails appear very flat and inclined to lift themselves up from
+the flesh towards their outer edge, the threatened danger is towards
+paralysis, and still more so when they look like a shell and are pointed
+towards the base (Plate V., Part II.). When these Nails are without any
+signs of moons, and whitish or bluish in colour, the disease is in a very
+advanced stage.
+
+
+THE MOONS OF THE NAILS
+
+Large "Moons" always denote strong action of the heart and rapid
+circulation of the blood, but when unusually large they indicate too much
+pressure on the heart, rapidity in its beat, the valves over-strained and
+danger of bursting some blood vessel in the heart or in the brain.
+
+Small "Moons" indicate the reverse of this; they always denote poor
+circulation, weak action of the heart and an�mia of the brain.
+
+When close to death the "Moons" are the first to take on a bluish look,
+and later on the entire Nail becomes blue or almost black in colour.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+
+THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND AND THEIR MEANING
+
+The Mounts of the Hand (Plate VI., Part II.) vary in the most remarkable
+manner in accordance with the character and dispositions of races and
+their different temperaments.
+
+In almost all the Southern and more emotional races, these Mounts are
+more noticeable than those belonging to Northern countries. It has been
+observed that all people with the Mounts apparent or prominent are more
+swayed by their feelings and emotions than those people who have flat
+palms and undeveloped Mounts.
+
+The names given to the Mounts of the Hand are those also given to the
+seven principal planets that sway the destiny of our earth, viz., the
+Sun, Moon, Venus, Mercury, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.
+
+These names were given to the Mounts by the Greek students of this
+subject, and were associated by them with the qualities attributed to
+these seven planets, such as:
+
+  Venus   = Love, sensuality and passion.
+  Mars    = Vitality, courage, fighting, etc.
+  Mercury = Mentality, commerce, science.
+  Moon    = Imagination, romance, changeability.
+  Sun     = Brilliancy, fruitfulness, success.
+  Jupiter = Ambition, power, domination.
+  Saturn  = Reserve, melancholy, seriousness.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VI.--PART II.
+
+THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND]
+
+In my own long experience I could not help but remark the intimate
+relation between the effect of these great planets of our Universe and
+humanity in general. Although it would not be within the scope of this
+work to teach also Astrology in these pages, I must, however, in order to
+help all earnest students and readers of this book, put before them the
+following curious evidence of the influence of the planets on our lives.
+This is also demonstrated by the position and shape of the Mounts on the
+Hand, and, as far as I know, has never been published in any book dealing
+with Palmistry before.
+
+In the accompanying pages it will be noticed that I have for the first
+time dealt with these Mounts as Positive and Negative. The following
+explanation of my reason for doing this should be of the greatest
+assistance to my readers, and will also be useful in showing the close
+relationship between the two sciences Astrology and Palmistry.
+
+There are, it is well-known, in the Zodiac which surrounds our earth,
+what are called "the twelve Houses" of the seven principal planets of our
+Solar System.
+
+The Zodiac itself is described both by Astronomers and Astrologers as a
+pathway in the Universe, about sixteen degrees broad, in which the
+planets travel. It is divided into twelve Signs or Houses of thirty
+degrees each, and our Sun enters a new sign on an average of every thirty
+days. At the end of twelve months it has completed the zodiacal circle of
+360 degrees, or one Solar year.
+
+The Sun, the creator of life, and itself the greatest mystery of our
+Universe, is in bulk 330,000 times larger than our earth. It therefore
+follows that in entering a new sign of the Zodiac, it changes the
+magnetic vibrations of the effect of each sign towards our earth.
+Consequently it is reasonable to presume that a person born, say in
+April, and another in May, would have very different characteristics and
+naturally a distinct destiny, because character is Fate or Destiny.
+
+My readers will now easily follow me when I state that, especially as
+regards health and disease, the following tables concerning the Mounts of
+the Hand, taken in conjunction with the date of birth, will enable them,
+when reading the hand, to tell many things with an accuracy that will be
+most convincing both to themselves and to their hearers.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MARS
+
+This Mount has two positions on the palm (Plate VI., Part II.); the first
+is to be found immediately under the upper part of the Line of Life, and
+the other opposite to it in the space lying between the Line of Heart and
+the Line of Head. The first relates to the physical characteristics and
+the second to the mental.
+
+The first if large is Positive, and it has more importance when the
+person is born between the dates of March 21st and April 21st, and in a
+minor way until April 28th, which portion of the year in the Zodiac is
+called the House of Mars (Positive).
+
+The second is considered Negative, and it has more importance when the
+person is born between October 21st and November 21st, and in a minor way
+until November 28th, because in the Zodiac this portion of the year is
+denoted as the House of Mars (Negative).
+
+We will now consider the difference of these two positions, how
+distinctly they affect the mind and temperament, and also their relation
+as to health and tendency towards disease.
+
+
+THE FIRST MOUNT OF MARS
+
+In the first Mount of Mars, at the commencement of the Line of Life, and
+especially when the subject is born in the House of Mars (March 21st to
+April 21st, and in a minor way until the 28th), he possesses a strong
+martial nature which will make its tendencies manifest in all actions of
+the life, whether the man be a business man, a soldier, or a leader of
+men in any line whatever.
+
+These subjects are born fighters in every sense of the word. They brook
+little or no control in all their affairs; they aspire to be leaders in
+whatever career they undertake, and with even average intelligence they
+generally become heads of business houses or organisations and take on
+large responsibilities.
+
+They have great obstinacy of purpose and determination, they resent all
+criticism, they are decided and dogmatic in all their views, and seldom
+ask the advice of others, until it is too late to alter their purpose for
+good or evil.
+
+They must do everything their own way, and as they always believe their
+way is the only right one they resent the slightest interference from
+others, and will even turn on their best friend who may attempt to
+dissuade them from their plans or purpose.
+
+They can only be handled or managed by kindness, patience, tact, or by
+their affections.
+
+The slightest attempt to fight or coerce them will bring them up "in
+arms" in a moment. The temper is hasty and explosive, but at the same
+time quickly over, and when the storm subsides they bitterly regret the
+outburst of passion and the cruel things they may have said in the heat
+of the moment.
+
+As a rule these people are good-natured and generous, but spasmodic and
+impulsive in all their actions. Their greatest fault lies in their
+impulsiveness and lack of self-control, and unless a good Line of Head be
+shown on the hands, they rush madly into all kinds of difficulties and
+dangers and often make a complete muddle of their opportunities and the
+magnificent powers of leadership that they nearly all possess.
+
+These people as a rule are unhappy in their love affairs or domestic
+life. They rarely meet women who understand them, and if they are lucky
+enough to escape opposition from their wives, they usually meet with it
+in their children.
+
+In health they are prone to fevers and blood diseases, especially in
+their early life. In youth they are also very liable to fits, epilepsy,
+severe headaches, often water on the brain, and suffer greatly with their
+teeth.
+
+In old age they have a grave liability towards apoplexy, vertigo, pains
+in the head and softening of the brain, and especially so if on their
+hands the Line of Head looks frayed, or made up of little pieces like a
+chain.
+
+Such people should be advised to cultivate repose self-control, and above
+all to avoid wines, spirits, and stimulants of all kinds, to which as a
+rule these natures are very much inclined.
+
+They should endeavour to sleep more than any other class, to take more
+recreation and exercise in the open air, and above all things to curb
+their pride and control their temper.
+
+The higher types of these subjects and those among them who practise
+self-restraint, can rise to almost any height in life and do great
+things for the benefit of their fellow men.
+
+
+THE SECOND MOUNT OF MARS
+
+The second Mount of Mars, lying between the Heart and Head Line (Plate
+VI., Part II.), is more important when the subject is born between the
+dates of 21st October and the 21st November and until November 28th. In
+the Zodiac this period of the year is called the House of Mars Negative
+or Mental.
+
+In character they are the complete opposite of the former type, all the
+Mars qualities being in the mind and in the mental attitude towards
+people and things.
+
+The latter type are mentally very courageous, and possess _moral courage_
+more than physical. They hate to have scenes, or to be mixed up with
+physical violence or bloodshed.
+
+They love to fight mentally, however, and in debates or arguments they
+also fight to the finish. They are more quietly determined than the
+former class of Mars subjects. They are even more obstinate in their
+views, but conceal their opinions, and often pass for assenting parties
+when in reality they are but waiting for the right opportunity to strike
+their "mental blow" and confuse their opponent.
+
+These people make better organisers than leaders, and their mental
+martial spirit often finds a splendid field for their talents as the
+brain behind an army. In plans, tactics and strategy, in carefully
+thought-out stores of ammunitions, provisions, or in financial schemes
+that may bring ruin or discomfiture on a more warlike enemy.
+
+When not highly cultivated or developed, they employ cunning and craft
+of every description to carry out their plans. They will stop at nothing
+to carry out their purpose. They can be the most treacherous and deadly
+enemies of all, and poison in opposition to the sword is one of the chief
+weapons they most readily employ.
+
+All these Mars Negative people have a mysterious power of magnetism,
+which they seem almost unconsciously to use in their dealings with
+others. They make natural hypnotists and thought-readers, and have strong
+leanings towards occultism and secret societies of all kinds. When on a
+highly developed plane, they use these wonderful qualities for the good
+of others, especially if they take up the study of medicine or science,
+for which work they seem usually well suited.
+
+Mars Negative people are generally so versatile and many-sided that they
+are the most difficult of all to place in some special career. If a good
+Line of Head be found on the hand, then there is nothing in the world of
+mental endeavour in which they will not make a success. It is a curious
+fact that these people seldom carry out what they were first trained for,
+and in fact in the course of their lives they are likely to change their
+profession or vocation as many times as the proverbial cat has lives.
+
+The worst fault of this type is that they are rather too adaptable to
+their surroundings and to the people with whom they come in contact. If
+they are thrown with evil-minded persons they are inclined to adapt
+themselves to their companions and even attempt to "go one better," but
+if in contact with good influences they just as rapidly develop the best
+that is in them.
+
+Their period of the Zodiac has from time immemorial been symbolised in
+their lower development as the figure of a scorpion wounding its own
+tail, and in their higher development that of an eagle with its head
+pointing upwards to the sky.
+
+Such symbols perfectly illustrate the dual nature of the type under
+consideration. In their lower aspect no type can be more vicious or
+harmful, even to wounding themselves and bringing about their own
+destruction. In their higher form, however, there is probably no class
+whose spiritual nature can, like the eagle, soar to such heights or be so
+free from earthly ties.
+
+Mars Negative people, especially when young, should above all things be
+carefully brought up with good companions. They should be especially
+warned to control their sex nature and be kept aloof from all perverse
+persons and evil books.
+
+As regards health, this type is usually inclined to be both slight and
+delicate in their early years, but generally incline towards corpulency
+after passing middle life. Both the men and women have a likelihood of
+weakness or illness in the sex organs, especially in youth, also in the
+kidneys and the bladder, while in advanced years the stomach and
+digestive organs become disordered. All through their lives they should
+be most careful and abstemious in their diet.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF JUPITER AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of Jupiter is found at the base of the first finger (Plate VI.,
+Part II.). When large, it shows desire to dominate, to rule and command
+others, to lead and organise, and to carry out some distinct object. But
+these good qualities will only be employed if the Line of Head is clear
+and long. When this line is poor and badly formed, then a large Mount of
+Jupiter gives pride, excess of vanity, a self-confident and a
+self-opinionated person. But on what is known as a good well-marked hand,
+there is no Mount more excellent and no surer indication of success from
+sheer strength of character and purpose.
+
+This Mount may be considered Positive when a person is found born between
+November 21st and December 20th, and in a minor way until the 28th. These
+persons are naturally ambitious, fearless and determined in all they
+undertake, but in acting on their impulses, they generally "hit too
+straight from the shoulder," or show their ambition too plainly, and so
+arouse antagonism, opposition, and enmity.
+
+They concentrate all their attention on whatever they may be doing at the
+moment and see no way but their own, especially if they feel the least
+opposition to their plans. They are, however, honourable and high
+principled in almost all they undertake and respond to any trust or
+confidence placed in them.
+
+They are usually extremely truthful and bitterly resent any attempt at
+deception, and do not hesitate to unmask any effort to deceive others,
+even when such an action on their part may ruin their own plans.
+
+They have great enterprise in business and all matters requiring
+organisation, and easily become the heads of businesses, or hold
+responsible positions in government offices or under the government. They
+rarely become politicians, for the simple reason that they cannot bear to
+bend to any party plans or schemes.
+
+They are perhaps the most independent of all types in choosing their own
+careers. Because their father may have happened to be a clergyman will be
+no reason for them to follow his example or even hold the same views on
+religion.
+
+It is for this reason that in early life such subjects are a cause of
+worry and anxiety to their parents; but they should always be allowed to
+choose their own career and even change it a dozen times if they wish,
+until at last they find their true vocation.
+
+The great fault of this class is that they are inclined to go to extremes
+in all things, and in doing so exhaust their efforts, and then change and
+fly off in another direction. But in all cases where the Line of Head is
+well-marked, especially when lying straight across the palm, there is no
+height in position or responsibility that they may not reach.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These subjects are more inclined to suffer with rheumatism and acid
+complaints than from any other form of disease, also inflammation of the
+tongue and throat, boils, carbuncles, eczema, and all skin troubles.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF JUPITER (NEGATIVE)
+
+The Mount of Jupiter may be considered negative or mental when the
+subject is born between the dates of February 19th and March 20th, and in
+a slighter degree until the 28th.
+
+In this case the ambition takes rather the mental form than what might be
+termed material. Brain work and brain development is more their
+speciality than other forms of effort.
+
+They seem to possess a kind of natural understanding of things and easily
+acquire all sorts of knowledge about a large variety of things,
+especially the history of countries, races, peoples, geographical,
+botanical, and geological researches.
+
+In spite of this mental ambition, these people are usually so very
+sensitive and so lacking in self-confidence that they find the greatest
+difficulty in carrying out their plans and making people believe in their
+projects. For this reason they appear to shrink from coming before the
+public, and have to stand aside and see others getting the credit for
+what really was their plan.
+
+A great number of literary people, composers and artists are born in this
+period and exhibit all the qualities that it represents. It is again a
+strong clear Line of Head which, if found on the hand, will determine
+whether the mental will power is sufficient to make this type overcome
+its natural sensitiveness and use the great qualities they have to carry
+out their aims and ambitions.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+People born in this period suffer largely from despondency, insomnia, and
+a feeling of martyrdom. Like the Positive type of the same Mount, they
+are also much inclined towards rheumatism and disorders brought on
+through the blood.
+
+They also suffer from internal chills, liver, and very often jaundice.
+Climate has the greatest possible effect upon their health, so they
+should endeavour to live in a bright, dry atmosphere and have plenty of
+air and exercise, and variety of change and travel.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF SATURN AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of Saturn is found at the base of the second finger (_see_
+Plate VI., Part II.). Its chief characteristics are love of solitude,
+prudence, quiet determination, the study of serious sombre things, the
+belief in fatalism and in the ultimate destiny of all things.
+
+A complete absence of this Mount indicates a more or less frivolous way
+of looking at life, while an exaggeration of it denotes an exaggeration
+of all the qualities it represents.
+
+The Mount of Saturn may be considered Positive when the subject is found
+to be born between the following dates, December 21st and January 20th,
+and during the subsequent seven days while this period is fading out and
+being overlapped by the period following.
+
+People born in these dates have strong will force and mentality, but they
+usually feel exceptionally lonely and isolated in going through life.
+
+They are very much children of fate and circumstances, over which they
+appear to have no control, and seem to make or mar their careers
+independently of their strong will.
+
+In character they are usually remarkable for their independence of
+thought and action, they also detest being under the restraint of others.
+
+For kindness and sympathy they will do almost anything, but they usually
+feel so isolated that they scarcely believe in the affections that may be
+offered.
+
+They have strange ideas of love and duty, and for this reason they are
+usually called somewhat peculiar by those few who attempt to penetrate
+their isolation.
+
+They have a deeply devotional nature, even when appearing not to be
+religious, and they make every effort to do good, especially to the
+masses, even when there may be no likelihood of their getting recognition
+or reward for their efforts.
+
+Such people as a rule feel the responsibilities of life too heavily and
+in consequence often become despondent and gloomy or retire into their
+own shell.
+
+If at all inclined to be very religious, they generally go to extremes
+and become fanatical in any Church they may adopt.
+
+Mysticism and occultism of all kinds appeal very strongly to their inner
+nature, but here again they are also inclined to go to extremes.
+
+They almost worship clever, intellectual people, and are deep thinkers in
+all matters that interest them, but they cannot brook interference in
+their views from others.
+
+They are often found holding positions of great responsibility, but in
+all matters fatalism seems to play a strange r�le in their life. They
+seem chosen to be the instrument or mouthpiece of Destiny, often hurling
+thousands to destruction in what they believe is their duty. If called
+upon to make a sacrifice of their own flesh and kin they will be the
+first to plunge the knife into the heart of their dearest.
+
+Nearly all people born in this period are strange, strong characters,
+equally feared, loved, and hated.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+The chief tendencies towards illness with persons born in this period are
+towards rheumatism, gout, pains and swellings in the feet and legs, also
+accidents to the feet, knees, and limbs, trouble with the liver and
+kidneys, ruptures, and disease of the teeth and ears.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF SATURN (NEGATIVE)
+
+The Mount of Saturn may be considered negative or mental when the person
+is found born between the dates of January 21st and February 18th, and
+also for the seven days following.
+
+These people are like the preceding type in almost all things, except
+that the same things appear to affect them more mentally than physically.
+
+They also feel lonely in life, but more mentally than the former
+type--they seem to feel less companionship in their ideas and thoughts,
+whereas the former feel it more in their lives and careers.
+
+These latter types are more sensitive and very easily wounded in their
+feelings.
+
+They read character instinctively and seem to "see through" people too
+easily to be really happy. They bitterly resent being taken in or
+deceived, and when they think they have been, they astonish people by the
+bitterness of their resentment.
+
+They make loyal, true friends, if their feelings are once aroused, and
+they will undergo any sacrifice for the sake of a friend, but they will
+stop at nothing to avenge an injury if they think they have been
+deceived.
+
+They are usually very active for the public good, and they give a good
+deal of their time and money to doing good, but in their own way. Like
+the positive type of Saturn they have very decided views of their own
+about religion and especially the regular observances and ceremonials of
+Church life.
+
+They are very different from the previous type in that they usually take
+a keen interest in public meetings and large gatherings of people. They
+love theatres, concerts, and places of amusement, and yet always if they
+told the truth, they feel alone in life.
+
+They have a quiet controlling power with their eyes, and although highly
+nervous people themselves, yet they have the greatest control over
+excitable and nervous patients and also over the insane. It is a strange
+fact that in the run of their careers they seem fated to be brought into
+contact with such cases.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These people suffer most from the nerves of the stomach and the digestive
+organs, and ordinary remedies seem to fail entirely to relieve them.
+
+They have as a rule poor circulation of the blood, cold feet and hands,
+very delicate teeth, and suffer much from accidents and hurts to the
+feet, ankles and limbs.
+
+They seldom feel strong in health and yet they have enormous power of
+resistance, and when a call is made on their will power, they usually
+astonish every one by what they can stand, especially if they in any way
+think that their duty or principles are involved or at stake.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF THE SUN AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of the Sun is found under the base of the third finger. To this
+Mount the Greeks also gave the name of Mount of Apollo (Plate VI., Part
+II.).
+
+When large or well developed it indicates glory, publicity, a desire to
+shine before one's fellows. It is always considered a good Mount to have
+large.
+
+It also indicates enthusiasm for the beautiful in all things, whether one
+follows an artistic calling or not. People with this Mount large, even if
+they have success in practical life, build beautiful houses or have
+artistic surroundings of some sort. They also have an expansive
+temperament, are generous and luxurious in all their tastes. They are
+bright and sunny by nature and have a forceful, happy, lucky personality.
+
+This Mount may be considered Positive when the subject is found to be
+born between the dates of July 21st and August 20th, and generally until
+the 28th of this month, which portion of the Zodiac is called the "House
+of the Sun."
+
+These people represent what may be called the heart force of the human
+race, and as a rule are generous and sympathetic even to an extreme.
+
+They have great force of character and personality, and even when
+constrained by circumstances to exist in the lower walks of life, they
+play, even there, a r�le distinct from their fellows, and their
+clean-cut, well-marked personality is sure to make itself manifest.
+
+At heart they are really most sympathetic, though they often seem to hide
+this quality on account of their strong sense of trying to force people
+to do what is right towards others.
+
+They have no mercy for "weaklings" or evaders of the truth, and in brutal
+frankness they will even denounce their own children should they find
+them falling into evil ways.
+
+They display the greatest loyalty if any friend of theirs is attacked,
+especially if in an underhand way. They love intensely and they hate
+intensely. Theirs is no middle path, for they must be either at one
+extreme or the other.
+
+Although truthful and naturally honest they often get terribly deceived,
+and the danger is with such people that towards the sunset of their
+lives, the glorious Sun that has shone, as it were, through them gets
+darkened by the deceit and treachery of others and sets in clouds, or
+gets hidden before the ending of life's pathway comes to view.
+
+Many of these people who have cheered others, who have brought their
+grand sunshine of good into the hearts of others, cannot cheer themselves
+when the twilight comes, and so they often fall victims to gloom and
+melancholy, and many commit suicide.
+
+Among other marked characteristics these people are extremely proud and
+would sooner die than ask favours from others. They are extremely easily
+wounded through their pride and are unusually sensitive.
+
+Impetuous and hot-tempered, they make many enemies, and when engaged in
+public life, which they are usually well fitted for, they often find
+themselves bitterly attacked in the most unscrupulous manner.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+Those born in the dates I have given, or who have the Mount of the Sun
+large, are most inclined to suffer with pains, palpitations, and trouble
+of the heart, head, and ears; with inflammation of the eyes, kidneys, and
+swellings and injuries to the feet.
+
+
+MOUNT OF THE SUN (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is found born
+between January 21st and February 18th, and for the seven days following.
+
+In this case they are far more successful when managing for others than
+for themselves.
+
+They are usually found most active in their plans towards the relief of
+all distress and for what they believe to be the public good.
+
+They are also often as a class found in governmental positions, or as
+leaders of some party or section of public opinion. Usually they take the
+part of the "under dog," and cause themselves to be greatly abused and
+disliked by the richer and more powerful classes.
+
+They seldom attract wealth as do those of the Positive type, who are
+usually lucky in money, and when they do they are inclined to impoverish
+themselves in their efforts to help those around them, or in the
+execution of their philanthropic plans for the good of the poorer
+classes.
+
+In strange apparent contradiction to this, these people are usually
+excellent in business and in their financial plans, but again it is more
+for others than for themselves. Many of them make fortunes for others and
+keep the merest pittance for their own homes.
+
+As a rule, they find great pleasure in public ceremonies, and meetings of
+all kinds. They love theatres and all places where large numbers of
+people congregate, and when wound up to the occasion they can display
+great eloquence, power of argument, and influence in debates. They rarely
+hold the positions they win for the run of their careers, they seem to
+play the r�le of the moment, and when that is passed they just as quickly
+retire into obscurity or into a quiet private life, and often end their
+days in the most unusual or unheard-of places.
+
+Quite the reverse of the Positive type, these people seldom if ever
+commit suicide; on the contrary, they can endure any kind of martyrdom or
+suffering. They are buoyed up with the feeling they have done their duty
+to their fellow beings, and this feeling seems to sustain them against
+all disappointments, or losses or attacks on their name.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These children of the Negative period of the Sun suffer mostly with the
+stomach and internal organs, also with poor circulation of blood, loss of
+natural heat, and with liver and kidney complaints.
+
+They are also prone to have accidents to their bones, especially to
+limbs, knees, and ankles.
+
+Very dry climates and plenty of sunlight is their greatest safeguard
+against all their maladies.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MERCURY AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of Mercury is found under the base of the fourth finger (Plate
+VI., Part II.). On a good hand it is a favourable Mount to have, but on a
+hand shewing evil tendencies, especially mental, it increases the bad
+indications.
+
+It seems to relate more to the mind than anything else. It gives
+quickness of brain, wit, thought, eloquence. It also relates to
+adaptability in science and commerce, but if evilly afflicted, it denotes
+mental excitability, nervousness, lack of concentration, trickiness in
+business, and everything that is unreliable in character.
+
+This Mount should always be considered with the kind of Line of Head
+found on the hand.
+
+With a Line of Head long and well marked, it increases all the promise of
+mental aptitude and success, but with a weak, badly marked, or irregular
+Head Line, it augments all its weak or bad indications.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (POSITIVE)
+
+This Mount can be considered positive when the subject is found to be
+born between the dates of May 21st and June 20th, and until the 27th of
+that month, but during the last seven days its influence is considered
+dying out and not so strong.
+
+People born in this period are represented in the Zodiac by the symbolism
+of the twins. It is a curious fact that all persons born in this part of
+the year are singularly dual in character and temperament. One side of
+their nature may, in fact, be described as perpetually pulling against
+the other, and although nearly always possessed with unusual
+intelligence, they often spoil their lives by lack of continuity in their
+plans and in their purpose.
+
+They seldom seem to have a fixed idea of what they really want. They
+change their plans or their occupations at a moment's notice, and unless
+they chance to be very happily married, they are just as uncertain in
+marriage.
+
+They are the most difficult of all classes to understand. In temperament
+they are hot and cold in the same moment, they may love passionately with
+one side of their nature and just as quickly dislike with the other.
+
+They are very critical, and especially notice small faults or mannerisms
+in others, and they can express their views with a sarcasm that is as
+cutting as it is clever.
+
+In all business dealings or affairs where a subtle, keen mentality is
+useful, they can out-distance all rivals, provided they are sufficiently
+interested to enter into the competition.
+
+They are excellent in diplomacy and are gifted talkers, but they usually
+leave their listeners at the end of their conversation no wiser than they
+were at the beginning.
+
+If taken as they are and with their moods, they are the most delightful
+people imaginable, but one must never expect them to be the same to-day
+that they were yesterday.
+
+They believe that they are the most truthful persons in the world, and so
+they may be at the moment they are telling the story, but to them moments
+seem entire lives, and so in a day or a week the same story may have a
+totally different colouring.
+
+None of these people will probably admit this to be true of his
+character, but a little study will convince anyone that it is a fairly
+accurate description of this subject's chief characteristics.
+
+Mental work, especially the class of mental work that requires quickness
+of wit and change, appeals to them more than any other. They make clever
+actors, barristers, and a certain class of public speakers, also
+diplomatists, stock brokers, company promoters, or inventors of new
+methods in business. In all careers that require keenness of brain, they
+can attain success, provided they have developed a sufficient amount of
+will power and continuity of purpose to stick long enough to any one
+thing.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+Everything that can affect the nerves and the nervous system especially,
+afflicts these people.
+
+Indigestion caused by nervous worry or anxiety, catalepsy, paralysis,
+afflictions of the tongue, stammering, insomnia, vivid dreams; to all
+such things they are specially liable. They are also inclined towards
+delicacy of the throat and bronchial tubes, and particularly to trouble
+with the nose and eyes.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount may be considered negative when the persons are born between
+August 21st and September 20th, and until the 27th, but these last seven
+days of this period are not so marked, but take more from the
+characteristics of the incoming sign.
+
+People belonging to this negative type of the Mount of Mercury have all
+the good points of the positive class, and even some added in their
+favour. For example, they stick longer and with more continuity to
+whatever study or career they adopt. They have hardly the quickness or
+the brilliancy of the first type, but they have a more solid, plodding
+course of action, and as a general rule they make more out of their
+lives.
+
+They are also more materialistic and practical in their views of life,
+but they analyse and reason everything from their own way of thinking
+outwards towards others. If they see a thing is right, it is right to
+them, and for this reason they are often found doing exactly the opposite
+from what one would expect.
+
+Women born in this period are especially curious puzzles. They are either
+extremely virtuous or the direct opposite, either extremely truthful and
+conventional or the reverse; but whether good or bad, they are all a law
+unto themselves, and in all things they usually think of themselves
+first.
+
+People born in this period often abandon their husbands or their children
+just because they think they ought to do so. They also are liable to
+change their religious views half way through life, or from the most
+conventional suddenly become the reverse. In the same way women who have
+commenced their career by leading unconventional lives, may just as
+suddenly become religious and enter some extremely severe order or
+community.
+
+Again, as in the positive type, it is the Line of Head that must be
+carefully considered if one should endeavour to form an estimate of what
+they will eventually become.
+
+If it be clear and straight, their best qualities will, as a rule, come
+to their rescue; but if weak or poorly marked, it is more than likely,
+especially with this class, that the evil side of the nature will in the
+end predominate.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These people are more open to mental suggestion as far as health is
+concerned than any other class.
+
+If they think they are ill it is quite sufficient that they are so, and
+they can become cured in exactly the same manner.
+
+In reality they have excellent constitutions, except when they are ruined
+by taking drugs and medicines.
+
+As they always imagine that they have something the matter, they are
+invariably the willing prey of quack doctors and every new cure that is
+advertised.
+
+They can hardly pass a chemist's shop without buying something, and if
+they sit next to a doctor at a dinner table, they are certain to walk off
+with some prescription.
+
+Their greatest fault is that they will persist in talking to everyone of
+their supposed ailments or afflictions, for the slightest ache, pain, or
+anything that concerns them, has the most exaggerated importance in their
+mind.
+
+On the contrary, Nature can do more for these people than for any other
+class of humanity. Peace of mind, a country life, and plenty of fresh air
+will banish all their ills and ailments into oblivion.
+
+But, if badly mated, or living in unhappy surroundings, their health
+quickly breaks up, and if they cannot make a change into happier
+conditions, then no medicine in all the world can help them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF THE MOON AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of the Moon, or as it is also called the Mount of Luna, is
+found on the base of the hand under the end of the Line of Head (Plate
+VI., Part II.).
+
+This Mount relates to everything that has to do with the imaginative
+faculties, the emotional artistic temperament, romance, ideality, poetry,
+change of scenery, travel, and such like.
+
+This Mount may be considered positive when it looks high or
+well-developed, and also when the subject is found to be born between the
+dates of June 21st and July 20th, and until July 27th.
+
+People who belong to this positive class are gifted with strong
+imagination which tinges everything they do or say. They are intensely
+romantic, but idealistic in their desires, and have not that passionate
+or sensual nature that is given by the Mount of Venus on the opposite
+side of the palm.
+
+As a rule they have the inventive faculties well developed, and succeed
+in inventions and in all new ideas in whatever careers they may have
+entered.
+
+Even business people born in this period are remarkable for their
+originality, and the inventive manner in which they will tackle the most
+practical affair.
+
+They are, however, inclined to speculate or gamble even with their
+chances, also in stocks, business or, in fact, anything in which they are
+engaged.
+
+Although their imagination is large, they often achieve great success and
+make money in business. Some great financiers and heads of large
+organisations have been born in this period and have also had the Mount
+of Luna very highly developed on their hands.
+
+It has been said "that what one sees in one's dreams one shall gain in
+reality," but the fact remains that imaginative people have been found
+among the most successful of all classes. Imagination may be another name
+for Inspiration.
+
+People born in this period are seldom hide-bound by any rule of thumb or
+set convention. They love what is new in everything, and perhaps for this
+reason they love travel and change, and generally see the greater part of
+this planet before they voyage over the last river of all.
+
+Change in every way affects their careers as it also does their lives.
+Even the successful members of this period have more ups and downs than
+almost any other class.
+
+They rarely, however, give in to the blows of Fate. Their imagination
+probably helps them through, and they seldom remain down or down-hearted
+for long.
+
+Inventors, a large number of artists, musicians, and composers are found
+among people of this type, but almost without exception they have a love
+of mystic and occult things, and their dreams and visions are tangible
+and clear.
+
+These Children of the Moon owe much to the influence of their planet that
+they are even more magnetic and successful when the Moon appears in the
+heavens. Even their health appears to change and become better under her
+benign influence, and they should always be advised to commence their
+plans or operations when their planet is to be seen illuminating the
+skies.
+
+That the Moon plays an important r�le in the affairs of this earth cannot
+for a moment be doubted. Recent discoveries are every day revealing more
+and more that her strange magnetic influence has a power almost beyond
+belief in its effect upon the growth of vegetables, and even inanimate
+things.
+
+There are other thinkers besides those interested in occult subjects who
+have noticed the effect of this planet on mundane things. If the Moon can
+affect vegetables, eggs, and the growth of chickens, as it is proved to
+do, how much more easily and wonderfully it must affect the grey matter
+of the human brain, which is the most subtle and mysterious essence of
+all.
+
+People born in the period I have mentioned should be most careful of
+those with whom they associate, because they are extraordinarily
+sensitive to the magnetism of others.
+
+They should, if possible, avoid marrying early in life unless they are
+absolutely sure they have met their affinity. These natures both change
+and develop rapidly, and they have a strong tendency to "grow away" from
+those with whom they associate in early life. It is the same with
+partners in business; they should be as much as possible "on their own"
+or, if partnerships are made, they should not be of a binding or
+restricting order, and provision should always be made for the
+partnership to be dissolved when it has become irksome.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These Children of the Moon are chiefly inclined towards all watery
+ailments and inflammatory diseases. In early life they are prone towards
+having water on the brain, gastric and dysentery attacks, and later in
+life, inflammation of the lungs and chest, pleurisy, and dropsy.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF THE MOON (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount is considered negative when it appears very flat on the hand,
+and it may also be taken as negative when people are found to be born
+between the dates of January 21st and February 20th, and in a minor
+degree, until about February 27th.
+
+People born between these dates have good mental powers, but their
+imaginative faculties are seldom as much in evidence as is so strongly
+the case with the positive period.
+
+These persons, on the contrary, are good and quiet reasoners-out of
+problems and matters relating to the organisation of business, and are
+also excellent in all forms of government work. They make splendid heads
+of departments and rise to any responsibility very quickly and easily.
+
+They are high-minded and have very decided views on love, duty, and
+social life. They make great efforts to do good to others, but as a rule
+their best work is done towards helping the masses more than individuals.
+
+They are extremely kind-hearted and love to give a helping hand when they
+can, but at the same time they have an unfortunate knack of making many
+bitter enemies, and when holding government positions they are most
+bitterly attacked by the opposition press. Their work seldom receives
+its proper recognition and reward until they have passed from their
+sphere of influence, or have left this world of mistrust and ingratitude.
+
+They generally make excellent speakers, but more from "plain speaking,"
+in a particular way of their own.
+
+As a rule they espouse the unpopular cause and take the part of the under
+dog in the fight.
+
+They make devoted and loyal friends once their friendship is aroused, but
+at the same time they are extremely sensitive and easily wounded by those
+they care for.
+
+They are strongly inclined to be religious and generally bring their
+religious views into all they do. They are in danger of becoming too
+fanatical, and when opposed, they become extremely obstinate, dogmatic,
+and hard to manage.
+
+Heavy responsibility for others suits them best of all, especially if
+such responsibility lies in the form of government work, or in some
+position of management.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These people usually worry themselves into bad health. They overwork
+themselves and bring on nervous breakdowns, palpitation and weakness of
+the heart, and often paralysis. They suffer with the nerves of the
+stomach, acidity of the blood, rheumatism, liver complaints, and gout.
+They are particularly liable to meet with accidents to the feet, ankles,
+and limbs.
+
+They should be very guarded when travelling by water, for they seldom get
+through life without sooner or later experiencing grave danger of
+drowning.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF VENUS AND ITS MEANING
+
+The portion of the palm under the base of the Thumb and inside the Line
+of Life is called the Mount of Venus (Plate VI., Part II.).
+
+When well-formed and not too large, it denotes a desire for love and
+companionship, the desire to please, worship of beauty in every form, the
+artistic and emotional temperament, and it is usually very prominent in
+the hands of all artists, singers, and musicians.
+
+This Mount, the science of Physiology teaches, covers one of the most
+important blood vessels in the palm, viz., the "Great Palmer Arch." If
+this loop or arch is large, it indicates a plentiful supply of blood and
+strong active circulation; consequently, the health is more robust. It is
+found that persons possessing this Mount well developed, being in active
+strong health, are naturally more full of passion than those individuals
+in poor health, and who, in consequence, have this portion of the hand
+either flat or poorly developed. Hence, when this Mount is large it has
+been considered to show passion and larger sensuality than when flat,
+flabby, or non-developed.
+
+This Mount is therefore called Positive when high or large, and Negative
+when small or flat.
+
+With the rest of the hand normal, this Mount well shaped is an excellent
+sign to have, as it denotes magnetism and attraction of one sex to the
+other, but if found together with vicious or abnormal signs in the hand,
+it increases those tendencies.
+
+When considered with the birth date, as alluded to in the former
+chapters, it helps to throw considerable light on characteristics that
+might otherwise be overlooked.
+
+The student may consider it Positive when the subject is born between
+April 20th and May 20th, and in a minor way until May 27th, the chief
+characteristics of this period being as follows:
+
+These persons have a curious dominating power over others, and are found
+rather inclined to be too dogmatic in their opinions, and also often too
+unyielding and tyrannical. They are considered stiff-necked and
+obstinate, but the strange thing is that when they love they become the
+most abject slaves of all to the object of their devotion, and they will
+consider no sacrifice too great for that one being who holds or attracts
+their affection.
+
+They are hospitable and generous, and especially love to entertain their
+friends. They make wonderfully good hosts, have great taste about food,
+and love to give excellent dinners.
+
+They dress with great taste, and are generally considered richer than
+they really are, and they can make a good show on very little.
+
+They are impulsive in their likes and dislikes, rather too frank and
+outspoken, quick in temper, and when their blood is up they have no
+restraint on what they say.
+
+Their passion or temper is, however, quickly over, and when the storm is
+passed they are most regretful for the wounds their temper may have
+caused.
+
+These types are most easily influenced by their surroundings, and become
+morbid and depressed when they are forced to live in gloomy and
+uncongenial conditions.
+
+Neither the man nor woman born in this period should marry early, for
+their first attempt is usually a mistake. They are so independent in
+character that, especially if they marry early and find their mistake,
+they lead unconventional lives and get severely criticised in
+consequence.
+
+They are inclined to be very jealous when their affections are roused,
+especially if the peace of the home is in any way disturbed.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+People born in this period have usually short or round-shaped nails which
+indicate a tendency to suffer with complaints of the throat and nose.[8]
+They also suffer, as a rule, with pains in the head and ears, swellings
+in the neck, and have a tendency towards tumours, appendicitis, and other
+internal troubles, chiefly relating to the intestines.
+
+[8] _See_ Chapter on Nails, page 136.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF VENUS (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is born between
+the dates of September 21st and October 20th, and in a minor way until
+October 27th, and with people born in this period it is seldom found so
+prominent. The fact is, that the affections these subjects possess may
+be just as intense, but more mental than physical.
+
+Their love is spiritual rather than sensual, and they crave more for soul
+companionship than for that of the physical senses.
+
+Of course there are exceptions to all rules, but these exceptions can be
+easily seen by watching if the Mount of Venus is large with people born
+in this period.
+
+All mental characteristics rule, however, very strongly. Those born in
+this latter period have keen intuition and a mental balance of all things
+not given to the other class. They have presentiments and psychic
+experiences, dreams, clairvoyance, and such like, which they often spoil
+by their reasoning faculties, and they endeavour to answer all problems
+through the medium of their mind or mental faculties.
+
+In love they are nearly always unhappy. They cannot "let themselves go,"
+like the Positive Venus type. They hesitate and miss their opportunities
+whilst they think or reason, and so love goes by and often leaves them
+nothing but regret. They should be advised to act more on their first
+impressions and intuition, and take the opportunities that Fate throws in
+their way.
+
+They occupy themselves very much with all mental questions concerning
+their fellow beings. They are often found studying Law, but more with the
+desire of improving it for others than for their own personal advantage.
+
+They have a great desire for knowledge, and often spend their lives in
+studying abstruse subjects, but always weighing and balancing each point
+in the most conscientious manner. They make excellent doctors, judges,
+lawyers, but more as masters of some particular branch than that of
+gaining worldly advantage.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+The people born in this period are inclined to suffer from lack of
+physical strength, exhaustion of the nerves, depression of spirits,
+melancholia, intense feeling of loneliness, and such like. Also severe
+headaches, pains in the back, loins, and kidneys; just as in the case of
+those of the other period of this Venus sign they have a great tendency,
+especially the women, to suffer from internal ailments, and often undergo
+severe operations.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+
+ADVICE TO THE STUDENT. THE BEST MEANS TO MAKE CASTS OR TAKE IMPRESSIONS
+OF THE HANDS
+
+I would strongly advise students of this subject to make casts of hands
+in plaster of Paris, wax, or any other suitable material, in order to
+make a library or collection, both for their own private study, and also
+as a valuable record of their work.
+
+Before I read any hands professionally, I had some thousands of casts,
+impressions on paper, and photographs of hands in my possession, and I
+found that I derived the most valuable aid from being able to analyse and
+study their shapes and markings at my leisure.
+
+In making casts I would advise the very finest plaster of Paris to be
+used. When the plaster is worked up to the proper consistency, it is
+necessary to rub a fine oil into the hand before bringing it into contact
+with the plaster, as otherwise the hair may stick and so cause trouble
+and annoyance.
+
+Dental wax heated in hot water and made very soft is also an excellent
+material to make moulds from, especially as it does not make a mess, and
+is very little trouble to employ.
+
+The great disadvantage of making a collection of casts arises from the
+large space that such a collection will eventually occupy. To avoid this
+the student can also make a library of impressions of hands on paper, and
+keep them marked and numbered in a series of albums or scrap-books that
+may easily be obtained at any stationer's.
+
+The best means of taking these impressions is to obtain a small gelatine
+roller used by printers for fine work, such as die stamping, a tube of
+printer's ink, and a small sheet of glass to roll the ink out until it
+covers the surface of the roller in an even way.
+
+The roller may then be passed over the surface of the palm, the hand
+pressed firmly down on a smooth sheet of white paper, and with a little
+practice, most excellent impressions can easily be obtained.
+
+When the impression is dry it can be dated, numbered, and placed in an
+album for reference.
+
+In order to remove the black ink from the hand, powdered washing soap,
+well brushed into the hand with a nail brush, and a little hot water is
+all that will be found necessary.
+
+These impressions taken with printer's ink are far better than those
+taken by smoking a sheet of paper by camphor, or by a candle, or any
+other means.
+
+The best time for examining hands is during the day, first because the
+light is better and, above all, because the circulation of the blood does
+not redden the entire palm as it does at night, and the finer lines can
+consequently easily be detected.
+
+As I described earlier in these pages, the right and left hands should be
+examined together to note what difference there may be in the shape and
+position of the lines, but the markings on the right hand are the only
+ones to be relied on.
+
+Lastly, do not be for ever on the lookout for faults and failings in the
+subject whose hands you may be examining, remember no one is perfect, and
+that faults and failings may in the end be as stepping stones "by which
+we rise from our dead selves to higher things."
+
+
+  Transcriber's notes:
+    P(ix)  d'Arpentigny corrected to D'Arpentigny
+    P10    dveloped corrected to developed.
+    P76    forshadows corected to foreshadows
+    P63    Removed extraneous comma.
+    P130   Period added at the end of a paragraph.
+    P132   Added "is called the Finger of" instead of " to clarify.
+    P135   Period added before a capital The.
+    P142   decribed corrected to described.
+    P158   Extra opening parenthesis removed.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Palmistry for All, by Cheiro
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PALMISTRY FOR ALL ***
+
+***** This file should be named 20480-8.txt or 20480-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/4/8/20480/
+
+Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier, Christine D. and
+the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/20480-8.zip b/20480-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57b2ae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-8.zip
diff --git a/20480-h.zip b/20480-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ef09803
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h.zip
diff --git a/20480-h/20480-h.htm b/20480-h/20480-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e81bfc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/20480-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,5913 @@
+<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN"
+    "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd">
+
+<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml">
+  <head>
+    <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" />
+    <title>
+      The Project Gutenberg eBook of Palmistry for all, by Cheiro.
+    </title>
+    <style type="text/css">
+/*<![CDATA[  XML blockout */
+<!--
+    p {  margin-top: .75em;
+         text-align: justify;
+         margin-bottom: .75em;
+         }
+    h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {
+         text-align: center; /* all headings centered */
+         clear: both;
+         }
+    hr { width: 33%;
+	 margin-top: 2em;
+	 margin-bottom: 2em;
+         margin-left: auto;
+         margin-right: auto;
+         clear: both;
+       }
+
+    img   {border: 0}
+    table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;}
+
+    body{margin-left: 10%;
+         margin-right: 10%;
+        }
+
+    .pagenum  { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */
+            /*  visibility: hidden;  */
+                position: absolute;
+                left: 92%;
+                font-size: smaller;
+                text-align: right;
+              } /* page numbers */
+
+    .linenum  {position: absolute; top: auto; left: 4%;} /* poetry number */
+    .blockquot{margin-left: 5%; margin-right: 10%;}
+    .sidenote {width: 20%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em;
+               padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em; margin-left: 1em;
+               float: right; clear: right; margin-top: 1em;
+               font-size: smaller; color: black; background: #eeeeee; border: dashed 1px;}
+
+    .bb       {border-bottom: solid 2px;}
+    .bl       {border-left: solid 2px;}
+    .bt       {border-top: solid 2px;}
+    .br       {border-right: solid 2px;}
+    .bbox     {border: solid 2px; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em;
+               padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;}
+    .trnote   {background-color: #EEE; color: inherit; margin: 2em 5% 1em 5%; font-size: 80%;
+               padding: 0.5em 1em 0.5em 1em; border: dotted 1px gray;}
+    .padding  {padding-bottom: 2em; padding-top: 2em;}
+    .center   {text-align: center;}
+    .right    {text-align: right;}
+    .left     {text-align: left;}
+    .smcap    {font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .caption  {font-weight: bold; font-variant: small-caps;}
+
+    .figcenter   {margin: auto; text-align: center;}
+
+
+    ins.translit      {text-decoration: none;}
+    .footnotes        {border: dashed 1px;}
+    .footnote         {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;}
+    .footnote .label  {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;}
+    .fnanchor         {vertical-align: super; font-size: .8em; text-decoration: none;}
+    // -->
+    /* XML end  ]]>*/
+    </style>
+  </head>
+<body>
+
+
+<pre>
+
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Palmistry for All, by Cheiro
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Palmistry for All
+
+Author: Cheiro
+
+Release Date: January 29, 2007 [EBook #20480]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PALMISTRY FOR ALL ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier, Christine D. and
+the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+</pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_i" id="Page_i">[Pg i]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="padding">
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 295px;">
+<a href="images/fig001.jpg"><img src="images/fig001_th.jpg" width="295" height="396" alt="The Author" title="Very Faithfully yours, Cheiro" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Very Faithfully yours, Cheiro</span>
+</div></div>
+
+
+<div class="padding">
+<h2>PALMISTRY<br />
+FOR ALL</h2></div>
+<div class="padding">
+<p class="center">
+CONTAINING NEW INFORMATION<br />
+ON THE STUDY OF THE<br />
+HAND NEVER BEFORE<br />
+PUBLISHED</p></div>
+<div class="padding">
+<h3>BY</h3>
+
+<h2>CHEIRO</h2>
+</div>
+<div class="padding">
+<p class="center"><i>WITH A PREFACE TO AMERICAN READERS</i><br />
+<i>AND</i><br />
+<i>WITH UPWARDS OF SIXTY ILLUSTRATIONS</i></p>
+</div>
+<div class="padding">
+<p class="center">
+G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS<br />
+NEW YORK&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;LONDON</p>
+</div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii">[Pg ii]</a></span></p>
+<div class="padding">
+<p class="center">
+COPYRIGHT, 1916<br />
+BY<br />
+G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS<br /></p>
+<hr style="width: 5%;" />
+
+<p class="center">Published, May, 1916</p>
+
+<p class="center">Twenty-second Impression</p>
+</div>
+<div class="padding">
+<p class="center">Made in the United States of America</p></div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">[Pg iii]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="PREFACE" id="PREFACE"></a>PREFACE</h2>
+
+<h3>TO THE AMERICAN EDITION</h3>
+
+
+<p>There is no country in the world where the "study of character" is more
+indulged in than in the United States of America. During my many visits
+there I could not help remarking how even the "hardest headed" business
+men used any form of this study that they could get hold of to help them
+in their business dealings with other men and also in endeavouring to
+ascertain the character of their clerks and employees.</p>
+
+<p>In looking over the records of my career I find that in the course of my
+visits to America I gave private lessons to the heads of two hundred and
+seventy business establishments in New York, one hundred and thirty-five
+in Boston, and three hundred and forty-two in Chicago.</p>
+
+<p>All these men were large employers of labour and what they principally
+wanted was, to have some help beyond that of their own judgment in
+dealing with those with whom they came in contact in the regular course
+of their business careers. In no other country did I find the same
+interest taken in the study of character from a practical standpoint.</p>
+
+<p>It is for this reason that I write a special Preface for this Edition,
+believing as I do that my American<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[Pg iv]</a></span> readers will appreciate the added
+information I may be able to give regarding the obtaining by a mere
+glance at a hand a quick grasp of the leading characteristics of the
+persons with whom they are thrown into contact, or for whatever reason
+they choose to make use of this study.</p>
+
+<p>Everyone knows that "the face can wear a mask," that a person may be a
+good actor and put on a certain expression that may deceive even the best
+judgment.</p>
+
+<p>But hands cannot change as the result of a mere effort to please; <i>the
+character they express is the real nature of the individual</i>&mdash;the true
+character that has been formed by heredity or that has grown up with the
+person by long years of habit.</p>
+
+<p>The characteristics alluded to below are those which may be easily
+observed and which are aids to a rapid judgment of character and which I
+have never before been able to give to the public in such a concise way.</p>
+
+<p>The more elaborate details concerning the ultimate success of the person
+one is talking to, their more intimate character and their future
+development will be found in their proper place, in the subsequent
+chapters.</p>
+
+
+<h3>RULES FOR RAPID OBSERVATION</h3>
+
+<p class="center"><i>The Fingers</i></p>
+
+<p>Observe the fingers. If they look short and stumpy in proportion to the
+rest of the palm&mdash;one may be sure that the individual to whom they belong
+is of an animal nature, possessing coarse instincts, devoid of real
+intellectuality, and belonging to the lower order of humanity.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[Pg v]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If the fingers and the palm appear equal in length, the owner belongs to
+a more cultured race. He has inherited from a more intellectual line of
+ancestors and for all work requiring intelligence and a higher mentality
+he or she could be depended on, whereas the first-mentioned type could
+not&mdash;no matter how well he might talk or advocate his own superiority.</p>
+
+<p>If the fingers look unusually long and thin, and in this way out of
+proportion to the palm, the man or woman will err on the side of too much
+ideality and refinement and is not suited to business or work requiring
+"level headedness" and practicality. It would be useless, for example, to
+put such a person in charge of work-people or over work-rooms. His
+ideality and refinement would be thrown away in such positions, and even
+with the best will in the world he would be completely out of harmony
+with his surroundings.</p>
+
+<p>Such a man, however, could be depended upon in all positions requiring
+personal mental work, research, science, literature, philosophy,
+educational work or, in fact, anything relating to the higher qualities
+of the mind.</p>
+
+<p>If his fingers, in addition to their length, were also knotty or jointed
+(joints much pronounced), he could be depended on to a still greater
+extent for all work requiring great thoughtfulness, detail, and
+concentration of mind.</p>
+
+<p>If, on the other hand, these long fingers were smooth jointed, he would,
+while having the same desire for ideality and for everything
+intellectual, be impulsive and inspirational, would lack a sense of
+detail and a love for detail in his own work, would be visionary,
+artistic, emotional. Such a person would be suited<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[Pg vi]</a></span> to artistic work,
+such as painting, making designs, models, etc., but could not be trusted
+to perform anything requiring detail, research or science, and would be
+utterly useless in any position where discipline or control of others
+were required.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE FINGERS CONSIDERED SEPARATELY</h3>
+
+<p>Let us now observe the fingers separately from the rest of the hand.</p>
+
+<p>The first finger is considered as the Dictator, the Lawgiver, the finger
+of Ambition, the Indicator, the Pointer, etc.</p>
+
+<p>If this finger is unusually long and nearly equals the second, all these
+tendencies are extremely pronounced.</p>
+
+<p>Therefore, if your employee has this finger long, you can safely entrust
+him with control over, and charge of others. You will be amazed how well
+he or she will make rules and regulations and see that they are obeyed;
+but beware, Mr. Employer, lest your first finger is short in proportion
+as that of your employee is long, for, if such be the case, you too will
+have "to toe the line" and you may find yourself in a very disagreeable
+position.</p>
+
+<p>But let me give you a further warning: Should this man or woman have a
+first finger that is long and crooked, you will assuredly find out to
+your cost that the personal ambitions of such an individual are
+"crooked." Such an employee would be perfectly unscrupulous in finding
+out your secrets and getting you into his power.</p>
+
+<p>If the second finger is straight and well shaped, its owner will be very
+serious, a little inclined to melancholy,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii">[Pg vii]</a></span> but will pay due regard to
+whatever responsibilities with which he may be entrusted, but again
+beware if this finger is crooked. In this case the owner would be,
+however, more subject to what may be called "a crooked fate" than
+wilfully "wrong." Such people are, as a rule, the children of strange
+circumstances over which they seem to have no control. They are
+continually getting themselves into trouble and into false positions,
+but, I must admit, more by a strange fatality of things than by their own
+wilful actions. Nevertheless, such infelicities might be very unpleasant
+for their employer, especially if he has more heart than brains.</p>
+
+<p>The third finger, if extremely long and straight, indicates an
+extraordinary desire for glory, celebrity, publicity and the like; and
+although this might be an extremely good quality in the case of an actor,
+preacher, politician or public man, it may be most undesirable if such a
+person is to occupy the position of a private secretary, or the
+confidential clerk to some family lawyer.</p>
+
+<p>If this finger is crooked as well as very long, all the above qualities
+will be intensified and exaggerated. The love of spending money and
+fondness for show will also be more marked, the gambling tendencies very
+pronounced. No position involving the handling of money, should be
+entrusted to the possessor of such a finger.</p>
+
+<p>The fourth, or little finger, if long (passing the nail joint of the
+third) is indicative of power of speech and subtlety in choice of
+language&mdash;the saying "to twist a person round one's little finger"
+originated from this very sign. Such people have a marvellous gift of
+speech, eloquence and flow of language, valuable<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_viii" id="Page_viii">[Pg viii]</a></span> gifts, of course, for
+orators and public persons, but not desirable qualities in a wife if a
+man is fond of sleep.</p>
+
+<p>A short "little finger" denotes the reverse of the above. Such persons
+find the greatest difficulty in expressing what they want to say, but
+they can write better than speak and should be encouraged to do so.</p>
+
+<p>These individuals have, however, not much power over others and the
+shorter the "little finger" is, the more timid and sensitive they are in
+the presence of strangers. If this finger is crooked, then these
+weaknesses are all the more emphasised, but if formed <i>crooked and long</i>
+the power of eloquence is also crooked. Such people will tell any "fairy
+tale" to suit their purpose&mdash;they are natural born liars and the position
+of President of the Ananias Club is their rightful inheritance.</p>
+
+<p>The first and third fingers absolutely of equal length is the best sign
+of <i>an equally balanced mind</i>, but such a sign is rather rare to find.</p>
+
+<p>When the fingers are very supple in the joints and turn backwards or
+outwards from the palm, it is an indication of a quick wit and clever
+brain; but such persons lack continuity of purpose. They have no "hold,"
+as it were, on any one thing.</p>
+
+<p>Fingers slightly curved inwards towards the palm, denote persons slow to
+grasp an idea, or a subject, but such people have retentive memories and
+"hold" or grip, as it were, any one thing they may take up.</p>
+
+
+<h3>CHARACTER SHOWN BY THE THUMB</h3>
+
+<p>The thumb is in itself more expressive of character than any other member
+of the hand. It was D'Arpentigny<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix">[Pg ix]</a></span> who wrote "the thumb individualises the
+man."</p>
+
+<p>Medical science has proved that there is such a thing as a "thumb centre"
+in the brain and any pressure or disease in that part of the brain <i>shows
+its effect in the thumb</i>.</p>
+
+<p>A large well-made thumb is the outward and visible sign of a
+strong-willed, determined person, be he man or woman.</p>
+
+<p>The longer the thumb, the more the power of will rules the actions; the
+shorter the thumb, the more brute force and obstinacy sways the nature.</p>
+
+<p>The shorter and more thick-set the nail phalange is, giving the
+appearance of a club, the more ungovernable is the person in his or her
+temper. Such people have no control over themselves and under the least
+opposition will fly into a blind rage of fury. This curious formation has
+been called the "Murderer's Thumb" because so many who have committed
+murder in a mad fit of passion have been found with this curious
+formation.</p>
+
+<p>An employee with this class of thumb should never be given any position
+of authority over others, for he could not curb his ungovernable temper.
+He would also be absolutely unbalanced in his jealousy, and no woman who
+has the ambition to live to the usual "threescore-years-and-ten" should
+risk marriage to a man with one of these thumbs. But as "love is blind"
+it is useless, I know, to give advice in such a case.</p>
+
+<p>The first joint or nail phalange of the thumb, when long and thin,
+denotes the opposite of the above characteristics. In such cases the
+person has the most absolute control over his temper, his will power is<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_x" id="Page_x">[Pg x]</a></span>
+also strong but quick and unobtrusive, and in a firm, determined way
+people with such a thumb manage others and bend those around them to
+their purpose.</p>
+
+<p>The second joint, if delicately shaped, almost "waist like," indicates
+tact, diplomacy, and gentleness, also subtlety in argument; but if this
+part of the thumb be full looking or equal in size to that of the nail
+phalange, it denotes the person who cares nothing for tact but who, on
+all occasions, will speak his mind plainly, and with brutal frankness.</p>
+
+<p>When the thumb looks as if it were "tied in" close to the hand, the
+person is timid, easily frightened by both people and circumstances,
+narrow-minded in his views, and miserly in his habits. It is a
+well-established fact that the thumbs of all misers are "tied in" and
+cramped-looking. It is perhaps this very fear of things and people that
+in the end makes them misers with their gold.</p>
+
+<p>One need never waste one's time asking a person with one of these
+cramped-looking thumbs to do a favour, and may God help the business man
+or woman who ever gets into such a person's clutches!</p>
+
+<p>A thumb with the nail joint supple (bending backwards or as it is also
+called "double jointed") indicates a character the exact opposite of that
+associated with the "tied in" thumb. Possessors of such a thumb are
+generous, adaptable to others, extravagant, and impetuous in their
+actions and decisions. They promise things quickly and are more often
+heard to say "Yes" than "No"; but if they have time for reflection, they
+very often go back on their promises.</p>
+
+<p>Individuals having a "stiff-jointed" thumb, on the contrary, cannot
+easily adapt themselves to others. They are distant and more reserved
+with<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xi" id="Page_xi">[Pg xi]</a></span> strangers. When asked to do a thing, they generally first say "No,"
+but on reflection or when reasoned with, they often give in to the other
+and generally regret having done so. It is useless to oppose such
+people&mdash;if one cannot lead them, it is no use attempting to force them
+against their will.</p>
+
+<p>This type has more self-control than the type of people with the "supple
+jointed" formation, and is not so generous or extravagant. Individuals of
+this group, however, make more reliable friends, so their friendship,
+though difficult to obtain, is generally worth having.</p>
+
+<p>A thumb standing very far out from the hand (almost at right angles to
+the palm) is not a good sign for ordinary success. Such people go to
+extremes in everything they do and are generally fanatics in religion,
+social reform, or whatever line of thought occupies their attention.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HANDS, HARD AND SOFT</h3>
+
+<p>Even in the simple act of shaking hands, one can form conclusions about
+character.</p>
+
+<p>Beware of any man or woman whose hand seems to slip from yours when you
+grasp theirs in greeting. Such persons are deceptive and treacherous.
+They may smile at you with their lips, but instinctively they regard you
+as their prey and will only use you for their own object.</p>
+
+<p>A soft, fat hand is the indication of an indolent and more or less lazy
+person.</p>
+
+<p>A firm hand is the sign of an energetic, reliable nature.</p>
+
+<p>A very thin hand denotes a restless energetic disposition,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xii" id="Page_xii">[Pg xii]</a></span> but one that
+is given to worry, and fretting and is generally discontented.</p>
+
+<p>A thin hand that feels listless in one's grasp denotes a weak
+constitution that has only sufficient energy to live.</p>
+
+<p>A cold, clammy hand is also a sign of poor health, but generally that of
+a very sensitive and nervous person.</p>
+
+<p>A person who keeps his hands closed while talking, is distrustful in his
+nature, has little self-reliance and can seldom be relied on by others.</p>
+
+<p>A man or woman who gives a good firm grasp of the hand, is
+self-confident, energetic, and generally reliable.</p>
+
+<p>When all the fingers (especially if the fingers be long) are seen always
+clinging, sticking, as it were, or folding over one another it denotes
+very doubtful qualities in the nature of their possessor and a decided
+tendency towards thieving and general lack of moral principal.</p>
+
+<p>Remember that the hands <i>are the immediate servants or instruments of the
+brain</i>. There are more motive and sensory nerves from the brain to the
+hand than to any other portion of the body and, whether sleeping or
+waking, they continually and unconsciously reflect the thought and
+character of the mind or soul of the individual.</p>
+
+<p>It will, then, be seen from these observations that without looking at
+the lines of the hand, one may be able to obtain certain details of
+character that are more trustworthy than those given by the face, and
+that these rules, if followed, should be of the greatest assistance and
+value to people in all walks of life.</p>
+
+<p>Many of these observations are further amplified<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xiii" id="Page_xiii">[Pg xiii]</a></span> in subsequent chapters
+of this work. There is not a single one of these rules that has not been
+proved by me in my long professional career, and knowing that they will
+bear the strictest inquiry and observation, it gives me pleasure now to
+offer them to the readers of the American Edition of <i>Palmistry for All</i>.</p>
+
+<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Cheiro.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">London.</span></p>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xiv" id="Page_xiv">[Pg xiv]</a></span></p>
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xv" id="Page_xv">[Pg xv]</a></span></p>
+<h2><a name="INTRODUCTION" id="INTRODUCTION"></a>INTRODUCTION</h2>
+
+
+<p>It was on July 21, 1894, that I had the honour of meeting Lord Kitchener
+and getting the autographed impression of his right hand, which I now
+publish for the first time as frontispiece to this volume. The day I had
+this interview, Lord Kitchener, or, as he was then, Major-General
+Kitchener, was at the War Office, and to take this impression had to use
+the paper on his table, and, strangely enough, the imprint of the War
+Office may be seen at the top of the second finger&mdash;in itself perhaps a
+premonition that he would one day be the controlling force of that great
+department.</p>
+
+<p>Lord Kitchener was at that moment Sirdar of the Egyptian Army. He had
+returned to England to tender his resignation on account of some hostile
+criticism about "the Abbas affair," and so I took the opportunity of his
+being in England to ask him to allow me to add his hand to my collection,
+which even then included some of the most famous men and women of the
+day.</p>
+
+<p>As Mr. T.P. O'Connor, in writing recently of Lord Kitchener, said: "One
+of his greatest qualities, at once useful and charming, is his
+accessibility. Anybody who has anything to say to him can approach him;
+anybody who has anything to teach him will find a ready and grateful
+learner."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xvi" id="Page_xvi">[Pg xvi]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>My experience can indeed bear out the truth of this clear judgment of one
+of the leading traits in Lord Kitchener's character. That very year,
+1894, was a notable one in his life; his strong-willed action over the
+Abbas affair was completely vindicated; he was made a K.C.M.G., and
+returned to Egypt with more power than ever.</p>
+
+<p>Once in his presence he put me completely at my ease, and in a few
+moments he appeared to be deeply interested in observing the difference
+between the lines in his own clearly-marked palm and those in dozens of
+other impressions that I put before him.</p>
+
+<p>He was then almost forty-four years of age, and I remember well how I
+explained the still higher positions and responsibilities that his path
+of Destiny mapped out before him. The heaviest and greatest of all would,
+I told him, be undertaken in his sixty-fourth year (1914), but how little
+either of us thought then that in that year the most terrible war of the
+century would have broken out.</p>
+
+<p>Believing, as I do, in the Law of Periodicity playing as great a r&ocirc;le in
+the lives of individuals as it does in nations, it is strange to notice
+that the same radix numbers that governed Lord Kitchener's career when he
+was planning out the Egyptian campaign, which resulted in his great
+victories of Atbara and Omdurman in 1896 and 1897, are exactly the same
+for him in 1914-1915, and 1916 gives again the same radix number that in
+1898 saw him receive a vote of thanks from both Houses of Parliament, and
+a gift of &pound;30,000 from the State.</p>
+
+<p>From the standpoint of those interested in this strange study of hands,
+the accompanying impression of Lord Kitchener's cannot help but be
+regarded as of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xvii" id="Page_xvii">[Pg xvii]</a></span> great importance. In it, the rules of Palmistry that I
+have given in the following pages are borne out in all their details.</p>
+
+<p>Returning to the impression of this remarkable hand; even in shape alone
+one may read by the rules of this science the following clearly-marked
+characteristics:</p>
+
+<p>Length of fingers&mdash;intellectuality (page <a href="#Page_134">134</a>), strong determination and
+will-power (chapter on the Thumb, page <a href="#Page_127">127</a>), mentality and firm
+determination of purpose (<i>see</i> Line of Head, page <a href="#Page_17">17</a>).</p>
+
+<p>The remarkable Line of Fate running up the centre of the hand and turning
+towards the first finger, denotes ambition and domination over others
+(page <a href="#Page_52">52</a>).</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Success and Fame, starting on the hand from the Line of Life
+and ascending to the base of the third finger, exactly coincides with the
+period in Lord Kitchener's career when he began to find recognition and
+success (page <a href="#Page_63">63</a>).</p>
+
+<p>As in my larger work on this subject I published Gladstone's hand as a
+remarkable illustration of the truth that may be found in this study, so
+in this present work with the same confidence I give this illustration of
+Lord Kitchener's as another proof of character indicated in the shape and
+lines of the hand, and as it has been said so often that "Character is
+Destiny," so it is surely not illogical to point out that in following
+the rules laid down by this study one may obtain a clear idea of the
+destiny that the Character, Will, and Individuality trace out in
+advance&mdash;tracks, as it were, stretching far out into the distant future
+for the engine of purpose and achievement to find already laid and ready
+to be used at the "appointed time."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xviii" id="Page_xviii">[Pg xviii]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In conclusion, as I have now completely retired from all professional
+work, I may be allowed to point out that I am not publishing this book
+with the idea of seeking clients. I have no desire but to see this
+strange study taken up as a useful and practical means of obtaining an
+exact judgment of the character, qualities, and hidden tendencies that
+might otherwise be ignored.</p>
+
+<p>I think that if all parents knew at least something of Palmistry, the
+vast majority of children would be more usefully trained and their proper
+tendencies developed.</p>
+
+<p>It is often too late when a child discovers&mdash;and most probably by
+accident&mdash;some tendency or talent that had never been suspected by its
+parents.</p>
+
+<p>It is no wonder that so few persons find their true vocations in the
+world, when it is remembered the random, haphazard way in which children
+are brought up&mdash;educated for the most part in some scholastic mill that
+grinds down all to the same dead level of mediocrity, and then turns them
+into the Army, the Church, or into trade.</p>
+
+<p>If, on the contrary, all these studies that teach the understanding of
+character were more encouraged, parents would have less excuse for the
+supreme ignorance they now show as to the real nature of those children
+who hold them responsible for their entry into the battlefield of
+existence.</p>
+
+<p>These same parents would lift up their voices in righteous indignation if
+soldiers were sent into battle untrained, without their proper equipment,
+and yet these same parents have never, in the whole course of their
+lives, made the simplest study of any one of those many subjects by which
+they could in knowing<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xix" id="Page_xix">[Pg xix]</a></span> the nature of their child, have strengthened weak
+points in the fortress of character, or by developing some talent or
+gift, doubly armed him for his entry into the battle of life.</p>
+
+<p>It is from this standpoint that I earnestly hope this study of hands may
+some day be taken up. It was from this standpoint that I interested such
+men as Gladstone, Professor Max Muller, of Oxford, Lord Russell, when he
+was Lord Chief Justice, King Edward VII., and many others too numerous to
+mention; and lastly, it is from the same standpoint that I have now
+written this book, which under the title of <i>Palmistry for All</i>, will, I
+hope, appeal to all classes, and cause such an interest in the Study of
+Character that, instead of such an art being left in the hands of a few,
+it will, on the contrary, become universally used for the benefit of all.</p>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Cheiro</span></p>
+
+<p><span class="smcap">Note</span>.&mdash;Cheiro retired from all professional work some time ago, and the
+public is therefore warned against persons pretending that they are the
+real "Cheiro," and endeavouring to pass themselves off as the author of
+his well-known works.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xxi" id="Page_xxi">[Pg xxi]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CONTENTS" id="CONTENTS"></a>CONTENTS</h2>
+
+<div class='center'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tr><td align='right' colspan='3'>PAGE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Preface</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_iii">iii</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Introduction</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_xv">xv</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='center' colspan='3'>PART I</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='center' colspan='3'>PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>CHAPTER</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">A Brief R&eacute;sum&eacute; of the History of the Study of Hands Through the Centuries To The Present Day</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Head or the Indications of Mentality</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_8">8</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Line of Head and its Variations</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_10">10</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_16">16</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Line of Head separated from the Line of Life</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_19">19</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Line of Head and its Secondary Signs</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_22">22</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Changes in the Line of Head</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_26">26</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Crosses and Squares in connection with the Line of Head</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_30">30</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Double Lines of Head</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_31">31</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Line of Head on the Seven Types of Hands</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_33">33</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Life and Its Variations</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Mars Or Inner Life Line</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_44">44</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Destiny Or Fate</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_47">47</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Line of Life</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_50">50</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Wrist</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_50">50</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Mount of the Moon</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_51">51</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xxii" id="Page_xxii">[Pg xxii]</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Middle of the Palm</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_55">55</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Influence Lines to the Line of Fate</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_57">57</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Double Lines of Fate</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_57">57</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of the Sun or Success</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_61">61</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Line of Life</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Line of Fate</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Plain of Mars</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Mount of the Moon</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Line of Head</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>From the Line of Heart</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_63">63</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Heart as indicating the Affectionate and Emotional Nature</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_67">67</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Signs Relating to Marriage</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_73">73</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Marriage:</span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>At the Base of the Fourth Finger</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_73">73</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Influence Lines to the Fate Line</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_77">77</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Influence Lines on Venus</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_79">79</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Lines denoting Children, their Sex, and Other Matters concerning Them</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_81">81</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Health or Hepatica</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_83">83</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Girdle of Venus</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_88">88</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Ring of Saturn</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_90">90</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Bracelets</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_91">91</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Line of Intuition</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_92">92</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Via Lasciva</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_93">93</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">La Croix Mystique</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_95">95</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Ring of Solomon</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_96">96</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XIV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Travels, Voyages and Accidents</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_97">97</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Island, the Circle, the Spot and the Grille</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_101">101</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xxiii" id="Page_xxiii">[Pg xxiii]</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XVI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Star, the Cross, the Square</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_104">104</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XVII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Different Classes of Lines and Right and Left Hands</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XVIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Great Triangle and the Quadrangle</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_110">110</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XIX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">How to tell Time and Dates of the Principal Events in the Life</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_112">112</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='center' colspan='3'>PART II</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='center' colspan='3'>CHEIROGNOMY&mdash;OR THE SHAPES OF THE HANDS AND FINGERS</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>I.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Study of the Shape of the Hands</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_117">117</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Seven Types of Hands</span>:</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Elementary</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_119">119</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Square</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_119">119</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Spatulate</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_121">121</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Philosophic</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_122">122</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Conic</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_124">124</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Psychic</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_125">125</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mixed</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_126">126</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>II.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Thumb</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_127">127</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Supple Jointed</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_128">128</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Firm Jointed</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_128">128</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The First, Second and Third Phalange</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_131">131</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>III.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Fingers</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_133">133</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Length of Fingers to one another</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_133">133</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Smooth Jointed</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Knotty Jointed</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_135">135</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>IV.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Nails</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_136">136</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Long Nails</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_136">136</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Short Nails</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Flat Nails</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_138">138</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Their Indications of Disease</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_139">139</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xxiv" id="Page_xxiv">[Pg xxiv]</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>V.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mounts of the Hand</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_140">140</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mount of Mars</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mount of Jupiter</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_150">150</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mount of Saturn</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_154">154</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>IX.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mount of the Sun</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_158">158</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>X.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mount of Mercury</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_162">162</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XI.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mount of The Moon</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_168">168</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">The Mount of Venus</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_173">173</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XIII.</td><td align='left'><span class="smcap">Advice to The Student: the Best Means to make Casts or take Impressions of the Hands</span></td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_178">178</a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xxv" id="Page_xxv">[Pg xxv]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="ILLUSTRATIONS" id="ILLUSTRATIONS"></a>ILLUSTRATIONS</h2>
+
+<div class='center'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tr><td align='right' colspan='3'>PAGE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Cheiro</td><td align='left'><i><a href="#Page_i">Frontispiece</a></i></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Lines of the Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_1">1</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Lord Kitchener's Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_2">2</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>PLATE</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>I.</td><td align='left'>The Three Principal Positions for the Commencement of the Line of Head</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>II.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life and its Terminations</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_18">18</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>III.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Head separated from the Line of Life</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_20">20</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>IV.</td><td align='left'>Islands on the Line of Head</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_24">24</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>V.</td><td align='left'>More Variations of the Line of Head</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_27">27</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VI.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Head and Line of Heart running together</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_29">29</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VII.</td><td align='left'>Double Lines of Head, also Crosses and Squares</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_32">32</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VIII.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Life and Sections of Influences from the Mounts</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_37">37</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>IX.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Life and its Variations</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_40">40</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>X.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Life and Line of Mars</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XI.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Destiny and its Modifications</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_51">51</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XII.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Destiny and its Variations</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XIII.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Destiny and its Modifications</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_56">56</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XIV.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Destiny, Islands, and other Signs</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_59">59</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XV.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Sun and its Modifications</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_62">62</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xxvi" id="Page_xxvi">[Pg xxvi]</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XVI.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Heart and its Variations</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XVII.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Marriage</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_74">74</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XVIII.</td><td align='left'>Marriage Lines and Influence Lines which further help in denoting Marriage</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_78">78</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XIX.</td><td align='left'>The Line of Health</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_84">84</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XX.</td><td align='left'>The Girdle of Venus. The Ring of Saturn. The Bracelets. The Line of Intuition. The Via Lasciva</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_89">89</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XXI.</td><td align='left'>Travels, Voyages, Accidents, and Descending Lines from the Mounts</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_99">99</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XXII.</td><td align='left'>The Island, the Circle, the Spot, the Grille, the Star, and the Square</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_102">102</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XXIII.</td><td align='left'>Minor Marks and Signs</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_105">105</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XXIV.</td><td align='left'>Minor Marks and Signs</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_108">108</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XXV.</td><td align='left'>The Great Triangle and the Quadrangle</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_111">111</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>XXVI.</td><td align='left'>Times and Dates of Principal Events</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_113">113</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='center' colspan='3'>CHEIROGNOMY</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='center' colspan='3'>ILLUSTRATIONS</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>I.</td><td align='left'>The Elementary Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_120">120</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Square or Useful Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_120">120</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Spatulate Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_120">120</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Philosophic Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_120">120</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>II.</td><td align='left'>The Conic or Artistic Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_123">123</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Psychic Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_123">123</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mixed Hand</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_123">123</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_xxvii" id="Page_xxvii">[Pg xxvii]</a></span></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>III.</td><td align='left'>Thumbs:</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Clubbed Thumb</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Supple Jointed Thumb</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Firm Jointed Thumb</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Waist-Like Thumb</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Straight Thumb</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Elementary Thumb</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>IV.</td><td align='left'>The Fingers:</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Smooth</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Square</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Knotty</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_134">134</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>V.</td><td align='left'>The Nails:</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Delicacy of Throat</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Chest and Bronchial</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Spinal Weakness</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Weak Action of the Heart</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>Paralysis</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_137">137</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>VI.</td><td align='left'>The Mounts of the Hand:</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mount of Venus</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mount of Mars</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mount of Jupiter</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mount of Saturn</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mount of the Sun</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mount of Mercury</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'></td><td align='left'>The Mount of the Moon</td><td align='left'><a href="#Page_141">141</a></td></tr>
+</table></div>
+<div class="padding">
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 309px;">
+<a href="images/fig029.jpg"><img src="images/fig029_th.jpg" width="309" height="397" alt="THE LINES OF THE HAND." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">THE LINES OF THE HAND.</span></div>
+</div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="Palmistry_for_All" id="Palmistry_for_All"></a>Palmistry for All</h2>
+
+
+<h2><a name="PART_I_PALMISTRY_OR_CHEIROMANCY" id="PART_I_PALMISTRY_OR_CHEIROMANCY"></a>PART I&mdash;PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY</h2>
+
+
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_I" id="CHAPTER_I"></a>CHAPTER I</h2>
+
+
+<h3>A BRIEF R&Eacute;SUM&Eacute; OF THE HISTORY OF THE STUDY OF HANDS THROUGH THE CENTURIES
+TO THE PRESENT DAY</h3>
+
+<p>The success I had during the twenty-five years in which I was connected
+with this study was, I believe, chiefly owing to the fact that although
+my principal study was the lines and formation of hands, yet I did not
+confine myself alone to that particular page in the book of Nature. I
+endeavoured to study every phase of thought that can throw light on human
+life; consequently the very ridges of the skin, the hair found on the
+hands, all were used as a detective would use a clue to accumulate
+evidence. I found people were sceptical of such a study only because they
+had not the subject presented to them in a logical manner.</p>
+
+<p>There are hundreds of facts connected with the hand that people have
+rarely, if ever, heard of, and I<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span> think it will not be out of place if I
+touch on them here. For instance, in regard to what are known as the
+corpuscles, Meissner, in 1853, proved that these little molecular
+substances were distributed in a peculiar manner in the hand itself. He
+found that in the tips of the fingers they were 108 to the square line,
+with 400 papill&aelig;; that they gave forth certain distinct crepitations, or
+vibrations, and that in the red lines of the hand they were most numerous
+and, strange to say, were found in straight individual rows in the lines
+of the palm. Experiments were made as to these vibrations, and it was
+proved that, after a little study, one could distinctly detect and
+recognise the crepitations <i>in relation to each individual</i>. They
+increased or decreased in every phase of health, thought, or excitement,
+and were extinct the moment death had mastered its victim. About twenty
+years later, experiments were made with a man in Paris, who had an
+abnormally acute sense of sound (Nature's compensation for want of sight,
+as he had been born blind). In a very short time this man could detect
+the slightest change or irregularity in these crepitations, and through
+the changes was able to tell with wonderful accuracy about how old a
+person was, and how near they were to illness, and even death.</p>
+
+<p>The study of these corpuscles was also taken up by Sir Charles Bell, who,
+in 1874, demonstrated that each corpuscle contained the end of a nerve
+fibre, and was in immediate connection with the brain. This great
+specialist also demonstrated that every portion of the brain was in touch
+with the nerves of the hand and more particularly with the corpuscles
+found in the tips of the fingers and the lines of the hand.</p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 261px;">
+<a href="images/fig032.jpg"><img src="images/fig032_th.jpg" width="261" height="395" alt="LORD KITCHENER&#39;S HAND." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">LORD KITCHENER&#39;S HAND.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The detection of criminals by taking impressions<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span> of the tips of the
+fingers and by thumb marks is now used by the police of almost every
+country, and thousands of criminals have been tracked down and identified
+by this means.</p>
+
+<p>To-day, at Scotland Yard, is to be seen almost an entire library now
+devoted to books on this side of the subject and to the collections that
+the police have made, and yet, in my short time, I remember how the idea
+was scoffed at when Monsieur Bertillon and the French police first
+commenced the detection of criminals by this method. If the ignorant
+prejudice against a complete study of the hand were overcome, the police
+would be greatly assisted by studying the lines of the palm, and
+acquiring a knowledge of what these lines mean, especially as regards
+mentality and the inclination of the brain in one direction or another.</p>
+
+<p>It is a well-known fact that, even if the skin be burned off the hands or
+removed by an acid, in a short time the lines will reappear exactly as
+they were before, and the same happens to the ridges or "spirals" in the
+skin of the inside tips of the fingers and thumb.</p>
+
+<p>The scientific use of such a study could also be made invaluable in
+foreseeing tendencies towards insanity, etc.</p>
+
+<p>Sir Thomas Browne, in his <i>Religio Medici</i>, after referring to
+Physiognomy, says:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>"Now there are besides these characters in our faces certain
+mystical figures in our hands, which I dare not call mere
+dashes, strokes <i>&agrave; la vol&eacute;e</i> or at random, because delineated
+by a pencil that never works in vain, and hereof I take more
+particular notice because I carry that in mine own hand which
+I could never read nor discover in another."</p></div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[Pg 4]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>But prejudice is a hard thing to combat, and, in consequence, a study
+which could render untold aid to humanity has been neglected in modern
+times. Yet it cannot be denied that this strange study was practised and
+followed by some of the greatest teachers and students of other
+civilisations.</p>
+
+<p>Whether or no these ancient philosophers were more enlightened than we
+are has long been a question of dispute, but the one point and the most
+important one which has been admitted is, that in those days the greatest
+study of mankind was man. It is, therefore, reasonable to suppose that
+their conclusions are more likely to be correct than those of an age like
+our own&mdash;famous chiefly for its implements of destruction, its warships,
+its dynamite, and its cannon.</p>
+
+<p>This study of hands can be traced back to the very earliest, most
+enlightened forms of civilisation. It has been practised by the greatest
+minds in all those civilisations, minds that have left their mental
+philosophies and their monuments for us to marvel at. India, China,
+Persia, Egypt, Rome&mdash;all in their study of mankind have placed the
+greatest store in their study of the hand.</p>
+
+<p>During my stay in India, I was permitted by some Brahmans (descendants of
+the Joshi Caste, famous from time immemorial for their knowledge in
+occult subjects) with whom it was my good fortune to become intimately
+acquainted, to examine and make extracts from an extraordinary book on
+this subject which they regarded as almost sacred, and which belonged to
+the great past of the now despised Hindustan.</p>
+
+<p>As the wisdom of the Hindus spread far and wide across the earth, so the
+theories and ideas about this<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span> study spread and were practised in other
+countries. Similar to the way in which religion suits itself to the
+conditions of the country in which it is propagated, so has it divided
+itself into various systems. It is, however, to the days of the Greek
+civilisation that we owe the present clear and lucid form of the study.
+The Greek civilisation has, in many ways, been considered the highest and
+most intellectual in the world, and here it is that Palmistry or
+Cheiromancy (from the Greek <ins class="translit" title="che&iacute;r">&#967;&#949;&iacute;&#961;</ins>, the hand) grew and found
+favour in the eyes of those who have given us laws and philosophies that
+we employ to-day and whose works are taught in all our leading colleges
+and schools.</p>
+
+<p>It is a well-known and undisputed fact that the philosopher Anaxagoras
+not only taught but practised this study. We also find that Hispanus
+discovered on an altar dedicated to Hermes a book on Cheiromancy, written
+in gold letters, which he sent as a present to Alexander the Great, as "a
+study worthy of the attention of an elevated and enquiring mind." Instead
+of it being followed by the "weak-minded," we find, on the contrary, that
+it numbered amongst its disciples such men of learning as Aristotle,
+Pliny, Paracelsus, Cardamis, Albertus Magnus, the Emperor Augustus, and
+many others of note.</p>
+
+<p>This brings us down to the period when the power of the Church was
+beginning to be felt outside the domain and jurisdiction of religion. It
+is said that the early Fathers were jealous of the influence of this
+old-world science. Whether this be true or not, we find that it was
+bitterly denounced and persecuted by the early Church. It has always
+been, that the history of any dominant creed or sect is the history of
+opposition to knowledge, unless that knowledge<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[Pg 6]</a></span> come through it. This
+study, therefore, the offspring of "pagans and heathens," was not even
+given a trial. It was denounced as sorcery and witchcraft; the devil was
+conjured up as the father of all such students, and the result was that
+through this bitter persecution, the study was outlawed, and fell into
+the hands of vagrants, tramps, and gipsies. In spite of this persecution
+it is interesting and significant to notice that almost the first book
+ever printed was a work on Palmistry, <i>Die Kunst Ciromantia</i>, printed in
+Augsburg, in the year 1475.</p>
+
+<p>In examining this subject it will be found that in the study of mankind
+it came to be recognised that, as there was a natural position on the
+face for the nose, eyes, lips, etc., so also on the hand was there a
+natural position for what is known as the Line of Head, Line of Life, and
+so on. If these were found in some unnatural position they would equally
+be the indications of unnatural tendencies. It doubtless took years of
+study to name these lines and marks, but it must be remembered that this
+curious study is more ancient than any other in the world.</p>
+
+<p>In the original Hebrew of the Book of Job (chap. xxxvii., ver. 7), we
+find these significant words: "God caused signs or seals on the hands of
+all the sons of men, that the sons of men might know their works."</p>
+
+<p>As the student of anatomy can build up the entire system from the
+examination of a single bone, so may a person by a careful study of an
+important member of the body such as the hand, apart from anything
+superstitious or even mystical, build up the entire action of the system
+and trace every effect back to its cause.</p>
+
+<p>To-day the science of the present is coming to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span> rescue of the
+so-called superstition of the past. All over the world scientists are
+little by little sweeping aside prejudice and beginning to study occult
+questions. Perhaps the "whys and wherefores" of such things may one of
+these days be as easily explained as are those wireless waves of
+electricity that carry messages from land to land.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_II" id="CHAPTER_II"></a>CHAPTER II</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEAD OR THE INDICATIONS OF THE MENTALITY</h3>
+
+<p>The object of the following chapters is to give clear and unmistakable
+instruction on the lines and markings of the hands, both from the
+student's standpoint and from that of the general reader. This is not
+usually the course adopted in books printed on this subject which have to
+appeal to a general public.</p>
+
+<p>During my twenty-five years' professional experience in England, America,
+and other countries, I have carefully noted down the questions that are
+not answered in books published on this subject. I have also recorded
+what are the difficulties that arise in the minds of those students who
+meet this, that, or the other mark or line and search in vain for some
+explanation as to its meanings. I may add that there is not a single
+point on which I give information that has not been proved by me from
+probably thousands of cases that have come before me during my own
+professional experience.</p>
+
+<p>As regards illustrations, I have endeavoured to make these of the
+simplest and clearest kind possible. I have every confidence that if they
+are carefully studied, no student can fail to grasp this subject in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span> a
+masterful manner, and that whoever acts upon the advice I give in these
+pages, cannot fail to become successful as an interpreter of this study.</p>
+
+<p>In all my work I regard the Line of Head (page <a href="#Page_11">11</a>) or the Line of
+Mentality as the most important sign that can be found in the hand.</p>
+
+<p>A Line of Head is like the needle in the compass, without a true
+knowledge of which it is impossible to grasp the "direction of the
+subject." I have seen more mistakes caused by a lack of grasp of this
+point than by anything else.</p>
+
+<p>I have seen, for example, many students make the mistake of paying great
+attention to what looked like a good Line of Sun or Success, and, at the
+same time, not noticing a weak, badly formed Line of Head, which
+contradicted the promise of success given by the various lines. If, on
+the other hand, the student had first noticed the Line of Head, he would
+have been able to tell the subject that the promise of success was not
+backed up by the intelligence or the mentality.</p>
+
+<p>As regards the future being foreshadowed, it has been demonstrated that
+the brain is always growing, changing, increasing, or diminishing. These
+changes commence years before the effect is shown by the thoughts or
+actions of the individual. A boy ten years old may at that point commence
+a development which will not be felt until he is thirty, and then it may
+change his whole life and career. As this development commences at ten,
+even at that age it has affected certain nerves, and they in their turn
+have already affected the Line of Head&mdash;a full twenty years before the
+point of change or action has been reached. It therefore follows that the
+future may<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[Pg 10]</a></span> be seen and told by a careful examination of the hand which,
+as Aristotle has said, is the "organ of all organs, the active agent of
+the passive powers of the entire system."</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS VARIATIONS</h3>
+
+<p>The Line of Head (page <a href="#Page_11">11</a>), or indication of the Mentality of the
+subject, must in all cases be considered as the most important line on
+the hand. The greatest attention should be paid to it, so as to obtain a
+clear grasp of the Mentality under consideration.</p>
+
+<p>The two hands must be carefully compared&mdash;the left showing the inherited
+tendencies, the right the developed or cultivated qualities. The
+slightest change or deviation in the markings from the left to the right
+should be carefully noted down or remembered.</p>
+
+<p>The direction or the termination or end of the line should, above all, be
+distinctly noted, for the all-important reason that this shows the
+direction that the Mentality is inclined to develop towards. For example,
+if found with the end of the line sloping downwards in the left hand, and
+having become straight or lying across the palm in the right&mdash;the student
+is safe in concluding that the subject has not been able to follow his
+natural bent, but by the force of circumstances has been obliged to make
+himself more practical, to study business methods, and to have undertaken
+a training towards practicality and level-headedness in order to rise
+equal to the circumstances that he found himself forced to meet.</p>
+
+<p>In this way the student obtains an insight into the earlier conditions of
+the life under examination that is invaluable, especially when there is,
+as will be<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span> found in many cases, no Line of Destiny visible in the early
+years.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_I_I" id="Plate_I_I"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 334px;">
+<a href="images/fig042.png"><img src="images/fig042_th.png" width="334" height="368" alt="Plate I. THE THREE PRINCIPAL POSITIONS FOR THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE LINE OF HEAD." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate I. THE THREE PRINCIPAL POSITIONS FOR THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE LINE OF HEAD.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>If, on the contrary, the Line of Head is found exactly in the same
+position on the right hand as on the left, or even very nearly so, the
+student can be sure that there was little or no strain in the early
+years, but that the subject had easy conditions which<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span> were favourable,
+and which allowed him to develop his natural bent of Mentality.</p>
+
+<p>If, however, it is found that the left hand shows a forked ending to the
+Line of Head, namely, one end sloping downwards and the other end
+straight, or nearly so, and that the right hand shows only the straight
+line, then the student may decide that the subject inherited from the
+parents two natures, the imaginative and the practical, and that he chose
+to develop the latter, either in the direction of business or science.</p>
+
+<p>In such a case, the student may state with confidence that the parents of
+the subject were decidedly opposite in their characteristics. If the line
+has become straight in the right hand the subject takes more after the
+side that was practical.</p>
+
+<p>In the case of boys or men it must be remembered that they will take more
+after their mother's mental peculiarities, and in the case of girls or
+women that they more generally take after the mental qualities of the
+father.</p>
+
+<p>On a man's left hand that has the forked ending with the upper end
+straight, or nearly so, the student can state that the mother was the
+more practical of the parents. If on the right hand the same mark has
+become clearest the man developed, followed, or cultivated the mental
+qualities of the mother more than those of the father. When reading a
+woman's hand the reverse will apply.</p>
+
+<p>If, on the contrary, the lower line was the more developed on the right
+hand, then the subject, if a man, had developed the imaginative or
+artistic qualities of the mother, and <i>vice versa</i> if the subject be a
+girl or a woman.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Head looks light or faint on the left, and strong and
+clear on the right, the student can safely state that the subject did not
+inherit any strong mental bent from either parent, but has cultivated and
+developed his own mentality.</p>
+
+<p>In such a case the subject has been a hard mental student, and has become
+mentally superior to his or her parents. This is often found in the case
+of "self-made" men or women, who have had little or no education in their
+early life or in their home, but who from an innate love of education
+developed themselves mentally. Such a sign would speak volumes for the
+will power and ambition of the subject under examination.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Head is lighter and poorer on the right hand than on the
+left, the student can state that the subject has not made the most of his
+opportunities mentally, and that he has not, and never will, equal the
+brain power and education of his or her parents.</p>
+
+<p>In such a case one may also be sure that the subject has not a very
+strong will power&mdash;at least mentally&mdash;although he might be very obstinate
+by nature, which will be seen from the quality exhibited by the nail
+phalange of the thumb (page <a href="#Page_129">129</a>).</p>
+
+<p>A poor or non-developed Line of Head in the right hand of any man or
+woman is also the indication of a lack of purpose or ambition&mdash;there
+being no ambition where a want of mental desire and development is so
+distinctly shown.</p>
+
+<p>A clean cut deep Line of Head is a more powerful sign of mentality than
+when the line is very broad, or lying, as it were, merely on the surface
+of the palm.</p>
+
+<p>A wide broad line shows less concentration and a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> more vacillating
+changeable nature. This rule applies with equal truth to all the lines on
+the palm.</p>
+
+<p>Broad, coarse-looking lines are more a constitutional sign than a mental
+indication. They are often found in cases where the subject leads a
+robust outdoor life, and those who have developed the physical side of
+their nature more than the mental.</p>
+
+<p>Great brain workers usually have thin, fine, clean-looking lines, and
+especially that of the Line of Head.</p>
+
+<p>It will thus be seen that by observation the student will be enabled to
+class the sort of life led by the person under examination. No matter how
+intellectual a man or woman may look, the lines on the hand will indicate
+whether or not they have developed their intellectuality. In this way it
+will be seen that a study of the hand becomes a far more accurate guide
+than the study of the face. Many men and women may have handsome,
+intellectual faces and yet prefer sport or outdoor life to any mental
+pursuit or exercise.</p>
+
+<p>Turning from an examination of the direction of ending of the Line of
+Head, the student must next examine the indications of the beginnings of
+this important Line. For example, the Line of Head may commence in three
+distinct different ways.</p>
+
+<p>
+(1) From inside the Line of Life (1-1, <a href="#Plate_I_I">Plate I</a>.).<br />
+(2) Joined to the Line of Life (2-2, <a href="#Plate_I_I">Plate I</a>.).<br />
+(3) And outside the Line of Life (3-3, <a href="#Plate_I_I">Plate I</a>.).<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>The first is the most uncertain of all. It denotes an over-sensitive,
+over-cautious, timid person. It also indicates a highly nervous, easily
+excited individual, one who has little control over himself or his
+temper, who is easily put out over trifles, and liable to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span> do the most
+erratic things, or fly off at a tangent when irritated. Such people are
+always in trouble, generally fighting or quarrelling with those about
+them and over things that are of no consequence. They are likewise so
+easily wounded in their feelings, that even a look or an imagined slight
+will put them out of humour or upset them for days.</p>
+
+<p>If this Line of Head farther out in the palm become straight, it denotes
+that the subject will, later, by the development of his intelligence
+largely overcome this failing of over-sensitiveness. If the line slope
+much or bend down towards the wrist or on to the Mount of Luna (the Mount
+of Imagination), then the subject will become still worse with his
+advancing years. If the Line of Head is also poorly marked, or with
+"hairlines" from it, it is often the indication of some form of insanity
+which is likely to cause the subject to be placed under restraint in
+later life.</p>
+
+<p>If, with this latter indication, the student also finds all the upward
+main lines, such as the Line of Destiny, etc., fading out past the middle
+of the palm, the indication of insanity and restraint becomes all the
+more certain.</p>
+
+<p>This class of Head Line is largely found in cases where the subject is
+naturally inclined towards drink and intemperance of every description.</p>
+
+<p>Even in cases where there are good lines running up the palm, it will
+usually be found that the subject gives way to occasional fits of
+intemperance or the desire for drugs. The qualities of the fiery Mount of
+Mars, from which such a Line of Head starts inside the Life Line, is
+largely the cause of the peculiarities above indicated. The opposite
+Mount of Mars (page <a href="#Page_141">141</a>) on the side of the hand, on the contrary, gives<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span>
+mental control, so that even when the Line of Head runs out straight on
+the palm it partakes of this "Mental Mars" quality, and so denotes that
+later on in years the subject with such a Line of Head will be able to
+develop mental control. The sloping Line of Head, however, would denote
+that the subject allows himself to turn, as it were, away from mental
+control, and so lets the earlier tendencies become his master.</p>
+
+<p>This point alone is worthy of the consideration of all parents, and if
+observed by them would do much to help such children to develop mental
+control over themselves. The accompanying plates show this formation of
+the Line of Head in all its variations.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE</h3>
+
+<p>The position of this line indicates in all cases a highly sensitive
+disposition, which inclines towards the side of caution and also lacks
+self-confidence (2-2, <a href="#Plate_I_I">Plate I</a>.). Even the cleverest people with this sign
+seem to rein themselves in too tightly, and are always inclined to
+undervalue their capabilities and talents.</p>
+
+<p>When, with the same indication, the line is also sloping slightly
+downwards, the sensitiveness is still more increased. This form is
+largely found on the hands of artists, painters, and those who even in
+other walks of life have the sensitive artistic temperament, even though
+it may not have been developed to a larger extent. If, on the contrary,
+the Line of Head joined to the Line of Life runs straight out across the
+hand towards the mental Mount of Mars (2-2, <a href="#Plate_I_I">Plate I</a>.), the subject,
+though still extremely sensitive, has got greater courage of his
+opinions. Such people do not get credit for being as highly sensitive as
+do<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span> the other people with the line sloping downwards towards the Mount of
+Imagination. The straighter the Head Line is found, the subject can be
+more relied on to carry out his determination, and often these highly
+sensitive and even nervous people are found doing very determined work in
+connection with some battle for principle or for right which they believe
+it their moral duty to carry out. If this class of Line of Head, however,
+go very far across the hand and straight on to the Mental Mount of Mars,
+it indicates an extremely strong-willed determined person who has the
+power to hide his sensitiveness and nervousness and stake everything for
+what he believes his duty to carry out.</p>
+
+<p>The difference in the observation of these two distinct classes of
+individuals, namely, those with the Line of Head joined but sloping, and
+the Line of Head joined and straight across the hand, has caused many
+exponents of this study to make great mistakes in the judgment of their
+subject. When, as is very often the case, the Line of Head is forked
+(3-3, <a href="#Plate_II_I">Plate II</a>.), also when joined and when these forked lines are equal
+to one another, especially in cases where the Line of Head is joined to
+the Line of Life showing the sensitive temperament, this forked mark
+often indicates a certain want of decision. The subject is inclined to
+balance too much between the two qualities of brain, the practical and
+the imaginative. As to what they should do for the best, in such cases it
+is always wise to advise the subject to act according to first impulse
+either in dealing with practical or imaginative things. By so doing they
+employ, as it were, the intuition of the brain, and by using it do not
+waver and vacillate by too much reasoning<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> over the question or
+endeavouring to see both sides of it at once. When the sloping Line of
+Head has a gentle curve downwards towards the Mount of the Moon (1-1,
+<a href="#Plate_II_I">Plate II</a>.), distinct control over the imagination is indicated. The
+student will then know that the subject simply uses his imagination when
+he wishes to do so instead of being controlled by it. But the contrary is
+the case when the line bends too far down this Mount (4-4, <a href="#Plate_II_I">Plate II</a>.). In
+this case the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> subject is the slave of his imagination and generally does
+erratic and peculiar things or can only work in moods of the moment.
+People of this latter class seldom, if ever, produce the great results in
+the world of art or imagination as do those who have the line simply
+curving downwards into this Mount.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_II_I" id="Plate_II_I"></a></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a href="images/fig049.jpg"><img src="images/fig049_th.jpg" width="335" height="359" alt="Plate II. THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS TERMINATIONS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate II. THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS TERMINATIONS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When the Line of the Head bends completely down and turns with a curve,
+as it were, under the base of the Mount of Luna (5-5, <a href="#Plate_II_I">Plate II</a>.), the
+tendency is to extreme morbid imaginings and such extreme sensitiveness,
+that people on whose hands it is found generally separate themselves from
+the rest of their fellows, and either retire from the world altogether
+and live a solitary life or else make their exit by the gate of suicide.
+The latter is, in fact, generally the ending of such lives. Their extreme
+sensitiveness evidently renders life for them almost unbearable. But this
+formation must not be confounded with the Line of Head curving downwards
+through the upper part of the Mount (4-4, <a href="#Plate_II_I">Plate II</a>.). In this latter
+case, it can even descend as far down as the wrist itself, and, unless it
+has an island or star at the end of the line, there is not the danger of
+suicide. In all such cases, however, there is extreme imagination,
+extreme sensibility, and a tendency to melancholy and morbidness, but
+there is no indication of the brain breaking down under strain as there
+is in the other case of what is known as the distinct tendency for
+self-murder.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE</h3>
+
+<p>The Line of Head is more frequently found connected with than separated
+from the Line of Life.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> When the space is not very wide (3-3, <a href="#Plate_I_I">Plate I</a>.),
+it is an excellent mark to have, giving independence of thought,
+quickness of judgment, and a certain mental daring that is invaluable in
+fighting the battle of life. When the Line of Head is at the same time
+lying fairly straight across the palm, such individuals have an immense
+power over others, but their capabilities are always more distinctly
+shown if they should in any form go in for some kind of public life.
+People<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> possessing this mark are rather less "hard students" than those
+with the Line of Head and Line of Life joined together, but they have
+such brilliancy and quickness of thought that they seem to see in a flash
+that which takes the other class hard work to attain. But these people
+with the "open Line of Head" must, above all things, have purpose in
+their life. Without purpose they are rather like a ship drifting on an
+idle sea. They may spend their life in an aimless way unless "the call"
+comes to them or the tide of ambition turns their way and carries them
+onward.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_III_I" id="Plate_III_I"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 338px;">
+<a href="images/fig051.jpg"><img src="images/fig051_th.jpg" width="338" height="359" alt="Plate III. THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate III. THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The same class of line but sloping is the more uncertain of the two
+characters, because the person is still more inclined to work only by
+moods. If the mood or the desire does not come, such people, although
+always brilliant and clever, may often waste their lives doing nothing.</p>
+
+<p>Those people with the Line of Head "open" and ascending slightly upwards
+towards or on to the Mental Mount of Mars (3-3, <a href="#Plate_III_I">Plate III</a>.), are
+self-appointed leaders, organizers of any public movement. They will
+sacrifice everything, home, affection, and all ties for what they believe
+is their public duty in connection with the work that they have
+undertaken.</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Head very open and separate from the Line of Life denotes a
+character with too little caution or sensitiveness (4-4, <a href="#Plate_III_I">Plate III</a>.). The
+subject will go to the opposite extreme of him with the Line of Head and
+Line of Life joined. When the space is very wide it denotes excessive
+impetuosity and lack of continuity of purpose, a person who pushes
+himself forward on all occasions, a great desire for notoriety and one
+continually changing his plans as far as the world is concerned. When
+this line is excessively<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> open or separate from the Line of Life, the
+brain seems to be an extremely excitable one. The subject suffers greatly
+from excessive blood to the head, mental hysteria, sleeplessness, and all
+things that affect the brain. If the Line of Head is badly formed with
+islands, or a broad line with breaks and hair lines (1-1, <a href="#Plate_IV_I">Plate IV</a>.), it
+is just as much a mark of another form of insanity as the Line of Head
+curving downwards at the wrist, but with the line mentioned the type is
+inclined to be morbid with a tendency to suicide.</p>
+
+<p>This other Line of Head with islands indicates the character that will be
+more likely to be excitable and fly into a temper and kill other people.
+A Line of Head not too widely separated and either one end of it
+commencing on the Mount of Jupiter, or with its main branch from the
+Mount of Jupiter (4-4, <a href="#Plate_III_I">Plate III</a>.), is one of the most brilliant marks of
+all. The student must, however, carefully establish this difference of
+the Line of Head in his own mind, as well as the termination or the
+ending of this line. Once he has these two points firmly established, he
+has gained the great keynote to this subject. When once this part is
+mastered, he has a sure foundation to work on.</p>
+
+<p>My next remarks will relate to the minor marks and their meaning, and to
+islands or breaks on or in the Line of Head.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS SECONDARY SIGNS</h3>
+
+<p>What are known as "islands" in the Line of Head are very important,
+especially if they are considered both in relation to the age at which
+they occur, and also in relation to the mentality itself.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In the first place the principal rule the student must bear in mind is,
+that islands must be considered as showing a weakness in any line
+wherever they may be found, and are to be considered unfortunate signs.</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Head when found in the form of a continuous chain (1-1,
+<a href="#Plate_IV_I">Plate IV</a>.), all through the line, they denote mental weakness, but
+generally produced by ill-health which more immediately affects the
+brain.</p>
+
+<p>Such mental weakness or "brain illness," if found with nails showing very
+small "moons" or none at all, denotes an an&aelig;mic condition of the blood
+that affects the brain, a low condition of vitality and bad circulation,
+which seems to starve the brain of blood and prevents such people from
+making any continuous effort in regard to study or will power, and causes
+them to act in an erratic fashion.</p>
+
+<p>If at the same time the Line of Head is seen placed very high on the
+hand, this sign is worse still in its meaning, and such subjects are
+inclined to be "half mad" in periods.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Head is widely separated from the Line of Life, then
+this chain formation of islands is still more accentuated and more
+difficult to cure. Such subjects have periods of mental excitability
+which it seems impossible for them to control, and in such moments they
+are liable to fly off at a tangent and commit mad or rash acts, but acts
+generally dangerous to other people.</p>
+
+<p>When, however, the Line of Head is very sloping (2-2, <a href="#Plate_IV_I">Plate IV</a>.), with
+this formation of islands the subject is inclined to have fits of
+depression and melancholy, during which he is likely to shrink away from
+people or make an attempt against his own life.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span> "Suicide while
+temporarily insane" is the verdict of the jury in such cases.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_IV_I" id="Plate_IV_I"></a></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 328px;">
+<a href="images/fig055.jpg"><img src="images/fig055_th.jpg" width="328" height="370" alt="Plate IV. ISLANDS ON THE LINE OF HEAD." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate IV. ISLANDS ON THE LINE OF HEAD.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Another important point of consideration in relation to the islands in
+the Line of Head, is to note their position on the line itself, or under
+what finger they make their appearance. When these islands are found at
+the commencement of the line under the first finger or Mount of Jupiter
+(3, <a href="#Plate_IV_I">Plate IV</a>.), it will be found that the subject in early life was
+delicate mentally,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> and displayed no energy of will; no desire to study,
+was listless and without ambition.</p>
+
+<p>Under the second finger on the Mount of Saturn (4, <a href="#Plate_IV_I">Plate IV</a>.), the
+subject, on the contrary, is inclined to suffer from severe headaches,
+morbidness, melancholy, and a tendency for inflammation, especially at
+the base of the head.</p>
+
+<p>If the line looks weak or frays into little hair lines from this point
+out, it shows that the subject will never recover thoroughly from this
+malady.</p>
+
+<p>Under the third finger, the Mount of Sun (5, <a href="#Plate_IV_I">Plate IV</a>.), an island shows
+a very curious fact, namely that the person is inclined to suffer from
+weakness of the eyes and short-sight. If many of these islands are marked
+it generally foreshadows a still greater tendency to blindness and
+weakness of the sight.</p>
+
+<p>Islands under the fourth finger, the Mount of Mercury (6, <a href="#Plate_IV_I">Plate IV</a>.), and
+the extremity of the Head Line denote weakness of the brain in old age,
+and a highly nervous worrying disposition. If very badly marked they
+denote that in the latter part of life the subject may be disposed to
+insanity proceeding from a worrying disposition, and often from the
+overstraining of the mental faculties. It will thus be seen that every
+portion of this remarkable line may be divided into sections to obtain
+marvellous detail in making predictions for the future.</p>
+
+<p>This line can further be divided, showing with considerable clearness the
+ages at which troubles or changes in the mentality may be expected.</p>
+
+<p>Under the first finger the period of the life indicated is the first 21
+years, the second period contains another section of the three 7's, and
+lasts until 42 years of age; the third period of 7's which will be found
+under<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> the third finger indicates the section from 49 to 63, and the
+fourth section which takes in the remainder of the hand, under the fourth
+finger, stands for the period from 70 up to the end.</p>
+
+
+<h3>CHANGES IN THE LINE OF HEAD</h3>
+
+<p>Another extremely interesting point in studying the Line of Head is to
+take notice of certain changes in its position, or lines either dropping
+or rising from it, which will also be found to give very remarkable
+information. For example: if a sloping Line of Head at any point in its
+track seems to curve or slightly bend upwards (1-1, <a href="#Plate_V_I">Plate V</a>.), it
+indicates that about that period of the person's life some unusual strain
+will be forced upon him. If this curved line is clearly marked and not
+interfered with by things that look like blotches in it, the person,
+although of a completely opposite turn of mind to the practical, will yet
+rise superior to the occasion, and for the time being will develop a
+practical or business-like way of looking at things which may even be the
+very reverse of the nature.</p>
+
+<p>If, however, instead of the curve or bend a fine line is seen leaving the
+Head Line in an upward direction (2-2, <a href="#Plate_V_I">Plate V</a>.), that period will leave
+a definite mark on the subject's entire character for the remainder of
+his life. In some cases these fine lines will, after a few years, appear
+to develop more strongly, and may even become a kind of second Head Line.
+This would denote that the person continues to cultivate the practical
+side of his nature that was at that period called into existence.</p>
+
+<p>If one were examining a straight Line of Head and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span> noticed a curve
+downward or a fine line growing downwards from it (3-3, <a href="#Plate_V_I">Plate V</a>.), the
+natural interpretation of such a mark would be that at that date in the
+person's career he had become less practical, or for the time being
+developed the more imaginative qualities of the mentality. In this latter
+case, curiously enough, it often denotes that the person had at that
+period of his life become more wealthy or prosperous,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> and so he was able
+to develop the artistic side of his nature. It is logical to assume that
+he could only have done this if the strain in the practical battle had
+been lessened about that time, but this must only be presumed if, at
+about the same date, the Sun Line (<a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.) were seen clearly marked or
+suddenly appearing on the hand, then the student can be positive in
+assuming that at that date greater ease and comfort came into the
+subject's life and he consequently turned to the more imaginative side of
+existence.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_V_I" id="Plate_V_I"></a></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a href="images/fig058.png"><img src="images/fig058_th.png" width="335" height="372" alt="Plate V. MORE VARIATIONS OF THE LINE OF HEAD." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate V. MORE VARIATIONS OF THE LINE OF HEAD.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>If the Line of Head itself should curve upward, especially at the end
+towards the fourth finger or Mount of Mercury (4-4, <a href="#Plate_V_I">Plate V</a>.), it denotes
+almost without exception that the longer the person lives the more his
+desire for money and his determination to possess it will become stronger
+every year.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Head apparently partly leaves its natural place, which
+will be seen by an examination of the left hand, and completely rises as
+it were to the Line of Heart (5-5, <a href="#Plate_V_I">Plate V</a>.), the person will develop an
+enormous fixity of purpose for some one desire. He will apparently and
+deliberately control the affectionate side of his nature by his will
+power, and will stick at nothing to obtain the realisation of whatever
+his desire may be. If this mark is found on a square thick-set material
+looking hand, it is a foregone conclusion that the subject has set his
+determination on some material object, such as wealth, and he will stop
+at nothing, even crime, in carrying out his aim. If this mark is found on
+a long hand the object of the ambition is certain to be connected with
+intellectual power over people and absolute determination to accomplish
+whatever the purpose of the career may be.</p>
+
+<p>This mark must not be confounded with one clear<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span> line running across the
+hand from side to side (<a href="#Plate_VI_I">Plate VI</a>.), because in this case the Line of Head
+has not risen out of its position, but simply denotes tremendous
+intensity of character, for good or evil as the case may be; such a
+person would exhibit great power of concentration, and if he concentrated
+his mentality on any purpose he would unite with it his heart<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span> nature.
+But if he had set his heart or affections on any person, he would unite
+with that desire the whole force of his mental nature. In this case it is
+as if these two sides of the mentality, the sentimental and the mental,
+were linked or in some way united together. Such persons I have always
+found possess greater intensity of purpose than any other, but I have
+never found it a very happy mark to possess.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_VI_I" id="Plate_VI_I"></a></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 352px;">
+<a href="images/fig060.png"><img src="images/fig060_th.png" width="352" height="380" alt="Plate VI. THE LINE OF HEAD AND THE LINE OF HEART RUNNING TOGETHER." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate VI. THE LINE OF HEAD AND THE LINE OF HEART RUNNING TOGETHER.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>In the first place, this peculiar type of person appears to be so rare in
+life that he seems to have no companions and for that reason has always
+the feeling of being intensely lonely and isolated from others. He is
+usually also in every way super-sensitive and easily wounded in his
+feelings. I have seldom found these people successful, unless when acting
+alone, but if linked with others by partnership in business, etc., they
+seem to feel their personality cramped, and the partnership as a rule
+seldom results happily. In considering this, the student must carefully
+observe whether this one line across the hand lies across the centre
+where the Head Line would naturally be, or whether it lies higher up
+towards the base of the fingers where the Heart Line is generally found.
+If the former case, one may be sure that it is a question of head and
+mentality and very little heart; but if the latter, it is a question of
+more intensity of feeling emotion and affection than of mental intensity.</p>
+
+
+<h3>CROSSES AND SQUARES IN CONNECTION WITH THE LINE OF HEAD</h3>
+
+<p>Small, sharply-defined crosses in any position just over or touching the
+Line of Head are generally signs of accidents to the Head itself.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><i>Under Jupiter</i> (1, <a href="#Plate_VII_I">Plate VII</a>.), they usually are brought about by blows
+caused generally by the subject's desire to rule and to be too dogmatic
+or tyrannical.</p>
+
+<p><i>Under Saturn</i> (2, <a href="#Plate_VII_I">Plate VII</a>.), crosses indicate injuries to the head
+from accidents by animals, blows by treachery, mine explosions, etc., and
+generally relate to accidents of a treacherous nature.</p>
+
+<p><i>Under the Mount of the Sun</i> (3, <a href="#Plate_VII_I">Plate VII</a>.), these crosses have been
+found to relate to accidents to the head from sudden falls, such as the
+subject striking his head by falling, concussion of the brain, etc.</p>
+
+<p><i>Under the Mount of Mercury</i> (4, <a href="#Plate_VII_I">Plate VII</a>.), these sharply defined
+crosses relate to injuries to the head due to accidents generally
+produced by scientific experiments or some hazardous business venture.</p>
+
+<p>Small defined squares touching the Line of Head (5, <a href="#Plate_VII_I">Plate VII</a>.), are in
+all cases signs of preservation, and they relate to the particular
+qualities of the Mount of the hand under which they are found. (<i>See</i>
+chapter on Mounts, page <a href="#Page_140">140</a>.)</p>
+
+
+<h3>DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD</h3>
+
+<p>Double Lines of Head (6-6, <a href="#Plate_VII_I">Plate VII</a>.), are as rarely found as are cases
+of the single line right across the hand. In all cases where the Double
+Line of Head stands out distinct and clear as two separate lines, the
+object will be found to have a dual mentality. He is usually capable of
+an enormous amount of mental work and is of that class of people who
+carry out two separate mental lives with success. It is often found with
+one line joined to the Line of Life and the other rising from the Mount
+of Jupiter; if such is the case, the interpretation would be that one<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span>
+side of the nature is extremely sensitive and cautious, while the other
+is self-confident with a great desire to rule or enforce its mental ideas
+on the world.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_VII_I" id="Plate_VII_I"></a></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 331px;">
+<a href="images/fig063.jpg"><img src="images/fig063_th.jpg" width="331" height="359" alt="Plate VII. DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD, ALSO CROSSES AND SQUARES." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate VII. DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD, ALSO CROSSES AND SQUARES.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Although such a sign as the Double Line of Head gives a remarkable degree
+of mentality, yet I have always found it a more successful sign to find
+one clear Line of Head well marked on the hand than the two Lines of Head
+in any of their positions.</p>
+
+<p>Another form of the Double Line of Head (7-7,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span> <a href="#Plate_VII_I">Plate VII</a>.), is one where
+the main line seems to separate about the middle of the hand, and where
+one branch goes across the hand and the other descends towards the Mount
+of the Moon. In such a case we get the double mental personality, but one
+which is more under the control of the will of the subject, whereas the
+two double distinct lines denote that the two mental personalities seem
+to act independently one from the other.</p>
+
+<p>It has been considered by many ancient authorities that the Double Line
+of Head, when found with two distinct lines, is a sign of the inheritance
+of great riches or power. I have generally found, however, that what it
+means is, that although the financial results of such a person's life may
+be either great wealth or power, yet he may inherit it from his mental
+right and not from his birth right.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEAD ON THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS</h3>
+
+<p>There are seven distinct types of hands, bearing in their own way more or
+less relationship to the Seven Races of Humanity (page <a href="#Page_118">118</a>).</p>
+
+<p>These seven types of hands are as follows:</p>
+
+<p>
+&nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;I.&mdash;The Elementary or Lowest type.<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;II.&mdash;The Square, also called the Useful or Practical.<br />
+&nbsp;III.&mdash;The Spatulate or Active.<br />
+&nbsp;IV.&mdash;The Philosophic.<br />
+&nbsp;&nbsp;V.&mdash;The Conic or Artistic.<br />
+&nbsp;VI.&mdash;The Psychic or Idealistic.<br />
+VII.&mdash;The Mixed Hand.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>As a rule the Line of Head is generally found in accordance with the type
+of hand on which it is seen, namely, lying straight or what is called
+"level-headed" on the Square-looking or Practical hand; or sloping, and
+thus indicating the more imaginative qualities on the Philosophic, Conic,
+or Psychic types.</p>
+
+<p>Consequently, if it be found on a hand in what may be called opposition
+to its class, such a Line of Head immediately possesses a greater
+significance.</p>
+
+<p>For example, if a sloping Line of Mentality were seen on the Square or
+Practical hand, it would indicate that though the bases of that man or
+woman's thoughts and plans were of the practical kind, yet they possessed
+a far greater power of imagination than any casual observer would at
+first sight give them credit for.</p>
+
+<p>On the contrary, if the Line of Head were found straight or level on the
+Spatulate, Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic types, it would denote that the
+person in question was usually level-headed and practical, even in their
+highest dreams of philosophy or idealistic creations.</p>
+
+<p>On the Elementary hand the Line of Head is usually found short, straight,
+and coarse-looking, often nothing more than a short deep-set furrow.
+Consequently, if found long and clear, it would indicate a superior
+mental development in a coarse brutal or animal nature.</p>
+
+<p>If in a Square-looking hand the Line of Head were found sloping instead
+of long and straight, it would denote an unusual development of the
+artistic and imaginative qualities, but always with the practical and
+logical basis for its support.</p>
+
+<p>On the Spatulate hand the natural indication of the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> Line of Head is
+long, clear and sloping, but if found straight or level it would indicate
+a practical development of the brain endeavouring to set off the active
+energy and originality indicated by the Spatulate formation.</p>
+
+<p>On the Philosophic type, the hand of the thinker and philosopher, the
+usual position of the Line of Mentality is long and sloping, but if found
+straight or level it indicates a mental development of the logical and
+practical qualities which might not be expected in such a class or type.</p>
+
+<p>The same rules hold good with the Conic and Psychic, but with what is
+called the Mixed type, the best Line of Head to find would be one, long
+straight and level-looking, because this class, being a mixture as it
+were of all the others, would require a practical or level-headed
+mentality to hold its own amid the mixture of tendencies which the last
+type personifies.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_III" id="CHAPTER_III"></a>CHAPTER III</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS</h3>
+
+<p>The Line of Life is that line which runs round the base of the thumb and
+lies directly over a large blood-vessel called the great Palmer Arch
+(1-1, <a href="#Plate_VIII_I">Plate VIII</a>.). This blood-vessel is more directly connected with the
+heart, stomach, and vital organs which may have given use to its term
+"The Vital," as used by the ancients.</p>
+
+<p>It is reasonable to assume that it is this intimate connection with the
+vital organs of the body which enables it to foretell the length of life
+from <i>natural causes</i>.</p>
+
+<p>If the student will bear this in mind it will make clear and plain to him
+many difficulties in connection with predictions as to health and
+disease, and he will follow more easily the following explanations.</p>
+
+<p>The first rules to master are, that to be normal the Line of Life should
+be long, clearly marked, and without any irregularities or breaks of any
+kind. Such a formation would indicate length of life, vitality, freedom
+from illness, and strength of constitution (1-1, <a href="#Plate_VIII_I">Plate VIII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>Bearing the first observation in mind it will be noticed that as the Line
+of Life represents the stomach and the vital organs, when well marked
+the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> stomach and digestion must necessarily be in a good condition.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_VIII_I" id="Plate_VIII_I"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 327px;">
+<a href="images/fig068.jpg"><img src="images/fig068_th.jpg" width="327" height="355" alt="Plate VIII. THE LINE OF LIFE AND SECTIONS OF INFLUENCES FROM THE MOUNTS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate VIII. THE LINE OF LIFE AND SECTIONS OF INFLUENCES FROM THE MOUNTS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When made up of little pieces or linked like a chain, it is a certain
+sign of poor health, weak stomach and lack of vitality.</p>
+
+<p>At this point I must ask the most careful attention to the following
+rules&mdash;which no other book on the subject contains, and which I have not
+published in any of my other writings, viz.: as the Line of Life<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> seems
+in every sense to be the representative on the hand of the body or trunk
+of the man&mdash;so the position of these breaks, marks, links, or islands
+denotes the portion of the body most affected.</p>
+
+<p>Before we go further I must also impress on the student to grasp the fact
+that every line or sign on the hand plays a dual r&ocirc;le. By one of their
+r&ocirc;les these lines indicate the disease the person is most liable to for
+the entire run of the life, and in another r&ocirc;le these lines indicate the
+date when the illness will reach its greatest gravity.</p>
+
+<p>To explain carefully this strange phenomenon of nature, I have divided
+this line into sections (<i>see</i> <a href="#Plate_VIII_I">Plate VIII</a>.), and although I am not
+writing on astrology in these pages, yet all believers in that science
+may be interested to find how wonderfully these twin sciences agree when
+the comparison is pointed out by an impartial observer such as I claim to
+be.</p>
+
+<p>In <a href="#Plate_VIII_I">Plate VIII</a>. are shown the Sections of the Line of Life with their
+various tendencies divided by the mounts at the base of the fingers. This
+will materially assist the student to comprehend their significance and,
+together with the influence of the month of birth as set out in the
+chapters on the Mounts of the Hand (page <a href="#Page_140">140</a>), will enable him to obtain
+an accuracy on all matters relating to health, diseases, and dangers to
+the life that up till now has never been attained.</p>
+
+<p>We will now proceed to consider the details as regards the Line of Life
+itself.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF LIFE</h3>
+
+<p>It is very important at the outset to consider the qualities of this very
+important line. In some hands<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> it is broad and shallow on the surface of
+the hand, in others it is deep and fine; the appearance of this line is
+very often deceptive, and leads students astray when they have not had
+their attention called to its appearance.</p>
+
+<p>The broad, shallow Line of Life often leads people to suppose that it is
+a sign of a very healthy, robust constitution; but, on the contrary, such
+an indication is not nearly as good a sign as a clear, thin, deep line.
+The broad Life Line seems to belong to people who have more robust animal
+strength, whereas the finer line relates to people who have more nerve or
+will-force. Under any strain of ill-health, it is the finer line that
+will hold out, whereas the broad-looking line has not the same resisting
+force.</p>
+
+<p>Very broad lines on the hand denote more muscular strength than will
+power, and I cannot impress this difference too strongly on the minds of
+my readers. If the line is made of chain formation (1-1, <a href="#Plate_IX_I">Plate IX</a>.), it
+is a sure sign of a tendency to bad health, and especially so if the hand
+be soft. The same marks on a hard, firm hand would not indicate as much
+delicacy, because hard, firm hands denote in themselves a robust
+constitution.</p>
+
+<p>Another important point to consider is, whether the Line of Life goes
+straight up to the side of the Mount of Venus and narrows that Mount
+(2-2, <a href="#Plate_IX_I">Plate IX</a>.), or whether it forms a well-defined curve or semicircle
+out into the palm (3-3, <a href="#Plate_IX_I">Plate IX</a>.). In the first case it indicates a
+naturally more delicate constitution, and less force of animal magnetism.
+This explanation will be readily understood by readers when I again call
+their attention to the fact that one of the most important blood-vessels
+going from the body to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> hand is called the Great Palmer Arch, which
+carries the blood up to the hand towards the root of the thumb, and
+carries the circulation back on the other side of the Arch almost
+underneath the Line of Life. It will, therefore, be seen that people who
+have a weaker constitution are more likely to have this Great Palmer Arch
+narrower in construction than those who have a robust constitution and
+strong circulation of the blood. This is the reason why, when the Mount<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span>
+of Venus is large and wide on the hand, it gives rise to the idea that it
+indicates a more passionate animal nature than when this mount is thin
+and narrow.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_IX_I" id="Plate_IX_I"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a href="images/fig071.png"><img src="images/fig071_th.png" width="335" height="356" alt="Plate IX. THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate IX. THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>While speaking on this particular point, I must also call attention to
+the fact that when the Line of Head is curved downwards instead of
+running straight across the palm, that it seems to be more attracted to
+the qualities indicated by the Mount of Venus and gives more to the
+imaginative, romantic nature, showing a greater tendency to fall in love,
+than with people who possess the Line of Head running straight across the
+hand, as if it were not attracted to the qualities indicated by the Mount
+of Venus. It will thus be seen that every point of this study bearing on
+character can be reasoned out from a logical standpoint. This places the
+study upon a higher foundation than when it is considered purely from the
+superstitious standpoint with which it has so long been associated.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Life is seen to rise high on the hand towards the Mount of
+Jupiter (4-4, <a href="#Plate_IX_I">Plate IX</a>.), the subject has more control over himself, and
+his life is more governed by the ambitious side of his nature. When,
+however, the Line of Life rises lower down on the palm, more from the
+Mount of Mars (5-5, <a href="#Plate_IX_I">Plate IX</a>.), it gives less control over the temper.
+When this sign is noticed, especially in the case of young persons, it
+will be found that they are more quarrelsome, more disobedient, and have
+less ambition in connection with their studies.</p>
+
+
+<h3>ASCENDING LINES</h3>
+
+<p>When the Line of Life is found with a number of ascending lines, even if
+they are small, it denotes a<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span> life of greater energy; and the dates at
+which these lines ascend from the Line of Life may always be considered
+points at which the subject has made a particular effort towards whatever
+may have been the special purpose of his destiny at that moment. When
+these lines are seen ascending towards or on the Mount of Jupiter (1-1,
+<a href="#Plate_X">Plate X</a>.), it indicates the desire and ambition to rise in life,
+especially in some way that would give the subject control or authority
+over others. If one of the lines be found partly arrested or stopped at
+the Line of Head (2-2, <a href="#Plate_X">Plate X</a>.), it indicates that the subject has by
+some mental error of judgment or stupidity, broken or prevented the
+effort, which started well, from reaching a successful termination. If
+one of these lines reaches and stops at the Line of Heart, it indicates
+that the affections have, or will, interfere with the subject's special
+effort in whatever direction this line indicates. If one of these lines
+crosses and joins the line of Fate (3-3, <a href="#Plate_X">Plate X</a>.), it indicates and
+gives two distinct dates which are very curious in their meaning. The
+first date it gives is when this line leaves the Line of Life on its way
+towards the Line of Fate. The date of this start towards the Line of Fate
+will be given on the Line of Fate itself, right opposite where this line
+begins to grow from the Line of Life. This mark will denote that the
+subject has made a determined effort at that moment in his career to make
+his own destiny, and to break free from the circumstances or people that
+surround him or tie him down.</p>
+
+<p>It is always a successful sign when this line is found to join the Line
+of Fate, especially if the Line of Fate looks stronger at or about this
+point of the junction.</p>
+
+<p>The second date is given at the period in the Line<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span> of Life when one is
+reading down the Line of Life itself. The singular point about this is
+that a repetition of circumstances will be found to occur in the destiny.
+Suppose, for example, one saw this line going towards the Fate Line at
+twenty-six years of age&mdash;a circumstance or repetition of the occurrence
+will be found to occur at almost double that age, namely, fifty-two years
+of age, which would give a more or less exact date of this occurrence
+when reading the Line of Life. As an illustration to help the reader I
+may say that I have generally found that this mark will indicate that the
+subject has, in the first instance, broken free from some tie at an early
+date, and that a similar occurrence will take place at the second date,
+viz., late in life, when again the subject seems to break free from some
+tie, and goes out more into the world for himself.</p>
+
+<p>This curious sign very often helps in deciding matters as regards
+marriage. The man, or woman, will apparently assert his independence
+more, and leave the ties of home life, and again go out in the world and
+fight the battle for himself, as he did in the earlier part of his
+existence, when he probably left his parents' influence and forged ahead
+for himself.</p>
+
+<p>When the ascending line is seen crossing over towards the Mount of
+Saturn, and running as an independent line not joined to the Line of Fate
+(6, <a href="#Plate_X">Plate X</a>.), it will be found that the subject has carried out a kind
+of second fate. The date when this line left the Line of Life will give
+the first date of its commencement, <i>i.e.</i>, opposite it on the Fate Line.
+If the line be a good one it would give its second date when reading down
+the Line of Life, where, if the line were good, it carried out this
+second fate to a successful culmination.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IV" id="CHAPTER_IV"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF MARS OR INNER LIFE LINE</h3>
+
+<p>What is called the Line of Mars is that line that is found only on some
+hands encircling the Mount of Venus and inside the Line of Life.</p>
+
+<p>This Line, which rises on the Mount of Mars, from which it derives its
+name, when found clear and strong appears to back up and reinforce the
+Line of Life (4-4, <a href="#Plate_X">Plate X</a>.). It indicates great vitality, power of
+resistance to illness and disease, and is not found on all hands.</p>
+
+<p>It is an excellent sign on the hands of soldiers, or in connection with
+all persons who follow a dangerous calling.</p>
+
+<p>All breaks or bad marks indicated on the Line of Life are minimized on
+the hands that have this Inner Life Line, or Line of Mars.</p>
+
+<p>As its name implies, in character it denotes a robust and rather fighting
+disposition, a person naturally inclined to rush into dangers and
+quarrels, and if deeply marked and reddish in colour it increases all
+indications of accidents and dangers shown on other parts of the hand.</p>
+
+<p>When a branch seems to shoot off from this line and runs on to the Mount
+of Luna (5-5, <a href="#Plate_X">Plate X</a>.), it foreshadows restlessness and an intense
+craving for<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> excitement. With a weak-looking Line of Mentality it is a
+sure sign of a craving for drink and intemperance of all kinds, and at
+the point where it breaks through the Line of Life, it generally
+indicates death brought on by the intemperance this mark foreshadows.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_X" id="Plate_X"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 328px;">
+<a href="images/fig076.png"><img src="images/fig076_th.png" width="328" height="363" alt="Plate X. THE LINE OF LIFE, THE LINE OF MARS, AND OTHER SIGNS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate X. THE LINE OF LIFE, THE LINE OF MARS, AND OTHER SIGNS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>It is generally found on short, thick-set square hands or short hands,
+but when found on a long, thin, and narrow palm, it indicates great
+vitality and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span> resistance to disease, a nervous, highly-strung, and rather
+irritable disposition.</p>
+
+<p>Any broken Life Line with this Line of Mars behind it may indicate great
+danger of death where the break appears, but a danger that will be
+overcome through the vitality indicated by this Inner Life Line or Line
+of Mars.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_V" id="CHAPTER_V"></a>CHAPTER V</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF DESTINY OR FATE</h3>
+
+<p>The Line of Destiny, otherwise called the Line of Fate (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.)
+is naturally one of the most important of the principal lines of the
+hand.</p>
+
+<p>Although one may never be able to explain why it is, this line
+undoubtedly appears to indicate at least the main events of one's career.</p>
+
+<p>It may be found on the hand even at the moment of birth, clearly
+indicating the class of Fate or Destiny that lies in the far distant
+future before the individual.</p>
+
+<p>In some cases it may look faint or shadowy, as if the path of Destiny
+were not yet clearly defined, while in other instances almost every step
+of the road is chiselled out with its milestones of failure or success,
+sorrow or joy, as the case may be.</p>
+
+<p>That some human beings seem to be more children of Fate than others has
+been admitted by almost all thinkers, but why they should be so has been
+the great question that baffles all students of such subjects.</p>
+
+<p>There are some who appear to have no Fate, and others who seem to carve
+their Destiny from day to day.</p>
+
+<p>I have seen hundreds of cases where every step of the journey was
+indicated from childhood to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span> grave; others where only the principal
+changes in the career were marked in advance. There are, again, others
+where nothing seemed decided, and where the events indicated by the Line
+of Fate appeared to change from year to year.</p>
+
+<p>The why and wherefore of such things may be impossible to fathom, but
+there are so many mysteries in Life itself that one more or less does not
+seem to matter.</p>
+
+<p>Some of the greatest teachers and philosophers have come to the
+conclusion that Fate exists for all. In the 17th Article of Religion in
+the Episcopal Church it is stated, and in no uncertain manner, that
+"Predestination to life is the everlasting purpose of God." All through
+the Bible the Destiny of nations and of men is clearly laid down, and
+from the first chapter of Genesis to the last page of Revelation the
+trials, tribulations, and pathway of the Jews was prophesied and
+predicted ages in advance.</p>
+
+<p>Thousands of years before the birth of Christ, it was foretold in Holy
+Writ in what manner He should be born, and in what manner He should die.
+It was predicted that a Virgin should conceive and that a Judas should
+betray, and that both were necessary "that the Scriptures might be
+fulfilled."</p>
+
+<p>In more recent ages thousands and thousands of predictions have been
+fulfilled, and all point to some mysterious agency that underlies the
+purpose of humanity, and that nothing from the smallest to the greatest
+is left to blind chance.</p>
+
+<p>It may be that the Soul&mdash;in being part of the Universal Soul of all
+things&mdash;<i>knows all things</i>, and so through the instrumentality of the
+brain writes its knowledge of the Future in advance.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>To the mysteries of the mind there are no limits. Medical science has, in
+late years, gone so far as to prove that there must be an advance growth
+or change in the brain cells years before action or change in character
+become the result of such development. For all we know, every deed in our
+careers is the result of some such mental change, and as there are more
+super-sensitive nerves from the brain to the hand, it may then follow
+that such changes and subsequent actions in our lives may be written in
+our hands even long years in advance.</p>
+
+<p>It may be, then, that to all living beings there is a Destiny "that
+shapes our ends, rough hew them as we will."</p>
+
+<p>I would, however, humbly suggest that each of us endeavour by knowledge
+to find what our Fate may be, and like loyal workmen accept whatever the
+task should prove, and so carry it out to the utmost of our ability,
+willing to leave the final result to the Master that thought fit to
+employ us in the working out of His design.</p>
+
+<p>All such questions as these the student of this subject must settle in
+his own mind, for when he or she once broaches this study of Fate, he
+will be assailed on all sides, and the student must be prepared to give
+"an answer for the faith that is in him."</p>
+
+<p>In studying the hand it will be found that the Line of Fate may rise from
+the following distinct positions:</p>
+
+<p>It may rise from and out of the Line of Life (2-2, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.), straight
+up from the wrist (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.), from the Mount of the Moon (3-3,
+<a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.), or from the middle of the palm.</p>
+
+<p>The following is the meaning of these principal positions:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>RISING FROM THE LINE OF LIFE</h3>
+
+<p>Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.), the subject's success will
+be made by personal effort and merit; the early years of such a Fate will
+be cramped and difficult; circumstances and the early surroundings will
+not be favourable, and such people will be greatly hampered or sacrificed
+to the wishes and plans of their parents or relatives. If the Line of
+Fate, however, should run on clear and strong from where it leaves the
+Line of Life, then the subject will overcome all such difficulties and
+win success by his own personal effort and merit, and not depend on what
+is termed luck at any time in the career.</p>
+
+<p>Another striking and important point is that the date or years marked on
+the Line of Fate of such a breaking out into the palm, will be found to
+coincide with the year in the subject's life in which he asserted his
+independence or launched out into what he more particularly wanted to do.
+(<i>See</i> also end of chapter on Time, page <a href="#Page_112">112</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>In any case this date as indicated will be found to be one of the most
+important in his career.<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1_1"><span class="label">[1]</span></a> For how to obtain dates and years <i>see</i> Chapter <a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">XIX</a>.</p></div>
+
+
+<h3>RISING FROM THE WRIST</h3>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate rises from the Wrist (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.) and goes
+straight up the centre of the palm to the Mount of Saturn, provided at
+the same time the Line of Sun (4-4, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.) is found well marked,
+luck, brilliance, and success will attend the Destiny, and extreme good
+fortune may be anticipated.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>RISING FROM THE MOUNT OF THE MOON</h3>
+
+<p>Rising from the Mount of the Moon (3-3, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.) the Fate will be more
+eventful, changeable, and largely depending on the fancy and caprice of
+other people.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XI" id="Plate_XI"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 337px;">
+<a href="images/fig082.jpg"><img src="images/fig082_th.jpg" width="337" height="354" alt="Plate XI. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XI. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>If such a line be found joining the Line of Heart (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XII">Plate XII</a>.), it
+foretells a happy and prosperous marriage, but one in which idealism,
+romance, and some fortunate circumstances play their r&ocirc;le, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> one which
+results more from the caprice or fancy of the person of the other sex.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Fate be itself straight but with a line running in and
+joining it from the Mount of the Moon (5-5, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.), it indicates that
+the influence of some outside person has helped the subject's Fate, and
+it is generally an indication of the influence of another sex to the one
+on whose hand it appears.</p>
+
+<p>When this line of influence from the Mount of the Moon does not, however,
+blend with the Fate Line (2-2, <a href="#Plate_XII">Plate XII</a>.), it denotes that the other
+person's life will always remain distinct, and the influence will last
+only for the length of time that it runs by the side of the subject's
+Fate.</p>
+
+<p>When this influence line cuts the Line of Fate and, leaving it, travels
+on for some distance towards the Mount of Jupiter (3-3, <a href="#Plate_XII">Plate XII</a>.) it
+tells that the person whose influence it denotes will only be attracted
+to the subject by personal ambition&mdash;that this person will use the
+subject for the furthering of his own aims and ambitions, and will desert
+the subject when she is of no further use. This is more commonly seen on
+the hand of a woman than on that of a man.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Fate ascending the hand sends an offshoot from it on or
+towards any of the Mounts, such as to Jupiter, the Sun, or Mercury, then
+the Destiny will be more largely associated with the quality that the
+Mount it approaches symbolises.</p>
+
+<p>For example: If such a line be seen approaching or going towards Jupiter
+(6-6, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.) it denotes responsibility, power of command over others,
+or some high position which will commence to be realised from the date
+when the offshoot leaves the Line of Fate. If such a mark continues its
+course and finishes<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> on the Mount of Jupiter, it is one of the most
+magnificent signs of success that can be found for that particular aim or
+purpose.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_XII" id="Plate_XII"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 336px;">
+<a href="images/fig084.jpg"><img src="images/fig084_th.jpg" width="336" height="361" alt="Plate XII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS VARIATIONS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS VARIATIONS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>If this offshoot ascends towards the Mount of the Sun (7-7, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.)
+the success will be in the direction of riches and public life, which
+will give great publicity or renown; this is also a magnificent sign of
+success.</p>
+
+<p>If the offshoot goes towards the Mount of Mercury (8-8, <a href="#Plate_XI">Plate XI</a>.), the
+success it indicates will be more<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> in the direction of some special
+achievement either in science or commerce.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Fate itself should not ascend towards its habitual
+position on the Mount of Saturn, but, instead, run up towards or on to
+any other Mount, then the whole effort of the life will be tinged with
+whatever quality that particular Mount signifies. Such an indication must
+not, however, be considered as the certain or sure sign of success as
+when the Line of Fate keeps to its own place and sends branches to some
+particular Mount.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate ascends the hand without branches and runs like a
+lonely path up and on to the Mount of Saturn, such a person will be like
+a child of Fate chained to an iron road of circumstances. It will be
+impossible for him to avert the trials of his Destiny or mitigate them in
+any way. He will receive no help from others, and little will ever happen
+except to bring him sorrow or tragedy. Such a mark of Fate through the
+hand must never be considered as "a good line of Destiny."</p>
+
+<p>To have a really good Line of Fate it should not be too heavily marked,
+but just clear and distinct, and, above all, be accompanied by a Line of
+Sun in some form or other.</p>
+
+<p>If a Line of Fate run over the Mount of Saturn and up into the base of
+the finger, it is an unfortunate sign, as everything the subject
+undertakes will get out of his control, and he will not apparently know
+how or when to stop in whatever he takes up.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Heart, the
+career will always be ruined through or by the affections being badly
+placed.</p>
+
+<p>When, however, it joins the Line of Heart and they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> together ascend the
+Mount of Jupiter (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XII">Plate XII</a>.), the subject will have happiness
+through his affections and will be helped by love and affection to attain
+his highest ambitions. He will also be extremely lucky through the
+friendship and love of those he meets, and will be greatly benefited and
+helped by others.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Head (4-4,
+<a href="#Plate_XII">Plate XII</a>.), it foretells that his career will be spoiled by the
+subject's own stupidity or mental foolishness.</p>
+
+
+<h3>RISING FROM THE MIDDLE OF THE PALM</h3>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate only makes its appearance far up in the centre of
+the palm, in what is called the Plain of Mars, it indicates a hard early
+life and that the subject must always have a hard fight to gain his ends;
+but should the Line ascend clearly and strongly from the Plain of Mars
+and have a branch to or on towards the Mount of the Sun, such a person
+will be the architect of his own fortunes, and without help or assistance
+will win success and fortune by his own personal hard work and merit.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate rises from the Line of Head and when it is well
+marked, everything will come to the subject late in life and only then by
+his own brains.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate is seen with one branch on the Mount of Venus and
+the other on the Mount of the Moon (1-2, <a href="#Plate_XIII">Plate XIII</a>.) it indicates a
+career of romance and passion, by which the whole of the Destiny will be
+swayed.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate itself rises inside the Life<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> Line on the Mount of
+Venus (2-2, <a href="#Plate_XIII">Plate XIII</a>.), passionate love will affect the whole career,
+and such persons, it will be found, usually place their affections on
+impossible people or on those who are in some way tied up by marriage or
+who otherwise are unable to gratify the love that the other person
+demands. This is a most unlucky sign for affection to find in the hands
+of a woman.</p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_XIII" id="Plate_XIII"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 331px;">
+<a href="images/fig087.jpg"><img src="images/fig087_th.jpg" width="331" height="335" alt="Plate XIII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XIII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate is broken or made up in little bits, the career
+will be found full of troubles, breaks,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> and nothing that one gets will
+last long enough to bring any settled or continuous success.</p>
+
+<p>A break in the Fate Line is not always a bad sign to have, provided that
+one side begins before the other ends; in such a case it foretells a
+complete change in surroundings and position, and if the new line looks
+good and straight it will be found to mean that the change will bring
+about an advancement in position commencing at the date when the second
+line first makes its appearance.<a name="FNanchor_2_2" id="FNanchor_2_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_2_2" id="Footnote_2_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_2_2"><span class="label">[2]</span></a> For dates on the Line of Fate <i>see</i> Chapter <a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">XIX</a>.</p></div>
+
+
+<h3>INFLUENCE LINES</h3>
+
+<p>When any small line joins the Fate Line or goes on with it as an
+attendant line, such a mark usually indicates marriage at the date when
+these lines join (3-3, <a href="#Plate_XIII">Plate XIII</a>.). If, on the contrary, these lines do
+not join, marriage with the person is not likely to occur although the
+affection and influence will be present in the career.</p>
+
+<p>When one of these influence lines appears by the side of the Fate Line
+and crosses through it towards or on to the Mount of Mars, it indicates
+that the influence thus shown will turn to hate and will injure the
+career of the person on whose hand it is found (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.).</p>
+
+
+<h3>DOUBLE LINES OF FATE</h3>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate is itself double (2-2, <a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.), it is a sign of
+what is called "a double life," but if, after running side by side for
+some length<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> these two lines join or become one, it foretells that "the
+double life" has been caused by some great affection, that circumstances
+prevented a union, but that the preventing cause will be removed at the
+point where these two lines join.</p>
+
+<p>When, however, a double Line of Fate is clearly marked, especially if
+they incline towards different mounts of the hand, such a mark indicates
+that two careers would be carried out simultaneously&mdash;one perhaps as a
+hobby and the other as the principal career.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate is extremely faint or just barely traced through
+the palm, it will be found to indicate a general disbelief in the idea of
+Fate and Destiny. It is often found on the hands of very materialistic
+persons, those who rebel against the idea that they are governed in any
+way by Fate or by any power save themselves.</p>
+
+<p>When this is found, and at the same time a good clear Line of Head, such
+people will be sure to win success by their mentality alone, but the
+details of their destiny will not be able to be told, and one must
+content oneself with chiefly describing their characteristics,
+peculiarities, etc.</p>
+
+<p>When no Line of Fate whatever is found and only a very ordinary Line of
+Head, then there will be nothing very particular to say about the
+Destiny; such people, as a rule, lead very colourless lives, nothing
+seems to affect them much one way or the other, and they will be found to
+have very little purpose to illumine the drab monotony of their
+existence.</p>
+
+<p>An island (3, <a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.) is an extremely bad sign to find in the Line of
+Fate.</p>
+
+<p>When found at the very beginning of the line (4,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span> <a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.) it
+indicates some mystery regarding the commencement of such careers, such
+as illegitimate birth.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XIV" id="Plate_XIV"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a href="images/fig090.jpg"><img src="images/fig090_th.jpg" width="335" height="345" alt="Plate XIV. THE LINE OF DESTINY, ISLANDS, AND OTHER SIGNS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XIV. THE LINE OF DESTINY, ISLANDS, AND OTHER SIGNS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>An island, when found on a woman's hand connecting the Fate Line with the
+Mount of Venus, is an almost certain indication of her seduction (5,
+<a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>An island in any part of the Plain of Mars indicates a period of great
+difficulty, loss in one's career, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> in consequence, generally loss of
+money (3, <a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>An Island on the Fate and Head Lines together means loss also, but more
+brought on by the person's own stupidity or lack of intelligence (6,
+<a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>An island over the Fate and Heart Lines indicates loss and trouble
+connected with affairs of the heart or brought about by the affections.</p>
+
+<p>An island on the Mount of Saturn or towards the end of the Line of Fate
+(5, <a href="#Plate_XIV">Plate XIV</a>.) foreshadows that the career will finish in poverty and
+despair.<a name="FNanchor_3_3" id="FNanchor_3_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_3_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_3_3" id="Footnote_3_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_3_3"><span class="label">[3]</span></a> For more details concerning the meaning of "islands" in
+general, <i>see</i> Chapter <a href="#CHAPTER_XV">XV</a>.</p></div>
+
+<p>When the Line of Fate finishes suddenly with a cross, some great fatality
+may be expected, but when the cross is found on the Fate Line and on the
+Mount of Saturn, the ending of such a Destiny will be some terrible
+tragedy, generally one of public disgrace and public death.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VI" id="CHAPTER_VI"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF THE SUN</h3>
+
+<p>The Line of the Sun, which is otherwise called the Line of Success or the
+Line of Brilliancy (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.), is one of the most important marks
+on the hand to consider.</p>
+
+<p>It has in its symbolism almost the same significance as the Sun itself
+has to the Earth.</p>
+
+<p>Without this line the life has no happiness, no sunshine, as it were, and
+even the greatest talents lie in darkness and do not produce their fruit.</p>
+
+<p>Amateurs, in looking at hands, often make the greatest mistakes in seeing
+what appears to be "a good Line of Fate," and in consequence rush off and
+predict great success and fortune, whereas, as I explained in the
+preceding chapter, a Fate Line unaccompanied by the Line of Sun may
+simply mean a fatalistic life full of sorrow and darkness.</p>
+
+<p>The quality that the Line of Sun denotes is, what is generally called
+"luck"; with a well-marked Sun Line even a poor Line of Head promises
+more success, and it is the same with the Line of Fate.</p>
+
+<p>People with the Sun Line appear to have more magnetism, more influence
+over others. They more easily secure recognition, reward, riches, and
+honours.</p>
+
+<p>They also have a happier and brighter disposition,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span> and this has
+naturally a great deal to do with what is called success.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XV" id="Plate_XV"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 328px;">
+<a href="images/fig093.jpg"><img src="images/fig093_th.jpg" width="328" height="383" alt="Plate XV. THE LINE OF SUN AND ITS MODIFICATIONS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XV. THE LINE OF SUN AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>From whatever date in the hand the Line of Sun appears, things become
+brighter, more prosperous and important. The Line of the Sun may rise
+from the following positions:</p>
+
+<p>From the Line of Life, the Line of Fate, the Plain of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span> Mars, the Mount of
+the Moon, the Line of Head, and from the Line of Heart, or it may only
+appear as a small line on its own Mount.</p>
+
+<p>Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, <a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.), it promises success from
+whatever the life is that is led, but not from "luck."</p>
+
+<p>From the Line of Fate (3-3, <a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.), it is a sure sign of recognition
+for the career adopted, but brought about by the personal effort of the
+subject.</p>
+
+<p>From the Plain of Mars, and not connected with the other lines, it
+foretells success after difficulties.</p>
+
+<p>From the Mount of the Moon (4-4, <a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.), success is more a matter due
+to the caprice of others. It is more changeable and uncertain and is by
+no means such a sure sign of riches or solid position. It is more the
+sign of success as a public favourite, and is often found in the hands of
+those who depend on the public for their livelihood, such as actors and
+actresses, singers, and certain classes of artists, speakers, clergymen,
+etc. For all such professions it is, however, fortunate, and an extremely
+lucky sign to have, as it promises in all cases luck, brilliancy, and
+recognition in the world.</p>
+
+<p>Rising from the Line of Head, the Sun Line gives success from the mental
+efforts and qualities, but not until after the middle of life is past. It
+is found on the hands of brain workers, students of some particular
+branch of study, writers, scientists, etc.</p>
+
+<p>From the Line of Heart, success will come late in life in some way
+depending on, or through, the affections. In such cases it generally
+promises a very happy marriage late in life, but it is always a certain
+sign of eventual ease, happiness, and worldly comfort.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Marked only on its own Mount, the Line of Sun promises happiness and
+success, but so late in life as to make it hardly worth having.</p>
+
+<p>When the third finger&mdash;called the finger of the Sun&mdash;is much longer than
+the first with the Line of Sun well marked, the gambling instincts will
+be much in evidence. Nearly all successful gamblers for money have these
+two indications.</p>
+
+<p>When, however, the third finger is equal to the second, the love of
+amassing wealth will be the dominant passion of the life.</p>
+
+<p>When the third finger is extremely long and twisted or crooked, the
+person will endeavour to obtain money at any cost. This malformation is
+much seen in the hands of thieves or criminals who are likely to commit
+any crime for the sake of money. Note&mdash;if the Line of Head is very high
+on the palm, and more especially if it rises upwards at the end (3-3,
+<a href="#Plate_III_I">Plate III</a>.), these evil qualities will be still more accentuated.</p>
+
+<p>When a hand is found to be artistic in its shape, with pointed fingers or
+long and narrow, the Line of Sun on such a formation promises rather
+success and brilliancy in Art, on the Stage, or in Public Singing, than
+in anything else.</p>
+
+<p>The real musician's hand, such as the composer's or player's, is however
+rarely a long, thin-shaped hand, because such persons must have a more
+scientific nature. This quality is not found with those who possess the
+long, slender, very artistic-shaped hand, who depend more on their
+emotional temperament than on scientific study for their foundation.</p>
+
+<p>On extremely long, thin hands, those that belong to what is called the
+Psychic Type,<a name="FNanchor_4_4" id="FNanchor_4_4"></a><a href="#Footnote_4_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a> the Line of Sun<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> has very little meaning except that of
+temperament, such persons being too idealistic to care for either wealth,
+position, or worldly success. They have as a rule, simply bright, happy,
+sunny dispositions if this line is marked on their hands, and they go
+through life as in a dream, and their dreams are to them the only things
+that matter.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_4_4" id="Footnote_4_4"></a><a href="#FNanchor_4_4"><span class="label">[4]</span></a> <i>See</i> Types of Hands, Part II., page <a href="#Page_123">123</a>.</p></div>
+
+<p>A curious characteristic, however, and one that has not been noticed by
+other writers on this subject, is, that on all hands where the Sun Line
+is seen, the nature of such people is much more sensitive to environment
+than that of those persons who do not possess this Line. For this reason
+the Line has been considered a sign of the artistic nature. But what is
+known as the "artistic nature" may show itself only in the love of
+beautiful things, harmony of surroundings, and such like; whereas the
+people who do not possess any mark of the Sun Line, seldom even notice
+their surroundings and would live equally happy in the most squalid
+homes. They would not trouble whether their curtains were black, green,
+yellow, or some fearful conglomeration of all three.</p>
+
+<p>When many lines are found on the Mount of the Sun, they show also the
+artistic nature, but one where the multiplicity of aims and ideas will
+prevent any real success.</p>
+
+<p>Two or three Sun Lines, when running parallel and evenly together, are
+good and indicate success in two or three different lines of work; but
+one good, straight, clear line is the best sign to have.</p>
+
+<p>An "island" on any part of the Line of the Sun destroys the position and
+success promised, but only during the period where the island appears (5,
+<a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.). In nearly all cases it denotes public scandal,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> and when very
+clearly marked a <i>cause c&eacute;l&egrave;bre</i> or something of that sort.</p>
+
+<p>All opposition lines, viz., those that cross over from the thumb side of
+the hand, and especially those from the Mount of Mars or from its
+direction, are bad (6-6 <a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.). If these opposition lines pass
+through, cut, or interfere with the Line of Sun in any way, they denote
+the jealousy or interference of people against one.</p>
+
+<p>Curiously enough, these opposition lines from the Mount of Mars relate to
+the interference of members of the same sex as the subject; while, if
+they come from the Mount of Venus, they relate to the opposite sex of the
+individual on whose hand they appear (7-7, <a href="#Plate_XV">Plate XV</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>A "star" found on the Line of Sun is one of the luckiest and most
+fortunate signs to have.</p>
+
+<p>A "square" is a sign of preservation against the attacks of enemies or
+efforts to assail one's position.</p>
+
+<p>A "cross" is an unfortunate sign, and denotes difficulties and annoyance,
+but only relating to one's name or position.</p>
+
+<p>On a "hollow hand," the Line of Sun loses all power, and its good
+promises are never fulfilled.</p>
+
+<p>The complete absence of the Line of Sun on an otherwise well-marked hand,
+indicates that no matter how clever or talented these people may be, the
+recognition of the world will be difficult or even impossible to gain. In
+other words, their life will remain in darkness; people will not see
+their work and the "Sun of Success" will never dawn on their pathway of
+labour.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VII" id="CHAPTER_VII"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEART AS INDICATING THE AFFECTIONATE AND EMOTIONAL NATURE</h3>
+
+<p>The Line of Heart is that Line which runs across the hand under the
+fingers and generally rises under the base of the first, and runs off the
+side of the hand under the base of the fourth or little finger (1-1,
+<a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Heart relates purely to the affectionate disposition, in
+fact, to the mental side of the love nature of the subject. It should be
+borne in mind that, by lying as it does on that part of the hand above
+the Line of Head, it is consequently on the portion of the hand that
+relates to mental characteristics and not to the physical.</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Heart should be deep, clear, and well coloured. It may arise
+from the extreme outside of the Mount of Jupiter (2, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.), from
+the centre of this Mount, from the space between the first and second
+fingers (3, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.), from the face of the Mount of Saturn (4, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate
+XVI</a>.), or from directly under this Mount (5, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>From the outside of the Mount of Jupiter, it denotes the blind enthusiast
+in affection, a man or woman who places his or her ideal of love so high
+that neither fault nor failing is seen in the being worshipped. With<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span>
+these people their pride in the object of their affection is beyond all
+reason, and all such extremists as a rule suffer terribly through their
+affections.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XVI" id="Plate_XVI"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a href="images/fig099.jpg"><img src="images/fig099_th.jpg" width="335" height="353" alt="Plate XVI. THE LINE OF HEART AND ITS VARIATIONS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XVI. THE LINE OF HEART AND ITS VARIATIONS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>From the centre of the Mount of Jupiter, the Heart Line gives more
+moderation, but also great ideality, and is one of the best of the
+variations of this Line that we are about to consider.</p>
+
+<p>People with such a Heart Line are firm and reliable in their affections,
+they have an unusually high code<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> of honour and morality. They are
+ambitious that the person they live with be great, noble, and successful.
+They seldom marry beneath their station in life, and they have fewer love
+affairs than any other class.</p>
+
+<p>If they once really love, they love for ever. They do not believe in
+second marriages, and the divorce courts are seldom troubled with their
+presence.</p>
+
+<p>The Heart Line rising from between the first and second fingers, gives a
+calmer but a very deep nature in all matters of the affections (3, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate
+XVI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>These people seem to strike the happy medium between the ideality and
+pride given by Jupiter, and the more selfish love nature given when the
+line rises from Saturn.</p>
+
+<p>They are not very demonstrative when in love, but they are capable of the
+very greatest sacrifices for those they care for. They do not expect the
+person on whom they bestow their affection to be a god or a goddess.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Heart rises on the Mount of Saturn the subject will be
+rather selfish in all questions of affection (4, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.). These
+people are not self-sacrificing, like the previous type. They are
+inclined to be cynical, reserved, undemonstrative but very insistent in
+trying to gain the person they want. They will let nothing stand in their
+way, but once they have obtained their object they show little tenderness
+or devotion.</p>
+
+<p>They are very unforgiving if they discover any lapses on the part of
+their partner, but as they are "a law unto themselves," they close their
+eyes to their own shortcomings.</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Heart that rises from under the base of the Mount of Saturn
+(5, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.), exhibits all<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span> the foregoing characteristics, but in a
+much more intensified form. Such persons live for themselves, and care
+little whether those around them are happy or not.</p>
+
+<p>The shorter the Line of Heart is on the Hand, the less the higher
+sentiments of the affection make themselves manifest.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Heart is found in excess, namely, extremely long&mdash;it
+denotes a terrible tendency toward jealousy (2, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.), and this is
+alarmingly increased if the Line of Head on the same hand is very sloping
+towards the Mount of the Moon (6, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.). In such a case the
+imagination will run away with itself where jealousy is concerned.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Heart is found curving downward at the base of the Mount
+of Jupiter (7, <a href="#Plate_XVI">Plate XVI</a>.), it tells of a strange fatality in that
+person, of meeting with great disappointment in love, and even with those
+they trust in friendship. He seems to lack perception, in knowing whom to
+love. His affections are nearly always misplaced or never returned.</p>
+
+<p>These people have, however, as a rule, wonderfully kind, affectionate
+dispositions. They have little pride about whom they love and they
+generally marry beneath their station in life.</p>
+
+<p>A Line of Heart made up like a chain, or by a crowd of little lines
+running into it, denotes flirtations and inconstancy in the love nature,
+and seldom has any lasting affection.</p>
+
+<p>A Line of Heart from Saturn in holes or links like a chain, especially
+when it is broad, denotes an absolute contempt for the subject's opposite
+sex. It is one of the signs of mental degeneration as far as love is
+concerned.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When this Line is pale and broad, without any depth, it denotes a nature
+<i>blas&eacute;</i> and indifferent with no depth of affection.</p>
+
+<p>When very low down on the hand, almost touching the Line of Head, the
+heart will always interfere with the affairs of the head.</p>
+
+<p>When it lies very high on the hand and the space is narrowed only by the
+Head Line being abnormally high and out of its place, it indicates the
+reverse of the above, and that the affairs of the heart are ruled by the
+head. Such persons are extremely calculating in all matters of love.</p>
+
+<p>When only one deep, straight line is found across the hand from side to
+side, the two lines both Head and Heart appear to blend together. This
+denotes an intensely self-concentrated nature. If such a subject loves,
+he unites with it all the forces of his mind, and if he put his mind on
+any subject, he throws his whole heart and soul into whatever it may be
+(<a href="#Plate_VI_I">Plate VI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>These people are also terribly head-strong and self-willed in all they
+do. They do not seem to know what fear means in any sense&mdash;they are
+dangerous lovers and husbands to trifle with, for they will stop at
+nothing if their blood is once roused.</p>
+
+<p>They are also dangerous to themselves. They rush blindly into danger, and
+they usually meet with terrible accidents and injuries, and very often
+suffer a violent death (<i>see</i> also page <a href="#Page_29">29</a>).</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Heart commences with a fork, one branch on Jupiter and
+the other between the first and second fingers, it is an excellent sign
+of a well-balanced, happy, affectionate disposition, and a good promise
+of great happiness in all matters of affection.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Heart is very thin and with no branches, it denotes
+coldness and want of heart.</p>
+
+<p>When there is no Line of Heart whatever, it is a sign of a cold-blooded,
+unemotional nature. Such people can, however, be brutally sensual and
+especially so if the Mount of Venus is high (<i>see</i> Mounts, page <a href="#Page_140">140</a>).</p>
+
+<p>A broken Heart Line is a certain sign that some terrible tragedy in the
+affections will at some time or other overwhelm the subject.</p>
+
+<p>It may not often be found nowadays, but I have seen it in some few cases,
+and these persons never recovered the loss of the loved one or ever had
+love in their lives again.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIII" id="CHAPTER_VIII"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>SIGNS RELATING TO MARRIAGE</h3>
+
+<p>What is called the Line of Marriage is that mark or marks, as the case
+may be, found on the side of the Mount under the fourth finger (1, <a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate
+XVII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>I will first proceed to give all the details possible about these lines,
+and then call my reader's attention to the other marks on the hand that
+qualify these Lines of Marriage, and further add a wealth of information
+regarding them.</p>
+
+<p>The Line, or Lines, of Marriage may be found as very short marks almost
+on the very side of the hand, or they may appear as quite long lines
+rising from the side of the hand into the face of the Mount of Mercury,
+or, in some cases, going farther still into the hand itself.</p>
+
+<p>Only the clearly formed lines relate to marriage, the short ones to deep
+affection, or marriage contemplated, but never entered into (2, <a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate
+XVII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When the deep line is found lying close to the line of Heart, the
+marriage will take place early in life, but the other marks I am going to
+explain later will give more accurate dates as to when the event will
+occur.</p>
+
+<p>For a happy marriage the lines on the Mount of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> Mercury should be
+straight and clear, without breaks or irregularities of any kind (1,
+<a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate XVII</a>.).</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XVII" id="Plate_XVII"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 343px;">
+<a href="images/fig105.jpg"><img src="images/fig105_th.jpg" width="343" height="385" alt="Plate XVII. MARRIAGE LINES. THE LINE OF MARRIAGE." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XVII. MARRIAGE LINES. THE LINE OF MARRIAGE.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>When the Line of Marriage curves or droops downwards (3, <a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate XVII</a>.),
+the person on whose hand this appears will outlive the other.</p>
+
+<p>When the line turns upward in the reverse direction, the possessor is not
+likely ever to marry (4, <a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate XVII.</a>).<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When the line is clear and distinct, but has a lot of little lines
+dropping from it, it foreshadows trouble and anxiety in the marriage, but
+brought on by the delicacy and ill-health of the partner (5, <a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate
+XVII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When the line has a curve at the end, and if a cross or line be found
+cutting into this curve (2, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.), the partner will die by
+accident or a sudden illness of some kind. But when the Marriage Line
+ends in a long, gradual curve into the Heart Line, the death of the
+partner will come about by gradual ill-health or illness of a very long
+duration.</p>
+
+<p>When the line has an "island" at the beginning, then the marriage will be
+for a long time delayed, and the two persons will be much separated at
+the commencement of their married life.</p>
+
+<p>When the "island" is found about the middle of the Marriage Line, some
+great trouble and separation will take place about the middle of the
+married life (3, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When the "island" is found towards the end of the line, the marriage will
+most probably end in trouble and separation one from the other.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Marriage divides into the form of a fork (4, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate
+XVIII</a>.), the two people will live apart from one another, but when the
+fork turns downwards towards the Line of Heart a legal separation may be
+anticipated (5, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When this fork is more accentuated, and turns down more into the hand,
+divorce may be expected, and especially so if one end of this fork
+stretches across the hand in the direction of the Plain of Mars, or the
+Mount of Mars (5, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>In many cases a fine line may be found crossing the entire palm, from the
+Marriage Line, and in such a case<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span> the greatest animosity and bitterness
+will enter into the fight for freedom and divorce. In such an example
+there is never any hope of reconciliation.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Marriage is full of little islands, or linked like the
+loops of a chain, the subject should be warned not to marry at any time,
+as such a union would be full of the greatest unhappiness and continual
+separations.</p>
+
+<p>When the line, which is otherwise well marked, appears about the centre
+to break in two, it foreshadows a fatality or break-up in an otherwise
+happy married life.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line of Marriage itself, or an offshoot from it, goes into the
+hand, and joins or ascends upward with the Line of Sun, it promises that
+its possessor will marry some one of great wealth or distinction (6,
+<a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When this above-mentioned line bends downward and cuts the Line of Sun,
+it denotes that the person on whose hand it is found will lose his
+position by the marriage he will make.</p>
+
+<p>When any line from the top of the Mount of Mercury falls down into the
+Marriage Line, it shows that there will be great obstacles to overcome in
+whatever marriage the subject enters, but if the Line of Marriage is a
+good one, then such obstacles will be overcome.</p>
+
+<p>When there is another line much slighter in appearance lying close to the
+upper side of the Marriage Line, it foretells some influence that will
+come into the subject's life after marriage.</p>
+
+<p>All lines that cross the hand from the Mount of Mars (6, <a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate XVII</a>.),
+and rise up towards the Line of Marriage denote the interference of
+people with the marriage. These lines give the date of the interference<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span>
+when they cross the Line of Destiny; they cause quarrels when they come
+from Mars; from Venus they also denote annoyances, but not of such a
+vindictive nature (7, <a href="#Plate_XVII">Plate XVII</a>.).</p>
+
+
+<h3>INFLUENCE LINES TO THE FATE LINE ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS, AND OTHER SIGNS
+WHICH ALSO HAVE A MEANING IN CONNECTION WITH MARRIAGE</h3>
+
+<p>The student may also get very great help in ascertaining details about
+the likely marriage of the person whose hands he is examining by the
+following:</p>
+
+<p>Fine Influence Lines seen joining the Line of Fate (7, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.),
+relate to persons who come into and affect the Destiny.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Influence is very strong where it joins the Fate Line, and
+if at about the same date a clear Marriage Line is seen on the Mount of
+Mercury, the date of marriage may be more accurately predicted by the
+place on the Fate Line where the Influence Line joins it.</p>
+
+<p>A great wealth of detail may also be made out from observing these
+Influence Lines to the Destiny:</p>
+
+<p>Coming over from the Mount of the Moon, there is always something
+romantic about the union. The person on whose hand this Line appears will
+as a rule meet his affinity when travelling or away from his home.</p>
+
+<p>If the Influence Line has an "island" marked on it, the influence will
+then be a bad one, or, at least, the person will have had some scandal
+connected with his or her past life (8, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.). If the Line of
+Fate looks weaker or more uncertain after the union is marked, then such
+a marriage has not brought good or<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span> success to the subject. If, on the
+contrary, the Line of Fate looks better or stronger after the Influence
+Line has joined it, then this union will prove of advantage to the person
+whose hand is being examined.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XVIII" id="Plate_XVIII"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 360px;">
+<a href="images/fig109.jpg"><img src="images/fig109_th.jpg" width="360" height="383" alt="Plate XVIII. MARRIAGE LINES AND INFLUENCE LINES WHICH FURTHER HELP IN DENOTING
+MARRIAGE." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XVIII. MARRIAGE LINES AND INFLUENCE LINES WHICH FURTHER HELP IN DENOTING
+MARRIAGE.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>This increase of wealth or power is still more accentuated if at the same
+time it is observed that a Sun Line has made its appearance.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>If the Influence Line should cut through the Fate Line, and appear on the
+thumb side of it, the affection will seldom last as long, or be so happy
+(7, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.). If a still wider separation of the Influence Line and
+the Fate Line appear as these two lines ascend the hand together, the
+separation of interests and destiny of the two persons will be still more
+marked as the years proceed.</p>
+
+<p>If an Influence Line approaches close to the Line of Fate, and runs
+parallel with it for some time but does not join it, some great obstacle
+will prevent a marriage ever taking place (<i>see</i> also page <a href="#Page_57">57</a>).</p>
+
+<p>If an Influence Line terminates in an "island," the influence itself will
+itself get into trouble, generally disgrace of some character (10, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate
+XVIII</a>.).<a name="FNanchor_5_5" id="FNanchor_5_5"></a><a href="#Footnote_5_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_5_5" id="Footnote_5_5"></a><a href="#FNanchor_5_5"><span class="label">[5]</span></a> For further particulars refer back to chapter on the Line of
+Destiny, where these Influence Lines are also referred to (page <a href="#Page_57">57</a>).</p></div>
+
+
+<h3>INFLUENCE LINES ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS</h3>
+
+<p>These are fine lines that run parallel with the Line of Life (11-11,
+<a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.), but they must not be confounded with the Line of Mars, or
+"Sister Life Line," which commences higher up nearer the Mount of Mars.</p>
+
+<p>These Venus Influence Lines are more often found with those persons who
+have what is called the "Venus temperament," or who are intensely
+emotional and passionate.</p>
+
+<p>When many of such lines are seen, the subject cannot live without love,
+and will have many "affairs" at the same time.</p>
+
+<p>As such an Influence Line runs parallel with the Life Line, or turns away
+from it, so it can be judged<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span> how long such an influence will last, and
+with fair accuracy the date when it will occur (for dates <i>see</i> page
+<a href="#Page_113">113</a>).</p>
+
+<p>These Influence Lines, however, never have the same importance or meaning
+as those previously ascribed to the Line of Fate.</p>
+
+<p>In my large work on this subject, Cheiro's <i>Language of the Hand</i>, I have
+been able to go into still greater detail with regard to all these
+Influence Lines.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IX" id="CHAPTER_IX"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2>
+
+
+<h3>LINES DENOTING CHILDREN, THEIR SEX, AND OTHER MATTERS CONCERNING THEM</h3>
+
+<p>The Lines relating to children are those finely marked upright lines
+found immediately above the Line of Marriage (12, <a href="#Plate_XVIII">Plate XVIII</a>.). A very
+good plan, in trying to see these Lines, is to press this portion of the
+hand with the tips of the fingers, and then note which of these small
+lines stand out the most clearly.</p>
+
+<p>Sometimes they are extremely deeply marked, and as a rule much more so on
+a woman's hand than on a man's. In many cases it is necessary to employ a
+magnifying glass in order to see them.</p>
+
+<p>Broad and deep lines denote male children, fine and narrow lines,
+females.</p>
+
+<p>When they appear as straight lines they denote strong healthy children,
+but when very faint or crooked, the children indicated are always
+delicate.</p>
+
+<p>When the first part of the little line (taking it upward from the Line of
+Marriage) is marked with a small "island," such a child will be very
+delicate in its early life, but if the line appears well marked when the
+"island" is passed, the probability is that it will grow up strong and
+healthy. When ending or broken at the "island" the child will never grow
+up.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When one line stands out very clear and distinct among the others, the
+child the mark indicates will be more to the parent, and will be more
+successful than any of the others.</p>
+
+<p>To know the number of children anyone will have, it is necessary to count
+these lines from the outside of the hand in towards the palm.</p>
+
+<p>A person with the Mount of Venus very flat on the hand, and very poorly
+developed, is not likely to have any children at all, and this is all the
+more certain if the first Bracelet is found rising up like an arch into
+or towards the palm (<i>see</i> page <a href="#Page_91">91</a>).<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_X" id="CHAPTER_X"></a>CHAPTER X</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF HEALTH OR THE HEPATICA</h3>
+
+<p>There has been very considerable discussion among students of this
+subject as to the part of the hand on which the Line of Health (1-1,
+<a href="#Plate_XIX">Plate XIX</a>.) commences.</p>
+
+<p>My own theory, and one that I have proved by over twenty-five years'
+experience and also watching its growth on the hands of children, is,
+that it rises at the base of or on the face of the Mount of Mercury, and
+as it grows across the hand and attacks the Line of Life, it foreshadows
+the development of illness or germ of disease, which, at the date of its
+coming in contact with the Line of Life, will reach the climax of its
+attack.</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Life, it must be remembered, merely relates to the promised
+length of life from heredity and natural causes, but the Line of Health
+denotes the effect of the class of life the subject has led. Where these
+two lines come together, if one is of equal strength to the other, will
+be the date of death, even though the Line of Life should pass this point
+and appear to be a much greater length (2, <a href="#Plate_XIX">Plate XIX</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Mercury, or of Health, relating as it does to the nervous
+system, and also to the mind (Mercury), lends itself to the supposition
+that the all-knowing<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> subconscious brain is cognisant, even at an early
+age, of the force of resistance in the nervous system. It may know how
+long this force will last, when it will be exhausted, and consequently
+may mark the hand long years in advance.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XIX" id="Plate_XIX"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 337px;">
+<a href="images/fig115.jpg"><img src="images/fig115_th.jpg" width="337" height="347" alt="Plate XIX. THE LINE OF HEALTH." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XIX. THE LINE OF HEALTH.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Line of Health is one of the lines of the hand most subject to
+changes. It is the thermometer of the life showing its "rise and fall" as
+the case may be. I have seen this mysterious line look deep and
+threatening<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> during the early years of a life, and completely fade away
+as greater health and strength took possession of the body.</p>
+
+<p>Again, I have often seen it look deeper and more ominous as the wear and
+tear, especially of the nervous system, began to make itself manifest, or
+when the subject over-taxed his mental strength.</p>
+
+<p>Further, it is an excellent sign to be without this line altogether. Its
+absence denotes an extremely robust, strong constitution, and a healthy
+state of the nervous system.</p>
+
+<p>If a hand has the Line of Health, the best position for it is to lie
+straight down the hand, and not approach or touch the Line of Life (3-3,
+<a href="#Plate_XIX">Plate XIX</a>.). When found crossing the hand, and touching or throwing
+branches across to the Line of Life, it foretells that there is some
+illness at work which is undermining the health.</p>
+
+<p>If it rises and seems like a branch from the Heart Line, especially if
+both these lines are broad in appearance and with the Health Line running
+down the palm coming in contact with the Line of Life, it is a certain
+indication of weakness or disease of the heart.</p>
+
+<p>The student should always observe the kind of nails there are on the hand
+when thinking out the diseases indicated by the Line of Health.<a name="FNanchor_6_6" id="FNanchor_6_6"></a><a href="#Footnote_6_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_6_6" id="Footnote_6_6"></a><a href="#FNanchor_6_6"><span class="label">[6]</span></a> <i>See</i> Chapter on Nails, page <a href="#Page_136">136</a>.</p></div>
+
+<p>When the finger nails are short, without moons, and round, and the Line
+of Health is strongly marked, he may be sure that nervous weak action of
+the heart is decidedly threatened.</p>
+
+<p>When the nails are long and almond-shaped, there is danger of weakness
+and delicacy of the lungs. With the same shape of nails, and with islands
+in the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span> upper part of the Health Line (4, <a href="#Plate_XIX">Plate XIX</a>.), consumption of the
+lungs and tuberculosis will make itself manifest.</p>
+
+<p>When the nails are very flat, and especially shell-shaped (<i>see</i> <a href="#Plate_V_II">Plate
+V</a>., Part II.), and the Line of Health is deeply marked, paralysis and the
+worst forms of nerve diseases are threatening the subject.</p>
+
+<p>When this line is very red in small spots, especially when pressed,
+rheumatic fever is indicated.</p>
+
+<p>When twisted, irregular, and yellowish in colour, the subject will suffer
+from biliousness and liver complaints.</p>
+
+<p>When found heavily marked, and only joining the Heart and Head Lines
+together, it foreshadows brain-fever, especially when any islands are
+marked on the Line of Head.</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Health, running straight down the hand but not touching the
+Line of Life, indicates that though the constitution may not be robust,
+it is wiry, and there is great reserve resistance to disease.</p>
+
+<p>In connection with the examination of the Line of Health, the student
+must always look for other indications to the rest of the lines of the
+hand, more especially to the Line of Life and Line of Head. For instance,
+when the Line of Life looks very chained and weak, the Health Line on a
+hand will naturally increase the danger of delicate health; and when
+found with a Line of Head full of little islands, or like a chain, such a
+Health Line more clearly foreshadows brain disease, severe headaches,
+etc.</p>
+
+<p>By a study of this line the most valuable warnings may be given of
+approaching ill-health. Whether persons will follow the warnings or not
+is a question. My experience is that they do not and will not, and<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span>
+therefore, whatever is indicated will most probably come to pass.</p>
+
+<p>Providence places many signposts and warnings in our paths, but human
+nature is either too blind or too self-confident to notice them until it
+is too late.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XI" id="CHAPTER_XI"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, AND THE BRACELETS</h3>
+
+<p>These marks are classed among the minor lines of the hands, but they
+often have a significance that is of the greatest importance.</p>
+
+<p>The Girdle of Venus is that broken or sometimes unbroken kind of
+semi-circular line that is found rising from the base of the first finger
+to the base of the fourth (1-1, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>I have not in my experience found this mark to indicate the gross
+sensuality that is so often ascribed to it by other writers. It should be
+remembered that the hand is divided by the Line of Head, as it were,
+<i>into two hemispheres, the lower and the upper</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The lower relates to the physical or more animal side of the nature, and
+the upper to the intellectual. Following this arrangement, it is only
+reasonable to assume that this mark under consideration, viz., the Girdle
+of Venus, relates more to the mental side of the symbolism of the Venus
+nature.</p>
+
+<p>I have found that persons with this sign are more mentally sensual than
+physically so. They love to read or write books on the subject of the
+"sex problem," but they are not inclined to put their theories and ideas
+into practice, at least with their own lives.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The qualities, however, that this mark represents are much more active
+and dangerous when this Girdle forms itself from the Mount of Saturn to
+that of Mercury. The imaginings of such people are then morbid and
+unhealthy.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XX" id="Plate_XX"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 336px;">
+<a href="images/fig120.jpg"><img src="images/fig120_th.jpg" width="336" height="382" alt="Plate XX. THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, THE THREE BRACELETS, THE LINE OF
+INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XX. THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, THE THREE BRACELETS, THE LINE OF
+INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>To those who study Astrology, the inference that<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> I draw from the
+connection of these two parts of the hand will become clear and
+reasonable.</p>
+
+<p>When broken or made up of little pieces, the Girdle of Venus has little
+meaning except to show a hysterical temperament, with a leaning towards
+the tendencies I have mentioned above.</p>
+
+<p>These persons in all cases suffer enormously from moods, they are very
+difficult to live with, and when the Girdle of Venus runs off the side of
+the hand and passes out through the Marriage Lines, their moody,
+changeable natures generally make marriage for them an unusually unhappy
+experience.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE RING OF SATURN</h3>
+
+<p>What is called the Ring of Saturn (2, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.) is very seldom found,
+and it is by no means a good sign to have. It is also a semi-circular
+line, but found lying across the Mount of Saturn.</p>
+
+<p>In all my experience I have never been able to come across any person
+with this mark who succeeded in life or was able to carry any one of his
+plans to a successful termination.</p>
+
+<p>These people seem cut off from their fellow beings in some peculiar and
+extraordinary way. They are isolated and alone, and they appear to
+realise their lonely position keenly. They are gloomy, morbid, and
+Saturnine in character. They seldom marry, and when they do it is always
+a ghastly failure.</p>
+
+<p>They are terribly obstinate and headstrong in all their actions, they
+resent the least advice or interference in their plans. Their lives
+generally close in suffering, poverty, or by some sinister tragedy or
+fatality.</p>
+
+<p>It is the most unfortunate mark ever to find.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>THE BRACELETS</h3>
+
+<p>The Bracelets (3-3, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.) are of very little importance except to
+throw light on certain points of health. There are supposed to be three
+of these lines or bracelets at the wrist, which were called by the Greeks
+the Bracelets of Health, Wealth, and Happiness.</p>
+
+<p>It is certainly very seldom that they can be found together, for
+experience in life does not give much hope that these three
+much-sought-after possessions can ever be found together on this side of
+the grave.</p>
+
+<p>Delving back into the ancient legends of Greece, we find one very
+significant point in reference to the first bracelet, the one nearest the
+palm, which represents Health.</p>
+
+<p>It appears that at one period of the ancient Greek civilisation all women
+had to come to the priest at their Temple to have their hands examined
+before they were allowed to marry. If the priest found this first
+Bracelet out of its place and rising up into the hand in the shape of an
+arch (4, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.), he would not allow the woman possessing this sign to
+be married under any circumstance, the idea being that it represented
+some internal malformation that would prevent her bringing children into
+the world. In such cases these women were made Vestal Virgins in the
+temples. Perhaps the old Greek Priest was right in his idea, for if this
+first Bracelet is found rising into the hand in the form of an arch, both
+men and women possessing it are delicate internally, and especially so in
+matters relating to sex.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XII" id="CHAPTER_XII"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE LINE OF INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA</h3>
+
+<p>The Line of Intuition (5, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.) is seldom found on other types of
+hand than those of the Philosophic, the Conic, and the Psychic, but it is
+sometimes found on the Spatulate.</p>
+
+<p>It takes more or less the formation of a semi-circle from the face of the
+Mount of Mercury to that of the Mount of the Moon, or may be found on the
+Mount of the Moon alone. It must not be confounded with the Hepatica, or
+Line of Health, but is found as a distinct mark in itself.</p>
+
+<p>It denotes an extra highly-strung sensitive temperament, also
+presentiments, inspiration, clairvoyance of the highest kind, clear vivid
+dreams which often come to pass, intuition as to how things should be
+done, and very often manifests itself in inspired speaking and writing of
+the loftiest character.</p>
+
+<p>It is much more often found on women's hands than on men's, although many
+cases have come under my notice of its being unusually clearly marked on
+some men's hands. In each case the possessor of it had most remarkable
+powers and unusual faculties, as well as the gift of intuition, even
+concerning purely mundane subjects that in an ordinary state they knew
+nothing whatever about.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>I use the words "ordinary state" advisably here, because such people are
+not always in the condition of mind when these strange faculties may be
+employed. Several of these men were absolutely uneducated, and yet at
+times, when thrown into an inspired state, they were able to explain the
+most intricate problems with the greatest accuracy. If asked, however,
+from where they obtained their knowledge, they were only able to reply
+that "it came to them" when in certain moods.</p>
+
+<p>One man I knew well had such remarkable dreams of coming events that he
+was able to warn many people weeks and months in advance of dangers that
+lay before them, and his warnings in many cases saved life.</p>
+
+<p>With all people who were gifted in this way I have noticed that they
+completely lost their strange powers the moment they indulged in alcohol
+of any kind.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE VIA LASCIVA</h3>
+
+<p>This is a strange mark (6, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.) which takes the form also somewhat
+of a semi-circle, but in this case it connects the Mount of the Moon with
+that of Venus, or it may simply run off the hand from the lower part of
+the Mount of Luna into the wrist.</p>
+
+<p>The first-mentioned formation indicates unbridled sensuality and passion,
+and where it cuts through the Line of Life it indicates death, but one
+usually brought about in connection with the licentiousness that it
+denotes.</p>
+
+<p>This Line running from the Mount of the Moon into the wrist denotes the
+most sensual dreams, desires, and imaginings, but, unlike the other
+class, it is usually<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> only dangerous to the person on whose hand it is
+found.</p>
+
+<p>In both cases there is generally a tendency towards the taking of drugs
+such as opium, morphine, especially when the hand is noted to be soft,
+full, and flabby. With a firm hard palm the subject usually indulges in
+excessive drinking fits, and when under drink seems to have no control
+whatever.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Head is found weak-looking, full of islands and descending
+downwards on the Mount of the Moon, insanity or the worst form of
+degeneracy will sooner or later destroy the whole character and career.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIII" id="CHAPTER_XIII"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>"LA CROIX MYSTIQUE", THE RING OF SOLOMON</h3>
+
+<p>What is called "La Croix Mystique" is found in the quadrangle of the hand
+between the Lines of Heart and Head (7, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>It is more usually found in the centre of this part of the hand, but it
+may be also found nearer the one side of the quadrangle or the other.</p>
+
+<p>This mark denotes a natural gift or talent for mysticism and occultism of
+all kinds.</p>
+
+<p>When placed nearer Jupiter, it denotes the employment of these studies
+more to gratify the subject's own pride or ambition than the following
+out of such things for their own sake.</p>
+
+<p>When it is in the centre of the quadrangle, across the Line of Fate, or
+immediately under the Mount of Saturn, such studies become more of a
+religion or are followed for their own worth and the influence and truth
+of occultism will play a leading r&ocirc;le in the whole career. Most likely
+the possessor of this mark will follow it as a profession, or will
+crystallise his researches into the form of books.</p>
+
+<p>When this mark lies lower down in the quadrangle, nearer to the Mount of
+the Moon, the subject will study some form of occultism more from a
+superstitious standpoint than any other. None the less, he will be likely
+to succeed in doing so, and influence other<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> people through his studies,
+and with this latter form he will be more likely to write beautiful
+mystic poetry with the prophetic note running through it very strongly.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE RING OF SOLOMON</h3>
+
+<p>The Ring of Solomon is also one of these strange marks of mysticism and
+occultism, but in this latter case, owing probably to the qualities
+signified by the Mount of Jupiter, its possessor will aim at having the
+power of a master or an adept in such subjects (8, <a href="#Plate_XX">Plate XX</a>.).<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIV" id="CHAPTER_XIV"></a>CHAPTER XIV</h2>
+
+
+<h3>TRAVELS, VOYAGES AND ACCIDENTS</h3>
+
+<p>Travels and voyages may be seen on the hand by the little lines that
+leave the Line of Life and bend over towards the Mount of the Moon and
+also by the lines found on this Mount (2, Plate XX<a href="#Plate_XXI">Plate XXI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When these fine lines of travel are seen on the Line of Life, by
+referring to the map showing dates (<a href="#Plate_XXVI">Plate XXVI</a>.), it may be possible to
+obtain a very clear idea of when these travels take place.</p>
+
+<p>When, however, the Line of Life itself divides, and one branch of it
+leans over towards or on to the Mount of the Moon (I, <a href="#Plate_XXI">Plate XXI</a>.), it
+denotes that the entire life will be full of change and travel. In such a
+case it will not be possible, except by the use of some gift such as
+clairvoyance, to tell accurately in advance the dates of voyages that
+will be undertaken.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Life apparently leaves its ordinary course and sweeps over
+to the Mount of the Moon, the life will be one continual round of travel.
+The person will settle nowhere, and the end of the life in such a case
+will take place in some land far distant from the place of birth.</p>
+
+<p>If the Line of Life has no line or branch leaving it and going in an
+opposite direction, but keeps to the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span> form of a semi-circle round the
+Mount of Venus, then such a life will be remarkably free from change and
+travel, and the person will remain all his life in the land of his birth
+(3-3, <a href="#Plate_XXI">Plate XXI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When a travel Line from the Line of Life ends in a small cross the
+journey undertaken will end in disappointment (4, <a href="#Plate_XXI">Plate XXI</a>).</p>
+
+<p>When the Line ends in a square, there will be great danger to the subject
+on such a journey, but he will escape, as the square is a sign of
+preservation from danger.</p>
+
+<p>When the Line ends in an island, the journey will end in loss (5, <a href="#Plate_XXI">Plate
+XXI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When the Travel Line crosses over near or on to the Mount of the Moon and
+ends in a fork or a circle, there will be great danger of the subject
+losing his life in undertaking such a journey.</p>
+
+<p>There is always more danger in travelling on water when the subject is
+found to be born in the following dates:</p>
+
+<p>
+(1) Between the 21st of June and the 21st of July.<br />
+(2) The 21st of October and the 21st of November.<br />
+(3) Between the 21st of February and the 21st of March.<br />
+</p>
+
+<p>There is more likelihood of danger from collision of trains and accidents
+on land when the subject is born between:</p>
+
+<p>
+(1) The 21st of April and 21st of May.<br />
+(2) The 21st of August and the 21st of September.<br />
+(3) The 21st of December and the 21st of January.<br />
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span></p>
+
+<p><a name="Plate_XXI" id="Plate_XXI"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 312px;">
+<a href="images/fig130.jpg"><img src="images/fig130_th.jpg" width="312" height="397" alt="Plate XXI. TRAVELS, VOYAGES, ACCIDENTS AND DESCENDING LINES PROM THE MOUNTS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XXI. TRAVELS, VOYAGES, ACCIDENTS AND DESCENDING LINES PROM THE MOUNTS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Danger from storms, tornadoes, thunder and lightning, is more likely to
+occur when people are travelling whose birthdays fall between:</p>
+
+<p>
+(1) The 21st of May and the 21st of June.<br />
+(2) The 21st of September and the 21st of October.<br />
+(3) The 21st of January and the 21st of February.<br />
+</p>
+
+
+<h3>ACCIDENTS</h3>
+
+<p>Accidents are generally marked by lines descending from the Mount of
+Saturn and touching the Line of Life (6, <a href="#Plate_XXI">Plate XXI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When falling on the Line of Head, they increase the danger to the head
+itself (7, <a href="#Plate_XXI">Plate XXI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>Descending lines are those that look thicker on the Mount and taper as
+they come downwards.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XV" id="CHAPTER_XV"></a>CHAPTER XV</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, AND THE GRILLE</h3>
+
+<p>The Island is never a fortunate sign. Whereever it makes its appearance,
+it reduces the promise of the Line or Mount on which it may be found.</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Life it shows delicacy or illness at that particular date
+where it appears (1, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Head, weakness of the brain, danger of brain illness (2,
+<a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Heart, weakness of the heart (3, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.), and
+especially so when under the Mount of the Sun.</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Fate, heavy loss in worldly matters, worry, and anxiety
+about the subject's destiny (4, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Sun, loss of position and generally by some scandal (5,
+<a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Health, serious illness (6, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.); if on the upper
+part of the Line and with small round finger-nails, throat and bronchial
+troubles. With long nails, delicacy of the lungs and chest. With short
+nails without moons, bad circulation and weak action of the heart; and
+with very flat nails, nerve diseases and paralysis (<i>see</i> Nails, page
+<a href="#Page_137">137</a>).</p>
+
+<p>Lower down on the Line of Health on the Mount of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span> the Moon, it indicates
+a grave tendency towards kidney and bladder troubles (7, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.).</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XXII" id="Plate_XXII"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a href="images/fig133.jpg"><img src="images/fig133_th.jpg" width="335" height="348" alt="Plate XXII. THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, THE GRILLE, THE STAR, THE SQUARE." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XXII. THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, THE GRILLE, THE STAR, THE SQUARE.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Any Line that forms itself into an island or that runs into one, is a bad
+sign for that Line or particular part of the hand on which it is found.
+An island on any of the Mounts weakens the qualities of what the Mount
+expresses.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>THE CIRCLE</h3>
+
+<p>On the Mount of the Sun the Circle is favourable (8, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.) in all
+other positions it is unfavourable. On the Mount of the Moon it threatens
+death from drowning.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE SPOT</h3>
+
+<p>The Spot is a sign of temporary arrest of the qualities of any Line on
+which it may be found.</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Head, shock or injury. (9, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Life, sudden illness.</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Health, fever.</p>
+
+<p>On all the other Lines it appears to have less significance.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE GRILLE</h3>
+
+<p>The Grille (10, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.) is very often seen on the Mounts of the
+Hand. It denotes difficulties and obstacles in connection with whatever
+the Mount represents, and a lack of success in whatever quality or talent
+the Mount symbolises.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVI" id="CHAPTER_XVI"></a>CHAPTER XVI</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE STAR, THE CROSS, THE SQUARE</h3>
+
+<p>The Star (11, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.) is with only one exception a most fortunate
+mark to possess. On the Mount of Jupiter, the Star promises added honour,
+power, and position.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Sun, it gives riches and glory, but generally associated
+with a public life.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Mercury, unusual success in commerce, business, science,
+or great eloquence, according to other indications of the hand. (11,
+<a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Mars under Jupiter, great distinction and celebrity in
+martial life or in some one decisive battle, which gives renown to the
+rest of the career, like a Wellington at Waterloo.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Mars under Mercury, it gives honour won by the mentality
+fighting the battle of life (<i>see</i> Mounts, page <a href="#Page_144">144</a>).</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of the Moon it is a sign of great celebrity arising from the
+qualities of this Mount, viz., through the imagination or inventive
+faculties.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Venus the Star on the centre of this Mount is also a sign
+of success, but in relation to animal magnetism and sensuality it gives
+extraordinary success with the opposite sex.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Saturn it is the one unfavourable<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span> sign of this
+particular mark, and on this Mount it gives distinction, but one to be
+dreaded. Such a person will be the plaything of destiny, a man cast for
+some terrible part in the tragedy of life. Such a man's life will end in
+some terrible disaster, but one which will cause his name to be on
+everyone's lips. A king perhaps, but one crowned by doom.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XXIII" id="Plate_XXIII"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 346px;">
+<a href="images/fig136.jpg"><img src="images/fig136_th.jpg" width="346" height="377" alt="Plate XXIII. MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XXIII. MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>THE CROSS</h3>
+
+<p>This sign is the direct opposite to the preceding sign, and has only one
+favourable position, viz., on the Mount of Jupiter where it indicates
+some extraordinary fortunate affection which will come into the life. On
+all the other Mounts it is evil.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Saturn, violent death. (12, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Sun, disappointment in riches.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Mercury, dishonesty.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Mars (under Mercury) great opposition.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Mars (under Jupiter) violence and even death from
+quarrels.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of the Moon it denotes a fatal influence to the imagination.
+Such a man will deceive himself. When low down on this Mount it
+foreshadows death by drowning.</p>
+
+<p>On the Mount of Venus it indicates some fatal influence of the
+affections.</p>
+
+<p>Above the Line of Head it foretells an accident or injury to the head.</p>
+
+<p>Above the Line of Heart, the sudden death of some loved one.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE SQUARE</h3>
+
+<p>The Square (13, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate XXII</a>.) is usually called the Mark of Preservation.
+It shows escape from dangers at that particular moment where it appears.</p>
+
+<p>When on the Line of Life it means preservation from death. (13, <a href="#Plate_XXII">Plate
+XXII</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>On the Line of Fate, preservation from loss, and so on with each quality
+represented by the different lines.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVII" id="CHAPTER_XVII"></a>CHAPTER XVII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>DIFFERENT CLASSES OF LINES</h3>
+
+<p>The lines on the palm should be clearly marked, a good pink or reddish
+colour, and they should be free from breaks, crosses, holes or
+irregularities of all kinds.</p>
+
+<p>When very pale in colour they show lack of force and loss of energy, and
+often poor health.</p>
+
+<p>When extremely red they indicate excessive energy and a rather violent
+disposition.</p>
+
+<p>When yellow in colour they denote a tendency to biliousness and liver
+complaints, and tell in consequence of a melancholy morose nature.</p>
+
+<p>Forked lines are generally good and increase the quality of the special
+indication. When at the end of the Line of Head, the fork gives more of
+what is called a dual mentality and less power of concentration on any
+one subject. (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>Spots on a Line weaken it and arrest its growth.</p>
+
+<p>Tasselled Lines (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.) are not good signs. They weaken any
+indication the line itself denotes, and at the end of a Life Line they
+foreshadow loss of all nervous energy.</p>
+
+<p>Wavy Lines (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.) show uncertainty, lack of decision and want of
+force.</p>
+
+<p>Broken Lines (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.) destroy the meaning of<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> the line at the
+particular place where the break appears, but if one line ends above the
+other, the break is not so bad and the quality of the line will be
+continued.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XXIV" id="Plate_XXIV"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 350px;">
+<a href="images/fig139.jpg"><img src="images/fig139_th.jpg" width="350" height="297" alt="Plate XXIV. MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XXIV. MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Sister Lines (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.) increase or double the power of any line, and
+when lying close together at the Line of Head, they give it great power
+and promise.</p>
+
+<p>Islands (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.) are always evil and denote weakness or failure of
+the Line or Mount on which they may be found.</p>
+
+<p>Ascending Lines (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.) are good from any line from which they
+spring. From the Line of Life they denote increased energy wherever they
+make their appearance. If they run up to any particular Mount or part of
+the hand, they show that the increased<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> effort or energy will be in that
+particular direction.</p>
+
+<p>Descending Lines (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.) are the reverse and mean loss of power.</p>
+
+<p>Chained Lines show lack of force or fixity of purpose. (<a href="#Plate_XXIV">Plate XXIV</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>When the entire hand is covered with a network of small lines, it denotes
+a highly nervous disposition and usually great mental worry and lack of
+decision.</p>
+
+
+<h3>RIGHT AND LEFT HANDS</h3>
+
+<p>Both the hands should be examined together to see if they accord. When
+they do, the indication of whatever the mark is, is more decided.</p>
+
+<p>When something is marked on the left hand and not on the right, the
+tendency will be in the nature, but unless it is also marked on the right
+hand it will never bear fruit or come to any result. When the two hands
+are exactly alike, it denotes that the subject has not developed in any
+way from what heredity or Nature gave to him.</p>
+
+<p>It must be remembered that we use the left side of the brain more than we
+do the right, and the nerves cross and go to the right hand.
+Consequently, it is this hand which denotes the developed or active
+brain, the left only giving the natural tendencies or inclinations.</p>
+
+<p>To be scientific and accurate the student of this subject must always
+keep this rule before his mind and not be led away in his judgment by
+some "marvellously good line" that the subject may proudly call his
+attention to in the left hand, for such a mark will have no actual result
+unless it is also found on the right hand.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XVIII" id="CHAPTER_XVIII"></a>CHAPTER XVIII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE</h3>
+
+<p>The Great Triangle is formed by the lines of Head, Life, and Health
+(<a href="#Plate_XXV">Plate XXV</a>.). The larger this triangle is, the better will be the health,
+for the reason that the Line of Health will be further removed from the
+Life Line. The views of life will also be broader and the field of action
+as it were less limited.</p>
+
+<p>When the upper angle (made by the Head and Life Lines) is acute, the
+subject will be more nervous, timid, and sensitive.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE QUADRANGLE</h3>
+
+<p>The Quadrangle, as its name implies, is that space lying between the
+Lines of Head and Heart. (<a href="#Plate_XXV">Plate XXV</a>.)</p>
+
+<p>To be well marked, it should be even in shape and not narrow at either
+end.</p>
+
+<p>When marked in this way it denotes balance of judgment, level-headedness
+in all things, and is a most excellent sign to have.</p>
+
+<p>It represents man's disposition or mental attitude towards his fellow
+men. When extremely narrow it indicates narrowness of views and bigotry
+in regard to religion.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>When excessively wide, it denotes a lack of judgment in all things and
+too much looseness of views for one's good.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XXV" id="Plate_XXV"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 335px;">
+<a href="images/fig142.jpg"><img src="images/fig142_th.jpg" width="335" height="355" alt="Plate XXV. THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XXV. THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE.</span>
+</div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIX" id="CHAPTER_XIX"></a>CHAPTER XIX</h2>
+
+
+<h3>HOW TO TELL TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS IN THE LIFE</h3>
+
+<p>The most correct way in which to tell time by the hand is to divide the
+Line of Life into periods of seven years, and also the Line of Fate,
+following the accompanying design (<a href="#Plate_XXVI">Plate XXVI</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>The Line of Head may also be divided into sections of seven years (<i>see</i>
+page <a href="#Page_25">25</a>).</p>
+
+<p>This division into periods of seven is the most natural one of all, as
+the entire nature changes every seven years. Long experience has proved
+that, by dividing the hand in the manner shown in the accompanying
+illustration, the best possible results as regards dates are obtained.</p>
+
+<p>I have also made the following curious observation concerning the most
+important years in people's careers, which I now publish in this work for
+the first time.</p>
+
+<p>People born on the 1st, 10th, 19th, and 28th of any month, and especially
+in the months of July, August, and January, will find the following years
+of their lives the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>1st, 7th, 10th, 16th, 19th, 28th, 34th, 37th, 43d, 46th, 52d,
+55th, 61st, and 70th.</p></div><p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span></p>
+<p><a name="Plate_XXVI" id="Plate_XXVI"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 291px;">
+<a href="images/fig144.jpg"><img src="images/fig144_th.jpg" width="291" height="395" alt="Plate XXVI. TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate XXVI. TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 2d, 11th, 20th, and 29th of any month, but more
+especially in July, August, and January, will find the following years of
+their lives the most eventful:<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span></p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th,
+52d, 56th, and 70th.</p></div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 3d, 12th, 21st, and 30th of any month, but more
+especially in the months of December and February, will find the
+following years of their lives the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>3d, 12th, 21st, 30th, 39th, 48th, 57th, 66th, and 75th.</p></div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 4th, 13th, 22d, and 31st, especially in the months of
+July, August, and January, will find the followings years of their lives
+the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>1st, 4th, 10th, 13th, 19th, 22d, 28th, 31st, 37th, 40th, 46th,
+49th, 55th, 58th, 64th, 67th, 73d, and 76th.</p></div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 5th, 14th, and 23d of any month, but especially in the
+months of June and September, will find the following years of their
+lives the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>5th, 14th, 23d, 32d, 41st, 50th, 59th, 68th, and 77th.</p></div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 6th, 15th, and 24th of any month, but especially in the
+months of May and October, will find the following years of their lives
+the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>6th, 15th, 24th, 33d, 42d, 51st, 60th, 69th, 78th, and 87th.</p></div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 7th, 16th, and 25th of any month, especially in the
+months of July, August, and January, will find the following years of
+their lives the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th,
+56th, 61st, 65th, 70th, 74th, and 79th.</p></div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 8th, 17th, and 26th of any month,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span> but more especially
+in the months of January, February, July, and August, will find the
+following years of their lives the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>8th, 17th, 26th, 35th, 44th, 53d, 62d, 71st, and 80th.</p></div>
+
+<p>Those born on the 9th, 18th, and 27th of any month, but more especially
+in the months of April, October, and November, will find the following
+years of their lives the most eventful:</p>
+
+<div class="blockquot"><p>9th, 18th, 27th, 36th, 45th, 54th, 63d, 72d, and 81st.</p></div>
+
+<p>This curious system it will be seen has embraced every day of every month
+that people can be born on. It is based on a strange law of periodicity
+that after years of study I have found extremely accurate and wonderful
+in its meaning.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="PART_II_CHEIROGNOMY" id="PART_II_CHEIROGNOMY"></a>PART II&mdash;CHEIROGNOMY</h2>
+
+<h3>OR</h3>
+
+<h3>THE SCIENCE OF INTERPRETING THE SHAPE OF HANDS</h3>
+
+
+<h2>CHAPTER I</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE STUDY OF THE SHAPE OF THE HAND</h3>
+
+<p>We now leave the domain of what must be considered Palmistry, the study
+of the Lines of the Palm&mdash;or Cheiromancy, as it was called by the Greeks
+from the word <ins class="translit" title="che&iacute;r">&#967;&#949;&iacute;&#961;</ins>, the hand, and proceed to consider the
+meanings that can be derived from the shapes of the hands, fingers, etc.,
+which is called Cheirognomy.</p>
+
+<p>These two studies may be taken up separately, but by a knowledge of both
+the student will be doubly armed, especially in the reading of character.</p>
+
+<p>To a judge of horseflesh the limbs of the horse give him such a fund of
+information as to the animals' breed, training, etc., that it enables him
+to draw conclusions that he could not otherwise obtain.</p>
+
+<p>In the same way the shape of the hand gives an enormous wealth of
+information as to breed and peculiarities of human beings.</p>
+
+<p>In a book of this nature I shall be able to give only<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> the leading traits
+denoted by each type, but if readers wish to carry out this study
+further, I must refer them to my larger works on the subject, in which
+the shapes of the hands are described in the fullest detail.</p>
+
+<p>The most casual observation of character as shown by the formation of
+hands will soon convince any person of the value of this study. Even in
+itself it possesses the most far-reaching possibilities in helping to a
+clear understanding of the difference that exists in races, their various
+blends of types, that have now spread themselves by intermarriage and
+travel over the surface of the earth.</p>
+
+<p>For example, the difference in the shape of the hands of the French and
+German or the French and English races would convince any thinking person
+that temperament and disposition are indeed largely indicated by the
+shape of the hand itself.</p>
+
+<p>It is even a remarkable thing that though work and exercise may enlarge
+and broaden the hand, yet the type to which it belongs is never
+destroyed, but can be easily detected by anyone who has made a study of
+such matters.</p>
+
+<p>The Seven Types or Shapes of Hands are as follows:</p>
+
+<p>
+(1) The Elementary&mdash;or lowest type.<br />
+(2) The Square&mdash;or the useful hand.<br />
+(3) The Spatulate&mdash;or nervous active type.<br />
+(4) The Philosophic&mdash;or jointed hand.<br />
+(5) The Conic&mdash;or the artistic type.<br />
+(6) The Psychic&mdash;or the idealistic hand.<br />
+(7) The Mixed Hand.<br />
+<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS</h3>
+
+
+<h3>THE ELEMENTARY</h3>
+
+<p>As its name implies, the Elementary is the lowest type of all. It is just
+a little above the brute creation. This type is extremely short (<a href="#Plate_I_II">Plate
+I</a>., Part II.), thick set and brutal-looking. In passing I must draw the
+reader's attention to the fact that the shorter and thicker the hand is,
+the nearer the person is to the animal.</p>
+
+<p>In examining this type one can therefore only expect to find it the
+expression of all that is coarse, brutal, and animal.</p>
+
+<p>People having such hands naturally have very little mental development or
+ability. They are found engaged in occupations requiring only unskilled
+labour and the very lowest even of that.</p>
+
+<p>They are violent in temper, and have little or no control over their
+passions or their anger. They are coarse in their ideas, possess little
+or no sentiment, no imagination or feeling, and it has been found that
+even the nerve system of such types is more or less in a state of
+non-development. They do not feel pain as the higher types of humanity
+feel it, and have little ambition except to eat, drink, and sleep.</p>
+
+<p>Note.&mdash;The thumb is extremely short and low-set with the Elementary type.</p>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span></p>
+<p><a name="Plate_I_II" id="Plate_I_II"></a></p>
+
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 333px;">
+<a href="images/fig151a.jpg"><img src="images/fig151a_th.jpg" width="333" height="210" alt="Plate I.&mdash;Part II. Fig. 1&mdash;THE ELEMENTARY HAND. Fig. 2&mdash;THE SQUARE OR USEFUL HAND. Fig. 3&mdash;THE SPATULATE HAND. Fig. 4&mdash;THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Fig. 1&mdash;THE ELEMENTARY HAND.<br /> Fig. 2&mdash;THE SQUARE OR USEFUL HAND.</span>
+<a href="images/fig151b.jpg"><img src="images/fig151b_th.jpg" width="332" height="240" alt="" title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Fig. 3&mdash;THE SPATULATE HAND.<br /> Fig. 4&mdash;THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND.</span><br />
+<span class="caption">Plate I.&mdash;Part II.</span>
+</div>
+
+
+<h3>THE SQUARE TYPE</h3>
+
+<p>The Square type (<a href="#Plate_I_II">Plate I</a>., Part II.,) is so designated on account of the
+palm being like a square in shape, or at least nearly so. Such a hand in
+fact "looks square."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span> It is rather straight or even at the wrist, at the
+base of the fingers, and also at the sides. The fingers themselves also
+have a "square-cut" appearance. The thumb is, however, nearly always
+long, well-shaped, and set high on the palm, and stands well out from the
+palm.</p>
+
+<p>The Square Hand is also called the practical or useful hand. People who
+possess this type are essentially practical, logical, and rather
+materialistic. They belong to the earth and the things of the earth. They
+have little imagination or idealism, they are solid, serious workers,
+methodical and painstaking in all they do. They believe in things only by
+proof and by their reason. They are often religious and even
+superstitious, but more from habit than from anything else.</p>
+
+<p>They are determined and obstinate, especially if their thumbs are long
+and the first joint stiff.<a name="FNanchor_7_7" id="FNanchor_7_7"></a><a href="#Footnote_7_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a></p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_7_7" id="Footnote_7_7"></a><a href="#FNanchor_7_7"><span class="label">[7]</span></a> <i>See</i> Chapter on Thumbs, page <a href="#Page_127">127</a>.</p></div>
+
+<p>They succeed in all lines of work that do not require imagination or the
+creative faculties, and as business men, lawyers, doctors, scientists,
+they do extremely well, and are generally to be found in such callings.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE SPATULATE HAND</h3>
+
+<p>The Spatulate or active nervous type (<a href="#Plate_I_II">Plate I</a>., Part II.) is usually
+crooked or irregular looking, with large tips or pads at the ends of the
+fingers, rather like the spatula chemists use and from which peculiarity
+this type gets its name. The people who possess this type are in fact
+always "pounding" at something. They are full of untiring energy,
+enormous workers in<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span> everything they take up, and generally remarkable
+for their originality.</p>
+
+<p>They are not built on the hard set square lines of the former type. These
+persons have enormous imagination, their creative faculties largely
+developed. They are inventive, unconventional, emotional, demonstrative,
+and in fact the complete opposite in character to the class who possesses
+the square type of hand.</p>
+
+<p>The Spatulate type has also the palm irregular in shape. It may be wider
+at the base of the fingers than at the wrist, or it may be found <i>vice
+versa</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the first case they are then more practical in their work and views
+and less impulsive. With the larger development at the wrist, they are
+more carried away with their impulses, hasty and impetuous in temper,
+speech, and action.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND</h3>
+
+<p>The Philosophic Hand (<a href="#Plate_I_II">Plate I</a>., Part II.) received this name from the
+Greek <ins class="translit" title="philos">&#966;&#953;&#955;&#959;&#963;</ins>&mdash;love, and <ins class="translit" title="sophich">&#963;&#959;&#966;&#953;&#967;</ins>&mdash;wisdom.
+When the Greeks made a study of hands they noticed that all those persons
+who possessed this type had a bent for philosophy in their blood that
+nothing could eradicate.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_II_II" id="Plate_II_II"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 396px;">
+<a href="images/fig154.jpg"><img src="images/fig154_th.jpg" width="396" height="201" alt="Plate II.&mdash; Part II. Fig. 1.&mdash;THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND. Fig. 2.&mdash;THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND. Fig. 3.&mdash;THE MIXED HAND." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Fig. 1.&mdash;THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND.<br /> Fig. 2.&mdash;THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND.<br /> Fig. 3.&mdash;THE MIXED HAND.</span><br />
+<span class="caption">Plate II.&mdash; Part II.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>The Philosophic Hand is long, bony, and angular with knotty joints, and
+is as a general rule fairly thin. People with this type of hand are
+always studious. They are great readers and usually have a strong
+tendency towards literature. They love sedentary work, and have a
+somewhat lonely, ascetic disposition. Perhaps on account of this quality
+they are very often found in church-life, or largely associated with
+religious movements. The monks of old, I mean those who<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> compiled those
+wonderful manuscripts on doctrine, science, art, alchemy, and occult
+matters, all had this class of hand. In our modern times this type may be
+easily recognised, and the qualities it expresses remain the same even in
+the age of money-getting and machinery.</p>
+
+<p>It is, however, more usual nowadays to find a slight modification of the
+true philosophic hand in that of the hand with the palm square and with
+the fingers only belonging to the philosophic type. In such cases the
+practical nature is a basis or foundation on which the studious mind
+builds its theories, its religion, its literary achievements, or its
+scientific researches.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule the Line of Head on such hands is rather sloping, but it may
+also be found almost straight, and when it is, a more "level-headed"
+disposition will make more practical use of the studious nature. But
+speaking generally, people with this type of hand rarely accumulate as
+much wealth as those possessing the Square Hand.</p>
+
+<p>The knotted or jointed fingers give carefulness and detail in work or
+study. They arrest the impulse of the brain, and so acquire time for
+thought and reflection.</p>
+
+<p>The Philosophic Hand is one of the highest developments of the mental
+side of the human family.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND</h3>
+
+<p>The Conic, also called the Artistic, Hand (<a href="#Plate_II_II">Plate II</a>., Part II.), is
+always graceful looking, with the fingers tapering and pointed. It has,
+not only on account of its appearance but also because of the qualities
+it represents, been called the Artistic Hand.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Its possessor may not always paint pictures or design beautiful things,
+but he will have the emotional, artistic temperament, which loves
+beautiful surroundings, and is most sensitive to colour, music, and all
+the fine arts. It largely depends on the kind of Head Line and the will
+power shown by it, to determine whether its owner will develop the
+natural artistic temperament that he or she possesses.</p>
+
+<p>Such hands being generally full, fleshy, or soft, there is always a
+decidedly pronounced indolence in the nature which, if not overcome,
+combats the hard work necessary to achieve any real result. All very
+emotional people have more or less the characteristics of this type, but
+great numbers simply squander their time in the appreciation of art,
+rather than in making the effort in themselves to create it.</p>
+
+<p>The harder and firmer this type of hand is, the more likely it is to find
+that its possessor will really make something out of his artistic
+temperament.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND</h3>
+
+<p>This type (<a href="#Plate_II_II">Plate II</a>., Part II.), may in many ways be considered as the
+highest development of the hand on the purely mental plane, but from a
+worldly standpoint it is the least successful of all. Its possessors live
+in a world of dreams and ideals. They know little or nothing about the
+practical or purely material side of existence, and when they have to
+earn their own bread they gain so little that they usually starve.</p>
+
+<p>These beautiful hands do not appear made for work in any sense. They are
+also too spiritual and frail to deal blows and hold their own in the
+battle of life. If they are supported by others, or have money<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> of their
+own to live on, all may be well, and in such cases they will be likely to
+develop strange psychic gifts dealing with visions and ideals that some
+few may hear and understand. But if not, their fate as a rule is a sad
+one, they will easily be pushed aside by the rougher types of humanity
+or, in sheer helplessness, take their own lives, and so end the unequal
+struggle.</p>
+
+<p>In constitution they are seldom strong physically, and consequently they
+are doubly unfitted for the struggle for existence.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE MIXED HAND</h3>
+
+<p>What is called the "Mixed Hand" (<a href="#Plate_II_II">Plate II</a>., Part II.), is an aggregation
+of all the types, or at least, some of them.</p>
+
+<p>It is very often found having all the fingers different from one another,
+as for example one pointed, one square, or spatulate, and so on. Or
+sometimes the palm may be of one type, say spatulate, with all the
+fingers mixed.</p>
+
+<p>Such persons are always versatility itself, but so changeable in purpose
+that they rarely succeed in making much out of any talents they may
+possess. They can generally do a little of everything but nothing well.
+They can talk on any subject that may crop up, but never impress their
+listeners with depth of thought on any subject.</p>
+
+<p>It is only when the Line of Head is found on such hands clear and
+straight that there is a likelihood of these persons developing some one
+talent out of the versatility that this type gives.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IIb" id="CHAPTER_IIb"></a>CHAPTER II</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE THUMB</h3>
+
+<p>In the judgment of character by the formation of the Hand, the Thumb is
+of about the same importance as the nose is to the face. It must be
+understood to represent the natural Will Power, whereas the Line of Head
+represents the Mental Will.</p>
+
+<p>In my larger works on this subject I have gone into very deeply the
+medical reasons why character should be expressed by the Thumb and the
+extraordinary r&ocirc;le it has played in civilisation, and also in the various
+religions of the world.</p>
+
+<p>The Thumb proper represents the three great worlds of ideas, viz., Love,
+Logic, and Will (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>., Part II.).</p>
+
+<p>Love is represented by the base of the Thumb which is covered on the hand
+by the Mount of Venus.</p>
+
+<p>Logic is the middle phalange, and Will is the top or nail portion.</p>
+
+<p>When these divisions are found large, the qualities are increased; when
+small, they play a smaller r&ocirc;le in the life of the individual.</p>
+
+<p>There are two distinct classes of Thumbs, the supple-jointed and the
+firm-jointed.</p>
+
+<p>The former of these divisions is the Thumb bending<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span> outwards and supple
+at the joint underneath the nail (<a href="#Fig_2">Fig. 2</a>, <a href="#Plate_III_II">Plate III</a>.).</p>
+
+<p>This denotes a nature pliable and adaptable to others, very broad-minded,
+rather unconventional, and not obstinate in its views of life. These
+characteristics will be increased if the Head Line be found sloping and
+bending downwards. If, however, the Line of Head be found lying straight
+across the palm, they are more conventional. The "supple-jointed" thumb
+also denotes generosity of mind both as regards thought and money. In all
+ways these people are more extravagant than people who have the straight
+firm-jointed thumb. In other words they "give more" even in what they
+think as well as in what they do.</p>
+
+<p>The nearer the Thumb approaches the side of the hand, or the more it
+looks tied down or cramped to the palm, the more the subject is inclined
+to grasp or hold. The true miser has always a thumb cramped towards the
+hand, and the nail phalange as a rule slightly turned in, as if the mind
+wanted to grab hold or retain.</p>
+
+<p>The supple-jointed Thumb is more impulsive in its desire to give than is
+the stiff-jointed class, whereas the latter type demands reflection
+before he even gives an opinion.</p>
+
+<p>If a favour should be asked of the man with the supple-jointed Thumb, one
+should remember that he is more inclined to give in on the impulse of the
+moment, and if one does not press one's point home at once, he is likely
+first to promise, and later, on reflection, change his mind.</p>
+
+<p>The man with the stiff-jointed Thumb (<a href="#Fig_3">Fig. 3</a>, <a href="#Plate_III_II">Plate III</a>.) on the
+contrary, is more likely to refuse at first and on reflection to agree to
+the proposition; but it<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span> he does make up his mind, he will stick to his
+judgment or opinion, and the more he is opposed the more determined he
+will be to hold to his view.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_III_II" id="Plate_III_II"></a></p>
+
+<p><a name="Fig_1" id="Fig_1"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 98px;">
+<a href="images/fig160a.jpg"><img src="images/fig160a_th.jpg" width="98" height="122" alt="Fig. 1.&mdash;THE CLUBBED THUMB." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Fig. 1.&mdash;THE CLUBBED THUMB.</span>
+</div>
+<p><a name="Fig_2" id="Fig_2"></a><a name="Fig_3" id="Fig_3"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 339px;">
+<a href="images/fig160b.jpg"><img src="images/fig160b_th.jpg" width="339" height="169" alt="Fig. 2.&mdash;THE SUPPLE-JOINTED THUMB. Fig. 3.&mdash;THE FIRM-JOINTED THUMB. " title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Fig. 2.&mdash;THE SUPPLE-JOINTED THUMB.<br /> Fig. 3.&mdash;THE FIRM-JOINTED THUMB. </span>
+</div>
+<p><a name="Fig_4" id="Fig_4"></a><a name="Fig_5" id="Fig_5"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 312px;">
+<a href="images/fig160c.jpg"><img src="images/fig160c_th.jpg" width="312" height="170" alt="Fig. 4.&mdash;THE WAIST-LIKE THUMB. Fig. 5.&mdash;THE STRAIGHT THUMB. Fig. 6.&mdash;THE ELEMENTARY THUMB." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Fig. 4.&mdash;THE WAIST-LIKE THUMB.<br /> Fig. 5.&mdash;THE STRAIGHT THUMB.<br /> Fig. 6.&mdash;THE ELEMENTARY THUMB.</span><br />
+<span class="caption">Plate III.&mdash; Part II.</span></div>
+
+
+
+<p>The firm-jointed thumb is then the outward sign of a more resisting
+nature, and the longer the first or nail phalange is, the stronger and
+more powerful the Will force.</p>
+
+<p>These people seldom make friends so easily or rapidly as those belonging
+to the other type. On a railway journey they rarely begin a conversation
+with a fellow traveller, and if they have to do so it will generally be
+in the form of an argument that "the window must be left open or shut,"
+as the case may be. Heaven help the other poor traveller if he should
+also happen to have a stiff thumb, and oppose his ideas to those of the
+first.</p>
+
+<p>The supple-jointed class, on the contrary, enter readily into
+conversation with strangers, and they often make their greatest friends
+while travelling. They are affable, charming companions, and give in
+readily to the wishes of others. In fact, this quality inclines to a
+weakness that should be guarded against. Among all those men and women
+who take the "easiest way" a large majority will be found to have very
+supple-jointed thumbs. This, however, will be greatly qualified by the
+position and appearance of the Line of Head, the indicator of the
+developed mental Will.</p>
+
+<p>To have a supple lower or middle joint does not relate to the Will but to
+the phalange of Logic of the possessor. When this second joint is found
+supple the subject adapts himself to circumstances rather than to
+persons. He reasons out that he must bend or adapt himself to the
+conditions or circumstances of the life in which he is placed.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The Clubbed Thumb (<a href="#Fig_1">Fig. 1</a>, <a href="#Plate_III_II">Plate III</a>.), is so called from its being thick
+like a club. People possessing this class of Thumb belong to the
+Elementary type as far as Will is concerned. They are brutal and like
+animals in their unreasonable obstinacy. If they are opposed they fly
+into ungovernable passions and blind rages. They have no control over
+themselves, and are liable to go to any extreme of violence or crime
+during one of their tempers. In fact the clubbed-shaped Thumb has also
+been designated "the murderer's thumb" on account of so many murderers
+having been found with this formation.</p>
+
+<p>The possessor of a Clubbed Thumb could not, however, plan out or
+premeditate a crime, for he would not have the determined Will or power
+of reason to think it out.</p>
+
+<p>The shorter the Thumb, the nearer the possessor is to the brute in
+passion and lack of self-control.</p>
+
+<p>The "waist-like" Thumb (<a href="#Fig_4">Fig. 4</a>, <a href="#Plate_III_II">Plate III</a>.), and the "straight" formation
+(<a href="#Fig_5">Fig. 5</a>), must also be considered as the opposite of one another in their
+characteristics, but in this case the difference is in the quality of
+Logic or Reason. The former will not use or depend much on such things,
+he will rely, on the contrary, on tact and diplomacy to gain his point or
+win his way. The second class have little or no tact, but in all matters
+depend on argument and reason.</p>
+
+<p>The third phalange of the Thumb, which is placed under the designation of
+Love (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>., Part II.), when found long, denotes more control over
+the quality of Love or Sensuality; when short and thick-set, the passion
+or sensual nature is more brutal and animal.</p>
+
+<p>The space at my disposal in this work will not allow<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span> me to go deeper
+into all the shades of character that can be made out by a study of the
+Thumb alone, but I think I have said enough to show my readers the great
+truth in D'Arpentigny's words that "the Thumb individualises the man."<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IIIb" id="CHAPTER_IIIb"></a>CHAPTER III</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE FINGERS&mdash;LENGTH TO ONE ANOTHER</h3>
+
+
+<h3>THE SMOOTH AND THE KNOTTY</h3>
+
+<p>The First Finger is called the Finger of Jupiter.</p>
+
+<p>The Second is called the Finger of Saturn.</p>
+
+<p>The Third is called the Finger of The Sun.</p>
+
+<p>The Fourth is called the Finger of Mercury.</p>
+
+<p>The Finger of Jupiter, when long, gives love of power and command over
+others. When short it denotes dislike of responsibility and lack of
+ambition.</p>
+
+<p>The Finger of Saturn when long gives prudence, love of solitude and a
+reserved, studious disposition. When short it denotes frivolity and
+general lack of seriousness in all things.</p>
+
+<p>The Finger of the Sun when long gives love of the beautiful, desire for
+celebrity and fame, but when excessively long, the tendency inclines more
+toward notoriety, risk in speculation, the love of money and gambling.
+When short it denotes a dislike of all these things.</p>
+
+<p>The Finger of Mercury when long gives mental power, grasp of languages,
+and power of expression, especially in speech. When short it denotes
+difficulty in speaking, and in the expression of thoughts. When crooked,
+with an irregular Head Line, it is an evil sign of the Mentality.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>The fingers should be long in proportion to the palm; they then denote
+greater intellectuality and mental power. When short and stubby looking,
+the subject is inclined to animalism and gross materialism.</p>
+
+<p>When the fingers lean towards one another, they take after the qualities
+expressed by the finger towards which they lean.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_IV_II" id="Plate_IV_II"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 340px;">
+<a href="images/fig165.jpg"><img src="images/fig165_th.jpg" width="340" height="249" alt="Plate IV.&mdash;Part II. DIFFERENT SHAPES OF FINGERS. THE SQUARE WITH SMOOTH JOINTS THE POINTED THE KNOTTY" title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate IV.&mdash;Part II. DIFFERENT SHAPES OF FINGERS.</span>
+</div>
+
+<p>A wide space between the thumb and first finger denotes independence of
+will and fearlessness.</p>
+
+<p>When wide between the first and second fingers, independence of thought;
+between the second and third fingers, independence of circumstances; and
+wide between the third and fourth fingers, independence of action.</p>
+
+<p>When the fingers are found loose and inclined to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span> curve backwards, the
+subject is "open-minded" and quick to grasp ideas or suggestions. They
+will not, however, have the more methodical stick-at-it quality of those
+whose fingers are found firm and stiff.</p>
+
+<p>When the fingers are curved inwards, the subject is slower to grasp new
+ideas, very cautious, and inclined to hold on to what he knows or what he
+has.</p>
+
+<p>Smooth-jointed fingers are more impulsive than those with "knotty
+joints". The "knotty joints" arrest the impetuousness of the disposition
+and give reflection, love of detail in all their work and are more
+frequently found in the hands of all great organisers and those who
+require thought and reflection in carrying out their plans.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IVb" id="CHAPTER_IVb"></a>CHAPTER IV</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE NAILS OF THE HAND</h3>
+
+<p>A study of the Nails of the Hand is a remarkably accurate guide to many
+diseases. This part of Palmistry is now recognised by the majority of
+medical men, who seldom fail quietly to observe the appearance of the
+nails on a patient's hand.</p>
+
+<p>They are peculiarly indicative of hereditary diseases, especially lungs,
+heart, nerves, and spine.</p>
+
+<p>They are divided into four very distinct classes. Long, Short, Broad, and
+Narrow.</p>
+
+
+<h3>LONG NAILS</h3>
+
+<p>When the Nails are found very long, the general constitution never
+appears to be so strong as when they are medium in size.</p>
+
+<p>Persons with long Nails are more liable to all diseases of the Lungs and
+Chest (<a href="#Plate_V_II">Plate V</a>., Part II.), and still more so when these long Nails are
+seen ribbed or fluted, with the ribs running upward from the base to the
+edge of the nail.</p>
+
+<p>The same type of Nail, but shorter in appearance, indicates that the
+delicacy lies higher up towards the<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span> throat, and denotes tendencies for
+laryngitis, inflammation of the throat, and all bronchial troubles.</p>
+
+<p>When especially long Nails are bluish in colour, they denote a still more
+delicate constitution, coupled with poor circulation of the blood.</p>
+<p><a name="Plate_V_II" id="Plate_V_II"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 365px;">
+<a href="images/fig168.jpg"><img src="images/fig168_th.jpg" width="365" height="331" alt="Plate V.&mdash; Part II." title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate V.&mdash; Part II.</span>
+</div>
+
+
+<h3>SHORT NAILS</h3>
+
+<p>Nails short in appearance denote a tendency towards weak action of the
+heart, more especially so when the "moons" are very small or barely
+noticeable. When the Nails appear very flat and sunk into the flesh at
+the base they denote nerve diseases. When they are<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span> "ribbed" across the
+Nail from side to side, the danger is still more apparent.</p>
+
+<p>When a deep furrow is found across the Nail, it is a sign in any hand
+that an unusual call has recently been made on the nervous system by
+illness. If the following rule be studied, the date of this illness or
+strain can be very clearly indicated.</p>
+
+<p>As it takes about nine months for a nail to grow out from the base to the
+outer edge, the nail can easily be divided into sections. When the furrow
+or very deep "rib" is seen close to the edge, the illness took place
+about nine months ago; when the furrow is seen about the centre, the date
+was about from four to five months, and when at the base, about one month
+previously.</p>
+
+<p>White spots on the Nails are a sign of general delicacy, and when the
+Nail is seen covered with small white flecks, the whole nervous system is
+in a low state of health.</p>
+
+
+<h3>LONG NARROW NAILS</h3>
+
+<p>Very narrow Nails (<a href="#Plate_V_II">Plate V</a>., Part II.), show spinal weakness, and when
+extremely curved and very thin they indicate curvature of the spine and
+great delicacy of the constitution.</p>
+
+
+<h3>FLAT NAILS</h3>
+
+<p>When the Nails appear very flat and inclined to lift themselves up from
+the flesh towards their outer edge, the threatened danger is towards
+paralysis, and still more so when they look like a shell and are pointed
+towards the base (<a href="#Plate_V_II">Plate V</a>., Part II.). When these<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> Nails are without any
+signs of moons, and whitish or bluish in colour, the disease is in a very
+advanced stage.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOONS OF THE NAILS</h3>
+
+<p>Large "Moons" always denote strong action of the heart and rapid
+circulation of the blood, but when unusually large they indicate too much
+pressure on the heart, rapidity in its beat, the valves over-strained and
+danger of bursting some blood vessel in the heart or in the brain.</p>
+
+<p>Small "Moons" indicate the reverse of this; they always denote poor
+circulation, weak action of the heart and an&aelig;mia of the brain.</p>
+
+<p>When close to death the "Moons" are the first to take on a bluish look,
+and later on the entire Nail becomes blue or almost black in colour.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_Vb" id="CHAPTER_Vb"></a>CHAPTER V</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND AND THEIR MEANING</h3>
+
+<p>The Mounts of the Hand (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>., Part II.) vary in the most remarkable
+manner in accordance with the character and dispositions of races and
+their different temperaments.</p>
+
+<p>In almost all the Southern and more emotional races, these Mounts are
+more noticeable than those belonging to Northern countries. It has been
+observed that all people with the Mounts apparent or prominent are more
+swayed by their feelings and emotions than those people who have flat
+palms and undeveloped Mounts.</p>
+
+<p>The names given to the Mounts of the Hand are those also given to the
+seven principal planets that sway the destiny of our earth, viz., the
+Sun, Moon, Venus, Mercury, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.</p>
+
+<p>These names were given to the Mounts by the Greek students of this
+subject, and were associated by them with the qualities attributed to
+these seven planets, such as:</p>
+
+
+
+<div class='center'>
+<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="">
+<tr><td align='left'>Venus</td><td align='left'>=</td><td align='left'>Love, sensuality and passion.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Mars</td><td align='left'>=</td><td align='left'>Vitality, courage, fighting, etc.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Mercury</td><td align='left'>=</td><td align='left'>Mentality, commerce, science.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Moon</td><td align='left'>=</td><td align='left'>Imagination, romance, changeability.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Sun</td><td align='left'>=</td><td align='left'>Brilliancy, fruitfulness, success.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Jupiter</td><td align='left'>=</td><td align='left'>Ambition, power, domination.</td></tr>
+<tr><td align='left'>Saturn</td><td align='left'>=</td><td align='left'>Reserve, melancholy, seriousness.</td></tr>
+</table></div>
+
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span></p>
+<p><a name="Plate_VI_II" id="Plate_VI_II"></a></p>
+<div class="figcenter" style="width: 292px;">
+<a href="images/fig172.jpg"><img src="images/fig172_th.jpg" width="292" height="400" alt="Plate VI.&mdash;Part II. THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND" title="" /></a>
+<span class="caption">Plate VI.&mdash;Part II. THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND</span>
+</div>
+<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In my own long experience I could not help but remark the intimate
+relation between the effect of these great planets of our Universe and
+humanity in general. Although it would not be within the scope of this
+work to teach also Astrology in these pages, I must, however, in order to
+help all earnest students and readers of this book, put before them the
+following curious evidence of the influence of the planets on our lives.
+This is also demonstrated by the position and shape of the Mounts on the
+Hand, and, as far as I know, has never been published in any book dealing
+with Palmistry before.</p>
+
+<p>In the accompanying pages it will be noticed that I have for the first
+time dealt with these Mounts as Positive and Negative. The following
+explanation of my reason for doing this should be of the greatest
+assistance to my readers, and will also be useful in showing the close
+relationship between the two sciences Astrology and Palmistry.</p>
+
+<p>There are, it is well-known, in the Zodiac which surrounds our earth,
+what are called "the twelve Houses" of the seven principal planets of our
+Solar System.</p>
+
+<p>The Zodiac itself is described both by Astronomers and Astrologers as a
+pathway in the Universe, about sixteen degrees broad, in which the
+planets travel. It is divided into twelve Signs or Houses of thirty
+degrees each, and our Sun enters a new sign on an average of every thirty
+days. At the end of twelve months it has completed the zodiacal circle of
+360 degrees, or one Solar year.</p>
+
+<p>The Sun, the creator of life, and itself the greatest mystery of our
+Universe, is in bulk 330,000 times larger than our earth. It therefore
+follows that in entering<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span> a new sign of the Zodiac, it changes the
+magnetic vibrations of the effect of each sign towards our earth.
+Consequently it is reasonable to presume that a person born, say in
+April, and another in May, would have very different characteristics and
+naturally a distinct destiny, because character is Fate or Destiny.</p>
+
+<p>My readers will now easily follow me when I state that, especially as
+regards health and disease, the following tables concerning the Mounts of
+the Hand, taken in conjunction with the date of birth, will enable them,
+when reading the hand, to tell many things with an accuracy that will be
+most convincing both to themselves and to their hearers.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIb" id="CHAPTER_VIb"></a>CHAPTER VI</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF MARS</h3>
+
+<p>This Mount has two positions on the palm (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>., Part II.); the first
+is to be found immediately under the upper part of the Line of Life, and
+the other opposite to it in the space lying between the Line of Heart and
+the Line of Head. The first relates to the physical characteristics and
+the second to the mental.</p>
+
+<p>The first if large is Positive, and it has more importance when the
+person is born between the dates of March 21st and April 21st, and in a
+minor way until April 28th, which portion of the year in the Zodiac is
+called the House of Mars (Positive).</p>
+
+<p>The second is considered Negative, and it has more importance when the
+person is born between October 21st and November 21st, and in a minor way
+until November 28th, because in the Zodiac this portion of the year is
+denoted as the House of Mars (Negative).</p>
+
+<p>We will now consider the difference of these two positions, how
+distinctly they affect the mind and temperament, and also their relation
+as to health and tendency towards disease.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>THE FIRST MOUNT OF MARS</h3>
+
+<p>In the first Mount of Mars, at the commencement of the Line of Life, and
+especially when the subject is born in the House of Mars (March 21st to
+April 21st, and in a minor way until the 28th), he possesses a strong
+martial nature which will make its tendencies manifest in all actions of
+the life, whether the man be a business man, a soldier, or a leader of
+men in any line whatever.</p>
+
+<p>These subjects are born fighters in every sense of the word. They brook
+little or no control in all their affairs; they aspire to be leaders in
+whatever career they undertake, and with even average intelligence they
+generally become heads of business houses or organisations and take on
+large responsibilities.</p>
+
+<p>They have great obstinacy of purpose and determination, they resent all
+criticism, they are decided and dogmatic in all their views, and seldom
+ask the advice of others, until it is too late to alter their purpose for
+good or evil.</p>
+
+<p>They must do everything their own way, and as they always believe their
+way is the only right one they resent the slightest interference from
+others, and will even turn on their best friend who may attempt to
+dissuade them from their plans or purpose.</p>
+
+<p>They can only be handled or managed by kindness, patience, tact, or by
+their affections.</p>
+
+<p>The slightest attempt to fight or coerce them will bring them up "in
+arms" in a moment. The temper is hasty and explosive, but at the same
+time quickly over, and when the storm subsides they bitterly regret the
+outburst of passion and the cruel things they may have said in the heat
+of the moment.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>As a rule these people are good-natured and generous, but spasmodic and
+impulsive in all their actions. Their greatest fault lies in their
+impulsiveness and lack of self-control, and unless a good Line of Head be
+shown on the hands, they rush madly into all kinds of difficulties and
+dangers and often make a complete muddle of their opportunities and the
+magnificent powers of leadership that they nearly all possess.</p>
+
+<p>These people as a rule are unhappy in their love affairs or domestic
+life. They rarely meet women who understand them, and if they are lucky
+enough to escape opposition from their wives, they usually meet with it
+in their children.</p>
+
+<p>In health they are prone to fevers and blood diseases, especially in
+their early life. In youth they are also very liable to fits, epilepsy,
+severe headaches, often water on the brain, and suffer greatly with their
+teeth.</p>
+
+<p>In old age they have a grave liability towards apoplexy, vertigo, pains
+in the head and softening of the brain, and especially so if on their
+hands the Line of Head looks frayed, or made up of little pieces like a
+chain.</p>
+
+<p>Such people should be advised to cultivate repose self-control, and above
+all to avoid wines, spirits, and stimulants of all kinds, to which as a
+rule these natures are very much inclined.</p>
+
+<p>They should endeavour to sleep more than any other class, to take more
+recreation and exercise in the open air, and above all things to curb
+their pride and control their temper.</p>
+
+<p>The higher types of these subjects and those among them who practise
+self-restraint, can rise to almost<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> any height in life and do great
+things for the benefit of their fellow men.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE SECOND MOUNT OF MARS</h3>
+
+<p>The second Mount of Mars, lying between the Heart and Head Line (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate
+VI</a>., Part II.), is more important when the subject is born between the
+dates of 21st October and the 21st November and until November 28th. In
+the Zodiac this period of the year is called the House of Mars Negative
+or Mental.</p>
+
+<p>In character they are the complete opposite of the former type, all the
+Mars qualities being in the mind and in the mental attitude towards
+people and things.</p>
+
+<p>The latter type are mentally very courageous, and possess <i>moral courage</i>
+more than physical. They hate to have scenes, or to be mixed up with
+physical violence or bloodshed.</p>
+
+<p>They love to fight mentally, however, and in debates or arguments they
+also fight to the finish. They are more quietly determined than the
+former class of Mars subjects. They are even more obstinate in their
+views, but conceal their opinions, and often pass for assenting parties
+when in reality they are but waiting for the right opportunity to strike
+their "mental blow" and confuse their opponent.</p>
+
+<p>These people make better organisers than leaders, and their mental
+martial spirit often finds a splendid field for their talents as the
+brain behind an army. In plans, tactics and strategy, in carefully
+thought-out stores of ammunitions, provisions, or in financial schemes
+that may bring ruin or discomfiture on a more warlike enemy.</p>
+
+<p>When not highly cultivated or developed, they<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span> employ cunning and craft
+of every description to carry out their plans. They will stop at nothing
+to carry out their purpose. They can be the most treacherous and deadly
+enemies of all, and poison in opposition to the sword is one of the chief
+weapons they most readily employ.</p>
+
+<p>All these Mars Negative people have a mysterious power of magnetism,
+which they seem almost unconsciously to use in their dealings with
+others. They make natural hypnotists and thought-readers, and have strong
+leanings towards occultism and secret societies of all kinds. When on a
+highly developed plane, they use these wonderful qualities for the good
+of others, especially if they take up the study of medicine or science,
+for which work they seem usually well suited.</p>
+
+<p>Mars Negative people are generally so versatile and many-sided that they
+are the most difficult of all to place in some special career. If a good
+Line of Head be found on the hand, then there is nothing in the world of
+mental endeavour in which they will not make a success. It is a curious
+fact that these people seldom carry out what they were first trained for,
+and in fact in the course of their lives they are likely to change their
+profession or vocation as many times as the proverbial cat has lives.</p>
+
+<p>The worst fault of this type is that they are rather too adaptable to
+their surroundings and to the people with whom they come in contact. If
+they are thrown with evil-minded persons they are inclined to adapt
+themselves to their companions and even attempt to "go one better," but
+if in contact with good influences they just as rapidly develop the best
+that is in them.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Their period of the Zodiac has from time immemorial been symbolised in
+their lower development as the figure of a scorpion wounding its own
+tail, and in their higher development that of an eagle with its head
+pointing upwards to the sky.</p>
+
+<p>Such symbols perfectly illustrate the dual nature of the type under
+consideration. In their lower aspect no type can be more vicious or
+harmful, even to wounding themselves and bringing about their own
+destruction. In their higher form, however, there is probably no class
+whose spiritual nature can, like the eagle, soar to such heights or be so
+free from earthly ties.</p>
+
+<p>Mars Negative people, especially when young, should above all things be
+carefully brought up with good companions. They should be especially
+warned to control their sex nature and be kept aloof from all perverse
+persons and evil books.</p>
+
+<p>As regards health, this type is usually inclined to be both slight and
+delicate in their early years, but generally incline towards corpulency
+after passing middle life. Both the men and women have a likelihood of
+weakness or illness in the sex organs, especially in youth, also in the
+kidneys and the bladder, while in advanced years the stomach and
+digestive organs become disordered. All through their lives they should
+be most careful and abstemious in their diet.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIIb" id="CHAPTER_VIIb"></a>CHAPTER VII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF JUPITER AND ITS MEANING</h3>
+
+<p>The Mount of Jupiter is found at the base of the first finger (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>.,
+Part II.). When large, it shows desire to dominate, to rule and command
+others, to lead and organise, and to carry out some distinct object. But
+these good qualities will only be employed if the Line of Head is clear
+and long. When this line is poor and badly formed, then a large Mount of
+Jupiter gives pride, excess of vanity, a self-confident and a
+self-opinionated person. But on what is known as a good well-marked hand,
+there is no Mount more excellent and no surer indication of success from
+sheer strength of character and purpose.</p>
+
+<p>This Mount may be considered Positive when a person is found born between
+November 21st and December 20th, and in a minor way until the 28th. These
+persons are naturally ambitious, fearless and determined in all they
+undertake, but in acting on their impulses, they generally "hit too
+straight from the shoulder," or show their ambition too plainly, and so
+arouse antagonism, opposition, and enmity.</p>
+
+<p>They concentrate all their attention on whatever they may be doing at the
+moment and see no way but their own, especially if they feel the least
+opposition to their plans. They are, however, honourable and high<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span>
+principled in almost all they undertake and respond to any trust or
+confidence placed in them.</p>
+
+<p>They are usually extremely truthful and bitterly resent any attempt at
+deception, and do not hesitate to unmask any effort to deceive others,
+even when such an action on their part may ruin their own plans.</p>
+
+<p>They have great enterprise in business and all matters requiring
+organisation, and easily become the heads of businesses, or hold
+responsible positions in government offices or under the government. They
+rarely become politicians, for the simple reason that they cannot bear to
+bend to any party plans or schemes.</p>
+
+<p>They are perhaps the most independent of all types in choosing their own
+careers. Because their father may have happened to be a clergyman will be
+no reason for them to follow his example or even hold the same views on
+religion.</p>
+
+<p>It is for this reason that in early life such subjects are a cause of
+worry and anxiety to their parents; but they should always be allowed to
+choose their own career and even change it a dozen times if they wish,
+until at last they find their true vocation.</p>
+
+<p>The great fault of this class is that they are inclined to go to extremes
+in all things, and in doing so exhaust their efforts, and then change and
+fly off in another direction. But in all cases where the Line of Head is
+well-marked, especially when lying straight across the palm, there is no
+height in position or responsibility that they may not reach.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>These subjects are more inclined to suffer with rheumatism and acid
+complaints than from any other<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span> form of disease, also inflammation of the
+tongue and throat, boils, carbuncles, eczema, and all skin troubles.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF JUPITER (NEGATIVE)</h3>
+
+<p>The Mount of Jupiter may be considered negative or mental when the
+subject is born between the dates of February 19th and March 20th, and in
+a slighter degree until the 28th.</p>
+
+<p>In this case the ambition takes rather the mental form than what might be
+termed material. Brain work and brain development is more their
+speciality than other forms of effort.</p>
+
+<p>They seem to possess a kind of natural understanding of things and easily
+acquire all sorts of knowledge about a large variety of things,
+especially the history of countries, races, peoples, geographical,
+botanical, and geological researches.</p>
+
+<p>In spite of this mental ambition, these people are usually so very
+sensitive and so lacking in self-confidence that they find the greatest
+difficulty in carrying out their plans and making people believe in their
+projects. For this reason they appear to shrink from coming before the
+public, and have to stand aside and see others getting the credit for
+what really was their plan.</p>
+
+<p>A great number of literary people, composers and artists are born in this
+period and exhibit all the qualities that it represents. It is again a
+strong clear Line of Head which, if found on the hand, will determine
+whether the mental will power is sufficient to make this type overcome
+its natural sensitiveness and use the great qualities they have to carry
+out their aims and ambitions.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>People born in this period suffer largely from despondency, insomnia, and
+a feeling of martyrdom. Like the Positive type of the same Mount, they
+are also much inclined towards rheumatism and disorders brought on
+through the blood.</p>
+
+<p>They also suffer from internal chills, liver, and very often jaundice.
+Climate has the greatest possible effect upon their health, so they
+should endeavour to live in a bright, dry atmosphere and have plenty of
+air and exercise, and variety of change and travel.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_VIIIb" id="CHAPTER_VIIIb"></a>CHAPTER VIII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF SATURN AND ITS MEANING</h3>
+
+<p>The Mount of Saturn is found at the base of the second finger (<i>see</i>
+<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>., Part II.). Its chief characteristics are love of solitude,
+prudence, quiet determination, the study of serious sombre things, the
+belief in fatalism and in the ultimate destiny of all things.</p>
+
+<p>A complete absence of this Mount indicates a more or less frivolous way
+of looking at life, while an exaggeration of it denotes an exaggeration
+of all the qualities it represents.</p>
+
+<p>The Mount of Saturn may be considered Positive when the subject is found
+to be born between the following dates, December 21st and January 20th,
+and during the subsequent seven days while this period is fading out and
+being overlapped by the period following.</p>
+
+<p>People born in these dates have strong will force and mentality, but they
+usually feel exceptionally lonely and isolated in going through life.</p>
+
+<p>They are very much children of fate and circumstances, over which they
+appear to have no control, and seem to make or mar their careers
+independently of their strong will.</p>
+
+<p>In character they are usually remarkable for their<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span> independence of
+thought and action, they also detest being under the restraint of others.</p>
+
+<p>For kindness and sympathy they will do almost anything, but they usually
+feel so isolated that they scarcely believe in the affections that may be
+offered.</p>
+
+<p>They have strange ideas of love and duty, and for this reason they are
+usually called somewhat peculiar by those few who attempt to penetrate
+their isolation.</p>
+
+<p>They have a deeply devotional nature, even when appearing not to be
+religious, and they make every effort to do good, especially to the
+masses, even when there may be no likelihood of their getting recognition
+or reward for their efforts.</p>
+
+<p>Such people as a rule feel the responsibilities of life too heavily and
+in consequence often become despondent and gloomy or retire into their
+own shell.</p>
+
+<p>If at all inclined to be very religious, they generally go to extremes
+and become fanatical in any Church they may adopt.</p>
+
+<p>Mysticism and occultism of all kinds appeal very strongly to their inner
+nature, but here again they are also inclined to go to extremes.</p>
+
+<p>They almost worship clever, intellectual people, and are deep thinkers in
+all matters that interest them, but they cannot brook interference in
+their views from others.</p>
+
+<p>They are often found holding positions of great responsibility, but in
+all matters fatalism seems to play a strange r&ocirc;le in their life. They
+seem chosen to be the instrument or mouthpiece of Destiny, often hurling
+thousands to destruction in what they believe is their duty. If called
+upon to make a sacrifice of their own flesh and kin they will be the
+first to plunge the knife into the heart of their dearest.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Nearly all people born in this period are strange, strong characters,
+equally feared, loved, and hated.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>The chief tendencies towards illness with persons born in this period are
+towards rheumatism, gout, pains and swellings in the feet and legs, also
+accidents to the feet, knees, and limbs, trouble with the liver and
+kidneys, ruptures, and disease of the teeth and ears.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF SATURN (NEGATIVE)</h3>
+
+<p>The Mount of Saturn may be considered negative or mental when the person
+is found born between the dates of January 21st and February 18th, and
+also for the seven days following.</p>
+
+<p>These people are like the preceding type in almost all things, except
+that the same things appear to affect them more mentally than physically.</p>
+
+<p>They also feel lonely in life, but more mentally than the former
+type&mdash;they seem to feel less companionship in their ideas and thoughts,
+whereas the former feel it more in their lives and careers.</p>
+
+<p>These latter types are more sensitive and very easily wounded in their
+feelings.</p>
+
+<p>They read character instinctively and seem to "see through" people too
+easily to be really happy. They bitterly resent being taken in or
+deceived, and when they think they have been, they astonish people by the
+bitterness of their resentment.</p>
+
+<p>They make loyal, true friends, if their feelings are once aroused, and
+they will undergo any sacrifice for the sake of a friend, but they will
+stop at nothing to<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span> avenge an injury if they think they have been
+deceived.</p>
+
+<p>They are usually very active for the public good, and they give a good
+deal of their time and money to doing good, but in their own way. Like
+the positive type of Saturn they have very decided views of their own
+about religion and especially the regular observances and ceremonials of
+Church life.</p>
+
+<p>They are very different from the previous type in that they usually take
+a keen interest in public meetings and large gatherings of people. They
+love theatres, concerts, and places of amusement, and yet always if they
+told the truth, they feel alone in life.</p>
+
+<p>They have a quiet controlling power with their eyes, and although highly
+nervous people themselves, yet they have the greatest control over
+excitable and nervous patients and also over the insane. It is a strange
+fact that in the run of their careers they seem fated to be brought into
+contact with such cases.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>These people suffer most from the nerves of the stomach and the digestive
+organs, and ordinary remedies seem to fail entirely to relieve them.</p>
+
+<p>They have as a rule poor circulation of the blood, cold feet and hands,
+very delicate teeth, and suffer much from accidents and hurts to the
+feet, ankles and limbs.</p>
+
+<p>They seldom feel strong in health and yet they have enormous power of
+resistance, and when a call is made on their will power, they usually
+astonish every one by what they can stand, especially if they in any way
+think that their duty or principles are involved or at stake.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_IXb" id="CHAPTER_IXb"></a>CHAPTER IX</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF THE SUN AND ITS MEANING</h3>
+
+<p>The Mount of the Sun is found under the base of the third finger. To this
+Mount the Greeks also gave the name of Mount of Apollo (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>., Part
+II.).</p>
+
+<p>When large or well developed it indicates glory, publicity, a desire to
+shine before one's fellows. It is always considered a good Mount to have
+large.</p>
+
+<p>It also indicates enthusiasm for the beautiful in all things, whether one
+follows an artistic calling or not. People with this Mount large, even if
+they have success in practical life, build beautiful houses or have
+artistic surroundings of some sort. They also have an expansive
+temperament, are generous and luxurious in all their tastes. They are
+bright and sunny by nature and have a forceful, happy, lucky personality.</p>
+
+<p>This Mount may be considered Positive when the subject is found to be
+born between the dates of July 21st and August 20th, and generally until
+the 28th of this month, which portion of the Zodiac is called the "House
+of the Sun."</p>
+
+<p>These people represent what may be called the heart force of the human
+race, and as a rule are generous and sympathetic even to an extreme.</p>
+
+<p>They have great force of character and personality,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span> and even when
+constrained by circumstances to exist in the lower walks of life, they
+play, even there, a r&ocirc;le distinct from their fellows, and their
+clean-cut, well-marked personality is sure to make itself manifest.</p>
+
+<p>At heart they are really most sympathetic, though they often seem to hide
+this quality on account of their strong sense of trying to force people
+to do what is right towards others.</p>
+
+<p>They have no mercy for "weaklings" or evaders of the truth, and in brutal
+frankness they will even denounce their own children should they find
+them falling into evil ways.</p>
+
+<p>They display the greatest loyalty if any friend of theirs is attacked,
+especially if in an underhand way. They love intensely and they hate
+intensely. Theirs is no middle path, for they must be either at one
+extreme or the other.</p>
+
+<p>Although truthful and naturally honest they often get terribly deceived,
+and the danger is with such people that towards the sunset of their
+lives, the glorious Sun that has shone, as it were, through them gets
+darkened by the deceit and treachery of others and sets in clouds, or
+gets hidden before the ending of life's pathway comes to view.</p>
+
+<p>Many of these people who have cheered others, who have brought their
+grand sunshine of good into the hearts of others, cannot cheer themselves
+when the twilight comes, and so they often fall victims to gloom and
+melancholy, and many commit suicide.</p>
+
+<p>Among other marked characteristics these people are extremely proud and
+would sooner die than ask favours from others. They are extremely easily
+wounded through their pride and are unusually sensitive.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>Impetuous and hot-tempered, they make many enemies, and when engaged in
+public life, which they are usually well fitted for, they often find
+themselves bitterly attacked in the most unscrupulous manner.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>Those born in the dates I have given, or who have the Mount of the Sun
+large, are most inclined to suffer with pains, palpitations, and trouble
+of the heart, head, and ears; with inflammation of the eyes, kidneys, and
+swellings and injuries to the feet.</p>
+
+
+<h3>MOUNT OF THE SUN (NEGATIVE)</h3>
+
+<p>This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is found born
+between January 21st and February 18th, and for the seven days following.</p>
+
+<p>In this case they are far more successful when managing for others than
+for themselves.</p>
+
+<p>They are usually found most active in their plans towards the relief of
+all distress and for what they believe to be the public good.</p>
+
+<p>They are also often as a class found in governmental positions, or as
+leaders of some party or section of public opinion. Usually they take the
+part of the "under dog," and cause themselves to be greatly abused and
+disliked by the richer and more powerful classes.</p>
+
+<p>They seldom attract wealth as do those of the Positive type, who are
+usually lucky in money, and when they do they are inclined to impoverish
+themselves in their efforts to help those around them, or in the
+execution of their philanthropic plans for the good of the poorer
+classes.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>In strange apparent contradiction to this, these people are usually
+excellent in business and in their financial plans, but again it is more
+for others than for themselves. Many of them make fortunes for others and
+keep the merest pittance for their own homes.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule, they find great pleasure in public ceremonies, and meetings of
+all kinds. They love theatres and all places where large numbers of
+people congregate, and when wound up to the occasion they can display
+great eloquence, power of argument, and influence in debates. They rarely
+hold the positions they win for the run of their careers, they seem to
+play the r&ocirc;le of the moment, and when that is passed they just as quickly
+retire into obscurity or into a quiet private life, and often end their
+days in the most unusual or unheard-of places.</p>
+
+<p>Quite the reverse of the Positive type, these people seldom if ever
+commit suicide; on the contrary, they can endure any kind of martyrdom or
+suffering. They are buoyed up with the feeling they have done their duty
+to their fellow beings, and this feeling seems to sustain them against
+all disappointments, or losses or attacks on their name.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>These children of the Negative period of the Sun suffer mostly with the
+stomach and internal organs, also with poor circulation of blood, loss of
+natural heat, and with liver and kidney complaints.</p>
+
+<p>They are also prone to have accidents to their bones, especially to
+limbs, knees, and ankles.</p>
+
+<p>Very dry climates and plenty of sunlight is their greatest safeguard
+against all their maladies.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_Xb" id="CHAPTER_Xb"></a>CHAPTER X</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF MERCURY AND ITS MEANING</h3>
+
+<p>The Mount of Mercury is found under the base of the fourth finger (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate
+VI</a>., Part II.). On a good hand it is a favourable Mount to have, but on a
+hand shewing evil tendencies, especially mental, it increases the bad
+indications.</p>
+
+<p>It seems to relate more to the mind than anything else. It gives
+quickness of brain, wit, thought, eloquence. It also relates to
+adaptability in science and commerce, but if evilly afflicted, it denotes
+mental excitability, nervousness, lack of concentration, trickiness in
+business, and everything that is unreliable in character.</p>
+
+<p>This Mount should always be considered with the kind of Line of Head
+found on the hand.</p>
+
+<p>With a Line of Head long and well marked, it increases all the promise of
+mental aptitude and success, but with a weak, badly marked, or irregular
+Head Line, it augments all its weak or bad indications.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (POSITIVE)</h3>
+
+<p>This Mount can be considered positive when the subject is found to be
+born between the dates of May 21st and June 20th, and until the 27th of
+that month, but during the last seven days its influence is considered
+dying out and not so strong.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>People born in this period are represented in the Zodiac by the symbolism
+of the twins. It is a curious fact that all persons born in this part of
+the year are singularly dual in character and temperament. One side of
+their nature may, in fact, be described as perpetually pulling against
+the other, and although nearly always possessed with unusual
+intelligence, they often spoil their lives by lack of continuity in their
+plans and in their purpose.</p>
+
+<p>They seldom seem to have a fixed idea of what they really want. They
+change their plans or their occupations at a moment's notice, and unless
+they chance to be very happily married, they are just as uncertain in
+marriage.</p>
+
+<p>They are the most difficult of all classes to understand. In temperament
+they are hot and cold in the same moment, they may love passionately with
+one side of their nature and just as quickly dislike with the other.</p>
+
+<p>They are very critical, and especially notice small faults or mannerisms
+in others, and they can express their views with a sarcasm that is as
+cutting as it is clever.</p>
+
+<p>In all business dealings or affairs where a subtle, keen mentality is
+useful, they can out-distance all rivals, provided they are sufficiently
+interested to enter into the competition.</p>
+
+<p>They are excellent in diplomacy and are gifted talkers, but they usually
+leave their listeners at the end of their conversation no wiser than they
+were at the beginning.</p>
+
+<p>If taken as they are and with their moods, they are the most delightful
+people imaginable, but one must never expect them to be the same to-day
+that they were yesterday.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>They believe that they are the most truthful persons in the world, and so
+they may be at the moment they are telling the story, but to them moments
+seem entire lives, and so in a day or a week the same story may have a
+totally different colouring.</p>
+
+<p>None of these people will probably admit this to be true of his
+character, but a little study will convince anyone that it is a fairly
+accurate description of this subject's chief characteristics.</p>
+
+<p>Mental work, especially the class of mental work that requires quickness
+of wit and change, appeals to them more than any other. They make clever
+actors, barristers, and a certain class of public speakers, also
+diplomatists, stock brokers, company promoters, or inventors of new
+methods in business. In all careers that require keenness of brain, they
+can attain success, provided they have developed a sufficient amount of
+will power and continuity of purpose to stick long enough to any one
+thing.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>Everything that can affect the nerves and the nervous system especially,
+afflicts these people.</p>
+
+<p>Indigestion caused by nervous worry or anxiety, catalepsy, paralysis,
+afflictions of the tongue, stammering, insomnia, vivid dreams; to all
+such things they are specially liable. They are also inclined towards
+delicacy of the throat and bronchial tubes, and particularly to trouble
+with the nose and eyes.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (NEGATIVE)</h3>
+
+<p>This Mount may be considered negative when the persons are born between
+August 21st and September<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> 20th, and until the 27th, but these last seven
+days of this period are not so marked, but take more from the
+characteristics of the incoming sign.</p>
+
+<p>People belonging to this negative type of the Mount of Mercury have all
+the good points of the positive class, and even some added in their
+favour. For example, they stick longer and with more continuity to
+whatever study or career they adopt. They have hardly the quickness or
+the brilliancy of the first type, but they have a more solid, plodding
+course of action, and as a general rule they make more out of their
+lives.</p>
+
+<p>They are also more materialistic and practical in their views of life,
+but they analyse and reason everything from their own way of thinking
+outwards towards others. If they see a thing is right, it is right to
+them, and for this reason they are often found doing exactly the opposite
+from what one would expect.</p>
+
+<p>Women born in this period are especially curious puzzles. They are either
+extremely virtuous or the direct opposite, either extremely truthful and
+conventional or the reverse; but whether good or bad, they are all a law
+unto themselves, and in all things they usually think of themselves
+first.</p>
+
+<p>People born in this period often abandon their husbands or their children
+just because they think they ought to do so. They also are liable to
+change their religious views half way through life, or from the most
+conventional suddenly become the reverse. In the same way women who have
+commenced their career by leading unconventional lives, may just as
+suddenly become religious and enter some extremely severe order or
+community.</p>
+
+<p>Again, as in the positive type, it is the Line of Head<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span> that must be
+carefully considered if one should endeavour to form an estimate of what
+they will eventually become.</p>
+
+<p>If it be clear and straight, their best qualities will, as a rule, come
+to their rescue; but if weak or poorly marked, it is more than likely,
+especially with this class, that the evil side of the nature will in the
+end predominate.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>These people are more open to mental suggestion as far as health is
+concerned than any other class.</p>
+
+<p>If they think they are ill it is quite sufficient that they are so, and
+they can become cured in exactly the same manner.</p>
+
+<p>In reality they have excellent constitutions, except when they are ruined
+by taking drugs and medicines.</p>
+
+<p>As they always imagine that they have something the matter, they are
+invariably the willing prey of quack doctors and every new cure that is
+advertised.</p>
+
+<p>They can hardly pass a chemist's shop without buying something, and if
+they sit next to a doctor at a dinner table, they are certain to walk off
+with some prescription.</p>
+
+<p>Their greatest fault is that they will persist in talking to everyone of
+their supposed ailments or afflictions, for the slightest ache, pain, or
+anything that concerns them, has the most exaggerated importance in their
+mind.</p>
+
+<p>On the contrary, Nature can do more for these people than for any other
+class of humanity. Peace of mind, a country life, and plenty of fresh air
+will banish all their ills and ailments into oblivion.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>But, if badly mated, or living in unhappy surroundings, their health
+quickly breaks up, and if they cannot make a change into happier
+conditions, then no medicine in all the world can help them.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIb" id="CHAPTER_XIb"></a>CHAPTER XI</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF THE MOON AND ITS MEANING</h3>
+
+<p>The Mount of the Moon, or as it is also called the Mount of Luna, is
+found on the base of the hand under the end of the Line of Head (<a href="#Plate_V_II">Plate
+VI</a>., Part II.).</p>
+
+<p>This Mount relates to everything that has to do with the imaginative
+faculties, the emotional artistic temperament, romance, ideality, poetry,
+change of scenery, travel, and such like.</p>
+
+<p>This Mount may be considered positive when it looks high or
+well-developed, and also when the subject is found to be born between the
+dates of June 21st and July 20th, and until July 27th.</p>
+
+<p>People who belong to this positive class are gifted with strong
+imagination which tinges everything they do or say. They are intensely
+romantic, but idealistic in their desires, and have not that passionate
+or sensual nature that is given by the Mount of Venus on the opposite
+side of the palm.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule they have the inventive faculties well developed, and succeed
+in inventions and in all new ideas in whatever careers they may have
+entered.</p>
+
+<p>Even business people born in this period are remarkable for their
+originality, and the inventive manner in which they will tackle the most
+practical affair.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>They are, however, inclined to speculate or gamble even with their
+chances, also in stocks, business or, in fact, anything in which they are
+engaged.</p>
+
+<p>Although their imagination is large, they often achieve great success and
+make money in business. Some great financiers and heads of large
+organisations have been born in this period and have also had the Mount
+of Luna very highly developed on their hands.</p>
+
+<p>It has been said "that what one sees in one's dreams one shall gain in
+reality," but the fact remains that imaginative people have been found
+among the most successful of all classes. Imagination may be another name
+for Inspiration.</p>
+
+<p>People born in this period are seldom hide-bound by any rule of thumb or
+set convention. They love what is new in everything, and perhaps for this
+reason they love travel and change, and generally see the greater part of
+this planet before they voyage over the last river of all.</p>
+
+<p>Change in every way affects their careers as it also does their lives.
+Even the successful members of this period have more ups and downs than
+almost any other class.</p>
+
+<p>They rarely, however, give in to the blows of Fate. Their imagination
+probably helps them through, and they seldom remain down or down-hearted
+for long.</p>
+
+<p>Inventors, a large number of artists, musicians, and composers are found
+among people of this type, but almost without exception they have a love
+of mystic and occult things, and their dreams and visions are tangible
+and clear.</p>
+
+<p>These Children of the Moon owe much to the influence of their planet that
+they are even more magnetic and successful when the Moon appears in the
+heavens.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span> Even their health appears to change and become better under her
+benign influence, and they should always be advised to commence their
+plans or operations when their planet is to be seen illuminating the
+skies.</p>
+
+<p>That the Moon plays an important r&ocirc;le in the affairs of this earth cannot
+for a moment be doubted. Recent discoveries are every day revealing more
+and more that her strange magnetic influence has a power almost beyond
+belief in its effect upon the growth of vegetables, and even inanimate
+things.</p>
+
+<p>There are other thinkers besides those interested in occult subjects who
+have noticed the effect of this planet on mundane things. If the Moon can
+affect vegetables, eggs, and the growth of chickens, as it is proved to
+do, how much more easily and wonderfully it must affect the grey matter
+of the human brain, which is the most subtle and mysterious essence of
+all.</p>
+
+<p>People born in the period I have mentioned should be most careful of
+those with whom they associate, because they are extraordinarily
+sensitive to the magnetism of others.</p>
+
+<p>They should, if possible, avoid marrying early in life unless they are
+absolutely sure they have met their affinity. These natures both change
+and develop rapidly, and they have a strong tendency to "grow away" from
+those with whom they associate in early life. It is the same with
+partners in business; they should be as much as possible "on their own"
+or, if partnerships are made, they should not be of a binding or
+restricting order, and provision should always be made for the
+partnership to be dissolved when it has become irksome.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span></p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>These Children of the Moon are chiefly inclined towards all watery
+ailments and inflammatory diseases. In early life they are prone towards
+having water on the brain, gastric and dysentery attacks, and later in
+life, inflammation of the lungs and chest, pleurisy, and dropsy.</p>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF THE MOON (NEGATIVE)</h3>
+
+<p>This Mount is considered negative when it appears very flat on the hand,
+and it may also be taken as negative when people are found to be born
+between the dates of January 21st and February 20th, and in a minor
+degree, until about February 27th.</p>
+
+<p>People born between these dates have good mental powers, but their
+imaginative faculties are seldom as much in evidence as is so strongly
+the case with the positive period.</p>
+
+<p>These persons, on the contrary, are good and quiet reasoners-out of
+problems and matters relating to the organisation of business, and are
+also excellent in all forms of government work. They make splendid heads
+of departments and rise to any responsibility very quickly and easily.</p>
+
+<p>They are high-minded and have very decided views on love, duty, and
+social life. They make great efforts to do good to others, but as a rule
+their best work is done towards helping the masses more than individuals.</p>
+
+<p>They are extremely kind-hearted and love to give a helping hand when they
+can, but at the same time they have an unfortunate knack of making many
+bitter enemies, and when holding government positions they are most
+bitterly attacked by the opposition press.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span> Their work seldom receives
+its proper recognition and reward until they have passed from their
+sphere of influence, or have left this world of mistrust and ingratitude.</p>
+
+<p>They generally make excellent speakers, but more from "plain speaking,"
+in a particular way of their own.</p>
+
+<p>As a rule they espouse the unpopular cause and take the part of the under
+dog in the fight.</p>
+
+<p>They make devoted and loyal friends once their friendship is aroused, but
+at the same time they are extremely sensitive and easily wounded by those
+they care for.</p>
+
+<p>They are strongly inclined to be religious and generally bring their
+religious views into all they do. They are in danger of becoming too
+fanatical, and when opposed, they become extremely obstinate, dogmatic,
+and hard to manage.</p>
+
+<p>Heavy responsibility for others suits them best of all, especially if
+such responsibility lies in the form of government work, or in some
+position of management.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>These people usually worry themselves into bad health. They overwork
+themselves and bring on nervous breakdowns, palpitation and weakness of
+the heart, and often paralysis. They suffer with the nerves of the
+stomach, acidity of the blood, rheumatism, liver complaints, and gout.
+They are particularly liable to meet with accidents to the feet, ankles,
+and limbs.</p>
+
+<p>They should be very guarded when travelling by water, for they seldom get
+through life without sooner or later experiencing grave danger of
+drowning.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIIb" id="CHAPTER_XIIb"></a>CHAPTER XII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF VENUS AND ITS MEANING</h3>
+
+<p>The portion of the palm under the base of the Thumb and inside the Line
+of Life is called the Mount of Venus (<a href="#Plate_VI_II">Plate VI</a>., Part II.).</p>
+
+<p>When well-formed and not too large, it denotes a desire for love and
+companionship, the desire to please, worship of beauty in every form, the
+artistic and emotional temperament, and it is usually very prominent in
+the hands of all artists, singers, and musicians.</p>
+
+<p>This Mount, the science of Physiology teaches, covers one of the most
+important blood vessels in the palm, viz., the "Great Palmer Arch." If
+this loop or arch is large, it indicates a plentiful supply of blood and
+strong active circulation; consequently, the health is more robust. It is
+found that persons possessing this Mount well developed, being in active
+strong health, are naturally more full of passion than those individuals
+in poor health, and who, in consequence, have this portion of the hand
+either flat or poorly developed. Hence, when this Mount is large it has
+been considered to show passion and larger sensuality than when flat,
+flabby, or non-developed.</p>
+
+<p>This Mount is therefore called Positive when high or large, and Negative
+when small or flat.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span></p>
+
+<p>With the rest of the hand normal, this Mount well shaped is an excellent
+sign to have, as it denotes magnetism and attraction of one sex to the
+other, but if found together with vicious or abnormal signs in the hand,
+it increases those tendencies.</p>
+
+<p>When considered with the birth date, as alluded to in the former
+chapters, it helps to throw considerable light on characteristics that
+might otherwise be overlooked.</p>
+
+<p>The student may consider it Positive when the subject is born between
+April 20th and May 20th, and in a minor way until May 27th, the chief
+characteristics of this period being as follows:</p>
+
+<p>These persons have a curious dominating power over others, and are found
+rather inclined to be too dogmatic in their opinions, and also often too
+unyielding and tyrannical. They are considered stiff-necked and
+obstinate, but the strange thing is that when they love they become the
+most abject slaves of all to the object of their devotion, and they will
+consider no sacrifice too great for that one being who holds or attracts
+their affection.</p>
+
+<p>They are hospitable and generous, and especially love to entertain their
+friends. They make wonderfully good hosts, have great taste about food,
+and love to give excellent dinners.</p>
+
+<p>They dress with great taste, and are generally considered richer than
+they really are, and they can make a good show on very little.</p>
+
+<p>They are impulsive in their likes and dislikes, rather too frank and
+outspoken, quick in temper, and when their blood is up they have no
+restraint on what they say.</p>
+
+<p>Their passion or temper is, however, quickly over,<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span> and when the storm is
+passed they are most regretful for the wounds their temper may have
+caused.</p>
+
+<p>These types are most easily influenced by their surroundings, and become
+morbid and depressed when they are forced to live in gloomy and
+uncongenial conditions.</p>
+
+<p>Neither the man nor woman born in this period should marry early, for
+their first attempt is usually a mistake. They are so independent in
+character that, especially if they marry early and find their mistake,
+they lead unconventional lives and get severely criticised in
+consequence.</p>
+
+<p>They are inclined to be very jealous when their affections are roused,
+especially if the peace of the home is in any way disturbed.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>People born in this period have usually short or round-shaped nails which
+indicate a tendency to suffer with complaints of the throat and nose.<a name="FNanchor_8_8" id="FNanchor_8_8"></a><a href="#Footnote_8_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a>
+They also suffer, as a rule, with pains in the head and ears, swellings
+in the neck, and have a tendency towards tumours, appendicitis, and other
+internal troubles, chiefly relating to the intestines.</p>
+
+<div class="footnote"><p><a name="Footnote_8_8" id="Footnote_8_8"></a><a href="#FNanchor_8_8"><span class="label">[8]</span></a> <i>See</i> Chapter on Nails, page <a href="#Page_136">136</a>.</p></div>
+
+
+<h3>THE MOUNT OF VENUS (NEGATIVE)</h3>
+
+<p>This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is born between
+the dates of September 21st and October 20th, and in a minor way until
+October 27th, and with people born in this period it is seldom found so
+prominent. The fact is, that the affections these<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span> subjects possess may
+be just as intense, but more mental than physical.</p>
+
+<p>Their love is spiritual rather than sensual, and they crave more for soul
+companionship than for that of the physical senses.</p>
+
+<p>Of course there are exceptions to all rules, but these exceptions can be
+easily seen by watching if the Mount of Venus is large with people born
+in this period.</p>
+
+<p>All mental characteristics rule, however, very strongly. Those born in
+this latter period have keen intuition and a mental balance of all things
+not given to the other class. They have presentiments and psychic
+experiences, dreams, clairvoyance, and such like, which they often spoil
+by their reasoning faculties, and they endeavour to answer all problems
+through the medium of their mind or mental faculties.</p>
+
+<p>In love they are nearly always unhappy. They cannot "let themselves go,"
+like the Positive Venus type. They hesitate and miss their opportunities
+whilst they think or reason, and so love goes by and often leaves them
+nothing but regret. They should be advised to act more on their first
+impressions and intuition, and take the opportunities that Fate throws in
+their way.</p>
+
+<p>They occupy themselves very much with all mental questions concerning
+their fellow beings. They are often found studying Law, but more with the
+desire of improving it for others than for their own personal advantage.</p>
+
+<p>They have a great desire for knowledge, and often spend their lives in
+studying abstruse subjects, but always weighing and balancing each point
+in the most conscientious manner. They make excellent doctors, judges,
+lawyers, but more as masters of some<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span> particular branch than that of
+gaining worldly advantage.</p>
+
+
+<h3>HEALTH</h3>
+
+<p>The people born in this period are inclined to suffer from lack of
+physical strength, exhaustion of the nerves, depression of spirits,
+melancholia, intense feeling of loneliness, and such like. Also severe
+headaches, pains in the back, loins, and kidneys; just as in the case of
+those of the other period of this Venus sign they have a great tendency,
+especially the women, to suffer from internal ailments, and often undergo
+severe operations.<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span></p>
+
+
+
+<hr style="width: 65%;" />
+<h2><a name="CHAPTER_XIIIb" id="CHAPTER_XIIIb"></a>CHAPTER XIII</h2>
+
+
+<h3>ADVICE TO THE STUDENT. THE BEST MEANS TO MAKE CASTS OR TAKE IMPRESSIONS
+OF THE HANDS</h3>
+
+<p>I would strongly advise students of this subject to make casts of hands
+in plaster of Paris, wax, or any other suitable material, in order to
+make a library or collection, both for their own private study, and also
+as a valuable record of their work.</p>
+
+<p>Before I read any hands professionally, I had some thousands of casts,
+impressions on paper, and photographs of hands in my possession, and I
+found that I derived the most valuable aid from being able to analyse and
+study their shapes and markings at my leisure.</p>
+
+<p>In making casts I would advise the very finest plaster of Paris to be
+used. When the plaster is worked up to the proper consistency, it is
+necessary to rub a fine oil into the hand before bringing it into contact
+with the plaster, as otherwise the hair may stick and so cause trouble
+and annoyance.</p>
+
+<p>Dental wax heated in hot water and made very soft is also an excellent
+material to make moulds from, especially as it does not make a mess, and
+is very little trouble to employ.</p>
+
+<p>The great disadvantage of making a collection of casts arises from the
+large space that such a collection<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span> will eventually occupy. To avoid this
+the student can also make a library of impressions of hands on paper, and
+keep them marked and numbered in a series of albums or scrap-books that
+may easily be obtained at any stationer's.</p>
+
+<p>The best means of taking these impressions is to obtain a small gelatine
+roller used by printers for fine work, such as die stamping, a tube of
+printer's ink, and a small sheet of glass to roll the ink out until it
+covers the surface of the roller in an even way.</p>
+
+<p>The roller may then be passed over the surface of the palm, the hand
+pressed firmly down on a smooth sheet of white paper, and with a little
+practice, most excellent impressions can easily be obtained.</p>
+
+<p>When the impression is dry it can be dated, numbered, and placed in an
+album for reference.</p>
+
+<p>In order to remove the black ink from the hand, powdered washing soap,
+well brushed into the hand with a nail brush, and a little hot water is
+all that will be found necessary.</p>
+
+<p>These impressions taken with printer's ink are far better than those
+taken by smoking a sheet of paper by camphor, or by a candle, or any
+other means.</p>
+
+<p>The best time for examining hands is during the day, first because the
+light is better and, above all, because the circulation of the blood does
+not redden the entire palm as it does at night, and the finer lines can
+consequently easily be detected.</p>
+
+<p>As I described earlier in these pages, the right and left hands should be
+examined together to note what difference there may be in the shape and
+position of the lines, but the markings on the right hand are the only
+ones to be relied on.</p>
+
+<p>Lastly, do not be for ever on the lookout for faults<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span> and failings in the
+subject whose hands you may be examining, remember no one is perfect, and
+that faults and failings may in the end be as stepping stones "by which
+we rise from our dead selves to higher things."</p>
+
+<div class='trnote'><p>Transcriber's notes</p>
+<p>P(<a href="#Page_ix">ix</a>)  d'Arpentigny corrected to D'Arpentigny<br />
+P<a href="#Page_10">10</a>  dveloped corrected to developed.<br />
+P<a href="#Page_76">76</a>  forshadows corected to foreshadows<br />
+P<a href="#Page_63">63</a> Removed extraneous comma.<br />
+P<a href="#Page_130">130</a> Period added at the end of a paragraph.<br />
+P<a href="#Page_132">132</a> Added "is called the Finger of" instead of " to clarify.<br />
+P<a href="#Page_135">135</a> Period added before a capital The.<br />
+P<a href="#Page_142">142</a> decribed corrected to described.<br />
+P<a href="#Page_158">158</a> Extra opening parenthesis removed.</p></div>
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+<pre>
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Palmistry for All, by Cheiro
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PALMISTRY FOR ALL ***
+
+***** This file should be named 20480-h.htm or 20480-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/4/8/20480/
+
+Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier, Christine D. and
+the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+
+</pre>
+
+</body>
+</html>
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig001.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig001.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eed0c82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig001.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig001_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig001_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..20c9b38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig001_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig029.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig029.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..058f261
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig029.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig029_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig029_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..677c1be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig029_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig032.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig032.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c4c7262
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig032.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig032_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig032_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..719bd49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig032_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig042.png b/20480-h/images/fig042.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c3d1ba3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig042.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig042_th.png b/20480-h/images/fig042_th.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..63cfd9e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig042_th.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig049.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig049.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9eb08fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig049.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig049_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig049_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..88a8c90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig049_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig051.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig051.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19494e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig051.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig051_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig051_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ae65dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig051_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig055.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig055.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e205500
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig055.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig055_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig055_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dfd1b49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig055_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig058.png b/20480-h/images/fig058.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6ae9ed5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig058.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig058_th.png b/20480-h/images/fig058_th.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65dcc07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig058_th.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig060.png b/20480-h/images/fig060.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4852a2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig060.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig060_th.png b/20480-h/images/fig060_th.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..26433f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig060_th.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig063.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig063.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9678124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig063.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig063_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig063_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cd338a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig063_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig068.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig068.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4358e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig068.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig068_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig068_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f54605
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig068_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig071.png b/20480-h/images/fig071.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ce9286e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig071.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig071_th.png b/20480-h/images/fig071_th.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..94a3c5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig071_th.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig076.png b/20480-h/images/fig076.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..361ed65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig076.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig076_th.png b/20480-h/images/fig076_th.png
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..31b402d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig076_th.png
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig082.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig082.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0fe2d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig082.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig082_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig082_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..50bce64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig082_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig084.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig084.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9732fd3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig084.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig084_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig084_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..502d8f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig084_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig087.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig087.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..92d9d0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig087.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig087_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig087_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e8159c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig087_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig090.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig090.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b6695ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig090.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig090_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig090_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba64aac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig090_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig093.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig093.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..dc34766
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig093.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig093_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig093_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1f48931
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig093_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig099.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig099.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f02696c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig099.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig099_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig099_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..974a505
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig099_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig105.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig105.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65b18a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig105.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig105_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig105_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1ffc51a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig105_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig109.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig109.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41820bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig109.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig109_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig109_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64a9e30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig109_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig115.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig115.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ebf5760
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig115.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig115_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig115_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b1d10e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig115_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig120.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig120.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8484539
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig120.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig120_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig120_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..35ea7a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig120_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig130.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig130.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..302ecc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig130.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig130_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig130_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9529d3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig130_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig133.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig133.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6cb8643
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig133.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig133_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig133_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e15e89d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig133_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig136.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig136.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..46f1b7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig136.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig136_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig136_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba4fede
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig136_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig139.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig139.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..1a7050c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig139.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig139_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig139_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8b99d0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig139_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig142.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig142.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4249fdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig142.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig142_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig142_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..119ab93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig142_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig144.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig144.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ee30c65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig144.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig144_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig144_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4b9e05c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig144_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig151a.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig151a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4d4ce9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig151a.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig151a_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig151a_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..25aea44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig151a_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig151b.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig151b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7dc7ecf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig151b.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig151b_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig151b_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e45393
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig151b_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig154.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig154.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..2ca7d5e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig154.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig154_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig154_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..55ada31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig154_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig160a.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig160a.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..64bb061
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig160a.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig160a_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig160a_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..57b8b18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig160a_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig160b.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig160b.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bc586c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig160b.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig160b_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig160b_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cdf7b6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig160b_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig160c.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig160c.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d587ff2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig160c.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig160c_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig160c_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7985e7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig160c_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig165.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig165.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..753b0bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig165.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig165_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig165_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..14d5946
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig165_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig168.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig168.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..45b6ba2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig168.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig168_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig168_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b4e33e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig168_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig172.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig172.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5bc3241
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig172.jpg
diff --git a/20480-h/images/fig172_th.jpg b/20480-h/images/fig172_th.jpg
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05a6187
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480-h/images/fig172_th.jpg
diff --git a/20480.txt b/20480.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a8aa5e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5824 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of Palmistry for All, by Cheiro
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: Palmistry for All
+
+Author: Cheiro
+
+Release Date: January 29, 2007 [EBook #20480]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PALMISTRY FOR ALL ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier, Christine D. and
+the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+[Illustration: (signed) Very Faithfully yours
+
+Cheiro]
+
+
+
+
+PALMISTRY
+
+FOR ALL
+
+  CONTAINING NEW INFORMATION
+  ON THE STUDY OF THE
+  HAND NEVER BEFORE
+  PUBLISHED
+
+BY
+
+CHEIRO
+
+
+_WITH A PREFACE TO AMERICAN READERS_
+
+_AND_
+
+_WITH UPWARDS OF SIXTY ILLUSTRATIONS_
+
+  G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS
+  NEW YORK      LONDON
+
+  COPYRIGHT, 1916
+  BY
+  G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS
+
+Published, May, 1916
+
+Twenty-second Impression
+
+
+Made in the United States of America
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE
+
+TO THE AMERICAN EDITION
+
+
+There is no country in the world where the "study of character" is more
+indulged in than in the United States of America. During my many visits
+there I could not help remarking how even the "hardest headed" business
+men used any form of this study that they could get hold of to help them
+in their business dealings with other men and also in endeavouring to
+ascertain the character of their clerks and employees.
+
+In looking over the records of my career I find that in the course of my
+visits to America I gave private lessons to the heads of two hundred and
+seventy business establishments in New York, one hundred and thirty-five
+in Boston, and three hundred and forty-two in Chicago.
+
+All these men were large employers of labour and what they principally
+wanted was, to have some help beyond that of their own judgment in
+dealing with those with whom they came in contact in the regular course
+of their business careers. In no other country did I find the same
+interest taken in the study of character from a practical standpoint.
+
+It is for this reason that I write a special Preface for this Edition,
+believing as I do that my American readers will appreciate the added
+information I may be able to give regarding the obtaining by a mere
+glance at a hand a quick grasp of the leading characteristics of the
+persons with whom they are thrown into contact, or for whatever reason
+they choose to make use of this study.
+
+Everyone knows that "the face can wear a mask," that a person may be a
+good actor and put on a certain expression that may deceive even the best
+judgment.
+
+But hands cannot change as the result of a mere effort to please; _the
+character they express is the real nature of the individual_--the true
+character that has been formed by heredity or that has grown up with the
+person by long years of habit.
+
+The characteristics alluded to below are those which may be easily
+observed and which are aids to a rapid judgment of character and which I
+have never before been able to give to the public in such a concise way.
+
+The more elaborate details concerning the ultimate success of the person
+one is talking to, their more intimate character and their future
+development will be found in their proper place, in the subsequent
+chapters.
+
+
+RULES FOR RAPID OBSERVATION
+
+_The Fingers_
+
+Observe the fingers. If they look short and stumpy in proportion to the
+rest of the palm--one may be sure that the individual to whom they belong
+is of an animal nature, possessing coarse instincts, devoid of real
+intellectuality, and belonging to the lower order of humanity.
+
+If the fingers and the palm appear equal in length, the owner belongs to
+a more cultured race. He has inherited from a more intellectual line of
+ancestors and for all work requiring intelligence and a higher mentality
+he or she could be depended on, whereas the first-mentioned type could
+not--no matter how well he might talk or advocate his own superiority.
+
+If the fingers look unusually long and thin, and in this way out of
+proportion to the palm, the man or woman will err on the side of too much
+ideality and refinement and is not suited to business or work requiring
+"level headedness" and practicality. It would be useless, for example, to
+put such a person in charge of work-people or over work-rooms. His
+ideality and refinement would be thrown away in such positions, and even
+with the best will in the world he would be completely out of harmony
+with his surroundings.
+
+Such a man, however, could be depended upon in all positions requiring
+personal mental work, research, science, literature, philosophy,
+educational work or, in fact, anything relating to the higher qualities
+of the mind.
+
+If his fingers, in addition to their length, were also knotty or jointed
+(joints much pronounced), he could be depended on to a still greater
+extent for all work requiring great thoughtfulness, detail, and
+concentration of mind.
+
+If, on the other hand, these long fingers were smooth jointed, he would,
+while having the same desire for ideality and for everything
+intellectual, be impulsive and inspirational, would lack a sense of
+detail and a love for detail in his own work, would be visionary,
+artistic, emotional. Such a person would be suited to artistic work,
+such as painting, making designs, models, etc., but could not be trusted
+to perform anything requiring detail, research or science, and would be
+utterly useless in any position where discipline or control of others
+were required.
+
+
+THE FINGERS CONSIDERED SEPARATELY
+
+Let us now observe the fingers separately from the rest of the hand.
+
+The first finger is considered as the Dictator, the Lawgiver, the finger
+of Ambition, the Indicator, the Pointer, etc.
+
+If this finger is unusually long and nearly equals the second, all these
+tendencies are extremely pronounced.
+
+Therefore, if your employee has this finger long, you can safely entrust
+him with control over, and charge of others. You will be amazed how well
+he or she will make rules and regulations and see that they are obeyed;
+but beware, Mr. Employer, lest your first finger is short in proportion
+as that of your employee is long, for, if such be the case, you too will
+have "to toe the line" and you may find yourself in a very disagreeable
+position.
+
+But let me give you a further warning: Should this man or woman have a
+first finger that is long and crooked, you will assuredly find out to
+your cost that the personal ambitions of such an individual are
+"crooked." Such an employee would be perfectly unscrupulous in finding
+out your secrets and getting you into his power.
+
+If the second finger is straight and well shaped, its owner will be very
+serious, a little inclined to melancholy, but will pay due regard to
+whatever responsibilities with which he may be entrusted, but again
+beware if this finger is crooked. In this case the owner would be,
+however, more subject to what may be called "a crooked fate" than
+wilfully "wrong." Such people are, as a rule, the children of strange
+circumstances over which they seem to have no control. They are
+continually getting themselves into trouble and into false positions,
+but, I must admit, more by a strange fatality of things than by their own
+wilful actions. Nevertheless, such infelicities might be very unpleasant
+for their employer, especially if he has more heart than brains.
+
+The third finger, if extremely long and straight, indicates an
+extraordinary desire for glory, celebrity, publicity and the like; and
+although this might be an extremely good quality in the case of an actor,
+preacher, politician or public man, it may be most undesirable if such a
+person is to occupy the position of a private secretary, or the
+confidential clerk to some family lawyer.
+
+If this finger is crooked as well as very long, all the above qualities
+will be intensified and exaggerated. The love of spending money and
+fondness for show will also be more marked, the gambling tendencies very
+pronounced. No position involving the handling of money, should be
+entrusted to the possessor of such a finger.
+
+The fourth, or little finger, if long (passing the nail joint of the
+third) is indicative of power of speech and subtlety in choice of
+language--the saying "to twist a person round one's little finger"
+originated from this very sign. Such people have a marvellous gift of
+speech, eloquence and flow of language, valuable gifts, of course, for
+orators and public persons, but not desirable qualities in a wife if a
+man is fond of sleep.
+
+A short "little finger" denotes the reverse of the above. Such persons
+find the greatest difficulty in expressing what they want to say, but
+they can write better than speak and should be encouraged to do so.
+
+These individuals have, however, not much power over others and the
+shorter the "little finger" is, the more timid and sensitive they are in
+the presence of strangers. If this finger is crooked, then these
+weaknesses are all the more emphasised, but if formed _crooked and long_
+the power of eloquence is also crooked. Such people will tell any "fairy
+tale" to suit their purpose--they are natural born liars and the position
+of President of the Ananias Club is their rightful inheritance.
+
+The first and third fingers absolutely of equal length is the best sign
+of _an equally balanced mind_, but such a sign is rather rare to find.
+
+When the fingers are very supple in the joints and turn backwards or
+outwards from the palm, it is an indication of a quick wit and clever
+brain; but such persons lack continuity of purpose. They have no "hold,"
+as it were, on any one thing.
+
+Fingers slightly curved inwards towards the palm, denote persons slow to
+grasp an idea, or a subject, but such people have retentive memories and
+"hold" or grip, as it were, any one thing they may take up.
+
+
+CHARACTER SHOWN BY THE THUMB
+
+The thumb is in itself more expressive of character than any other member
+of the hand. It was D'Arpentigny who wrote "the thumb individualises the
+man."
+
+Medical science has proved that there is such a thing as a "thumb centre"
+in the brain and any pressure or disease in that part of the brain _shows
+its effect in the thumb_.
+
+A large well-made thumb is the outward and visible sign of a
+strong-willed, determined person, be he man or woman.
+
+The longer the thumb, the more the power of will rules the actions; the
+shorter the thumb, the more brute force and obstinacy sways the nature.
+
+The shorter and more thick-set the nail phalange is, giving the
+appearance of a club, the more ungovernable is the person in his or her
+temper. Such people have no control over themselves and under the least
+opposition will fly into a blind rage of fury. This curious formation has
+been called the "Murderer's Thumb" because so many who have committed
+murder in a mad fit of passion have been found with this curious
+formation.
+
+An employee with this class of thumb should never be given any position
+of authority over others, for he could not curb his ungovernable temper.
+He would also be absolutely unbalanced in his jealousy, and no woman who
+has the ambition to live to the usual "threescore-years-and-ten" should
+risk marriage to a man with one of these thumbs. But as "love is blind"
+it is useless, I know, to give advice in such a case.
+
+The first joint or nail phalange of the thumb, when long and thin,
+denotes the opposite of the above characteristics. In such cases the
+person has the most absolute control over his temper, his will power is
+also strong but quick and unobtrusive, and in a firm, determined way
+people with such a thumb manage others and bend those around them to
+their purpose.
+
+The second joint, if delicately shaped, almost "waist like," indicates
+tact, diplomacy, and gentleness, also subtlety in argument; but if this
+part of the thumb be full looking or equal in size to that of the nail
+phalange, it denotes the person who cares nothing for tact but who, on
+all occasions, will speak his mind plainly, and with brutal frankness.
+
+When the thumb looks as if it were "tied in" close to the hand, the
+person is timid, easily frightened by both people and circumstances,
+narrow-minded in his views, and miserly in his habits. It is a
+well-established fact that the thumbs of all misers are "tied in" and
+cramped-looking. It is perhaps this very fear of things and people that
+in the end makes them misers with their gold.
+
+One need never waste one's time asking a person with one of these
+cramped-looking thumbs to do a favour, and may God help the business man
+or woman who ever gets into such a person's clutches!
+
+A thumb with the nail joint supple (bending backwards or as it is also
+called "double jointed") indicates a character the exact opposite of that
+associated with the "tied in" thumb. Possessors of such a thumb are
+generous, adaptable to others, extravagant, and impetuous in their
+actions and decisions. They promise things quickly and are more often
+heard to say "Yes" than "No"; but if they have time for reflection, they
+very often go back on their promises.
+
+Individuals having a "stiff-jointed" thumb, on the contrary, cannot
+easily adapt themselves to others. They are distant and more reserved
+with strangers. When asked to do a thing, they generally first say "No,"
+but on reflection or when reasoned with, they often give in to the other
+and generally regret having done so. It is useless to oppose such
+people--if one cannot lead them, it is no use attempting to force them
+against their will.
+
+This type has more self-control than the type of people with the "supple
+jointed" formation, and is not so generous or extravagant. Individuals of
+this group, however, make more reliable friends, so their friendship,
+though difficult to obtain, is generally worth having.
+
+A thumb standing very far out from the hand (almost at right angles to
+the palm) is not a good sign for ordinary success. Such people go to
+extremes in everything they do and are generally fanatics in religion,
+social reform, or whatever line of thought occupies their attention.
+
+
+HANDS, HARD AND SOFT
+
+Even in the simple act of shaking hands, one can form conclusions about
+character.
+
+Beware of any man or woman whose hand seems to slip from yours when you
+grasp theirs in greeting. Such persons are deceptive and treacherous.
+They may smile at you with their lips, but instinctively they regard you
+as their prey and will only use you for their own object.
+
+A soft, fat hand is the indication of an indolent and more or less lazy
+person.
+
+A firm hand is the sign of an energetic, reliable nature.
+
+A very thin hand denotes a restless energetic disposition, but one that
+is given to worry, and fretting and is generally discontented.
+
+A thin hand that feels listless in one's grasp denotes a weak
+constitution that has only sufficient energy to live.
+
+A cold, clammy hand is also a sign of poor health, but generally that of
+a very sensitive and nervous person.
+
+A person who keeps his hands closed while talking, is distrustful in his
+nature, has little self-reliance and can seldom be relied on by others.
+
+A man or woman who gives a good firm grasp of the hand, is
+self-confident, energetic, and generally reliable.
+
+When all the fingers (especially if the fingers be long) are seen always
+clinging, sticking, as it were, or folding over one another it denotes
+very doubtful qualities in the nature of their possessor and a decided
+tendency towards thieving and general lack of moral principal.
+
+Remember that the hands _are the immediate servants or instruments of the
+brain_. There are more motive and sensory nerves from the brain to the
+hand than to any other portion of the body and, whether sleeping or
+waking, they continually and unconsciously reflect the thought and
+character of the mind or soul of the individual.
+
+It will, then, be seen from these observations that without looking at
+the lines of the hand, one may be able to obtain certain details of
+character that are more trustworthy than those given by the face, and
+that these rules, if followed, should be of the greatest assistance and
+value to people in all walks of life.
+
+Many of these observations are further amplified in subsequent chapters
+of this work. There is not a single one of these rules that has not been
+proved by me in my long professional career, and knowing that they will
+bear the strictest inquiry and observation, it gives me pleasure now to
+offer them to the readers of the American Edition of _Palmistry for All_.
+
+                                                               CHEIRO.
+
+LONDON.
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+
+It was on July 21, 1894, that I had the honour of meeting Lord Kitchener
+and getting the autographed impression of his right hand, which I now
+publish for the first time as frontispiece to this volume. The day I had
+this interview, Lord Kitchener, or, as he was then, Major-General
+Kitchener, was at the War Office, and to take this impression had to use
+the paper on his table, and, strangely enough, the imprint of the War
+Office may be seen at the top of the second finger--in itself perhaps a
+premonition that he would one day be the controlling force of that great
+department.
+
+Lord Kitchener was at that moment Sirdar of the Egyptian Army. He had
+returned to England to tender his resignation on account of some hostile
+criticism about "the Abbas affair," and so I took the opportunity of his
+being in England to ask him to allow me to add his hand to my collection,
+which even then included some of the most famous men and women of the
+day.
+
+As Mr. T.P. O'Connor, in writing recently of Lord Kitchener, said: "One
+of his greatest qualities, at once useful and charming, is his
+accessibility. Anybody who has anything to say to him can approach him;
+anybody who has anything to teach him will find a ready and grateful
+learner."
+
+My experience can indeed bear out the truth of this clear judgment of one
+of the leading traits in Lord Kitchener's character. That very year,
+1894, was a notable one in his life; his strong-willed action over the
+Abbas affair was completely vindicated; he was made a K.C.M.G., and
+returned to Egypt with more power than ever.
+
+Once in his presence he put me completely at my ease, and in a few
+moments he appeared to be deeply interested in observing the difference
+between the lines in his own clearly-marked palm and those in dozens of
+other impressions that I put before him.
+
+He was then almost forty-four years of age, and I remember well how I
+explained the still higher positions and responsibilities that his path
+of Destiny mapped out before him. The heaviest and greatest of all would,
+I told him, be undertaken in his sixty-fourth year (1914), but how little
+either of us thought then that in that year the most terrible war of the
+century would have broken out.
+
+Believing, as I do, in the Law of Periodicity playing as great a role in
+the lives of individuals as it does in nations, it is strange to notice
+that the same radix numbers that governed Lord Kitchener's career when he
+was planning out the Egyptian campaign, which resulted in his great
+victories of Atbara and Omdurman in 1896 and 1897, are exactly the same
+for him in 1914-1915, and 1916 gives again the same radix number that in
+1898 saw him receive a vote of thanks from both Houses of Parliament, and
+a gift of L30,000 from the State.
+
+From the standpoint of those interested in this strange study of hands,
+the accompanying impression of Lord Kitchener's cannot help but be
+regarded as of great importance. In it, the rules of Palmistry that I
+have given in the following pages are borne out in all their details.
+
+Returning to the impression of this remarkable hand; even in shape alone
+one may read by the rules of this science the following clearly-marked
+characteristics:
+
+Length of fingers--intellectuality (page 134), strong determination and
+will-power (chapter on the Thumb, page 127), mentality and firm
+determination of purpose (_see_ Line of Head, page 17).
+
+The remarkable Line of Fate running up the centre of the hand and turning
+towards the first finger, denotes ambition and domination over others
+(page 52).
+
+The Line of Success and Fame, starting on the hand from the Line of Life
+and ascending to the base of the third finger, exactly coincides with the
+period in Lord Kitchener's career when he began to find recognition and
+success (page 63).
+
+As in my larger work on this subject I published Gladstone's hand as a
+remarkable illustration of the truth that may be found in this study, so
+in this present work with the same confidence I give this illustration of
+Lord Kitchener's as another proof of character indicated in the shape and
+lines of the hand, and as it has been said so often that "Character is
+Destiny," so it is surely not illogical to point out that in following
+the rules laid down by this study one may obtain a clear idea of the
+destiny that the Character, Will, and Individuality trace out in
+advance--tracks, as it were, stretching far out into the distant future
+for the engine of purpose and achievement to find already laid and ready
+to be used at the "appointed time."
+
+In conclusion, as I have now completely retired from all professional
+work, I may be allowed to point out that I am not publishing this book
+with the idea of seeking clients. I have no desire but to see this
+strange study taken up as a useful and practical means of obtaining an
+exact judgment of the character, qualities, and hidden tendencies that
+might otherwise be ignored.
+
+I think that if all parents knew at least something of Palmistry, the
+vast majority of children would be more usefully trained and their proper
+tendencies developed.
+
+It is often too late when a child discovers--and most probably by
+accident--some tendency or talent that had never been suspected by its
+parents.
+
+It is no wonder that so few persons find their true vocations in the
+world, when it is remembered the random, haphazard way in which children
+are brought up--educated for the most part in some scholastic mill that
+grinds down all to the same dead level of mediocrity, and then turns them
+into the Army, the Church, or into trade.
+
+If, on the contrary, all these studies that teach the understanding of
+character were more encouraged, parents would have less excuse for the
+supreme ignorance they now show as to the real nature of those children
+who hold them responsible for their entry into the battlefield of
+existence.
+
+These same parents would lift up their voices in righteous indignation if
+soldiers were sent into battle untrained, without their proper equipment,
+and yet these same parents have never, in the whole course of their
+lives, made the simplest study of any one of those many subjects by which
+they could in knowing the nature of their child, have strengthened weak
+points in the fortress of character, or by developing some talent or
+gift, doubly armed him for his entry into the battle of life.
+
+It is from this standpoint that I earnestly hope this study of hands may
+some day be taken up. It was from this standpoint that I interested such
+men as Gladstone, Professor Max Muller, of Oxford, Lord Russell, when he
+was Lord Chief Justice, King Edward VII., and many others too numerous to
+mention; and lastly, it is from the same standpoint that I have now
+written this book, which under the title of _Palmistry for All_, will, I
+hope, appeal to all classes, and cause such an interest in the Study of
+Character that, instead of such an art being left in the hands of a few,
+it will, on the contrary, become universally used for the benefit of all.
+
+CHEIRO
+
+NOTE.--Cheiro retired from all professional work some time ago, and the
+public is therefore warned against persons pretending that they are the
+real "Cheiro," and endeavouring to pass themselves off as the author of
+his well-known works.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+
+                                                                  PAGE
+  PREFACE                                                          iii
+  INTRODUCTION                                                      xv
+
+  PART I
+  PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY
+
+  CHAPTER
+
+  I.     A BRIEF RESUME OF THE HISTORY OF THE STUDY
+             OF HANDS THROUGH THE CENTURIES TO THE
+             PRESENT DAY                                             1
+
+  II.    THE LINE OF HEAD OR THE INDICATIONS OF MENTALITY            8
+           The Line of Head and its Variations                      10
+           The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life              16
+           The Line of Head separated from the Line of Life         19
+           The Line of Head and its Secondary Signs                 22
+           Changes in the Line of Head                              26
+           Crosses and Squares in connection with the Line of Head  30
+           Double Lines of Head                                     31
+           The Line of Head on the Seven Types of Hands             33
+
+  III.   THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS                        36
+
+  IV.    THE LINE OF MARS OR INNER LIFE LINE                        44
+
+  V.     THE LINE OF DESTINY OR FATE                                47
+           From the Line of Life                                    50
+           From the Wrist                                           50
+           From the Mount of the Moon                               51
+           From the Middle of the Palm                              55
+           Influence Lines to the Line of Fate                      57
+           Double Lines of Fate                                     57
+
+  VI.    THE LINE OF THE SUN OR SUCCESS                             61
+           From the Line of Life                                    63
+           From the Line of Fate                                    63
+           From the Plain of Mars                                   63
+           From the Mount of the Moon                               63
+           From the Line of Head                                    63
+           From the Line of Heart                                   63
+
+  VII.   THE LINE OF HEART AS INDICATING THE AFFECTIONATE
+             AND EMOTIONAL NATURE                                   67
+
+  VIII.  SIGNS RELATING TO MARRIAGE                                 73
+
+         THE LINE OF MARRIAGE:
+           At the Base of the Fourth Finger                         73
+           Influence Lines to the Fate Line                         77
+           Influence Lines on Venus                                 79
+
+  IX.    LINES DENOTING CHILDREN, THEIR SEX, AND OTHER MATTERS
+             CONCERNING THEM                                        81
+
+  X.     THE LINE OF HEALTH OR HEPATICA                             83
+
+  XI.    THE GIRDLE OF VENUS                                        88
+           The Ring of Saturn                                       90
+           The Bracelets                                            91
+
+  XII.   THE LINE OF INTUITION                                      92
+           The Via Lasciva                                          93
+
+  XIII.  LA CROIX MYSTIQUE                                          95
+           The Ring of Solomon                                      96
+
+  XIV.   TRAVELS, VOYAGES AND ACCIDENTS                             97
+
+  XV.    THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT AND THE GRILLE           101
+
+  XVI.   THE STAR, THE CROSS, THE SQUARE                           104
+
+  XVII.  DIFFERENT CLASSES OF LINES AND RIGHT AND LEFT HANDS       107
+
+  XVIII. THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE                     110
+
+  XIX.   HOW TO TELL TIME AND DATES OF THE PRINCIPAL EVENTS IN
+             THE LIFE                                              112
+
+
+  PART II
+
+  CHEIROGNOMY--OR THE SHAPES OF THE HANDS AND FINGERS
+
+  I.     THE STUDY OF THE SHAPE OF THE HANDS                       117
+
+         THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS:
+           The Elementary                                          119
+           The Square                                              119
+           The Spatulate                                           121
+           The Philosophic                                         122
+           The Conic                                               124
+           The Psychic                                             125
+           The Mixed                                               126
+
+  II.    THE THUMB                                                 127
+           The Supple Jointed                                      128
+           The Firm Jointed                                        128
+           The First, Second and Third Phalange                    131
+
+  III.   THE FINGERS                                               133
+           Length of Fingers to one another                        133
+           Smooth Jointed                                          135
+           Knotty Jointed                                          135
+
+  IV.    THE NAILS                                                 136
+           Long Nails                                              136
+           Short Nails                                             137
+           Flat Nails                                              138
+           Their Indications of Disease                            139
+
+  V.     THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND                                    140
+
+  VI.    THE MOUNT OF MARS                                         144
+
+  VII.   THE MOUNT OF JUPITER                                      150
+
+  VIII.  THE MOUNT OF SATURN                                       154
+
+  IX.    THE MOUNT OF THE SUN                                      158
+
+  X.     THE MOUNT OF MERCURY                                      162
+
+  XI.    THE MOUNT OF THE MOON                                     168
+
+  XII.   THE MOUNT OF VENUS                                        173
+
+  XIII.  ADVICE TO THE STUDENT: THE BEST MEANS TO
+            MAKE CASTS OR TAKE IMPRESSIONS OF THE HANDS            178
+
+
+
+
+ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+
+                                                                  PAGE
+
+         Cheiro                                         _Frontispiece_
+
+         The Lines of the Hand                                       1
+
+         Lord Kitchener's Hand                                       2
+
+  PLATE
+
+  I.     The Three Principal Positions for the Commencement
+             of the Line of Head                                    11
+
+  II.    The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life and
+             its Terminations                                       18
+
+  III.   The Line of Head separated from the Line of
+             Life                                                   20
+
+  IV.    Islands on the Line of Head                                24
+
+  V.     More Variations of the Line of Head                        27
+
+  VI.    The Line of Head and Line of Heart running
+             together                                               29
+
+  VII.   Double Lines of Head, also Crosses and Squares             32
+
+  VIII.  The Line of Life and Sections of Influences from
+             the Mounts                                             37
+
+  IX.    The Line of Life and its Variations                        40
+
+  X.     The Line of Life and Line of Mars                          45
+
+  XI.    The Line of Destiny and its Modifications                  51
+
+  XII.   The Line of Destiny and its Variations                     53
+
+  XIII.  The Line of Destiny and its Modifications                  56
+
+  XIV.   The Line of Destiny, Islands, and other Signs              59
+
+  XV.    The Line of Sun and its Modifications                      62
+
+  XVI.   The Line of Heart and its Variations                       68
+
+  XVII.  The Line of Marriage                                       74
+
+  XVIII. Marriage Lines and Influence Lines which further
+             help in denoting Marriage                              78
+
+  XIX.   The Line of Health                                         84
+
+  XX.    The Girdle of Venus. The Ring of Saturn.
+             The Bracelets. The Line of Intuition. The
+             Via Lasciva                                            89
+
+  XXI.   Travels, Voyages, Accidents, and Descending
+           Lines from the Mounts                                    99
+
+  XXII.  The Island, the Circle, the Spot, the Grille, the
+           Star, and the Square                                    102
+
+  XXIII. Minor Marks and Signs                                     105
+
+  XXIV.  Minor Marks and Signs                                     108
+
+  XXV.   The Great Triangle and the Quadrangle                     111
+
+  XXVI.  Times and Dates of Principal Events                       113
+
+
+  CHEIROGNOMY
+
+  ILLUSTRATIONS
+
+  I.     The Elementary Hand                                       120
+         The Square or Useful Hand                                 120
+         The Spatulate Hand                                        120
+         The Philosophic Hand                                      120
+
+  II.    The Conic or Artistic Hand                                123
+         The Psychic Hand                                          123
+         The Mixed Hand                                            123
+
+  III.   Thumbs:
+         The Clubbed Thumb                                         129
+         The Supple Jointed Thumb                                  129
+         The Firm Jointed Thumb                                    129
+         The Waist-Like Thumb                                      129
+         The Straight Thumb                                        129
+         The Elementary Thumb                                      129
+
+  IV.    The Fingers:
+         The Smooth                                                134
+         The Square                                                134
+         The Knotty                                                134
+
+  V.     The Nails:
+         Delicacy of Throat                                        137
+         Chest and Bronchial                                       137
+         Spinal Weakness                                           137
+         Weak Action of the Heart                                  137
+         Paralysis                                                 137
+
+  VI.    The Mounts of the Hand:
+         The Mount of Venus                                        141
+         The Mount of Mars                                         141
+         The Mount of Jupiter                                      141
+         The Mount of Saturn                                       141
+         The Mount of the Sun                                      141
+         The Mount of Mercury                                      141
+         The Mount of the Moon                                     141
+
+[Illustration: THE LINES OF THE HAND.]
+
+
+
+
+Palmistry for All
+
+
+
+
+PART I--PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+
+A BRIEF RESUME OF THE HISTORY OF THE STUDY OF HANDS THROUGH THE CENTURIES
+TO THE PRESENT DAY
+
+The success I had during the twenty-five years in which I was connected
+with this study was, I believe, chiefly owing to the fact that although
+my principal study was the lines and formation of hands, yet I did not
+confine myself alone to that particular page in the book of Nature. I
+endeavoured to study every phase of thought that can throw light on human
+life; consequently the very ridges of the skin, the hair found on the
+hands, all were used as a detective would use a clue to accumulate
+evidence. I found people were sceptical of such a study only because they
+had not the subject presented to them in a logical manner.
+
+There are hundreds of facts connected with the hand that people have
+rarely, if ever, heard of, and I think it will not be out of place if I
+touch on them here. For instance, in regard to what are known as the
+corpuscles, Meissner, in 1853, proved that these little molecular
+substances were distributed in a peculiar manner in the hand itself. He
+found that in the tips of the fingers they were 108 to the square line,
+with 400 papillae; that they gave forth certain distinct crepitations, or
+vibrations, and that in the red lines of the hand they were most numerous
+and, strange to say, were found in straight individual rows in the lines
+of the palm. Experiments were made as to these vibrations, and it was
+proved that, after a little study, one could distinctly detect and
+recognise the crepitations _in relation to each individual_. They
+increased or decreased in every phase of health, thought, or excitement,
+and were extinct the moment death had mastered its victim. About twenty
+years later, experiments were made with a man in Paris, who had an
+abnormally acute sense of sound (Nature's compensation for want of sight,
+as he had been born blind). In a very short time this man could detect
+the slightest change or irregularity in these crepitations, and through
+the changes was able to tell with wonderful accuracy about how old a
+person was, and how near they were to illness, and even death.
+
+The study of these corpuscles was also taken up by Sir Charles Bell, who,
+in 1874, demonstrated that each corpuscle contained the end of a nerve
+fibre, and was in immediate connection with the brain. This great
+specialist also demonstrated that every portion of the brain was in touch
+with the nerves of the hand and more particularly with the corpuscles
+found in the tips of the fingers and the lines of the hand.
+
+[Illustration: LORD KITCHENER'S HAND.]
+
+The detection of criminals by taking impressions of the tips of the
+fingers and by thumb marks is now used by the police of almost every
+country, and thousands of criminals have been tracked down and identified
+by this means.
+
+To-day, at Scotland Yard, is to be seen almost an entire library now
+devoted to books on this side of the subject and to the collections that
+the police have made, and yet, in my short time, I remember how the idea
+was scoffed at when Monsieur Bertillon and the French police first
+commenced the detection of criminals by this method. If the ignorant
+prejudice against a complete study of the hand were overcome, the police
+would be greatly assisted by studying the lines of the palm, and
+acquiring a knowledge of what these lines mean, especially as regards
+mentality and the inclination of the brain in one direction or another.
+
+It is a well-known fact that, even if the skin be burned off the hands or
+removed by an acid, in a short time the lines will reappear exactly as
+they were before, and the same happens to the ridges or "spirals" in the
+skin of the inside tips of the fingers and thumb.
+
+The scientific use of such a study could also be made invaluable in
+foreseeing tendencies towards insanity, etc.
+
+Sir Thomas Browne, in his _Religio Medici_, after referring to
+Physiognomy, says:
+
+    "Now there are besides these characters in our faces certain
+    mystical figures in our hands, which I dare not call mere
+    dashes, strokes _a la volee_ or at random, because delineated
+    by a pencil that never works in vain, and hereof I take more
+    particular notice because I carry that in mine own hand which
+    I could never read nor discover in another."
+
+But prejudice is a hard thing to combat, and, in consequence, a study
+which could render untold aid to humanity has been neglected in modern
+times. Yet it cannot be denied that this strange study was practised and
+followed by some of the greatest teachers and students of other
+civilisations.
+
+Whether or no these ancient philosophers were more enlightened than we
+are has long been a question of dispute, but the one point and the most
+important one which has been admitted is, that in those days the greatest
+study of mankind was man. It is, therefore, reasonable to suppose that
+their conclusions are more likely to be correct than those of an age like
+our own--famous chiefly for its implements of destruction, its warships,
+its dynamite, and its cannon.
+
+This study of hands can be traced back to the very earliest, most
+enlightened forms of civilisation. It has been practised by the greatest
+minds in all those civilisations, minds that have left their mental
+philosophies and their monuments for us to marvel at. India, China,
+Persia, Egypt, Rome--all in their study of mankind have placed the
+greatest store in their study of the hand.
+
+During my stay in India, I was permitted by some Brahmans (descendants of
+the Joshi Caste, famous from time immemorial for their knowledge in
+occult subjects) with whom it was my good fortune to become intimately
+acquainted, to examine and make extracts from an extraordinary book on
+this subject which they regarded as almost sacred, and which belonged to
+the great past of the now despised Hindustan.
+
+As the wisdom of the Hindus spread far and wide across the earth, so the
+theories and ideas about this study spread and were practised in other
+countries. Similar to the way in which religion suits itself to the
+conditions of the country in which it is propagated, so has it divided
+itself into various systems. It is, however, to the days of the Greek
+civilisation that we owe the present clear and lucid form of the study.
+The Greek civilisation has, in many ways, been considered the highest and
+most intellectual in the world, and here it is that Palmistry or
+Cheiromancy (from the Greek [Greek: cheir], the hand) grew and found
+favour in the eyes of those who have given us laws and philosophies that
+we employ to-day and whose works are taught in all our leading colleges
+and schools.
+
+It is a well-known and undisputed fact that the philosopher Anaxagoras
+not only taught but practised this study. We also find that Hispanus
+discovered on an altar dedicated to Hermes a book on Cheiromancy, written
+in gold letters, which he sent as a present to Alexander the Great, as "a
+study worthy of the attention of an elevated and enquiring mind." Instead
+of it being followed by the "weak-minded," we find, on the contrary, that
+it numbered amongst its disciples such men of learning as Aristotle,
+Pliny, Paracelsus, Cardamis, Albertus Magnus, the Emperor Augustus, and
+many others of note.
+
+This brings us down to the period when the power of the Church was
+beginning to be felt outside the domain and jurisdiction of religion. It
+is said that the early Fathers were jealous of the influence of this
+old-world science. Whether this be true or not, we find that it was
+bitterly denounced and persecuted by the early Church. It has always
+been, that the history of any dominant creed or sect is the history of
+opposition to knowledge, unless that knowledge come through it. This
+study, therefore, the offspring of "pagans and heathens," was not even
+given a trial. It was denounced as sorcery and witchcraft; the devil was
+conjured up as the father of all such students, and the result was that
+through this bitter persecution, the study was outlawed, and fell into
+the hands of vagrants, tramps, and gipsies. In spite of this persecution
+it is interesting and significant to notice that almost the first book
+ever printed was a work on Palmistry, _Die Kunst Ciromantia_, printed in
+Augsburg, in the year 1475.
+
+In examining this subject it will be found that in the study of mankind
+it came to be recognised that, as there was a natural position on the
+face for the nose, eyes, lips, etc., so also on the hand was there a
+natural position for what is known as the Line of Head, Line of Life, and
+so on. If these were found in some unnatural position they would equally
+be the indications of unnatural tendencies. It doubtless took years of
+study to name these lines and marks, but it must be remembered that this
+curious study is more ancient than any other in the world.
+
+In the original Hebrew of the Book of Job (chap. xxxvii., ver. 7), we
+find these significant words: "God caused signs or seals on the hands of
+all the sons of men, that the sons of men might know their works."
+
+As the student of anatomy can build up the entire system from the
+examination of a single bone, so may a person by a careful study of an
+important member of the body such as the hand, apart from anything
+superstitious or even mystical, build up the entire action of the system
+and trace every effect back to its cause.
+
+To-day the science of the present is coming to the rescue of the
+so-called superstition of the past. All over the world scientists are
+little by little sweeping aside prejudice and beginning to study occult
+questions. Perhaps the "whys and wherefores" of such things may one of
+these days be as easily explained as are those wireless waves of
+electricity that carry messages from land to land.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD OR THE INDICATIONS OF THE MENTALITY
+
+The object of the following chapters is to give clear and unmistakable
+instruction on the lines and markings of the hands, both from the
+student's standpoint and from that of the general reader. This is not
+usually the course adopted in books printed on this subject which have to
+appeal to a general public.
+
+During my twenty-five years' professional experience in England, America,
+and other countries, I have carefully noted down the questions that are
+not answered in books published on this subject. I have also recorded
+what are the difficulties that arise in the minds of those students who
+meet this, that, or the other mark or line and search in vain for some
+explanation as to its meanings. I may add that there is not a single
+point on which I give information that has not been proved by me from
+probably thousands of cases that have come before me during my own
+professional experience.
+
+As regards illustrations, I have endeavoured to make these of the
+simplest and clearest kind possible. I have every confidence that if they
+are carefully studied, no student can fail to grasp this subject in a
+masterful manner, and that whoever acts upon the advice I give in these
+pages, cannot fail to become successful as an interpreter of this study.
+
+In all my work I regard the Line of Head (page 11) or the Line of
+Mentality as the most important sign that can be found in the hand.
+
+A Line of Head is like the needle in the compass, without a true
+knowledge of which it is impossible to grasp the "direction of the
+subject." I have seen more mistakes caused by a lack of grasp of this
+point than by anything else.
+
+I have seen, for example, many students make the mistake of paying great
+attention to what looked like a good Line of Sun or Success, and, at the
+same time, not noticing a weak, badly formed Line of Head, which
+contradicted the promise of success given by the various lines. If, on
+the other hand, the student had first noticed the Line of Head, he would
+have been able to tell the subject that the promise of success was not
+backed up by the intelligence or the mentality.
+
+As regards the future being foreshadowed, it has been demonstrated that
+the brain is always growing, changing, increasing, or diminishing. These
+changes commence years before the effect is shown by the thoughts or
+actions of the individual. A boy ten years old may at that point commence
+a development which will not be felt until he is thirty, and then it may
+change his whole life and career. As this development commences at ten,
+even at that age it has affected certain nerves, and they in their turn
+have already affected the Line of Head--a full twenty years before the
+point of change or action has been reached. It therefore follows that the
+future may be seen and told by a careful examination of the hand which,
+as Aristotle has said, is the "organ of all organs, the active agent of
+the passive powers of the entire system."
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS VARIATIONS
+
+The Line of Head (page 11), or indication of the Mentality of the
+subject, must in all cases be considered as the most important line on
+the hand. The greatest attention should be paid to it, so as to obtain a
+clear grasp of the Mentality under consideration.
+
+The two hands must be carefully compared--the left showing the inherited
+tendencies, the right the developed or cultivated qualities. The
+slightest change or deviation in the markings from the left to the right
+should be carefully noted down or remembered.
+
+The direction or the termination or end of the line should, above all, be
+distinctly noted, for the all-important reason that this shows the
+direction that the Mentality is inclined to develop towards. For example,
+if found with the end of the line sloping downwards in the left hand, and
+having become straight or lying across the palm in the right--the student
+is safe in concluding that the subject has not been able to follow his
+natural bent, but by the force of circumstances has been obliged to make
+himself more practical, to study business methods, and to have undertaken
+a training towards practicality and level-headedness in order to rise
+equal to the circumstances that he found himself forced to meet.
+
+In this way the student obtains an insight into the earlier conditions of
+the life under examination that is invaluable, especially when there is,
+as will be found in many cases, no Line of Destiny visible in the early
+years.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE I.
+
+THE THREE PRINCIPAL POSITIONS FOR THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE LINE OF HEAD.]
+
+If, on the contrary, the Line of Head is found exactly in the same
+position on the right hand as on the left, or even very nearly so, the
+student can be sure that there was little or no strain in the early
+years, but that the subject had easy conditions which were favourable,
+and which allowed him to develop his natural bent of Mentality.
+
+If, however, it is found that the left hand shows a forked ending to the
+Line of Head, namely, one end sloping downwards and the other end
+straight, or nearly so, and that the right hand shows only the straight
+line, then the student may decide that the subject inherited from the
+parents two natures, the imaginative and the practical, and that he chose
+to develop the latter, either in the direction of business or science.
+
+In such a case, the student may state with confidence that the parents of
+the subject were decidedly opposite in their characteristics. If the line
+has become straight in the right hand the subject takes more after the
+side that was practical.
+
+In the case of boys or men it must be remembered that they will take more
+after their mother's mental peculiarities, and in the case of girls or
+women that they more generally take after the mental qualities of the
+father.
+
+On a man's left hand that has the forked ending with the upper end
+straight, or nearly so, the student can state that the mother was the
+more practical of the parents. If on the right hand the same mark has
+become clearest the man developed, followed, or cultivated the mental
+qualities of the mother more than those of the father. When reading a
+woman's hand the reverse will apply.
+
+If, on the contrary, the lower line was the more developed on the right
+hand, then the subject, if a man, had developed the imaginative or
+artistic qualities of the mother, and _vice versa_ if the subject be a
+girl or a woman.
+
+When the Line of Head looks light or faint on the left, and strong and
+clear on the right, the student can safely state that the subject did not
+inherit any strong mental bent from either parent, but has cultivated and
+developed his own mentality.
+
+In such a case the subject has been a hard mental student, and has become
+mentally superior to his or her parents. This is often found in the case
+of "self-made" men or women, who have had little or no education in their
+early life or in their home, but who from an innate love of education
+developed themselves mentally. Such a sign would speak volumes for the
+will power and ambition of the subject under examination.
+
+If the Line of Head is lighter and poorer on the right hand than on the
+left, the student can state that the subject has not made the most of his
+opportunities mentally, and that he has not, and never will, equal the
+brain power and education of his or her parents.
+
+In such a case one may also be sure that the subject has not a very
+strong will power--at least mentally--although he might be very obstinate
+by nature, which will be seen from the quality exhibited by the nail
+phalange of the thumb (page 129).
+
+A poor or non-developed Line of Head in the right hand of any man or
+woman is also the indication of a lack of purpose or ambition--there
+being no ambition where a want of mental desire and development is so
+distinctly shown.
+
+A clean cut deep Line of Head is a more powerful sign of mentality than
+when the line is very broad, or lying, as it were, merely on the surface
+of the palm.
+
+A wide broad line shows less concentration and a more vacillating
+changeable nature. This rule applies with equal truth to all the lines on
+the palm.
+
+Broad, coarse-looking lines are more a constitutional sign than a mental
+indication. They are often found in cases where the subject leads a
+robust outdoor life, and those who have developed the physical side of
+their nature more than the mental.
+
+Great brain workers usually have thin, fine, clean-looking lines, and
+especially that of the Line of Head.
+
+It will thus be seen that by observation the student will be enabled to
+class the sort of life led by the person under examination. No matter how
+intellectual a man or woman may look, the lines on the hand will indicate
+whether or not they have developed their intellectuality. In this way it
+will be seen that a study of the hand becomes a far more accurate guide
+than the study of the face. Many men and women may have handsome,
+intellectual faces and yet prefer sport or outdoor life to any mental
+pursuit or exercise.
+
+Turning from an examination of the direction of ending of the Line of
+Head, the student must next examine the indications of the beginnings of
+this important Line. For example, the Line of Head may commence in three
+distinct different ways.
+
+  (1) From inside the Line of Life (1-1, Plate I.).
+  (2) Joined to the Line of Life (2-2, Plate I.).
+  (3) And outside the Line of Life (3-3, Plate I.).
+
+The first is the most uncertain of all. It denotes an over-sensitive,
+over-cautious, timid person. It also indicates a highly nervous, easily
+excited individual, one who has little control over himself or his
+temper, who is easily put out over trifles, and liable to do the most
+erratic things, or fly off at a tangent when irritated. Such people are
+always in trouble, generally fighting or quarrelling with those about
+them and over things that are of no consequence. They are likewise so
+easily wounded in their feelings, that even a look or an imagined slight
+will put them out of humour or upset them for days.
+
+If this Line of Head farther out in the palm become straight, it denotes
+that the subject will, later, by the development of his intelligence
+largely overcome this failing of over-sensitiveness. If the line slope
+much or bend down towards the wrist or on to the Mount of Luna (the Mount
+of Imagination), then the subject will become still worse with his
+advancing years. If the Line of Head is also poorly marked, or with
+"hairlines" from it, it is often the indication of some form of insanity
+which is likely to cause the subject to be placed under restraint in
+later life.
+
+If, with this latter indication, the student also finds all the upward
+main lines, such as the Line of Destiny, etc., fading out past the middle
+of the palm, the indication of insanity and restraint becomes all the
+more certain.
+
+This class of Head Line is largely found in cases where the subject is
+naturally inclined towards drink and intemperance of every description.
+
+Even in cases where there are good lines running up the palm, it will
+usually be found that the subject gives way to occasional fits of
+intemperance or the desire for drugs. The qualities of the fiery Mount of
+Mars, from which such a Line of Head starts inside the Life Line, is
+largely the cause of the peculiarities above indicated. The opposite
+Mount of Mars (page 141) on the side of the hand, on the contrary, gives
+mental control, so that even when the Line of Head runs out straight on
+the palm it partakes of this "Mental Mars" quality, and so denotes that
+later on in years the subject with such a Line of Head will be able to
+develop mental control. The sloping Line of Head, however, would denote
+that the subject allows himself to turn, as it were, away from mental
+control, and so lets the earlier tendencies become his master.
+
+This point alone is worthy of the consideration of all parents, and if
+observed by them would do much to help such children to develop mental
+control over themselves. The accompanying plates show this formation of
+the Line of Head in all its variations.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+The position of this line indicates in all cases a highly sensitive
+disposition, which inclines towards the side of caution and also lacks
+self-confidence (2-2, Plate I.). Even the cleverest people with this sign
+seem to rein themselves in too tightly, and are always inclined to
+undervalue their capabilities and talents.
+
+When, with the same indication, the line is also sloping slightly
+downwards, the sensitiveness is still more increased. This form is
+largely found on the hands of artists, painters, and those who even in
+other walks of life have the sensitive artistic temperament, even though
+it may not have been developed to a larger extent. If, on the contrary,
+the Line of Head joined to the Line of Life runs straight out across the
+hand towards the mental Mount of Mars (2-2, Plate I.), the subject,
+though still extremely sensitive, has got greater courage of his
+opinions. Such people do not get credit for being as highly sensitive as
+do the other people with the line sloping downwards towards the Mount of
+Imagination. The straighter the Head Line is found, the subject can be
+more relied on to carry out his determination, and often these highly
+sensitive and even nervous people are found doing very determined work in
+connection with some battle for principle or for right which they believe
+it their moral duty to carry out. If this class of Line of Head, however,
+go very far across the hand and straight on to the Mental Mount of Mars,
+it indicates an extremely strong-willed determined person who has the
+power to hide his sensitiveness and nervousness and stake everything for
+what he believes his duty to carry out.
+
+The difference in the observation of these two distinct classes of
+individuals, namely, those with the Line of Head joined but sloping, and
+the Line of Head joined and straight across the hand, has caused many
+exponents of this study to make great mistakes in the judgment of their
+subject. When, as is very often the case, the Line of Head is forked
+(3-3, Plate II.), also when joined and when these forked lines are equal
+to one another, especially in cases where the Line of Head is joined to
+the Line of Life showing the sensitive temperament, this forked mark
+often indicates a certain want of decision. The subject is inclined to
+balance too much between the two qualities of brain, the practical and
+the imaginative. As to what they should do for the best, in such cases it
+is always wise to advise the subject to act according to first impulse
+either in dealing with practical or imaginative things. By so doing they
+employ, as it were, the intuition of the brain, and by using it do not
+waver and vacillate by too much reasoning over the question or
+endeavouring to see both sides of it at once. When the sloping Line of
+Head has a gentle curve downwards towards the Mount of the Moon (1-1,
+Plate II.), distinct control over the imagination is indicated. The
+student will then know that the subject simply uses his imagination when
+he wishes to do so instead of being controlled by it. But the contrary is
+the case when the line bends too far down this Mount (4-4, Plate II.). In
+this case the subject is the slave of his imagination and generally does
+erratic and peculiar things or can only work in moods of the moment.
+People of this latter class seldom, if ever, produce the great results in
+the world of art or imagination as do those who have the line simply
+curving downwards into this Mount.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE II.
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS TERMINATIONS.]
+
+When the Line of the Head bends completely down and turns with a curve,
+as it were, under the base of the Mount of Luna (5-5, Plate II.), the
+tendency is to extreme morbid imaginings and such extreme sensitiveness,
+that people on whose hands it is found generally separate themselves from
+the rest of their fellows, and either retire from the world altogether
+and live a solitary life or else make their exit by the gate of suicide.
+The latter is, in fact, generally the ending of such lives. Their extreme
+sensitiveness evidently renders life for them almost unbearable. But this
+formation must not be confounded with the Line of Head curving downwards
+through the upper part of the Mount (4-4, Plate II.). In this latter
+case, it can even descend as far down as the wrist itself, and, unless it
+has an island or star at the end of the line, there is not the danger of
+suicide. In all such cases, however, there is extreme imagination,
+extreme sensibility, and a tendency to melancholy and morbidness, but
+there is no indication of the brain breaking down under strain as there
+is in the other case of what is known as the distinct tendency for
+self-murder.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+The Line of Head is more frequently found connected with than separated
+from the Line of Life. When the space is not very wide (3-3, Plate I.),
+it is an excellent mark to have, giving independence of thought,
+quickness of judgment, and a certain mental daring that is invaluable in
+fighting the battle of life. When the Line of Head is at the same time
+lying fairly straight across the palm, such individuals have an immense
+power over others, but their capabilities are always more distinctly
+shown if they should in any form go in for some kind of public life.
+People possessing this mark are rather less "hard students" than those
+with the Line of Head and Line of Life joined together, but they have
+such brilliancy and quickness of thought that they seem to see in a flash
+that which takes the other class hard work to attain. But these people
+with the "open Line of Head" must, above all things, have purpose in
+their life. Without purpose they are rather like a ship drifting on an
+idle sea. They may spend their life in an aimless way unless "the call"
+comes to them or the tide of ambition turns their way and carries them
+onward.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE III.
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE.]
+
+The same class of line but sloping is the more uncertain of the two
+characters, because the person is still more inclined to work only by
+moods. If the mood or the desire does not come, such people, although
+always brilliant and clever, may often waste their lives doing nothing.
+
+Those people with the Line of Head "open" and ascending slightly upwards
+towards or on to the Mental Mount of Mars (3-3, Plate III.), are
+self-appointed leaders, organizers of any public movement. They will
+sacrifice everything, home, affection, and all ties for what they believe
+is their public duty in connection with the work that they have
+undertaken.
+
+The Line of Head very open and separate from the Line of Life denotes a
+character with too little caution or sensitiveness (4-4, Plate III.). The
+subject will go to the opposite extreme of him with the Line of Head and
+Line of Life joined. When the space is very wide it denotes excessive
+impetuosity and lack of continuity of purpose, a person who pushes
+himself forward on all occasions, a great desire for notoriety and one
+continually changing his plans as far as the world is concerned. When
+this line is excessively open or separate from the Line of Life, the
+brain seems to be an extremely excitable one. The subject suffers greatly
+from excessive blood to the head, mental hysteria, sleeplessness, and all
+things that affect the brain. If the Line of Head is badly formed with
+islands, or a broad line with breaks and hair lines (1-1, Plate IV.), it
+is just as much a mark of another form of insanity as the Line of Head
+curving downwards at the wrist, but with the line mentioned the type is
+inclined to be morbid with a tendency to suicide.
+
+This other Line of Head with islands indicates the character that will be
+more likely to be excitable and fly into a temper and kill other people.
+A Line of Head not too widely separated and either one end of it
+commencing on the Mount of Jupiter, or with its main branch from the
+Mount of Jupiter (4-4, Plate III.), is one of the most brilliant marks of
+all. The student must, however, carefully establish this difference of
+the Line of Head in his own mind, as well as the termination or the
+ending of this line. Once he has these two points firmly established, he
+has gained the great keynote to this subject. When once this part is
+mastered, he has a sure foundation to work on.
+
+My next remarks will relate to the minor marks and their meaning, and to
+islands or breaks on or in the Line of Head.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS SECONDARY SIGNS
+
+What are known as "islands" in the Line of Head are very important,
+especially if they are considered both in relation to the age at which
+they occur, and also in relation to the mentality itself.
+
+In the first place the principal rule the student must bear in mind is,
+that islands must be considered as showing a weakness in any line
+wherever they may be found, and are to be considered unfortunate signs.
+
+On the Line of Head when found in the form of a continuous chain (1-1,
+Plate IV.), all through the line, they denote mental weakness, but
+generally produced by ill-health which more immediately affects the
+brain.
+
+Such mental weakness or "brain illness," if found with nails showing very
+small "moons" or none at all, denotes an anaemic condition of the blood
+that affects the brain, a low condition of vitality and bad circulation,
+which seems to starve the brain of blood and prevents such people from
+making any continuous effort in regard to study or will power, and causes
+them to act in an erratic fashion.
+
+If at the same time the Line of Head is seen placed very high on the
+hand, this sign is worse still in its meaning, and such subjects are
+inclined to be "half mad" in periods.
+
+When the Line of Head is widely separated from the Line of Life, then
+this chain formation of islands is still more accentuated and more
+difficult to cure. Such subjects have periods of mental excitability
+which it seems impossible for them to control, and in such moments they
+are liable to fly off at a tangent and commit mad or rash acts, but acts
+generally dangerous to other people.
+
+When, however, the Line of Head is very sloping (2-2, Plate IV.), with
+this formation of islands the subject is inclined to have fits of
+depression and melancholy, during which he is likely to shrink away from
+people or make an attempt against his own life. "Suicide while
+temporarily insane" is the verdict of the jury in such cases.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE IV.
+
+ISLANDS ON THE LINE OF HEAD.]
+
+Another important point of consideration in relation to the islands in
+the Line of Head, is to note their position on the line itself, or under
+what finger they make their appearance. When these islands are found at
+the commencement of the line under the first finger or Mount of Jupiter
+(3, Plate IV.), it will be found that the subject in early life was
+delicate mentally, and displayed no energy of will; no desire to study,
+was listless and without ambition.
+
+Under the second finger on the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate IV.), the
+subject, on the contrary, is inclined to suffer from severe headaches,
+morbidness, melancholy, and a tendency for inflammation, especially at
+the base of the head.
+
+If the line looks weak or frays into little hair lines from this point
+out, it shows that the subject will never recover thoroughly from this
+malady.
+
+Under the third finger, the Mount of Sun (5, Plate IV.), an island shows
+a very curious fact, namely that the person is inclined to suffer from
+weakness of the eyes and short-sight. If many of these islands are marked
+it generally foreshadows a still greater tendency to blindness and
+weakness of the sight.
+
+Islands under the fourth finger, the Mount of Mercury (6, Plate IV.), and
+the extremity of the Head Line denote weakness of the brain in old age,
+and a highly nervous worrying disposition. If very badly marked they
+denote that in the latter part of life the subject may be disposed to
+insanity proceeding from a worrying disposition, and often from the
+overstraining of the mental faculties. It will thus be seen that every
+portion of this remarkable line may be divided into sections to obtain
+marvellous detail in making predictions for the future.
+
+This line can further be divided, showing with considerable clearness the
+ages at which troubles or changes in the mentality may be expected.
+
+Under the first finger the period of the life indicated is the first 21
+years, the second period contains another section of the three 7's, and
+lasts until 42 years of age; the third period of 7's which will be found
+under the third finger indicates the section from 49 to 63, and the
+fourth section which takes in the remainder of the hand, under the fourth
+finger, stands for the period from 70 up to the end.
+
+
+CHANGES IN THE LINE OF HEAD
+
+Another extremely interesting point in studying the Line of Head is to
+take notice of certain changes in its position, or lines either dropping
+or rising from it, which will also be found to give very remarkable
+information. For example: if a sloping Line of Head at any point in its
+track seems to curve or slightly bend upwards (1-1, Plate V.), it
+indicates that about that period of the person's life some unusual strain
+will be forced upon him. If this curved line is clearly marked and not
+interfered with by things that look like blotches in it, the person,
+although of a completely opposite turn of mind to the practical, will yet
+rise superior to the occasion, and for the time being will develop a
+practical or business-like way of looking at things which may even be the
+very reverse of the nature.
+
+If, however, instead of the curve or bend a fine line is seen leaving the
+Head Line in an upward direction (2-2, Plate V.), that period will leave
+a definite mark on the subject's entire character for the remainder of
+his life. In some cases these fine lines will, after a few years, appear
+to develop more strongly, and may even become a kind of second Head Line.
+This would denote that the person continues to cultivate the practical
+side of his nature that was at that period called into existence.
+
+If one were examining a straight Line of Head and noticed a curve
+downward or a fine line growing downwards from it (3-3, Plate V.), the
+natural interpretation of such a mark would be that at that date in the
+person's career he had become less practical, or for the time being
+developed the more imaginative qualities of the mentality. In this latter
+case, curiously enough, it often denotes that the person had at that
+period of his life become more wealthy or prosperous, and so he was able
+to develop the artistic side of his nature. It is logical to assume that
+he could only have done this if the strain in the practical battle had
+been lessened about that time, but this must only be presumed if, at
+about the same date, the Sun Line (Plate XV.) were seen clearly marked or
+suddenly appearing on the hand, then the student can be positive in
+assuming that at that date greater ease and comfort came into the
+subject's life and he consequently turned to the more imaginative side of
+existence.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE V.
+
+MORE VARIATIONS OF THE LINE OF HEAD.]
+
+If the Line of Head itself should curve upward, especially at the end
+towards the fourth finger or Mount of Mercury (4-4, Plate V.), it denotes
+almost without exception that the longer the person lives the more his
+desire for money and his determination to possess it will become stronger
+every year.
+
+If the Line of Head apparently partly leaves its natural place, which
+will be seen by an examination of the left hand, and completely rises as
+it were to the Line of Heart (5-5, Plate V.), the person will develop an
+enormous fixity of purpose for some one desire. He will apparently and
+deliberately control the affectionate side of his nature by his will
+power, and will stick at nothing to obtain the realisation of whatever
+his desire may be. If this mark is found on a square thick-set material
+looking hand, it is a foregone conclusion that the subject has set his
+determination on some material object, such as wealth, and he will stop
+at nothing, even crime, in carrying out his aim. If this mark is found on
+a long hand the object of the ambition is certain to be connected with
+intellectual power over people and absolute determination to accomplish
+whatever the purpose of the career may be.
+
+This mark must not be confounded with one clear line running across the
+hand from side to side (Plate VI.), because in this case the Line of Head
+has not risen out of its position, but simply denotes tremendous
+intensity of character, for good or evil as the case may be; such a
+person would exhibit great power of concentration, and if he concentrated
+his mentality on any purpose he would unite with it his heart nature.
+But if he had set his heart or affections on any person, he would unite
+with that desire the whole force of his mental nature. In this case it is
+as if these two sides of the mentality, the sentimental and the mental,
+were linked or in some way united together. Such persons I have always
+found possess greater intensity of purpose than any other, but I have
+never found it a very happy mark to possess.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VI.
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD AND THE LINE OF HEART RUNNING TOGETHER.]
+
+In the first place, this peculiar type of person appears to be so rare in
+life that he seems to have no companions and for that reason has always
+the feeling of being intensely lonely and isolated from others. He is
+usually also in every way super-sensitive and easily wounded in his
+feelings. I have seldom found these people successful, unless when acting
+alone, but if linked with others by partnership in business, etc., they
+seem to feel their personality cramped, and the partnership as a rule
+seldom results happily. In considering this, the student must carefully
+observe whether this one line across the hand lies across the centre
+where the Head Line would naturally be, or whether it lies higher up
+towards the base of the fingers where the Heart Line is generally found.
+If the former case, one may be sure that it is a question of head and
+mentality and very little heart; but if the latter, it is a question of
+more intensity of feeling emotion and affection than of mental intensity.
+
+
+CROSSES AND SQUARES IN CONNECTION WITH THE LINE OF HEAD
+
+Small, sharply-defined crosses in any position just over or touching the
+Line of Head are generally signs of accidents to the Head itself.
+
+_Under Jupiter_ (1, Plate VII.), they usually are brought about by blows
+caused generally by the subject's desire to rule and to be too dogmatic
+or tyrannical.
+
+_Under Saturn_ (2, Plate VII.), crosses indicate injuries to the head
+from accidents by animals, blows by treachery, mine explosions, etc., and
+generally relate to accidents of a treacherous nature.
+
+_Under the Mount of the Sun_ (3, Plate VII.), these crosses have been
+found to relate to accidents to the head from sudden falls, such as the
+subject striking his head by falling, concussion of the brain, etc.
+
+_Under the Mount of Mercury_ (4, Plate VII.), these sharply defined
+crosses relate to injuries to the head due to accidents generally
+produced by scientific experiments or some hazardous business venture.
+
+Small defined squares touching the Line of Head (5, Plate VII.), are in
+all cases signs of preservation, and they relate to the particular
+qualities of the Mount of the hand under which they are found. (_See_
+chapter on Mounts, page 140.)
+
+
+DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD
+
+Double Lines of Head (6-6, Plate VII.), are as rarely found as are cases
+of the single line right across the hand. In all cases where the Double
+Line of Head stands out distinct and clear as two separate lines, the
+object will be found to have a dual mentality. He is usually capable of
+an enormous amount of mental work and is of that class of people who
+carry out two separate mental lives with success. It is often found with
+one line joined to the Line of Life and the other rising from the Mount
+of Jupiter; if such is the case, the interpretation would be that one
+side of the nature is extremely sensitive and cautious, while the other
+is self-confident with a great desire to rule or enforce its mental ideas
+on the world.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VII.
+
+DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD, ALSO CROSSES AND SQUARES.]
+
+Although such a sign as the Double Line of Head gives a remarkable degree
+of mentality, yet I have always found it a more successful sign to find
+one clear Line of Head well marked on the hand than the two Lines of Head
+in any of their positions.
+
+Another form of the Double Line of Head (7-7, Plate VII.), is one where
+the main line seems to separate about the middle of the hand, and where
+one branch goes across the hand and the other descends towards the Mount
+of the Moon. In such a case we get the double mental personality, but one
+which is more under the control of the will of the subject, whereas the
+two double distinct lines denote that the two mental personalities seem
+to act independently one from the other.
+
+It has been considered by many ancient authorities that the Double Line
+of Head, when found with two distinct lines, is a sign of the inheritance
+of great riches or power. I have generally found, however, that what it
+means is, that although the financial results of such a person's life may
+be either great wealth or power, yet he may inherit it from his mental
+right and not from his birth right.
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEAD ON THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS
+
+There are seven distinct types of hands, bearing in their own way more or
+less relationship to the Seven Races of Humanity (page 118).
+
+These seven types of hands are as follows:
+
+  I.--The Elementary or Lowest type.
+  II.--The Square, also called the Useful or Practical.
+  III.--The Spatulate or Active.
+  IV.--The Philosophic.
+  V.--The Conic or Artistic.
+  VI.--The Psychic or Idealistic.
+  VII.--The Mixed Hand.
+
+As a rule the Line of Head is generally found in accordance with the type
+of hand on which it is seen, namely, lying straight or what is called
+"level-headed" on the Square-looking or Practical hand; or sloping, and
+thus indicating the more imaginative qualities on the Philosophic, Conic,
+or Psychic types.
+
+Consequently, if it be found on a hand in what may be called opposition
+to its class, such a Line of Head immediately possesses a greater
+significance.
+
+For example, if a sloping Line of Mentality were seen on the Square or
+Practical hand, it would indicate that though the bases of that man or
+woman's thoughts and plans were of the practical kind, yet they possessed
+a far greater power of imagination than any casual observer would at
+first sight give them credit for.
+
+On the contrary, if the Line of Head were found straight or level on the
+Spatulate, Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic types, it would denote that the
+person in question was usually level-headed and practical, even in their
+highest dreams of philosophy or idealistic creations.
+
+On the Elementary hand the Line of Head is usually found short, straight,
+and coarse-looking, often nothing more than a short deep-set furrow.
+Consequently, if found long and clear, it would indicate a superior
+mental development in a coarse brutal or animal nature.
+
+If in a Square-looking hand the Line of Head were found sloping instead
+of long and straight, it would denote an unusual development of the
+artistic and imaginative qualities, but always with the practical and
+logical basis for its support.
+
+On the Spatulate hand the natural indication of the Line of Head is
+long, clear and sloping, but if found straight or level it would indicate
+a practical development of the brain endeavouring to set off the active
+energy and originality indicated by the Spatulate formation.
+
+On the Philosophic type, the hand of the thinker and philosopher, the
+usual position of the Line of Mentality is long and sloping, but if found
+straight or level it indicates a mental development of the logical and
+practical qualities which might not be expected in such a class or type.
+
+The same rules hold good with the Conic and Psychic, but with what is
+called the Mixed type, the best Line of Head to find would be one, long
+straight and level-looking, because this class, being a mixture as it
+were of all the others, would require a practical or level-headed
+mentality to hold its own amid the mixture of tendencies which the last
+type personifies.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS
+
+The Line of Life is that line which runs round the base of the thumb and
+lies directly over a large blood-vessel called the great Palmer Arch
+(1-1, Plate VIII.). This blood-vessel is more directly connected with the
+heart, stomach, and vital organs which may have given use to its term
+"The Vital," as used by the ancients.
+
+It is reasonable to assume that it is this intimate connection with the
+vital organs of the body which enables it to foretell the length of life
+from _natural causes_.
+
+If the student will bear this in mind it will make clear and plain to him
+many difficulties in connection with predictions as to health and
+disease, and he will follow more easily the following explanations.
+
+The first rules to master are, that to be normal the Line of Life should
+be long, clearly marked, and without any irregularities or breaks of any
+kind. Such a formation would indicate length of life, vitality, freedom
+from illness, and strength of constitution (1-1, Plate VIII.).
+
+Bearing the first observation in mind it will be noticed that as the Line
+of Life represents the stomach and the vital organs, when well marked
+the stomach and digestion must necessarily be in a good condition.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VIII.
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE AND SECTIONS OF INFLUENCES FROM THE MOUNTS.]
+
+When made up of little pieces or linked like a chain, it is a certain
+sign of poor health, weak stomach and lack of vitality.
+
+At this point I must ask the most careful attention to the following
+rules--which no other book on the subject contains, and which I have not
+published in any of my other writings, viz.: as the Line of Life seems
+in every sense to be the representative on the hand of the body or trunk
+of the man--so the position of these breaks, marks, links, or islands
+denotes the portion of the body most affected.
+
+Before we go further I must also impress on the student to grasp the fact
+that every line or sign on the hand plays a dual role. By one of their
+roles these lines indicate the disease the person is most liable to for
+the entire run of the life, and in another role these lines indicate the
+date when the illness will reach its greatest gravity.
+
+To explain carefully this strange phenomenon of nature, I have divided
+this line into sections (_see_ Plate VIII.), and although I am not
+writing on astrology in these pages, yet all believers in that science
+may be interested to find how wonderfully these twin sciences agree when
+the comparison is pointed out by an impartial observer such as I claim to
+be.
+
+In Plate VIII. are shown the Sections of the Line of Life with their
+various tendencies divided by the mounts at the base of the fingers. This
+will materially assist the student to comprehend their significance and,
+together with the influence of the month of birth as set out in the
+chapters on the Mounts of the Hand (page 140), will enable him to obtain
+an accuracy on all matters relating to health, diseases, and dangers to
+the life that up till now has never been attained.
+
+We will now proceed to consider the details as regards the Line of Life
+itself.
+
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+It is very important at the outset to consider the qualities of this very
+important line. In some hands it is broad and shallow on the surface of
+the hand, in others it is deep and fine; the appearance of this line is
+very often deceptive, and leads students astray when they have not had
+their attention called to its appearance.
+
+The broad, shallow Line of Life often leads people to suppose that it is
+a sign of a very healthy, robust constitution; but, on the contrary, such
+an indication is not nearly as good a sign as a clear, thin, deep line.
+The broad Life Line seems to belong to people who have more robust animal
+strength, whereas the finer line relates to people who have more nerve or
+will-force. Under any strain of ill-health, it is the finer line that
+will hold out, whereas the broad-looking line has not the same resisting
+force.
+
+Very broad lines on the hand denote more muscular strength than will
+power, and I cannot impress this difference too strongly on the minds of
+my readers. If the line is made of chain formation (1-1, Plate IX.), it
+is a sure sign of a tendency to bad health, and especially so if the hand
+be soft. The same marks on a hard, firm hand would not indicate as much
+delicacy, because hard, firm hands denote in themselves a robust
+constitution.
+
+Another important point to consider is, whether the Line of Life goes
+straight up to the side of the Mount of Venus and narrows that Mount
+(2-2, Plate IX.), or whether it forms a well-defined curve or semicircle
+out into the palm (3-3, Plate IX.). In the first case it indicates a
+naturally more delicate constitution, and less force of animal magnetism.
+This explanation will be readily understood by readers when I again call
+their attention to the fact that one of the most important blood-vessels
+going from the body to the hand is called the Great Palmer Arch, which
+carries the blood up to the hand towards the root of the thumb, and
+carries the circulation back on the other side of the Arch almost
+underneath the Line of Life. It will, therefore, be seen that people who
+have a weaker constitution are more likely to have this Great Palmer Arch
+narrower in construction than those who have a robust constitution and
+strong circulation of the blood. This is the reason why, when the Mount
+of Venus is large and wide on the hand, it gives rise to the idea that it
+indicates a more passionate animal nature than when this mount is thin
+and narrow.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE IX.
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS.]
+
+While speaking on this particular point, I must also call attention to
+the fact that when the Line of Head is curved downwards instead of
+running straight across the palm, that it seems to be more attracted to
+the qualities indicated by the Mount of Venus and gives more to the
+imaginative, romantic nature, showing a greater tendency to fall in love,
+than with people who possess the Line of Head running straight across the
+hand, as if it were not attracted to the qualities indicated by the Mount
+of Venus. It will thus be seen that every point of this study bearing on
+character can be reasoned out from a logical standpoint. This places the
+study upon a higher foundation than when it is considered purely from the
+superstitious standpoint with which it has so long been associated.
+
+If the Line of Life is seen to rise high on the hand towards the Mount of
+Jupiter (4-4, Plate IX.), the subject has more control over himself, and
+his life is more governed by the ambitious side of his nature. When,
+however, the Line of Life rises lower down on the palm, more from the
+Mount of Mars (5-5, Plate IX.), it gives less control over the temper.
+When this sign is noticed, especially in the case of young persons, it
+will be found that they are more quarrelsome, more disobedient, and have
+less ambition in connection with their studies.
+
+
+ASCENDING LINES
+
+When the Line of Life is found with a number of ascending lines, even if
+they are small, it denotes a life of greater energy; and the dates at
+which these lines ascend from the Line of Life may always be considered
+points at which the subject has made a particular effort towards whatever
+may have been the special purpose of his destiny at that moment. When
+these lines are seen ascending towards or on the Mount of Jupiter (1-1,
+Plate X.), it indicates the desire and ambition to rise in life,
+especially in some way that would give the subject control or authority
+over others. If one of the lines be found partly arrested or stopped at
+the Line of Head (2-2, Plate X.), it indicates that the subject has by
+some mental error of judgment or stupidity, broken or prevented the
+effort, which started well, from reaching a successful termination. If
+one of these lines reaches and stops at the Line of Heart, it indicates
+that the affections have, or will, interfere with the subject's special
+effort in whatever direction this line indicates. If one of these lines
+crosses and joins the line of Fate (3-3, Plate X.), it indicates and
+gives two distinct dates which are very curious in their meaning. The
+first date it gives is when this line leaves the Line of Life on its way
+towards the Line of Fate. The date of this start towards the Line of Fate
+will be given on the Line of Fate itself, right opposite where this line
+begins to grow from the Line of Life. This mark will denote that the
+subject has made a determined effort at that moment in his career to make
+his own destiny, and to break free from the circumstances or people that
+surround him or tie him down.
+
+It is always a successful sign when this line is found to join the Line
+of Fate, especially if the Line of Fate looks stronger at or about this
+point of the junction.
+
+The second date is given at the period in the Line of Life when one is
+reading down the Line of Life itself. The singular point about this is
+that a repetition of circumstances will be found to occur in the destiny.
+Suppose, for example, one saw this line going towards the Fate Line at
+twenty-six years of age--a circumstance or repetition of the occurrence
+will be found to occur at almost double that age, namely, fifty-two years
+of age, which would give a more or less exact date of this occurrence
+when reading the Line of Life. As an illustration to help the reader I
+may say that I have generally found that this mark will indicate that the
+subject has, in the first instance, broken free from some tie at an early
+date, and that a similar occurrence will take place at the second date,
+viz., late in life, when again the subject seems to break free from some
+tie, and goes out more into the world for himself.
+
+This curious sign very often helps in deciding matters as regards
+marriage. The man, or woman, will apparently assert his independence
+more, and leave the ties of home life, and again go out in the world and
+fight the battle for himself, as he did in the earlier part of his
+existence, when he probably left his parents' influence and forged ahead
+for himself.
+
+When the ascending line is seen crossing over towards the Mount of
+Saturn, and running as an independent line not joined to the Line of Fate
+(6, Plate X.), it will be found that the subject has carried out a kind
+of second fate. The date when this line left the Line of Life will give
+the first date of its commencement, _i.e._, opposite it on the Fate Line.
+If the line be a good one it would give its second date when reading down
+the Line of Life, where, if the line were good, it carried out this
+second fate to a successful culmination.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+
+THE LINE OF MARS OR INNER LIFE LINE
+
+What is called the Line of Mars is that line that is found only on some
+hands encircling the Mount of Venus and inside the Line of Life.
+
+This Line, which rises on the Mount of Mars, from which it derives its
+name, when found clear and strong appears to back up and reinforce the
+Line of Life (4-4, Plate X.). It indicates great vitality, power of
+resistance to illness and disease, and is not found on all hands.
+
+It is an excellent sign on the hands of soldiers, or in connection with
+all persons who follow a dangerous calling.
+
+All breaks or bad marks indicated on the Line of Life are minimized on
+the hands that have this Inner Life Line, or Line of Mars.
+
+As its name implies, in character it denotes a robust and rather fighting
+disposition, a person naturally inclined to rush into dangers and
+quarrels, and if deeply marked and reddish in colour it increases all
+indications of accidents and dangers shown on other parts of the hand.
+
+When a branch seems to shoot off from this line and runs on to the Mount
+of Luna (5-5, Plate X.), it foreshadows restlessness and an intense
+craving for excitement. With a weak-looking Line of Mentality it is a
+sure sign of a craving for drink and intemperance of all kinds, and at
+the point where it breaks through the Line of Life, it generally
+indicates death brought on by the intemperance this mark foreshadows.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE X.
+
+THE LINE OF LIFE, THE LINE OF MARS, AND OTHER SIGNS.]
+
+It is generally found on short, thick-set square hands or short hands,
+but when found on a long, thin, and narrow palm, it indicates great
+vitality and resistance to disease, a nervous, highly-strung, and rather
+irritable disposition.
+
+Any broken Life Line with this Line of Mars behind it may indicate great
+danger of death where the break appears, but a danger that will be
+overcome through the vitality indicated by this Inner Life Line or Line
+of Mars.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY OR FATE
+
+The Line of Destiny, otherwise called the Line of Fate (1-1, Plate XI.)
+is naturally one of the most important of the principal lines of the
+hand.
+
+Although one may never be able to explain why it is, this line
+undoubtedly appears to indicate at least the main events of one's career.
+
+It may be found on the hand even at the moment of birth, clearly
+indicating the class of Fate or Destiny that lies in the far distant
+future before the individual.
+
+In some cases it may look faint or shadowy, as if the path of Destiny
+were not yet clearly defined, while in other instances almost every step
+of the road is chiselled out with its milestones of failure or success,
+sorrow or joy, as the case may be.
+
+That some human beings seem to be more children of Fate than others has
+been admitted by almost all thinkers, but why they should be so has been
+the great question that baffles all students of such subjects.
+
+There are some who appear to have no Fate, and others who seem to carve
+their Destiny from day to day.
+
+I have seen hundreds of cases where every step of the journey was
+indicated from childhood to the grave; others where only the principal
+changes in the career were marked in advance. There are, again, others
+where nothing seemed decided, and where the events indicated by the Line
+of Fate appeared to change from year to year.
+
+The why and wherefore of such things may be impossible to fathom, but
+there are so many mysteries in Life itself that one more or less does not
+seem to matter.
+
+Some of the greatest teachers and philosophers have come to the
+conclusion that Fate exists for all. In the 17th Article of Religion in
+the Episcopal Church it is stated, and in no uncertain manner, that
+"Predestination to life is the everlasting purpose of God." All through
+the Bible the Destiny of nations and of men is clearly laid down, and
+from the first chapter of Genesis to the last page of Revelation the
+trials, tribulations, and pathway of the Jews was prophesied and
+predicted ages in advance.
+
+Thousands of years before the birth of Christ, it was foretold in Holy
+Writ in what manner He should be born, and in what manner He should die.
+It was predicted that a Virgin should conceive and that a Judas should
+betray, and that both were necessary "that the Scriptures might be
+fulfilled."
+
+In more recent ages thousands and thousands of predictions have been
+fulfilled, and all point to some mysterious agency that underlies the
+purpose of humanity, and that nothing from the smallest to the greatest
+is left to blind chance.
+
+It may be that the Soul--in being part of the Universal Soul of all
+things--_knows all things_, and so through the instrumentality of the
+brain writes its knowledge of the Future in advance.
+
+To the mysteries of the mind there are no limits. Medical science has, in
+late years, gone so far as to prove that there must be an advance growth
+or change in the brain cells years before action or change in character
+become the result of such development. For all we know, every deed in our
+careers is the result of some such mental change, and as there are more
+super-sensitive nerves from the brain to the hand, it may then follow
+that such changes and subsequent actions in our lives may be written in
+our hands even long years in advance.
+
+It may be, then, that to all living beings there is a Destiny "that
+shapes our ends, rough hew them as we will."
+
+I would, however, humbly suggest that each of us endeavour by knowledge
+to find what our Fate may be, and like loyal workmen accept whatever the
+task should prove, and so carry it out to the utmost of our ability,
+willing to leave the final result to the Master that thought fit to
+employ us in the working out of His design.
+
+All such questions as these the student of this subject must settle in
+his own mind, for when he or she once broaches this study of Fate, he
+will be assailed on all sides, and the student must be prepared to give
+"an answer for the faith that is in him."
+
+In studying the hand it will be found that the Line of Fate may rise from
+the following distinct positions:
+
+It may rise from and out of the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), straight
+up from the wrist (1-1, Plate XI.), from the Mount of the Moon (3-3,
+Plate XI.), or from the middle of the palm.
+
+The following is the meaning of these principal positions:
+
+
+RISING FROM THE LINE OF LIFE
+
+Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), the subject's success will
+be made by personal effort and merit; the early years of such a Fate will
+be cramped and difficult; circumstances and the early surroundings will
+not be favourable, and such people will be greatly hampered or sacrificed
+to the wishes and plans of their parents or relatives. If the Line of
+Fate, however, should run on clear and strong from where it leaves the
+Line of Life, then the subject will overcome all such difficulties and
+win success by his own personal effort and merit, and not depend on what
+is termed luck at any time in the career.
+
+Another striking and important point is that the date or years marked on
+the Line of Fate of such a breaking out into the palm, will be found to
+coincide with the year in the subject's life in which he asserted his
+independence or launched out into what he more particularly wanted to do.
+(_See_ also end of chapter on Time, page 112.)
+
+In any case this date as indicated will be found to be one of the most
+important in his career.[1]
+
+[1] For how to obtain dates and years _see_ Chapter XIX.
+
+
+RISING FROM THE WRIST
+
+When the Line of Fate rises from the Wrist (1-1, Plate XI.) and goes
+straight up the centre of the palm to the Mount of Saturn, provided at
+the same time the Line of Sun (4-4, Plate XI.) is found well marked,
+luck, brilliance, and success will attend the Destiny, and extreme good
+fortune may be anticipated.
+
+
+RISING FROM THE MOUNT OF THE MOON
+
+Rising from the Mount of the Moon (3-3, Plate XI.) the Fate will be more
+eventful, changeable, and largely depending on the fancy and caprice of
+other people.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XI.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.]
+
+If such a line be found joining the Line of Heart (1-1, Plate XII.), it
+foretells a happy and prosperous marriage, but one in which idealism,
+romance, and some fortunate circumstances play their role, and one which
+results more from the caprice or fancy of the person of the other sex.
+
+If the Line of Fate be itself straight but with a line running in and
+joining it from the Mount of the Moon (5-5, Plate XI.), it indicates that
+the influence of some outside person has helped the subject's Fate, and
+it is generally an indication of the influence of another sex to the one
+on whose hand it appears.
+
+When this line of influence from the Mount of the Moon does not, however,
+blend with the Fate Line (2-2, Plate XII.), it denotes that the other
+person's life will always remain distinct, and the influence will last
+only for the length of time that it runs by the side of the subject's
+Fate.
+
+When this influence line cuts the Line of Fate and, leaving it, travels
+on for some distance towards the Mount of Jupiter (3-3, Plate XII.) it
+tells that the person whose influence it denotes will only be attracted
+to the subject by personal ambition--that this person will use the
+subject for the furthering of his own aims and ambitions, and will desert
+the subject when she is of no further use. This is more commonly seen on
+the hand of a woman than on that of a man.
+
+If the Line of Fate ascending the hand sends an offshoot from it on or
+towards any of the Mounts, such as to Jupiter, the Sun, or Mercury, then
+the Destiny will be more largely associated with the quality that the
+Mount it approaches symbolises.
+
+For example: If such a line be seen approaching or going towards Jupiter
+(6-6, Plate XI.) it denotes responsibility, power of command over others,
+or some high position which will commence to be realised from the date
+when the offshoot leaves the Line of Fate. If such a mark continues its
+course and finishes on the Mount of Jupiter, it is one of the most
+magnificent signs of success that can be found for that particular aim or
+purpose.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XII.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS VARIATIONS.]
+
+If this offshoot ascends towards the Mount of the Sun (7-7, Plate XI.)
+the success will be in the direction of riches and public life, which
+will give great publicity or renown; this is also a magnificent sign of
+success.
+
+If the offshoot goes towards the Mount of Mercury (8-8, Plate XI.), the
+success it indicates will be more in the direction of some special
+achievement either in science or commerce.
+
+If the Line of Fate itself should not ascend towards its habitual
+position on the Mount of Saturn, but, instead, run up towards or on to
+any other Mount, then the whole effort of the life will be tinged with
+whatever quality that particular Mount signifies. Such an indication must
+not, however, be considered as the certain or sure sign of success as
+when the Line of Fate keeps to its own place and sends branches to some
+particular Mount.
+
+When the Line of Fate ascends the hand without branches and runs like a
+lonely path up and on to the Mount of Saturn, such a person will be like
+a child of Fate chained to an iron road of circumstances. It will be
+impossible for him to avert the trials of his Destiny or mitigate them in
+any way. He will receive no help from others, and little will ever happen
+except to bring him sorrow or tragedy. Such a mark of Fate through the
+hand must never be considered as "a good line of Destiny."
+
+To have a really good Line of Fate it should not be too heavily marked,
+but just clear and distinct, and, above all, be accompanied by a Line of
+Sun in some form or other.
+
+If a Line of Fate run over the Mount of Saturn and up into the base of
+the finger, it is an unfortunate sign, as everything the subject
+undertakes will get out of his control, and he will not apparently know
+how or when to stop in whatever he takes up.
+
+When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Heart, the
+career will always be ruined through or by the affections being badly
+placed.
+
+When, however, it joins the Line of Heart and they together ascend the
+Mount of Jupiter (1-1, Plate XII.), the subject will have happiness
+through his affections and will be helped by love and affection to attain
+his highest ambitions. He will also be extremely lucky through the
+friendship and love of those he meets, and will be greatly benefited and
+helped by others.
+
+When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Head (4-4,
+Plate XII.), it foretells that his career will be spoiled by the
+subject's own stupidity or mental foolishness.
+
+
+RISING FROM THE MIDDLE OF THE PALM
+
+When the Line of Fate only makes its appearance far up in the centre of
+the palm, in what is called the Plain of Mars, it indicates a hard early
+life and that the subject must always have a hard fight to gain his ends;
+but should the Line ascend clearly and strongly from the Plain of Mars
+and have a branch to or on towards the Mount of the Sun, such a person
+will be the architect of his own fortunes, and without help or assistance
+will win success and fortune by his own personal hard work and merit.
+
+When the Line of Fate rises from the Line of Head and when it is well
+marked, everything will come to the subject late in life and only then by
+his own brains.
+
+When the Line of Fate is seen with one branch on the Mount of Venus and
+the other on the Mount of the Moon (1-2, Plate XIII.) it indicates a
+career of romance and passion, by which the whole of the Destiny will be
+swayed.
+
+When the Line of Fate itself rises inside the Life Line on the Mount of
+Venus (2-2, Plate XIII.), passionate love will affect the whole career,
+and such persons, it will be found, usually place their affections on
+impossible people or on those who are in some way tied up by marriage or
+who otherwise are unable to gratify the love that the other person
+demands. This is a most unlucky sign for affection to find in the hands
+of a woman.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XIII.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.]
+
+When the Line of Fate is broken or made up in little bits, the career
+will be found full of troubles, breaks, and nothing that one gets will
+last long enough to bring any settled or continuous success.
+
+A break in the Fate Line is not always a bad sign to have, provided that
+one side begins before the other ends; in such a case it foretells a
+complete change in surroundings and position, and if the new line looks
+good and straight it will be found to mean that the change will bring
+about an advancement in position commencing at the date when the second
+line first makes its appearance.[2]
+
+[2] For dates on the Line of Fate _see_ Chapter XIX.
+
+
+INFLUENCE LINES
+
+When any small line joins the Fate Line or goes on with it as an
+attendant line, such a mark usually indicates marriage at the date when
+these lines join (3-3, Plate XIII.). If, on the contrary, these lines do
+not join, marriage with the person is not likely to occur although the
+affection and influence will be present in the career.
+
+When one of these influence lines appears by the side of the Fate Line
+and crosses through it towards or on to the Mount of Mars, it indicates
+that the influence thus shown will turn to hate and will injure the
+career of the person on whose hand it is found (1-1, Plate XIV.).
+
+
+DOUBLE LINES OF FATE
+
+When the Line of Fate is itself double (2-2, Plate XIV.), it is a sign of
+what is called "a double life," but if, after running side by side for
+some length these two lines join or become one, it foretells that "the
+double life" has been caused by some great affection, that circumstances
+prevented a union, but that the preventing cause will be removed at the
+point where these two lines join.
+
+When, however, a double Line of Fate is clearly marked, especially if
+they incline towards different mounts of the hand, such a mark indicates
+that two careers would be carried out simultaneously--one perhaps as a
+hobby and the other as the principal career.
+
+When the Line of Fate is extremely faint or just barely traced through
+the palm, it will be found to indicate a general disbelief in the idea of
+Fate and Destiny. It is often found on the hands of very materialistic
+persons, those who rebel against the idea that they are governed in any
+way by Fate or by any power save themselves.
+
+When this is found, and at the same time a good clear Line of Head, such
+people will be sure to win success by their mentality alone, but the
+details of their destiny will not be able to be told, and one must
+content oneself with chiefly describing their characteristics,
+peculiarities, etc.
+
+When no Line of Fate whatever is found and only a very ordinary Line of
+Head, then there will be nothing very particular to say about the
+Destiny; such people, as a rule, lead very colourless lives, nothing
+seems to affect them much one way or the other, and they will be found to
+have very little purpose to illumine the drab monotony of their
+existence.
+
+An island (3, Plate XIV.) is an extremely bad sign to find in the Line of
+Fate.
+
+When found at the very beginning of the line (4, Plate XIV.) it
+indicates some mystery regarding the commencement of such careers, such
+as illegitimate birth.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XIV.
+
+THE LINE OF DESTINY, ISLANDS, AND OTHER SIGNS.]
+
+An island, when found on a woman's hand connecting the Fate Line with the
+Mount of Venus, is an almost certain indication of her seduction (5,
+Plate XIV.).
+
+An island in any part of the Plain of Mars indicates a period of great
+difficulty, loss in one's career, and in consequence, generally loss of
+money (3, Plate XIV.).
+
+An Island on the Fate and Head Lines together means loss also, but more
+brought on by the person's own stupidity or lack of intelligence (6,
+Plate XIV.).
+
+An island over the Fate and Heart Lines indicates loss and trouble
+connected with affairs of the heart or brought about by the affections.
+
+An island on the Mount of Saturn or towards the end of the Line of Fate
+(5, Plate XIV.) foreshadows that the career will finish in poverty and
+despair.[3]
+
+[3] For more details concerning the meaning of "islands" in general,
+_see_ Chapter XV.
+
+When the Line of Fate finishes suddenly with a cross, some great fatality
+may be expected, but when the cross is found on the Fate Line and on the
+Mount of Saturn, the ending of such a Destiny will be some terrible
+tragedy, generally one of public disgrace and public death.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+
+THE LINE OF THE SUN
+
+The Line of the Sun, which is otherwise called the Line of Success or the
+Line of Brilliancy (1-1, Plate XV.), is one of the most important marks
+on the hand to consider.
+
+It has in its symbolism almost the same significance as the Sun itself
+has to the Earth.
+
+Without this line the life has no happiness, no sunshine, as it were, and
+even the greatest talents lie in darkness and do not produce their fruit.
+
+Amateurs, in looking at hands, often make the greatest mistakes in seeing
+what appears to be "a good Line of Fate," and in consequence rush off and
+predict great success and fortune, whereas, as I explained in the
+preceding chapter, a Fate Line unaccompanied by the Line of Sun may
+simply mean a fatalistic life full of sorrow and darkness.
+
+The quality that the Line of Sun denotes is, what is generally called
+"luck"; with a well-marked Sun Line even a poor Line of Head promises
+more success, and it is the same with the Line of Fate.
+
+People with the Sun Line appear to have more magnetism, more influence
+over others. They more easily secure recognition, reward, riches, and
+honours.
+
+They also have a happier and brighter disposition, and this has
+naturally a great deal to do with what is called success.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XV.
+
+THE LINE OF SUN AND ITS MODIFICATIONS.]
+
+From whatever date in the hand the Line of Sun appears, things become
+brighter, more prosperous and important. The Line of the Sun may rise
+from the following positions:
+
+From the Line of Life, the Line of Fate, the Plain of Mars, the Mount of
+the Moon, the Line of Head, and from the Line of Heart, or it may only
+appear as a small line on its own Mount.
+
+Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XV.), it promises success from
+whatever the life is that is led, but not from "luck."
+
+From the Line of Fate (3-3, Plate XV.), it is a sure sign of recognition
+for the career adopted, but brought about by the personal effort of the
+subject.
+
+From the Plain of Mars, and not connected with the other lines, it
+foretells success after difficulties.
+
+From the Mount of the Moon (4-4, Plate XV.), success is more a matter due
+to the caprice of others. It is more changeable and uncertain and is by
+no means such a sure sign of riches or solid position. It is more the
+sign of success as a public favourite, and is often found in the hands of
+those who depend on the public for their livelihood, such as actors and
+actresses, singers, and certain classes of artists, speakers, clergymen,
+etc. For all such professions it is, however, fortunate, and an extremely
+lucky sign to have, as it promises in all cases luck, brilliancy, and
+recognition in the world.
+
+Rising from the Line of Head, the Sun Line gives success from the mental
+efforts and qualities, but not until after the middle of life is past. It
+is found on the hands of brain workers, students of some particular
+branch of study, writers, scientists, etc.
+
+From the Line of Heart, success will come late in life in some way
+depending on, or through, the affections. In such cases it generally
+promises a very happy marriage late in life, but it is always a certain
+sign of eventual ease, happiness, and worldly comfort.
+
+Marked only on its own Mount, the Line of Sun promises happiness and
+success, but so late in life as to make it hardly worth having.
+
+When the third finger--called the finger of the Sun--is much longer than
+the first with the Line of Sun well marked, the gambling instincts will
+be much in evidence. Nearly all successful gamblers for money have these
+two indications.
+
+When, however, the third finger is equal to the second, the love of
+amassing wealth will be the dominant passion of the life.
+
+When the third finger is extremely long and twisted or crooked, the
+person will endeavour to obtain money at any cost. This malformation is
+much seen in the hands of thieves or criminals who are likely to commit
+any crime for the sake of money. Note--if the Line of Head is very high
+on the palm, and more especially if it rises upwards at the end (3-3,
+Plate III.), these evil qualities will be still more accentuated.
+
+When a hand is found to be artistic in its shape, with pointed fingers or
+long and narrow, the Line of Sun on such a formation promises rather
+success and brilliancy in Art, on the Stage, or in Public Singing, than
+in anything else.
+
+The real musician's hand, such as the composer's or player's, is however
+rarely a long, thin-shaped hand, because such persons must have a more
+scientific nature. This quality is not found with those who possess the
+long, slender, very artistic-shaped hand, who depend more on their
+emotional temperament than on scientific study for their foundation.
+
+On extremely long, thin hands, those that belong to what is called the
+Psychic Type,[4] the Line of Sun has very little meaning except that of
+temperament, such persons being too idealistic to care for either wealth,
+position, or worldly success. They have as a rule, simply bright, happy,
+sunny dispositions if this line is marked on their hands, and they go
+through life as in a dream, and their dreams are to them the only things
+that matter.
+
+[4] _See_ Types of Hands, Part II., page 123.
+
+A curious characteristic, however, and one that has not been noticed by
+other writers on this subject, is, that on all hands where the Sun Line
+is seen, the nature of such people is much more sensitive to environment
+than that of those persons who do not possess this Line. For this reason
+the Line has been considered a sign of the artistic nature. But what is
+known as the "artistic nature" may show itself only in the love of
+beautiful things, harmony of surroundings, and such like; whereas the
+people who do not possess any mark of the Sun Line, seldom even notice
+their surroundings and would live equally happy in the most squalid
+homes. They would not trouble whether their curtains were black, green,
+yellow, or some fearful conglomeration of all three.
+
+When many lines are found on the Mount of the Sun, they show also the
+artistic nature, but one where the multiplicity of aims and ideas will
+prevent any real success.
+
+Two or three Sun Lines, when running parallel and evenly together, are
+good and indicate success in two or three different lines of work; but
+one good, straight, clear line is the best sign to have.
+
+An "island" on any part of the Line of the Sun destroys the position and
+success promised, but only during the period where the island appears (5,
+Plate XV.). In nearly all cases it denotes public scandal, and when very
+clearly marked a _cause celebre_ or something of that sort.
+
+All opposition lines, viz., those that cross over from the thumb side of
+the hand, and especially those from the Mount of Mars or from its
+direction, are bad (6-6 Plate XV.). If these opposition lines pass
+through, cut, or interfere with the Line of Sun in any way, they denote
+the jealousy or interference of people against one.
+
+Curiously enough, these opposition lines from the Mount of Mars relate to
+the interference of members of the same sex as the subject; while, if
+they come from the Mount of Venus, they relate to the opposite sex of the
+individual on whose hand they appear (7-7, Plate XV.).
+
+A "star" found on the Line of Sun is one of the luckiest and most
+fortunate signs to have.
+
+A "square" is a sign of preservation against the attacks of enemies or
+efforts to assail one's position.
+
+A "cross" is an unfortunate sign, and denotes difficulties and annoyance,
+but only relating to one's name or position.
+
+On a "hollow hand," the Line of Sun loses all power, and its good
+promises are never fulfilled.
+
+The complete absence of the Line of Sun on an otherwise well-marked hand,
+indicates that no matter how clever or talented these people may be, the
+recognition of the world will be difficult or even impossible to gain. In
+other words, their life will remain in darkness; people will not see
+their work and the "Sun of Success" will never dawn on their pathway of
+labour.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEART AS INDICATING THE AFFECTIONATE AND EMOTIONAL NATURE
+
+The Line of Heart is that Line which runs across the hand under the
+fingers and generally rises under the base of the first, and runs off the
+side of the hand under the base of the fourth or little finger (1-1,
+Plate XVI.).
+
+The Line of Heart relates purely to the affectionate disposition, in
+fact, to the mental side of the love nature of the subject. It should be
+borne in mind that, by lying as it does on that part of the hand above
+the Line of Head, it is consequently on the portion of the hand that
+relates to mental characteristics and not to the physical.
+
+The Line of Heart should be deep, clear, and well coloured. It may arise
+from the extreme outside of the Mount of Jupiter (2, Plate XVI.), from
+the centre of this Mount, from the space between the first and second
+fingers (3, Plate XVI.), from the face of the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate
+XVI.), or from directly under this Mount (5, Plate XVI.).
+
+From the outside of the Mount of Jupiter, it denotes the blind enthusiast
+in affection, a man or woman who places his or her ideal of love so high
+that neither fault nor failing is seen in the being worshipped. With
+these people their pride in the object of their affection is beyond all
+reason, and all such extremists as a rule suffer terribly through their
+affections.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XVI.
+
+THE LINE OF HEART AND ITS VARIATIONS.]
+
+From the centre of the Mount of Jupiter, the Heart Line gives more
+moderation, but also great ideality, and is one of the best of the
+variations of this Line that we are about to consider.
+
+People with such a Heart Line are firm and reliable in their affections,
+they have an unusually high code of honour and morality. They are
+ambitious that the person they live with be great, noble, and successful.
+They seldom marry beneath their station in life, and they have fewer love
+affairs than any other class.
+
+If they once really love, they love for ever. They do not believe in
+second marriages, and the divorce courts are seldom troubled with their
+presence.
+
+The Heart Line rising from between the first and second fingers, gives a
+calmer but a very deep nature in all matters of the affections (3, Plate
+XVI.).
+
+These people seem to strike the happy medium between the ideality and
+pride given by Jupiter, and the more selfish love nature given when the
+line rises from Saturn.
+
+They are not very demonstrative when in love, but they are capable of the
+very greatest sacrifices for those they care for. They do not expect the
+person on whom they bestow their affection to be a god or a goddess.
+
+When the Line of Heart rises on the Mount of Saturn the subject will be
+rather selfish in all questions of affection (4, Plate XVI.). These
+people are not self-sacrificing, like the previous type. They are
+inclined to be cynical, reserved, undemonstrative but very insistent in
+trying to gain the person they want. They will let nothing stand in their
+way, but once they have obtained their object they show little tenderness
+or devotion.
+
+They are very unforgiving if they discover any lapses on the part of
+their partner, but as they are "a law unto themselves," they close their
+eyes to their own shortcomings.
+
+The Line of Heart that rises from under the base of the Mount of Saturn
+(5, Plate XVI.), exhibits all the foregoing characteristics, but in a
+much more intensified form. Such persons live for themselves, and care
+little whether those around them are happy or not.
+
+The shorter the Line of Heart is on the Hand, the less the higher
+sentiments of the affection make themselves manifest.
+
+When the Line of Heart is found in excess, namely, extremely long--it
+denotes a terrible tendency toward jealousy (2, Plate XVI.), and this is
+alarmingly increased if the Line of Head on the same hand is very sloping
+towards the Mount of the Moon (6, Plate XVI.). In such a case the
+imagination will run away with itself where jealousy is concerned.
+
+When the Line of Heart is found curving downward at the base of the Mount
+of Jupiter (7, Plate XVI.), it tells of a strange fatality in that
+person, of meeting with great disappointment in love, and even with those
+they trust in friendship. He seems to lack perception, in knowing whom to
+love. His affections are nearly always misplaced or never returned.
+
+These people have, however, as a rule, wonderfully kind, affectionate
+dispositions. They have little pride about whom they love and they
+generally marry beneath their station in life.
+
+A Line of Heart made up like a chain, or by a crowd of little lines
+running into it, denotes flirtations and inconstancy in the love nature,
+and seldom has any lasting affection.
+
+A Line of Heart from Saturn in holes or links like a chain, especially
+when it is broad, denotes an absolute contempt for the subject's opposite
+sex. It is one of the signs of mental degeneration as far as love is
+concerned.
+
+When this Line is pale and broad, without any depth, it denotes a nature
+_blase_ and indifferent with no depth of affection.
+
+When very low down on the hand, almost touching the Line of Head, the
+heart will always interfere with the affairs of the head.
+
+When it lies very high on the hand and the space is narrowed only by the
+Head Line being abnormally high and out of its place, it indicates the
+reverse of the above, and that the affairs of the heart are ruled by the
+head. Such persons are extremely calculating in all matters of love.
+
+When only one deep, straight line is found across the hand from side to
+side, the two lines both Head and Heart appear to blend together. This
+denotes an intensely self-concentrated nature. If such a subject loves,
+he unites with it all the forces of his mind, and if he put his mind on
+any subject, he throws his whole heart and soul into whatever it may be
+(Plate VI.).
+
+These people are also terribly head-strong and self-willed in all they
+do. They do not seem to know what fear means in any sense--they are
+dangerous lovers and husbands to trifle with, for they will stop at
+nothing if their blood is once roused.
+
+They are also dangerous to themselves. They rush blindly into danger, and
+they usually meet with terrible accidents and injuries, and very often
+suffer a violent death (_see_ also page 29).
+
+When the Line of Heart commences with a fork, one branch on Jupiter and
+the other between the first and second fingers, it is an excellent sign
+of a well-balanced, happy, affectionate disposition, and a good promise
+of great happiness in all matters of affection.
+
+When the Line of Heart is very thin and with no branches, it denotes
+coldness and want of heart.
+
+When there is no Line of Heart whatever, it is a sign of a cold-blooded,
+unemotional nature. Such people can, however, be brutally sensual and
+especially so if the Mount of Venus is high (_see_ Mounts, page 140).
+
+A broken Heart Line is a certain sign that some terrible tragedy in the
+affections will at some time or other overwhelm the subject.
+
+It may not often be found nowadays, but I have seen it in some few cases,
+and these persons never recovered the loss of the loved one or ever had
+love in their lives again.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+
+SIGNS RELATING TO MARRIAGE
+
+What is called the Line of Marriage is that mark or marks, as the case
+may be, found on the side of the Mount under the fourth finger (1, Plate
+XVII.).
+
+I will first proceed to give all the details possible about these lines,
+and then call my reader's attention to the other marks on the hand that
+qualify these Lines of Marriage, and further add a wealth of information
+regarding them.
+
+The Line, or Lines, of Marriage may be found as very short marks almost
+on the very side of the hand, or they may appear as quite long lines
+rising from the side of the hand into the face of the Mount of Mercury,
+or, in some cases, going farther still into the hand itself.
+
+Only the clearly formed lines relate to marriage, the short ones to deep
+affection, or marriage contemplated, but never entered into (2, Plate
+XVII.).
+
+When the deep line is found lying close to the line of Heart, the
+marriage will take place early in life, but the other marks I am going to
+explain later will give more accurate dates as to when the event will
+occur.
+
+For a happy marriage the lines on the Mount of Mercury should be
+straight and clear, without breaks or irregularities of any kind (1,
+Plate XVII.).
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XVII.
+
+MARRIAGE LINES. THE LINE OF MARRIAGE.]
+
+When the Line of Marriage curves or droops downwards (3, Plate XVII.),
+the person on whose hand this appears will outlive the other.
+
+When the line turns upward in the reverse direction, the possessor is not
+likely ever to marry (4, Plate XVII.).
+
+When the line is clear and distinct, but has a lot of little lines
+dropping from it, it foreshadows trouble and anxiety in the marriage, but
+brought on by the delicacy and ill-health of the partner (5, Plate
+XVII.).
+
+When the line has a curve at the end, and if a cross or line be found
+cutting into this curve (2, Plate XVIII.), the partner will die by
+accident or a sudden illness of some kind. But when the Marriage Line
+ends in a long, gradual curve into the Heart Line, the death of the
+partner will come about by gradual ill-health or illness of a very long
+duration.
+
+When the line has an "island" at the beginning, then the marriage will be
+for a long time delayed, and the two persons will be much separated at
+the commencement of their married life.
+
+When the "island" is found about the middle of the Marriage Line, some
+great trouble and separation will take place about the middle of the
+married life (3, Plate XVIII.).
+
+When the "island" is found towards the end of the line, the marriage will
+most probably end in trouble and separation one from the other.
+
+When the Line of Marriage divides into the form of a fork (4, Plate
+XVIII.), the two people will live apart from one another, but when the
+fork turns downwards towards the Line of Heart a legal separation may be
+anticipated (5, Plate XVIII.).
+
+When this fork is more accentuated, and turns down more into the hand,
+divorce may be expected, and especially so if one end of this fork
+stretches across the hand in the direction of the Plain of Mars, or the
+Mount of Mars (5, Plate XVIII.).
+
+In many cases a fine line may be found crossing the entire palm, from the
+Marriage Line, and in such a case the greatest animosity and bitterness
+will enter into the fight for freedom and divorce. In such an example
+there is never any hope of reconciliation.
+
+When the Line of Marriage is full of little islands, or linked like the
+loops of a chain, the subject should be warned not to marry at any time,
+as such a union would be full of the greatest unhappiness and continual
+separations.
+
+When the line, which is otherwise well marked, appears about the centre
+to break in two, it foreshadows a fatality or break-up in an otherwise
+happy married life.
+
+When the Line of Marriage itself, or an offshoot from it, goes into the
+hand, and joins or ascends upward with the Line of Sun, it promises that
+its possessor will marry some one of great wealth or distinction (6,
+Plate XVIII.).
+
+When this above-mentioned line bends downward and cuts the Line of Sun,
+it denotes that the person on whose hand it is found will lose his
+position by the marriage he will make.
+
+When any line from the top of the Mount of Mercury falls down into the
+Marriage Line, it shows that there will be great obstacles to overcome in
+whatever marriage the subject enters, but if the Line of Marriage is a
+good one, then such obstacles will be overcome.
+
+When there is another line much slighter in appearance lying close to the
+upper side of the Marriage Line, it foretells some influence that will
+come into the subject's life after marriage.
+
+All lines that cross the hand from the Mount of Mars (6, Plate XVII.),
+and rise up towards the Line of Marriage denote the interference of
+people with the marriage. These lines give the date of the interference
+when they cross the Line of Destiny; they cause quarrels when they come
+from Mars; from Venus they also denote annoyances, but not of such a
+vindictive nature (7, Plate XVII.).
+
+
+INFLUENCE LINES TO THE FATE LINE ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS, AND OTHER SIGNS
+WHICH ALSO HAVE A MEANING IN CONNECTION WITH MARRIAGE
+
+The student may also get very great help in ascertaining details about
+the likely marriage of the person whose hands he is examining by the
+following:
+
+Fine Influence Lines seen joining the Line of Fate (7, Plate XVIII.),
+relate to persons who come into and affect the Destiny.
+
+If the Line of Influence is very strong where it joins the Fate Line, and
+if at about the same date a clear Marriage Line is seen on the Mount of
+Mercury, the date of marriage may be more accurately predicted by the
+place on the Fate Line where the Influence Line joins it.
+
+A great wealth of detail may also be made out from observing these
+Influence Lines to the Destiny:
+
+Coming over from the Mount of the Moon, there is always something
+romantic about the union. The person on whose hand this Line appears will
+as a rule meet his affinity when travelling or away from his home.
+
+If the Influence Line has an "island" marked on it, the influence will
+then be a bad one, or, at least, the person will have had some scandal
+connected with his or her past life (8, Plate XVIII.). If the Line of
+Fate looks weaker or more uncertain after the union is marked, then such
+a marriage has not brought good or success to the subject. If, on the
+contrary, the Line of Fate looks better or stronger after the Influence
+Line has joined it, then this union will prove of advantage to the person
+whose hand is being examined.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XVIII.
+
+MARRIAGE LINES AND INFLUENCE LINES WHICH FURTHER HELP IN DENOTING
+MARRIAGE.]
+
+This increase of wealth or power is still more accentuated if at the same
+time it is observed that a Sun Line has made its appearance.
+
+If the Influence Line should cut through the Fate Line, and appear on the
+thumb side of it, the affection will seldom last as long, or be so happy
+(7, Plate XVIII.). If a still wider separation of the Influence Line and
+the Fate Line appear as these two lines ascend the hand together, the
+separation of interests and destiny of the two persons will be still more
+marked as the years proceed.
+
+If an Influence Line approaches close to the Line of Fate, and runs
+parallel with it for some time but does not join it, some great obstacle
+will prevent a marriage ever taking place (_see_ also page 57).
+
+If an Influence Line terminates in an "island," the influence itself will
+itself get into trouble, generally disgrace of some character (10, Plate
+XVIII.).[5]
+
+[5] For further particulars refer back to chapter on the Line of Destiny,
+where these Influence Lines are also referred to (page 57).
+
+
+INFLUENCE LINES ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS
+
+These are fine lines that run parallel with the Line of Life (11-11,
+Plate XVIII.), but they must not be confounded with the Line of Mars, or
+"Sister Life Line," which commences higher up nearer the Mount of Mars.
+
+These Venus Influence Lines are more often found with those persons who
+have what is called the "Venus temperament," or who are intensely
+emotional and passionate.
+
+When many of such lines are seen, the subject cannot live without love,
+and will have many "affairs" at the same time.
+
+As such an Influence Line runs parallel with the Life Line, or turns away
+from it, so it can be judged how long such an influence will last, and
+with fair accuracy the date when it will occur (for dates _see_ page
+113).
+
+These Influence Lines, however, never have the same importance or meaning
+as those previously ascribed to the Line of Fate.
+
+In my large work on this subject, Cheiro's _Language of the Hand_, I have
+been able to go into still greater detail with regard to all these
+Influence Lines.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+
+LINES DENOTING CHILDREN, THEIR SEX, AND OTHER MATTERS CONCERNING THEM
+
+The Lines relating to children are those finely marked upright lines
+found immediately above the Line of Marriage (12, Plate XVIII.). A very
+good plan, in trying to see these Lines, is to press this portion of the
+hand with the tips of the fingers, and then note which of these small
+lines stand out the most clearly.
+
+Sometimes they are extremely deeply marked, and as a rule much more so on
+a woman's hand than on a man's. In many cases it is necessary to employ a
+magnifying glass in order to see them.
+
+Broad and deep lines denote male children, fine and narrow lines,
+females.
+
+When they appear as straight lines they denote strong healthy children,
+but when very faint or crooked, the children indicated are always
+delicate.
+
+When the first part of the little line (taking it upward from the Line of
+Marriage) is marked with a small "island," such a child will be very
+delicate in its early life, but if the line appears well marked when the
+"island" is passed, the probability is that it will grow up strong and
+healthy. When ending or broken at the "island" the child will never grow
+up.
+
+When one line stands out very clear and distinct among the others, the
+child the mark indicates will be more to the parent, and will be more
+successful than any of the others.
+
+To know the number of children anyone will have, it is necessary to count
+these lines from the outside of the hand in towards the palm.
+
+A person with the Mount of Venus very flat on the hand, and very poorly
+developed, is not likely to have any children at all, and this is all the
+more certain if the first Bracelet is found rising up like an arch into
+or towards the palm (_see_ page 91).
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+
+THE LINE OF HEALTH OR THE HEPATICA
+
+There has been very considerable discussion among students of this
+subject as to the part of the hand on which the Line of Health (1-1,
+Plate XIX.) commences.
+
+My own theory, and one that I have proved by over twenty-five years'
+experience and also watching its growth on the hands of children, is,
+that it rises at the base of or on the face of the Mount of Mercury, and
+as it grows across the hand and attacks the Line of Life, it foreshadows
+the development of illness or germ of disease, which, at the date of its
+coming in contact with the Line of Life, will reach the climax of its
+attack.
+
+The Line of Life, it must be remembered, merely relates to the promised
+length of life from heredity and natural causes, but the Line of Health
+denotes the effect of the class of life the subject has led. Where these
+two lines come together, if one is of equal strength to the other, will
+be the date of death, even though the Line of Life should pass this point
+and appear to be a much greater length (2, Plate XIX.).
+
+The Line of Mercury, or of Health, relating as it does to the nervous
+system, and also to the mind (Mercury), lends itself to the supposition
+that the all-knowing subconscious brain is cognisant, even at an early
+age, of the force of resistance in the nervous system. It may know how
+long this force will last, when it will be exhausted, and consequently
+may mark the hand long years in advance.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XIX.
+
+THE LINE OF HEALTH.]
+
+The Line of Health is one of the lines of the hand most subject to
+changes. It is the thermometer of the life showing its "rise and fall" as
+the case may be. I have seen this mysterious line look deep and
+threatening during the early years of a life, and completely fade away
+as greater health and strength took possession of the body.
+
+Again, I have often seen it look deeper and more ominous as the wear and
+tear, especially of the nervous system, began to make itself manifest, or
+when the subject over-taxed his mental strength.
+
+Further, it is an excellent sign to be without this line altogether. Its
+absence denotes an extremely robust, strong constitution, and a healthy
+state of the nervous system.
+
+If a hand has the Line of Health, the best position for it is to lie
+straight down the hand, and not approach or touch the Line of Life (3-3,
+Plate XIX.). When found crossing the hand, and touching or throwing
+branches across to the Line of Life, it foretells that there is some
+illness at work which is undermining the health.
+
+If it rises and seems like a branch from the Heart Line, especially if
+both these lines are broad in appearance and with the Health Line running
+down the palm coming in contact with the Line of Life, it is a certain
+indication of weakness or disease of the heart.
+
+The student should always observe the kind of nails there are on the hand
+when thinking out the diseases indicated by the Line of Health.[6]
+
+[6] _See_ Chapter on Nails, page 136.
+
+When the finger nails are short, without moons, and round, and the Line
+of Health is strongly marked, he may be sure that nervous weak action of
+the heart is decidedly threatened.
+
+When the nails are long and almond-shaped, there is danger of weakness
+and delicacy of the lungs. With the same shape of nails, and with islands
+in the upper part of the Health Line (4, Plate XIX.), consumption of the
+lungs and tuberculosis will make itself manifest.
+
+When the nails are very flat, and especially shell-shaped (_see_ Plate
+V., Part II.), and the Line of Health is deeply marked, paralysis and the
+worst forms of nerve diseases are threatening the subject.
+
+When this line is very red in small spots, especially when pressed,
+rheumatic fever is indicated.
+
+When twisted, irregular, and yellowish in colour, the subject will suffer
+from biliousness and liver complaints.
+
+When found heavily marked, and only joining the Heart and Head Lines
+together, it foreshadows brain-fever, especially when any islands are
+marked on the Line of Head.
+
+The Line of Health, running straight down the hand but not touching the
+Line of Life, indicates that though the constitution may not be robust,
+it is wiry, and there is great reserve resistance to disease.
+
+In connection with the examination of the Line of Health, the student
+must always look for other indications to the rest of the lines of the
+hand, more especially to the Line of Life and Line of Head. For instance,
+when the Line of Life looks very chained and weak, the Health Line on a
+hand will naturally increase the danger of delicate health; and when
+found with a Line of Head full of little islands, or like a chain, such a
+Health Line more clearly foreshadows brain disease, severe headaches,
+etc.
+
+By a study of this line the most valuable warnings may be given of
+approaching ill-health. Whether persons will follow the warnings or not
+is a question. My experience is that they do not and will not, and
+therefore, whatever is indicated will most probably come to pass.
+
+Providence places many signposts and warnings in our paths, but human
+nature is either too blind or too self-confident to notice them until it
+is too late.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+
+THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, AND THE BRACELETS
+
+These marks are classed among the minor lines of the hands, but they
+often have a significance that is of the greatest importance.
+
+The Girdle of Venus is that broken or sometimes unbroken kind of
+semi-circular line that is found rising from the base of the first finger
+to the base of the fourth (1-1, Plate XX.).
+
+I have not in my experience found this mark to indicate the gross
+sensuality that is so often ascribed to it by other writers. It should be
+remembered that the hand is divided by the Line of Head, as it were,
+_into two hemispheres, the lower and the upper_.
+
+The lower relates to the physical or more animal side of the nature, and
+the upper to the intellectual. Following this arrangement, it is only
+reasonable to assume that this mark under consideration, viz., the Girdle
+of Venus, relates more to the mental side of the symbolism of the Venus
+nature.
+
+I have found that persons with this sign are more mentally sensual than
+physically so. They love to read or write books on the subject of the
+"sex problem," but they are not inclined to put their theories and ideas
+into practice, at least with their own lives.
+
+The qualities, however, that this mark represents are much more active
+and dangerous when this Girdle forms itself from the Mount of Saturn to
+that of Mercury. The imaginings of such people are then morbid and
+unhealthy.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XX.
+
+THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, THE THREE BRACELETS, THE LINE OF
+INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA.]
+
+To those who study Astrology, the inference that I draw from the
+connection of these two parts of the hand will become clear and
+reasonable.
+
+When broken or made up of little pieces, the Girdle of Venus has little
+meaning except to show a hysterical temperament, with a leaning towards
+the tendencies I have mentioned above.
+
+These persons in all cases suffer enormously from moods, they are very
+difficult to live with, and when the Girdle of Venus runs off the side of
+the hand and passes out through the Marriage Lines, their moody,
+changeable natures generally make marriage for them an unusually unhappy
+experience.
+
+
+THE RING OF SATURN
+
+What is called the Ring of Saturn (2, Plate XX.) is very seldom found,
+and it is by no means a good sign to have. It is also a semi-circular
+line, but found lying across the Mount of Saturn.
+
+In all my experience I have never been able to come across any person
+with this mark who succeeded in life or was able to carry any one of his
+plans to a successful termination.
+
+These people seem cut off from their fellow beings in some peculiar and
+extraordinary way. They are isolated and alone, and they appear to
+realise their lonely position keenly. They are gloomy, morbid, and
+Saturnine in character. They seldom marry, and when they do it is always
+a ghastly failure.
+
+They are terribly obstinate and headstrong in all their actions, they
+resent the least advice or interference in their plans. Their lives
+generally close in suffering, poverty, or by some sinister tragedy or
+fatality.
+
+It is the most unfortunate mark ever to find.
+
+
+THE BRACELETS
+
+The Bracelets (3-3, Plate XX.) are of very little importance except to
+throw light on certain points of health. There are supposed to be three
+of these lines or bracelets at the wrist, which were called by the Greeks
+the Bracelets of Health, Wealth, and Happiness.
+
+It is certainly very seldom that they can be found together, for
+experience in life does not give much hope that these three
+much-sought-after possessions can ever be found together on this side of
+the grave.
+
+Delving back into the ancient legends of Greece, we find one very
+significant point in reference to the first bracelet, the one nearest the
+palm, which represents Health.
+
+It appears that at one period of the ancient Greek civilisation all women
+had to come to the priest at their Temple to have their hands examined
+before they were allowed to marry. If the priest found this first
+Bracelet out of its place and rising up into the hand in the shape of an
+arch (4, Plate XX.), he would not allow the woman possessing this sign to
+be married under any circumstance, the idea being that it represented
+some internal malformation that would prevent her bringing children into
+the world. In such cases these women were made Vestal Virgins in the
+temples. Perhaps the old Greek Priest was right in his idea, for if this
+first Bracelet is found rising into the hand in the form of an arch, both
+men and women possessing it are delicate internally, and especially so in
+matters relating to sex.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+
+THE LINE OF INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA
+
+The Line of Intuition (5, Plate XX.) is seldom found on other types of
+hand than those of the Philosophic, the Conic, and the Psychic, but it is
+sometimes found on the Spatulate.
+
+It takes more or less the formation of a semi-circle from the face of the
+Mount of Mercury to that of the Mount of the Moon, or may be found on the
+Mount of the Moon alone. It must not be confounded with the Hepatica, or
+Line of Health, but is found as a distinct mark in itself.
+
+It denotes an extra highly-strung sensitive temperament, also
+presentiments, inspiration, clairvoyance of the highest kind, clear vivid
+dreams which often come to pass, intuition as to how things should be
+done, and very often manifests itself in inspired speaking and writing of
+the loftiest character.
+
+It is much more often found on women's hands than on men's, although many
+cases have come under my notice of its being unusually clearly marked on
+some men's hands. In each case the possessor of it had most remarkable
+powers and unusual faculties, as well as the gift of intuition, even
+concerning purely mundane subjects that in an ordinary state they knew
+nothing whatever about.
+
+I use the words "ordinary state" advisably here, because such people are
+not always in the condition of mind when these strange faculties may be
+employed. Several of these men were absolutely uneducated, and yet at
+times, when thrown into an inspired state, they were able to explain the
+most intricate problems with the greatest accuracy. If asked, however,
+from where they obtained their knowledge, they were only able to reply
+that "it came to them" when in certain moods.
+
+One man I knew well had such remarkable dreams of coming events that he
+was able to warn many people weeks and months in advance of dangers that
+lay before them, and his warnings in many cases saved life.
+
+With all people who were gifted in this way I have noticed that they
+completely lost their strange powers the moment they indulged in alcohol
+of any kind.
+
+
+THE VIA LASCIVA
+
+This is a strange mark (6, Plate XX.) which takes the form also somewhat
+of a semi-circle, but in this case it connects the Mount of the Moon with
+that of Venus, or it may simply run off the hand from the lower part of
+the Mount of Luna into the wrist.
+
+The first-mentioned formation indicates unbridled sensuality and passion,
+and where it cuts through the Line of Life it indicates death, but one
+usually brought about in connection with the licentiousness that it
+denotes.
+
+This Line running from the Mount of the Moon into the wrist denotes the
+most sensual dreams, desires, and imaginings, but, unlike the other
+class, it is usually only dangerous to the person on whose hand it is
+found.
+
+In both cases there is generally a tendency towards the taking of drugs
+such as opium, morphine, especially when the hand is noted to be soft,
+full, and flabby. With a firm hard palm the subject usually indulges in
+excessive drinking fits, and when under drink seems to have no control
+whatever.
+
+If the Line of Head is found weak-looking, full of islands and descending
+downwards on the Mount of the Moon, insanity or the worst form of
+degeneracy will sooner or later destroy the whole character and career.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+
+"LA CROIX MYSTIQUE", THE RING OF SOLOMON
+
+What is called "La Croix Mystique" is found in the quadrangle of the hand
+between the Lines of Heart and Head (7, Plate XX.).
+
+It is more usually found in the centre of this part of the hand, but it
+may be also found nearer the one side of the quadrangle or the other.
+
+This mark denotes a natural gift or talent for mysticism and occultism of
+all kinds.
+
+When placed nearer Jupiter, it denotes the employment of these studies
+more to gratify the subject's own pride or ambition than the following
+out of such things for their own sake.
+
+When it is in the centre of the quadrangle, across the Line of Fate, or
+immediately under the Mount of Saturn, such studies become more of a
+religion or are followed for their own worth and the influence and truth
+of occultism will play a leading role in the whole career. Most likely
+the possessor of this mark will follow it as a profession, or will
+crystallise his researches into the form of books.
+
+When this mark lies lower down in the quadrangle, nearer to the Mount of
+the Moon, the subject will study some form of occultism more from a
+superstitious standpoint than any other. None the less, he will be likely
+to succeed in doing so, and influence other people through his studies,
+and with this latter form he will be more likely to write beautiful
+mystic poetry with the prophetic note running through it very strongly.
+
+
+THE RING OF SOLOMON
+
+The Ring of Solomon is also one of these strange marks of mysticism and
+occultism, but in this latter case, owing probably to the qualities
+signified by the Mount of Jupiter, its possessor will aim at having the
+power of a master or an adept in such subjects (8, Plate XX.).
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+
+TRAVELS, VOYAGES AND ACCIDENTS
+
+Travels and voyages may be seen on the hand by the little lines that
+leave the Line of Life and bend over towards the Mount of the Moon and
+also by the lines found on this Mount (2, Plate XXI.).
+
+When these fine lines of travel are seen on the Line of Life, by
+referring to the map showing dates (Plate XXVI.), it may be possible to
+obtain a very clear idea of when these travels take place.
+
+When, however, the Line of Life itself divides, and one branch of it
+leans over towards or on to the Mount of the Moon (I, Plate XXI.), it
+denotes that the entire life will be full of change and travel. In such a
+case it will not be possible, except by the use of some gift such as
+clairvoyance, to tell accurately in advance the dates of voyages that
+will be undertaken.
+
+If the Line of Life apparently leaves its ordinary course and sweeps over
+to the Mount of the Moon, the life will be one continual round of travel.
+The person will settle nowhere, and the end of the life in such a case
+will take place in some land far distant from the place of birth.
+
+If the Line of Life has no line or branch leaving it and going in an
+opposite direction, but keeps to the form of a semi-circle round the
+Mount of Venus, then such a life will be remarkably free from change and
+travel, and the person will remain all his life in the land of his birth
+(3-3, Plate XXI.).
+
+When a travel Line from the Line of Life ends in a small cross the
+journey undertaken will end in disappointment (4, Plate XXI).
+
+When the Line ends in a square, there will be great danger to the subject
+on such a journey, but he will escape, as the square is a sign of
+preservation from danger.
+
+When the Line ends in an island, the journey will end in loss (5, Plate
+XXI.).
+
+When the Travel Line crosses over near or on to the Mount of the Moon and
+ends in a fork or a circle, there will be great danger of the subject
+losing his life in undertaking such a journey.
+
+There is always more danger in travelling on water when the subject is
+found to be born in the following dates:
+
+  (1) Between the 21st of June and the 21st of July.
+  (2) The 21st of October and the 21st of November.
+  (3) Between the 21st of February and the 21st of March.
+
+There is more likelihood of danger from collision of trains and accidents
+on land when the subject is born between:
+
+  (1) The 21st of April and 21st of May.
+  (2) The 21st of August and the 21st of September.
+  (3) The 21st of December and the 21st of January.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXI.
+
+TRAVELS, VOYAGES, ACCIDENTS AND DESCENDING LINES PROM THE MOUNTS.]
+
+Danger from storms, tornadoes, thunder and lightning, is more likely to
+occur when people are travelling whose birthdays fall between:
+
+  (1) The 21st of May and the 21st of June.
+  (2) The 21st of September and the 21st of October.
+  (3) The 21st of January and the 21st of February.
+
+
+ACCIDENTS
+
+Accidents are generally marked by lines descending from the Mount of
+Saturn and touching the Line of Life (6, Plate XXI.).
+
+When falling on the Line of Head, they increase the danger to the head
+itself (7, Plate XXI.).
+
+Descending lines are those that look thicker on the Mount and taper as
+they come downwards.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+
+THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, AND THE GRILLE
+
+The Island is never a fortunate sign. Whereever it makes its appearance,
+it reduces the promise of the Line or Mount on which it may be found.
+
+On the Line of Life it shows delicacy or illness at that particular date
+where it appears (1, Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Head, weakness of the brain, danger of brain illness (2,
+Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Heart, weakness of the heart (3, Plate XXII.), and
+especially so when under the Mount of the Sun.
+
+On the Line of Fate, heavy loss in worldly matters, worry, and anxiety
+about the subject's destiny (4, Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Sun, loss of position and generally by some scandal (5,
+Plate XXII.).
+
+On the Line of Health, serious illness (6, Plate XXII.); if on the upper
+part of the Line and with small round finger-nails, throat and bronchial
+troubles. With long nails, delicacy of the lungs and chest. With short
+nails without moons, bad circulation and weak action of the heart; and
+with very flat nails, nerve diseases and paralysis (_see_ Nails, page
+137).
+
+Lower down on the Line of Health on the Mount of the Moon, it indicates
+a grave tendency towards kidney and bladder troubles (7, Plate XXII.).
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXII.
+
+THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, THE GRILLE, THE STAR, THE SQUARE.]
+
+Any Line that forms itself into an island or that runs into one, is a bad
+sign for that Line or particular part of the hand on which it is found.
+An island on any of the Mounts weakens the qualities of what the Mount
+expresses.
+
+
+THE CIRCLE
+
+On the Mount of the Sun the Circle is favourable (8, Plate XXII.) in all
+other positions it is unfavourable. On the Mount of the Moon it threatens
+death from drowning.
+
+
+THE SPOT
+
+The Spot is a sign of temporary arrest of the qualities of any Line on
+which it may be found.
+
+On the Line of Head, shock or injury. (9, Plate XXII.)
+
+On the Line of Life, sudden illness.
+
+On the Line of Health, fever.
+
+On all the other Lines it appears to have less significance.
+
+
+THE GRILLE
+
+The Grille (10, Plate XXII.) is very often seen on the Mounts of the
+Hand. It denotes difficulties and obstacles in connection with whatever
+the Mount represents, and a lack of success in whatever quality or talent
+the Mount symbolises.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+
+THE STAR, THE CROSS, THE SQUARE
+
+The Star (11, Plate XXII.) is with only one exception a most fortunate
+mark to possess. On the Mount of Jupiter, the Star promises added honour,
+power, and position.
+
+On the Mount of Sun, it gives riches and glory, but generally associated
+with a public life.
+
+On the Mount of Mercury, unusual success in commerce, business, science,
+or great eloquence, according to other indications of the hand. (11,
+Plate XXII.)
+
+On the Mount of Mars under Jupiter, great distinction and celebrity in
+martial life or in some one decisive battle, which gives renown to the
+rest of the career, like a Wellington at Waterloo.
+
+On the Mount of Mars under Mercury, it gives honour won by the mentality
+fighting the battle of life (_see_ Mounts, page 144).
+
+On the Mount of the Moon it is a sign of great celebrity arising from the
+qualities of this Mount, viz., through the imagination or inventive
+faculties.
+
+On the Mount of Venus the Star on the centre of this Mount is also a sign
+of success, but in relation to animal magnetism and sensuality it gives
+extraordinary success with the opposite sex.
+
+On the Mount of Saturn it is the one unfavourable sign of this
+particular mark, and on this Mount it gives distinction, but one to be
+dreaded. Such a person will be the plaything of destiny, a man cast for
+some terrible part in the tragedy of life. Such a man's life will end in
+some terrible disaster, but one which will cause his name to be on
+everyone's lips. A king perhaps, but one crowned by doom.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXIII.
+
+MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS.]
+
+
+THE CROSS
+
+This sign is the direct opposite to the preceding sign, and has only one
+favourable position, viz., on the Mount of Jupiter where it indicates
+some extraordinary fortunate affection which will come into the life. On
+all the other Mounts it is evil.
+
+On the Mount of Saturn, violent death. (12, Plate XXII.)
+
+On the Mount of Sun, disappointment in riches.
+
+On the Mount of Mercury, dishonesty.
+
+On the Mount of Mars (under Mercury) great opposition.
+
+On the Mount of Mars (under Jupiter) violence and even death from
+quarrels.
+
+On the Mount of the Moon it denotes a fatal influence to the imagination.
+Such a man will deceive himself. When low down on this Mount it
+foreshadows death by drowning.
+
+On the Mount of Venus it indicates some fatal influence of the
+affections.
+
+Above the Line of Head it foretells an accident or injury to the head.
+
+Above the Line of Heart, the sudden death of some loved one.
+
+
+THE SQUARE
+
+The Square (13, Plate XXII.) is usually called the Mark of Preservation.
+It shows escape from dangers at that particular moment where it appears.
+
+When on the Line of Life it means preservation from death. (13, Plate
+XXII.)
+
+On the Line of Fate, preservation from loss, and so on with each quality
+represented by the different lines.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+
+DIFFERENT CLASSES OF LINES
+
+The lines on the palm should be clearly marked, a good pink or reddish
+colour, and they should be free from breaks, crosses, holes or
+irregularities of all kinds.
+
+When very pale in colour they show lack of force and loss of energy, and
+often poor health.
+
+When extremely red they indicate excessive energy and a rather violent
+disposition.
+
+When yellow in colour they denote a tendency to biliousness and liver
+complaints, and tell in consequence of a melancholy morose nature.
+
+Forked lines are generally good and increase the quality of the special
+indication. When at the end of the Line of Head, the fork gives more of
+what is called a dual mentality and less power of concentration on any
+one subject. (Plate XXIV.)
+
+Spots on a Line weaken it and arrest its growth.
+
+Tasselled Lines (Plate XXIV.) are not good signs. They weaken any
+indication the line itself denotes, and at the end of a Life Line they
+foreshadow loss of all nervous energy.
+
+Wavy Lines (Plate XXIV.) show uncertainty, lack of decision and want of
+force.
+
+Broken Lines (Plate XXIV.) destroy the meaning of the line at the
+particular place where the break appears, but if one line ends above the
+other, the break is not so bad and the quality of the line will be
+continued.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXIV.
+
+MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS.]
+
+Sister Lines (Plate XXIV.) increase or double the power of any line, and
+when lying close together at the Line of Head, they give it great power
+and promise.
+
+Islands (Plate XXIV.) are always evil and denote weakness or failure of
+the Line or Mount on which they may be found.
+
+Ascending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are good from any line from which they
+spring. From the Line of Life they denote increased energy wherever they
+make their appearance. If they run up to any particular Mount or part of
+the hand, they show that the increased effort or energy will be in that
+particular direction.
+
+Descending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are the reverse and mean loss of power.
+
+Chained Lines show lack of force or fixity of purpose. (Plate XXIV.).
+
+When the entire hand is covered with a network of small lines, it denotes
+a highly nervous disposition and usually great mental worry and lack of
+decision.
+
+
+RIGHT AND LEFT HANDS
+
+Both the hands should be examined together to see if they accord. When
+they do, the indication of whatever the mark is, is more decided.
+
+When something is marked on the left hand and not on the right, the
+tendency will be in the nature, but unless it is also marked on the right
+hand it will never bear fruit or come to any result. When the two hands
+are exactly alike, it denotes that the subject has not developed in any
+way from what heredity or Nature gave to him.
+
+It must be remembered that we use the left side of the brain more than we
+do the right, and the nerves cross and go to the right hand.
+Consequently, it is this hand which denotes the developed or active
+brain, the left only giving the natural tendencies or inclinations.
+
+To be scientific and accurate the student of this subject must always
+keep this rule before his mind and not be led away in his judgment by
+some "marvellously good line" that the subject may proudly call his
+attention to in the left hand, for such a mark will have no actual result
+unless it is also found on the right hand.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+
+THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE
+
+The Great Triangle is formed by the lines of Head, Life, and Health
+(Plate XXV.). The larger this triangle is, the better will be the health,
+for the reason that the Line of Health will be further removed from the
+Life Line. The views of life will also be broader and the field of action
+as it were less limited.
+
+When the upper angle (made by the Head and Life Lines) is acute, the
+subject will be more nervous, timid, and sensitive.
+
+
+THE QUADRANGLE
+
+The Quadrangle, as its name implies, is that space lying between the
+Lines of Head and Heart. (Plate XXV.)
+
+To be well marked, it should be even in shape and not narrow at either
+end.
+
+When marked in this way it denotes balance of judgment, level-headedness
+in all things, and is a most excellent sign to have.
+
+It represents man's disposition or mental attitude towards his fellow
+men. When extremely narrow it indicates narrowness of views and bigotry
+in regard to religion.
+
+When excessively wide, it denotes a lack of judgment in all things and
+too much looseness of views for one's good.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXV.
+
+THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+
+HOW TO TELL TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS IN THE LIFE
+
+The most correct way in which to tell time by the hand is to divide the
+Line of Life into periods of seven years, and also the Line of Fate,
+following the accompanying design (Plate XXVI.).
+
+The Line of Head may also be divided into sections of seven years (_see_
+page 25).
+
+This division into periods of seven is the most natural one of all, as
+the entire nature changes every seven years. Long experience has proved
+that, by dividing the hand in the manner shown in the accompanying
+illustration, the best possible results as regards dates are obtained.
+
+I have also made the following curious observation concerning the most
+important years in people's careers, which I now publish in this work for
+the first time.
+
+People born on the 1st, 10th, 19th, and 28th of any month, and especially
+in the months of July, August, and January, will find the following years
+of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    1st, 7th, 10th, 16th, 19th, 28th, 34th, 37th, 43d, 46th, 52d,
+    55th, 61st, and 70th.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE XXVI.
+
+TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS.]
+
+Those born on the 2d, 11th, 20th, and 29th of any month, but more
+especially in July, August, and January, will find the following years of
+their lives the most eventful:
+
+    2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th,
+    52d, 56th, and 70th.
+
+Those born on the 3d, 12th, 21st, and 30th of any month, but more
+especially in the months of December and February, will find the
+following years of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    3d, 12th, 21st, 30th, 39th, 48th, 57th, 66th, and 75th.
+
+Those born on the 4th, 13th, 22d, and 31st, especially in the months of
+July, August, and January, will find the followings years of their lives
+the most eventful:
+
+    1st, 4th, 10th, 13th, 19th, 22d, 28th, 31st, 37th, 40th, 46th,
+    49th, 55th, 58th, 64th, 67th, 73d, and 76th.
+
+Those born on the 5th, 14th, and 23d of any month, but especially in the
+months of June and September, will find the following years of their
+lives the most eventful:
+
+    5th, 14th, 23d, 32d, 41st, 50th, 59th, 68th, and 77th.
+
+Those born on the 6th, 15th, and 24th of any month, but especially in the
+months of May and October, will find the following years of their lives
+the most eventful:
+
+    6th, 15th, 24th, 33d, 42d, 51st, 60th, 69th, 78th, and 87th.
+
+Those born on the 7th, 16th, and 25th of any month, especially in the
+months of July, August, and January, will find the following years of
+their lives the most eventful:
+
+    2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th,
+    56th, 61st, 65th, 70th, 74th, and 79th.
+
+Those born on the 8th, 17th, and 26th of any month, but more especially
+in the months of January, February, July, and August, will find the
+following years of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    8th, 17th, 26th, 35th, 44th, 53d, 62d, 71st, and 80th.
+
+Those born on the 9th, 18th, and 27th of any month, but more especially
+in the months of April, October, and November, will find the following
+years of their lives the most eventful:
+
+    9th, 18th, 27th, 36th, 45th, 54th, 63d, 72d, and 81st.
+
+This curious system it will be seen has embraced every day of every month
+that people can be born on. It is based on a strange law of periodicity
+that after years of study I have found extremely accurate and wonderful
+in its meaning.
+
+
+
+
+PART II--CHEIROGNOMY
+
+OR
+
+THE SCIENCE OF INTERPRETING THE SHAPE OF HANDS
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+
+THE STUDY OF THE SHAPE OF THE HAND
+
+We now leave the domain of what must be considered Palmistry, the study
+of the Lines of the Palm--or Cheiromancy, as it was called by the Greeks
+from the word [Greek: cheir], the hand, and proceed to consider the
+meanings that can be derived from the shapes of the hands, fingers, etc.,
+which is called Cheirognomy.
+
+These two studies may be taken up separately, but by a knowledge of both
+the student will be doubly armed, especially in the reading of character.
+
+To a judge of horseflesh the limbs of the horse give him such a fund of
+information as to the animals' breed, training, etc., that it enables him
+to draw conclusions that he could not otherwise obtain.
+
+In the same way the shape of the hand gives an enormous wealth of
+information as to breed and peculiarities of human beings.
+
+In a book of this nature I shall be able to give only the leading traits
+denoted by each type, but if readers wish to carry out this study
+further, I must refer them to my larger works on the subject, in which
+the shapes of the hands are described in the fullest detail.
+
+The most casual observation of character as shown by the formation of
+hands will soon convince any person of the value of this study. Even in
+itself it possesses the most far-reaching possibilities in helping to a
+clear understanding of the difference that exists in races, their various
+blends of types, that have now spread themselves by intermarriage and
+travel over the surface of the earth.
+
+For example, the difference in the shape of the hands of the French and
+German or the French and English races would convince any thinking person
+that temperament and disposition are indeed largely indicated by the
+shape of the hand itself.
+
+It is even a remarkable thing that though work and exercise may enlarge
+and broaden the hand, yet the type to which it belongs is never
+destroyed, but can be easily detected by anyone who has made a study of
+such matters.
+
+The Seven Types or Shapes of Hands are as follows:
+
+  (1) The Elementary--or lowest type.
+  (2) The Square--or the useful hand.
+  (3) The Spatulate--or nervous active type.
+  (4) The Philosophic--or jointed hand.
+  (5) The Conic--or the artistic type.
+  (6) The Psychic--or the idealistic hand.
+  (7) The Mixed Hand.
+
+
+THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS
+
+
+THE ELEMENTARY
+
+As its name implies, the Elementary is the lowest type of all. It is just
+a little above the brute creation. This type is extremely short (Plate
+I., Part II.), thick set and brutal-looking. In passing I must draw the
+reader's attention to the fact that the shorter and thicker the hand is,
+the nearer the person is to the animal.
+
+In examining this type one can therefore only expect to find it the
+expression of all that is coarse, brutal, and animal.
+
+People having such hands naturally have very little mental development or
+ability. They are found engaged in occupations requiring only unskilled
+labour and the very lowest even of that.
+
+They are violent in temper, and have little or no control over their
+passions or their anger. They are coarse in their ideas, possess little
+or no sentiment, no imagination or feeling, and it has been found that
+even the nerve system of such types is more or less in a state of
+non-development. They do not feel pain as the higher types of humanity
+feel it, and have little ambition except to eat, drink, and sleep.
+
+Note.--The thumb is extremely short and low-set with the Elementary type.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 1--THE ELEMENTARY HAND. FIG. 2--THE SQUARE OR USEFUL
+HAND.
+
+FIG. 3--THE SPATULATE HAND. FIG. 4--THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND.
+
+PLATE I.--PART II.]
+
+
+THE SQUARE TYPE
+
+The Square type (Plate I., Part II.,) is so designated on account of the
+palm being like a square in shape, or at least nearly so. Such a hand in
+fact "looks square." It is rather straight or even at the wrist, at the
+base of the fingers, and also at the sides. The fingers themselves also
+have a "square-cut" appearance. The thumb is, however, nearly always
+long, well-shaped, and set high on the palm, and stands well out from the
+palm.
+
+The Square Hand is also called the practical or useful hand. People who
+possess this type are essentially practical, logical, and rather
+materialistic. They belong to the earth and the things of the earth. They
+have little imagination or idealism, they are solid, serious workers,
+methodical and painstaking in all they do. They believe in things only by
+proof and by their reason. They are often religious and even
+superstitious, but more from habit than from anything else.
+
+They are determined and obstinate, especially if their thumbs are long
+and the first joint stiff.[7]
+
+[7] _See_ Chapter on Thumbs, page 127.
+
+They succeed in all lines of work that do not require imagination or the
+creative faculties, and as business men, lawyers, doctors, scientists,
+they do extremely well, and are generally to be found in such callings.
+
+
+THE SPATULATE HAND
+
+The Spatulate or active nervous type (Plate I., Part II.) is usually
+crooked or irregular looking, with large tips or pads at the ends of the
+fingers, rather like the spatula chemists use and from which peculiarity
+this type gets its name. The people who possess this type are in fact
+always "pounding" at something. They are full of untiring energy,
+enormous workers in everything they take up, and generally remarkable
+for their originality.
+
+They are not built on the hard set square lines of the former type. These
+persons have enormous imagination, their creative faculties largely
+developed. They are inventive, unconventional, emotional, demonstrative,
+and in fact the complete opposite in character to the class who possesses
+the square type of hand.
+
+The Spatulate type has also the palm irregular in shape. It may be wider
+at the base of the fingers than at the wrist, or it may be found _vice
+versa_.
+
+In the first case they are then more practical in their work and views
+and less impulsive. With the larger development at the wrist, they are
+more carried away with their impulses, hasty and impetuous in temper,
+speech, and action.
+
+
+THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND
+
+The Philosophic Hand (Plate I., Part II.) received this name from the
+Greek [Greek: philos]--love, and [Greek: sophich]--wisdom. When the
+Greeks made a study of hands they noticed that all those persons who
+possessed this type had a bent for philosophy in their blood that nothing
+could eradicate.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 1.--THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND.
+
+FIG. 2.--THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND.
+
+FIG. 3.--THE MIXED HAND.
+
+PLATE II.--PART II.]
+
+The Philosophic Hand is long, bony, and angular with knotty joints, and
+is as a general rule fairly thin. People with this type of hand are
+always studious. They are great readers and usually have a strong
+tendency towards literature. They love sedentary work, and have a
+somewhat lonely, ascetic disposition. Perhaps on account of this quality
+they are very often found in church-life, or largely associated with
+religious movements. The monks of old, I mean those who compiled those
+wonderful manuscripts on doctrine, science, art, alchemy, and occult
+matters, all had this class of hand. In our modern times this type may be
+easily recognised, and the qualities it expresses remain the same even in
+the age of money-getting and machinery.
+
+It is, however, more usual nowadays to find a slight modification of the
+true philosophic hand in that of the hand with the palm square and with
+the fingers only belonging to the philosophic type. In such cases the
+practical nature is a basis or foundation on which the studious mind
+builds its theories, its religion, its literary achievements, or its
+scientific researches.
+
+As a rule the Line of Head on such hands is rather sloping, but it may
+also be found almost straight, and when it is, a more "level-headed"
+disposition will make more practical use of the studious nature. But
+speaking generally, people with this type of hand rarely accumulate as
+much wealth as those possessing the Square Hand.
+
+The knotted or jointed fingers give carefulness and detail in work or
+study. They arrest the impulse of the brain, and so acquire time for
+thought and reflection.
+
+The Philosophic Hand is one of the highest developments of the mental
+side of the human family.
+
+
+THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND
+
+The Conic, also called the Artistic, Hand (Plate II., Part II.), is
+always graceful looking, with the fingers tapering and pointed. It has,
+not only on account of its appearance but also because of the qualities
+it represents, been called the Artistic Hand.
+
+Its possessor may not always paint pictures or design beautiful things,
+but he will have the emotional, artistic temperament, which loves
+beautiful surroundings, and is most sensitive to colour, music, and all
+the fine arts. It largely depends on the kind of Head Line and the will
+power shown by it, to determine whether its owner will develop the
+natural artistic temperament that he or she possesses.
+
+Such hands being generally full, fleshy, or soft, there is always a
+decidedly pronounced indolence in the nature which, if not overcome,
+combats the hard work necessary to achieve any real result. All very
+emotional people have more or less the characteristics of this type, but
+great numbers simply squander their time in the appreciation of art,
+rather than in making the effort in themselves to create it.
+
+The harder and firmer this type of hand is, the more likely it is to find
+that its possessor will really make something out of his artistic
+temperament.
+
+
+THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND
+
+This type (Plate II., Part II.), may in many ways be considered as the
+highest development of the hand on the purely mental plane, but from a
+worldly standpoint it is the least successful of all. Its possessors live
+in a world of dreams and ideals. They know little or nothing about the
+practical or purely material side of existence, and when they have to
+earn their own bread they gain so little that they usually starve.
+
+These beautiful hands do not appear made for work in any sense. They are
+also too spiritual and frail to deal blows and hold their own in the
+battle of life. If they are supported by others, or have money of their
+own to live on, all may be well, and in such cases they will be likely to
+develop strange psychic gifts dealing with visions and ideals that some
+few may hear and understand. But if not, their fate as a rule is a sad
+one, they will easily be pushed aside by the rougher types of humanity
+or, in sheer helplessness, take their own lives, and so end the unequal
+struggle.
+
+In constitution they are seldom strong physically, and consequently they
+are doubly unfitted for the struggle for existence.
+
+
+THE MIXED HAND
+
+What is called the "Mixed Hand" (Plate II., Part II.), is an aggregation
+of all the types, or at least, some of them.
+
+It is very often found having all the fingers different from one another,
+as for example one pointed, one square, or spatulate, and so on. Or
+sometimes the palm may be of one type, say spatulate, with all the
+fingers mixed.
+
+Such persons are always versatility itself, but so changeable in purpose
+that they rarely succeed in making much out of any talents they may
+possess. They can generally do a little of everything but nothing well.
+They can talk on any subject that may crop up, but never impress their
+listeners with depth of thought on any subject.
+
+It is only when the Line of Head is found on such hands clear and
+straight that there is a likelihood of these persons developing some one
+talent out of the versatility that this type gives.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+
+THE THUMB
+
+In the judgment of character by the formation of the Hand, the Thumb is
+of about the same importance as the nose is to the face. It must be
+understood to represent the natural Will Power, whereas the Line of Head
+represents the Mental Will.
+
+In my larger works on this subject I have gone into very deeply the
+medical reasons why character should be expressed by the Thumb and the
+extraordinary role it has played in civilisation, and also in the various
+religions of the world.
+
+The Thumb proper represents the three great worlds of ideas, viz., Love,
+Logic, and Will (Plate VI., Part II.).
+
+Love is represented by the base of the Thumb which is covered on the hand
+by the Mount of Venus.
+
+Logic is the middle phalange, and Will is the top or nail portion.
+
+When these divisions are found large, the qualities are increased; when
+small, they play a smaller role in the life of the individual.
+
+There are two distinct classes of Thumbs, the supple-jointed and the
+firm-jointed.
+
+The former of these divisions is the Thumb bending outwards and supple
+at the joint underneath the nail (Fig. 2, Plate III.).
+
+This denotes a nature pliable and adaptable to others, very broad-minded,
+rather unconventional, and not obstinate in its views of life. These
+characteristics will be increased if the Head Line be found sloping and
+bending downwards. If, however, the Line of Head be found lying straight
+across the palm, they are more conventional. The "supple-jointed" thumb
+also denotes generosity of mind both as regards thought and money. In all
+ways these people are more extravagant than people who have the straight
+firm-jointed thumb. In other words they "give more" even in what they
+think as well as in what they do.
+
+The nearer the Thumb approaches the side of the hand, or the more it
+looks tied down or cramped to the palm, the more the subject is inclined
+to grasp or hold. The true miser has always a thumb cramped towards the
+hand, and the nail phalange as a rule slightly turned in, as if the mind
+wanted to grab hold or retain.
+
+The supple-jointed Thumb is more impulsive in its desire to give than is
+the stiff-jointed class, whereas the latter type demands reflection
+before he even gives an opinion.
+
+If a favour should be asked of the man with the supple-jointed Thumb, one
+should remember that he is more inclined to give in on the impulse of the
+moment, and if one does not press one's point home at once, he is likely
+first to promise, and later, on reflection, change his mind.
+
+The man with the stiff-jointed Thumb (Fig. 3, Plate III.) on the
+contrary, is more likely to refuse at first and on reflection to agree to
+the proposition; but it he does make up his mind, he will stick to his
+judgment or opinion, and the more he is opposed the more determined he
+will be to hold to his view.
+
+[Illustration: FIG. 1.--THE CLUBBED THUMB.
+
+FIG. 2.--THE SUPPLE-JOINTED THUMB.
+
+FIG. 3.--THE FIRM-JOINTED THUMB.
+
+FIG. 4.--THE WAIST-LIKE THUMB.
+
+FIG. 5.--THE STRAIGHT THUMB.
+
+FIG. 6.--THE ELEMENTARY THUMB.
+
+PLATE III.--PART II.]
+
+The firm-jointed thumb is then the outward sign of a more resisting
+nature, and the longer the first or nail phalange is, the stronger and
+more powerful the Will force.
+
+These people seldom make friends so easily or rapidly as those belonging
+to the other type. On a railway journey they rarely begin a conversation
+with a fellow traveller, and if they have to do so it will generally be
+in the form of an argument that "the window must be left open or shut,"
+as the case may be. Heaven help the other poor traveller if he should
+also happen to have a stiff thumb, and oppose his ideas to those of the
+first.
+
+The supple-jointed class, on the contrary, enter readily into
+conversation with strangers, and they often make their greatest friends
+while travelling. They are affable, charming companions, and give in
+readily to the wishes of others. In fact, this quality inclines to a
+weakness that should be guarded against. Among all those men and women
+who take the "easiest way" a large majority will be found to have very
+supple-jointed thumbs. This, however, will be greatly qualified by the
+position and appearance of the Line of Head, the indicator of the
+developed mental Will.
+
+To have a supple lower or middle joint does not relate to the Will but to
+the phalange of Logic of the possessor. When this second joint is found
+supple the subject adapts himself to circumstances rather than to
+persons. He reasons out that he must bend or adapt himself to the
+conditions or circumstances of the life in which he is placed.
+
+The Clubbed Thumb (Fig. 1, Plate III.), is so called from its being thick
+like a club. People possessing this class of Thumb belong to the
+Elementary type as far as Will is concerned. They are brutal and like
+animals in their unreasonable obstinacy. If they are opposed they fly
+into ungovernable passions and blind rages. They have no control over
+themselves, and are liable to go to any extreme of violence or crime
+during one of their tempers. In fact the clubbed-shaped Thumb has also
+been designated "the murderer's thumb" on account of so many murderers
+having been found with this formation.
+
+The possessor of a Clubbed Thumb could not, however, plan out or
+premeditate a crime, for he would not have the determined Will or power
+of reason to think it out.
+
+The shorter the Thumb, the nearer the possessor is to the brute in
+passion and lack of self-control.
+
+The "waist-like" Thumb (Fig. 4, Plate III.), and the "straight" formation
+(Fig. 5), must also be considered as the opposite of one another in their
+characteristics, but in this case the difference is in the quality of
+Logic or Reason. The former will not use or depend much on such things,
+he will rely, on the contrary, on tact and diplomacy to gain his point or
+win his way. The second class have little or no tact, but in all matters
+depend on argument and reason.
+
+The third phalange of the Thumb, which is placed under the designation of
+Love (Plate VI., Part II.), when found long, denotes more control over
+the quality of Love or Sensuality; when short and thick-set, the passion
+or sensual nature is more brutal and animal.
+
+The space at my disposal in this work will not allow me to go deeper
+into all the shades of character that can be made out by a study of the
+Thumb alone, but I think I have said enough to show my readers the great
+truth in D'Arpentigny's words that "the Thumb individualises the man."
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+
+THE FINGERS--LENGTH TO ONE ANOTHER
+
+
+THE SMOOTH AND THE KNOTTY
+
+The First Finger is called the Finger of Jupiter.
+
+The Second is called the Finger of Saturn.
+
+The Third is called the Finger of The Sun.
+
+The Fourth is called the Finger of Mercury.
+
+The Finger of Jupiter, when long, gives love of power and command over
+others. When short it denotes dislike of responsibility and lack of
+ambition.
+
+The Finger of Saturn when long gives prudence, love of solitude and a
+reserved, studious disposition. When short it denotes frivolity and
+general lack of seriousness in all things.
+
+The Finger of the Sun when long gives love of the beautiful, desire for
+celebrity and fame, but when excessively long, the tendency inclines more
+toward notoriety, risk in speculation, the love of money and gambling.
+When short it denotes a dislike of all these things.
+
+The Finger of Mercury when long gives mental power, grasp of languages,
+and power of expression, especially in speech. When short it denotes
+difficulty in speaking, and in the expression of thoughts. When crooked,
+with an irregular Head Line, it is an evil sign of the Mentality.
+
+The fingers should be long in proportion to the palm; they then denote
+greater intellectuality and mental power. When short and stubby looking,
+the subject is inclined to animalism and gross materialism.
+
+When the fingers lean towards one another, they take after the qualities
+expressed by the finger towards which they lean.
+
+[Illustration: _THE SQUARE WITH SMOOTH JOINTS_
+
+_THE POINTED_
+
+_THE KNOTTY_
+
+PLATE IV.--PART II.
+
+DIFFERENT SHAPES OF FINGERS.]
+
+A wide space between the thumb and first finger denotes independence of
+will and fearlessness.
+
+When wide between the first and second fingers, independence of thought;
+between the second and third fingers, independence of circumstances; and
+wide between the third and fourth fingers, independence of action.
+
+When the fingers are found loose and inclined to curve backwards, the
+subject is "open-minded" and quick to grasp ideas or suggestions. They
+will not, however, have the more methodical stick-at-it quality of those
+whose fingers are found firm and stiff.
+
+When the fingers are curved inwards, the subject is slower to grasp new
+ideas, very cautious, and inclined to hold on to what he knows or what he
+has.
+
+Smooth-jointed fingers are more impulsive than those with "knotty
+joints". The "knotty joints" arrest the impetuousness of the disposition
+and give reflection, love of detail in all their work and are more
+frequently found in the hands of all great organisers and those who
+require thought and reflection in carrying out their plans.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+
+THE NAILS OF THE HAND
+
+A study of the Nails of the Hand is a remarkably accurate guide to many
+diseases. This part of Palmistry is now recognised by the majority of
+medical men, who seldom fail quietly to observe the appearance of the
+nails on a patient's hand.
+
+They are peculiarly indicative of hereditary diseases, especially lungs,
+heart, nerves, and spine.
+
+They are divided into four very distinct classes. Long, Short, Broad, and
+Narrow.
+
+
+LONG NAILS
+
+When the Nails are found very long, the general constitution never
+appears to be so strong as when they are medium in size.
+
+Persons with long Nails are more liable to all diseases of the Lungs and
+Chest (Plate V., Part II.), and still more so when these long Nails are
+seen ribbed or fluted, with the ribs running upward from the base to the
+edge of the nail.
+
+The same type of Nail, but shorter in appearance, indicates that the
+delicacy lies higher up towards the throat, and denotes tendencies for
+laryngitis, inflammation of the throat, and all bronchial troubles.
+
+When especially long Nails are bluish in colour, they denote a still more
+delicate constitution, coupled with poor circulation of the blood.
+
+[Illustration: SHORT SQUARE NAILS. WEAK ACTION OF THE HEART.
+
+SHELL-SHAPED NAILS. STRONG TENDENCY TOWARDS PARALYSIS.
+
+DELICACY OF THROAT.
+
+CHEST DELICATE AND BRONCHIAL.
+
+LUNGS DELICATE.
+
+SPINAL WEAKNESS.
+
+SPINAL WEAKNESS.
+
+PLATE V.--PART II.]
+
+
+SHORT NAILS
+
+Nails short in appearance denote a tendency towards weak action of the
+heart, more especially so when the "moons" are very small or barely
+noticeable. When the Nails appear very flat and sunk into the flesh at
+the base they denote nerve diseases. When they are "ribbed" across the
+Nail from side to side, the danger is still more apparent.
+
+When a deep furrow is found across the Nail, it is a sign in any hand
+that an unusual call has recently been made on the nervous system by
+illness. If the following rule be studied, the date of this illness or
+strain can be very clearly indicated.
+
+As it takes about nine months for a nail to grow out from the base to the
+outer edge, the nail can easily be divided into sections. When the furrow
+or very deep "rib" is seen close to the edge, the illness took place
+about nine months ago; when the furrow is seen about the centre, the date
+was about from four to five months, and when at the base, about one month
+previously.
+
+White spots on the Nails are a sign of general delicacy, and when the
+Nail is seen covered with small white flecks, the whole nervous system is
+in a low state of health.
+
+
+LONG NARROW NAILS
+
+Very narrow Nails (Plate V., Part II.), show spinal weakness, and when
+extremely curved and very thin they indicate curvature of the spine and
+great delicacy of the constitution.
+
+
+FLAT NAILS
+
+When the Nails appear very flat and inclined to lift themselves up from
+the flesh towards their outer edge, the threatened danger is towards
+paralysis, and still more so when they look like a shell and are pointed
+towards the base (Plate V., Part II.). When these Nails are without any
+signs of moons, and whitish or bluish in colour, the disease is in a very
+advanced stage.
+
+
+THE MOONS OF THE NAILS
+
+Large "Moons" always denote strong action of the heart and rapid
+circulation of the blood, but when unusually large they indicate too much
+pressure on the heart, rapidity in its beat, the valves over-strained and
+danger of bursting some blood vessel in the heart or in the brain.
+
+Small "Moons" indicate the reverse of this; they always denote poor
+circulation, weak action of the heart and anaemia of the brain.
+
+When close to death the "Moons" are the first to take on a bluish look,
+and later on the entire Nail becomes blue or almost black in colour.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+
+THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND AND THEIR MEANING
+
+The Mounts of the Hand (Plate VI., Part II.) vary in the most remarkable
+manner in accordance with the character and dispositions of races and
+their different temperaments.
+
+In almost all the Southern and more emotional races, these Mounts are
+more noticeable than those belonging to Northern countries. It has been
+observed that all people with the Mounts apparent or prominent are more
+swayed by their feelings and emotions than those people who have flat
+palms and undeveloped Mounts.
+
+The names given to the Mounts of the Hand are those also given to the
+seven principal planets that sway the destiny of our earth, viz., the
+Sun, Moon, Venus, Mercury, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.
+
+These names were given to the Mounts by the Greek students of this
+subject, and were associated by them with the qualities attributed to
+these seven planets, such as:
+
+  Venus   = Love, sensuality and passion.
+  Mars    = Vitality, courage, fighting, etc.
+  Mercury = Mentality, commerce, science.
+  Moon    = Imagination, romance, changeability.
+  Sun     = Brilliancy, fruitfulness, success.
+  Jupiter = Ambition, power, domination.
+  Saturn  = Reserve, melancholy, seriousness.
+
+[Illustration: PLATE VI.--PART II.
+
+THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND]
+
+In my own long experience I could not help but remark the intimate
+relation between the effect of these great planets of our Universe and
+humanity in general. Although it would not be within the scope of this
+work to teach also Astrology in these pages, I must, however, in order to
+help all earnest students and readers of this book, put before them the
+following curious evidence of the influence of the planets on our lives.
+This is also demonstrated by the position and shape of the Mounts on the
+Hand, and, as far as I know, has never been published in any book dealing
+with Palmistry before.
+
+In the accompanying pages it will be noticed that I have for the first
+time dealt with these Mounts as Positive and Negative. The following
+explanation of my reason for doing this should be of the greatest
+assistance to my readers, and will also be useful in showing the close
+relationship between the two sciences Astrology and Palmistry.
+
+There are, it is well-known, in the Zodiac which surrounds our earth,
+what are called "the twelve Houses" of the seven principal planets of our
+Solar System.
+
+The Zodiac itself is described both by Astronomers and Astrologers as a
+pathway in the Universe, about sixteen degrees broad, in which the
+planets travel. It is divided into twelve Signs or Houses of thirty
+degrees each, and our Sun enters a new sign on an average of every thirty
+days. At the end of twelve months it has completed the zodiacal circle of
+360 degrees, or one Solar year.
+
+The Sun, the creator of life, and itself the greatest mystery of our
+Universe, is in bulk 330,000 times larger than our earth. It therefore
+follows that in entering a new sign of the Zodiac, it changes the
+magnetic vibrations of the effect of each sign towards our earth.
+Consequently it is reasonable to presume that a person born, say in
+April, and another in May, would have very different characteristics and
+naturally a distinct destiny, because character is Fate or Destiny.
+
+My readers will now easily follow me when I state that, especially as
+regards health and disease, the following tables concerning the Mounts of
+the Hand, taken in conjunction with the date of birth, will enable them,
+when reading the hand, to tell many things with an accuracy that will be
+most convincing both to themselves and to their hearers.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MARS
+
+This Mount has two positions on the palm (Plate VI., Part II.); the first
+is to be found immediately under the upper part of the Line of Life, and
+the other opposite to it in the space lying between the Line of Heart and
+the Line of Head. The first relates to the physical characteristics and
+the second to the mental.
+
+The first if large is Positive, and it has more importance when the
+person is born between the dates of March 21st and April 21st, and in a
+minor way until April 28th, which portion of the year in the Zodiac is
+called the House of Mars (Positive).
+
+The second is considered Negative, and it has more importance when the
+person is born between October 21st and November 21st, and in a minor way
+until November 28th, because in the Zodiac this portion of the year is
+denoted as the House of Mars (Negative).
+
+We will now consider the difference of these two positions, how
+distinctly they affect the mind and temperament, and also their relation
+as to health and tendency towards disease.
+
+
+THE FIRST MOUNT OF MARS
+
+In the first Mount of Mars, at the commencement of the Line of Life, and
+especially when the subject is born in the House of Mars (March 21st to
+April 21st, and in a minor way until the 28th), he possesses a strong
+martial nature which will make its tendencies manifest in all actions of
+the life, whether the man be a business man, a soldier, or a leader of
+men in any line whatever.
+
+These subjects are born fighters in every sense of the word. They brook
+little or no control in all their affairs; they aspire to be leaders in
+whatever career they undertake, and with even average intelligence they
+generally become heads of business houses or organisations and take on
+large responsibilities.
+
+They have great obstinacy of purpose and determination, they resent all
+criticism, they are decided and dogmatic in all their views, and seldom
+ask the advice of others, until it is too late to alter their purpose for
+good or evil.
+
+They must do everything their own way, and as they always believe their
+way is the only right one they resent the slightest interference from
+others, and will even turn on their best friend who may attempt to
+dissuade them from their plans or purpose.
+
+They can only be handled or managed by kindness, patience, tact, or by
+their affections.
+
+The slightest attempt to fight or coerce them will bring them up "in
+arms" in a moment. The temper is hasty and explosive, but at the same
+time quickly over, and when the storm subsides they bitterly regret the
+outburst of passion and the cruel things they may have said in the heat
+of the moment.
+
+As a rule these people are good-natured and generous, but spasmodic and
+impulsive in all their actions. Their greatest fault lies in their
+impulsiveness and lack of self-control, and unless a good Line of Head be
+shown on the hands, they rush madly into all kinds of difficulties and
+dangers and often make a complete muddle of their opportunities and the
+magnificent powers of leadership that they nearly all possess.
+
+These people as a rule are unhappy in their love affairs or domestic
+life. They rarely meet women who understand them, and if they are lucky
+enough to escape opposition from their wives, they usually meet with it
+in their children.
+
+In health they are prone to fevers and blood diseases, especially in
+their early life. In youth they are also very liable to fits, epilepsy,
+severe headaches, often water on the brain, and suffer greatly with their
+teeth.
+
+In old age they have a grave liability towards apoplexy, vertigo, pains
+in the head and softening of the brain, and especially so if on their
+hands the Line of Head looks frayed, or made up of little pieces like a
+chain.
+
+Such people should be advised to cultivate repose self-control, and above
+all to avoid wines, spirits, and stimulants of all kinds, to which as a
+rule these natures are very much inclined.
+
+They should endeavour to sleep more than any other class, to take more
+recreation and exercise in the open air, and above all things to curb
+their pride and control their temper.
+
+The higher types of these subjects and those among them who practise
+self-restraint, can rise to almost any height in life and do great
+things for the benefit of their fellow men.
+
+
+THE SECOND MOUNT OF MARS
+
+The second Mount of Mars, lying between the Heart and Head Line (Plate
+VI., Part II.), is more important when the subject is born between the
+dates of 21st October and the 21st November and until November 28th. In
+the Zodiac this period of the year is called the House of Mars Negative
+or Mental.
+
+In character they are the complete opposite of the former type, all the
+Mars qualities being in the mind and in the mental attitude towards
+people and things.
+
+The latter type are mentally very courageous, and possess _moral courage_
+more than physical. They hate to have scenes, or to be mixed up with
+physical violence or bloodshed.
+
+They love to fight mentally, however, and in debates or arguments they
+also fight to the finish. They are more quietly determined than the
+former class of Mars subjects. They are even more obstinate in their
+views, but conceal their opinions, and often pass for assenting parties
+when in reality they are but waiting for the right opportunity to strike
+their "mental blow" and confuse their opponent.
+
+These people make better organisers than leaders, and their mental
+martial spirit often finds a splendid field for their talents as the
+brain behind an army. In plans, tactics and strategy, in carefully
+thought-out stores of ammunitions, provisions, or in financial schemes
+that may bring ruin or discomfiture on a more warlike enemy.
+
+When not highly cultivated or developed, they employ cunning and craft
+of every description to carry out their plans. They will stop at nothing
+to carry out their purpose. They can be the most treacherous and deadly
+enemies of all, and poison in opposition to the sword is one of the chief
+weapons they most readily employ.
+
+All these Mars Negative people have a mysterious power of magnetism,
+which they seem almost unconsciously to use in their dealings with
+others. They make natural hypnotists and thought-readers, and have strong
+leanings towards occultism and secret societies of all kinds. When on a
+highly developed plane, they use these wonderful qualities for the good
+of others, especially if they take up the study of medicine or science,
+for which work they seem usually well suited.
+
+Mars Negative people are generally so versatile and many-sided that they
+are the most difficult of all to place in some special career. If a good
+Line of Head be found on the hand, then there is nothing in the world of
+mental endeavour in which they will not make a success. It is a curious
+fact that these people seldom carry out what they were first trained for,
+and in fact in the course of their lives they are likely to change their
+profession or vocation as many times as the proverbial cat has lives.
+
+The worst fault of this type is that they are rather too adaptable to
+their surroundings and to the people with whom they come in contact. If
+they are thrown with evil-minded persons they are inclined to adapt
+themselves to their companions and even attempt to "go one better," but
+if in contact with good influences they just as rapidly develop the best
+that is in them.
+
+Their period of the Zodiac has from time immemorial been symbolised in
+their lower development as the figure of a scorpion wounding its own
+tail, and in their higher development that of an eagle with its head
+pointing upwards to the sky.
+
+Such symbols perfectly illustrate the dual nature of the type under
+consideration. In their lower aspect no type can be more vicious or
+harmful, even to wounding themselves and bringing about their own
+destruction. In their higher form, however, there is probably no class
+whose spiritual nature can, like the eagle, soar to such heights or be so
+free from earthly ties.
+
+Mars Negative people, especially when young, should above all things be
+carefully brought up with good companions. They should be especially
+warned to control their sex nature and be kept aloof from all perverse
+persons and evil books.
+
+As regards health, this type is usually inclined to be both slight and
+delicate in their early years, but generally incline towards corpulency
+after passing middle life. Both the men and women have a likelihood of
+weakness or illness in the sex organs, especially in youth, also in the
+kidneys and the bladder, while in advanced years the stomach and
+digestive organs become disordered. All through their lives they should
+be most careful and abstemious in their diet.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF JUPITER AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of Jupiter is found at the base of the first finger (Plate VI.,
+Part II.). When large, it shows desire to dominate, to rule and command
+others, to lead and organise, and to carry out some distinct object. But
+these good qualities will only be employed if the Line of Head is clear
+and long. When this line is poor and badly formed, then a large Mount of
+Jupiter gives pride, excess of vanity, a self-confident and a
+self-opinionated person. But on what is known as a good well-marked hand,
+there is no Mount more excellent and no surer indication of success from
+sheer strength of character and purpose.
+
+This Mount may be considered Positive when a person is found born between
+November 21st and December 20th, and in a minor way until the 28th. These
+persons are naturally ambitious, fearless and determined in all they
+undertake, but in acting on their impulses, they generally "hit too
+straight from the shoulder," or show their ambition too plainly, and so
+arouse antagonism, opposition, and enmity.
+
+They concentrate all their attention on whatever they may be doing at the
+moment and see no way but their own, especially if they feel the least
+opposition to their plans. They are, however, honourable and high
+principled in almost all they undertake and respond to any trust or
+confidence placed in them.
+
+They are usually extremely truthful and bitterly resent any attempt at
+deception, and do not hesitate to unmask any effort to deceive others,
+even when such an action on their part may ruin their own plans.
+
+They have great enterprise in business and all matters requiring
+organisation, and easily become the heads of businesses, or hold
+responsible positions in government offices or under the government. They
+rarely become politicians, for the simple reason that they cannot bear to
+bend to any party plans or schemes.
+
+They are perhaps the most independent of all types in choosing their own
+careers. Because their father may have happened to be a clergyman will be
+no reason for them to follow his example or even hold the same views on
+religion.
+
+It is for this reason that in early life such subjects are a cause of
+worry and anxiety to their parents; but they should always be allowed to
+choose their own career and even change it a dozen times if they wish,
+until at last they find their true vocation.
+
+The great fault of this class is that they are inclined to go to extremes
+in all things, and in doing so exhaust their efforts, and then change and
+fly off in another direction. But in all cases where the Line of Head is
+well-marked, especially when lying straight across the palm, there is no
+height in position or responsibility that they may not reach.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These subjects are more inclined to suffer with rheumatism and acid
+complaints than from any other form of disease, also inflammation of the
+tongue and throat, boils, carbuncles, eczema, and all skin troubles.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF JUPITER (NEGATIVE)
+
+The Mount of Jupiter may be considered negative or mental when the
+subject is born between the dates of February 19th and March 20th, and in
+a slighter degree until the 28th.
+
+In this case the ambition takes rather the mental form than what might be
+termed material. Brain work and brain development is more their
+speciality than other forms of effort.
+
+They seem to possess a kind of natural understanding of things and easily
+acquire all sorts of knowledge about a large variety of things,
+especially the history of countries, races, peoples, geographical,
+botanical, and geological researches.
+
+In spite of this mental ambition, these people are usually so very
+sensitive and so lacking in self-confidence that they find the greatest
+difficulty in carrying out their plans and making people believe in their
+projects. For this reason they appear to shrink from coming before the
+public, and have to stand aside and see others getting the credit for
+what really was their plan.
+
+A great number of literary people, composers and artists are born in this
+period and exhibit all the qualities that it represents. It is again a
+strong clear Line of Head which, if found on the hand, will determine
+whether the mental will power is sufficient to make this type overcome
+its natural sensitiveness and use the great qualities they have to carry
+out their aims and ambitions.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+People born in this period suffer largely from despondency, insomnia, and
+a feeling of martyrdom. Like the Positive type of the same Mount, they
+are also much inclined towards rheumatism and disorders brought on
+through the blood.
+
+They also suffer from internal chills, liver, and very often jaundice.
+Climate has the greatest possible effect upon their health, so they
+should endeavour to live in a bright, dry atmosphere and have plenty of
+air and exercise, and variety of change and travel.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF SATURN AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of Saturn is found at the base of the second finger (_see_
+Plate VI., Part II.). Its chief characteristics are love of solitude,
+prudence, quiet determination, the study of serious sombre things, the
+belief in fatalism and in the ultimate destiny of all things.
+
+A complete absence of this Mount indicates a more or less frivolous way
+of looking at life, while an exaggeration of it denotes an exaggeration
+of all the qualities it represents.
+
+The Mount of Saturn may be considered Positive when the subject is found
+to be born between the following dates, December 21st and January 20th,
+and during the subsequent seven days while this period is fading out and
+being overlapped by the period following.
+
+People born in these dates have strong will force and mentality, but they
+usually feel exceptionally lonely and isolated in going through life.
+
+They are very much children of fate and circumstances, over which they
+appear to have no control, and seem to make or mar their careers
+independently of their strong will.
+
+In character they are usually remarkable for their independence of
+thought and action, they also detest being under the restraint of others.
+
+For kindness and sympathy they will do almost anything, but they usually
+feel so isolated that they scarcely believe in the affections that may be
+offered.
+
+They have strange ideas of love and duty, and for this reason they are
+usually called somewhat peculiar by those few who attempt to penetrate
+their isolation.
+
+They have a deeply devotional nature, even when appearing not to be
+religious, and they make every effort to do good, especially to the
+masses, even when there may be no likelihood of their getting recognition
+or reward for their efforts.
+
+Such people as a rule feel the responsibilities of life too heavily and
+in consequence often become despondent and gloomy or retire into their
+own shell.
+
+If at all inclined to be very religious, they generally go to extremes
+and become fanatical in any Church they may adopt.
+
+Mysticism and occultism of all kinds appeal very strongly to their inner
+nature, but here again they are also inclined to go to extremes.
+
+They almost worship clever, intellectual people, and are deep thinkers in
+all matters that interest them, but they cannot brook interference in
+their views from others.
+
+They are often found holding positions of great responsibility, but in
+all matters fatalism seems to play a strange role in their life. They
+seem chosen to be the instrument or mouthpiece of Destiny, often hurling
+thousands to destruction in what they believe is their duty. If called
+upon to make a sacrifice of their own flesh and kin they will be the
+first to plunge the knife into the heart of their dearest.
+
+Nearly all people born in this period are strange, strong characters,
+equally feared, loved, and hated.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+The chief tendencies towards illness with persons born in this period are
+towards rheumatism, gout, pains and swellings in the feet and legs, also
+accidents to the feet, knees, and limbs, trouble with the liver and
+kidneys, ruptures, and disease of the teeth and ears.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF SATURN (NEGATIVE)
+
+The Mount of Saturn may be considered negative or mental when the person
+is found born between the dates of January 21st and February 18th, and
+also for the seven days following.
+
+These people are like the preceding type in almost all things, except
+that the same things appear to affect them more mentally than physically.
+
+They also feel lonely in life, but more mentally than the former
+type--they seem to feel less companionship in their ideas and thoughts,
+whereas the former feel it more in their lives and careers.
+
+These latter types are more sensitive and very easily wounded in their
+feelings.
+
+They read character instinctively and seem to "see through" people too
+easily to be really happy. They bitterly resent being taken in or
+deceived, and when they think they have been, they astonish people by the
+bitterness of their resentment.
+
+They make loyal, true friends, if their feelings are once aroused, and
+they will undergo any sacrifice for the sake of a friend, but they will
+stop at nothing to avenge an injury if they think they have been
+deceived.
+
+They are usually very active for the public good, and they give a good
+deal of their time and money to doing good, but in their own way. Like
+the positive type of Saturn they have very decided views of their own
+about religion and especially the regular observances and ceremonials of
+Church life.
+
+They are very different from the previous type in that they usually take
+a keen interest in public meetings and large gatherings of people. They
+love theatres, concerts, and places of amusement, and yet always if they
+told the truth, they feel alone in life.
+
+They have a quiet controlling power with their eyes, and although highly
+nervous people themselves, yet they have the greatest control over
+excitable and nervous patients and also over the insane. It is a strange
+fact that in the run of their careers they seem fated to be brought into
+contact with such cases.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These people suffer most from the nerves of the stomach and the digestive
+organs, and ordinary remedies seem to fail entirely to relieve them.
+
+They have as a rule poor circulation of the blood, cold feet and hands,
+very delicate teeth, and suffer much from accidents and hurts to the
+feet, ankles and limbs.
+
+They seldom feel strong in health and yet they have enormous power of
+resistance, and when a call is made on their will power, they usually
+astonish every one by what they can stand, especially if they in any way
+think that their duty or principles are involved or at stake.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF THE SUN AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of the Sun is found under the base of the third finger. To this
+Mount the Greeks also gave the name of Mount of Apollo (Plate VI., Part
+II.).
+
+When large or well developed it indicates glory, publicity, a desire to
+shine before one's fellows. It is always considered a good Mount to have
+large.
+
+It also indicates enthusiasm for the beautiful in all things, whether one
+follows an artistic calling or not. People with this Mount large, even if
+they have success in practical life, build beautiful houses or have
+artistic surroundings of some sort. They also have an expansive
+temperament, are generous and luxurious in all their tastes. They are
+bright and sunny by nature and have a forceful, happy, lucky personality.
+
+This Mount may be considered Positive when the subject is found to be
+born between the dates of July 21st and August 20th, and generally until
+the 28th of this month, which portion of the Zodiac is called the "House
+of the Sun."
+
+These people represent what may be called the heart force of the human
+race, and as a rule are generous and sympathetic even to an extreme.
+
+They have great force of character and personality, and even when
+constrained by circumstances to exist in the lower walks of life, they
+play, even there, a role distinct from their fellows, and their
+clean-cut, well-marked personality is sure to make itself manifest.
+
+At heart they are really most sympathetic, though they often seem to hide
+this quality on account of their strong sense of trying to force people
+to do what is right towards others.
+
+They have no mercy for "weaklings" or evaders of the truth, and in brutal
+frankness they will even denounce their own children should they find
+them falling into evil ways.
+
+They display the greatest loyalty if any friend of theirs is attacked,
+especially if in an underhand way. They love intensely and they hate
+intensely. Theirs is no middle path, for they must be either at one
+extreme or the other.
+
+Although truthful and naturally honest they often get terribly deceived,
+and the danger is with such people that towards the sunset of their
+lives, the glorious Sun that has shone, as it were, through them gets
+darkened by the deceit and treachery of others and sets in clouds, or
+gets hidden before the ending of life's pathway comes to view.
+
+Many of these people who have cheered others, who have brought their
+grand sunshine of good into the hearts of others, cannot cheer themselves
+when the twilight comes, and so they often fall victims to gloom and
+melancholy, and many commit suicide.
+
+Among other marked characteristics these people are extremely proud and
+would sooner die than ask favours from others. They are extremely easily
+wounded through their pride and are unusually sensitive.
+
+Impetuous and hot-tempered, they make many enemies, and when engaged in
+public life, which they are usually well fitted for, they often find
+themselves bitterly attacked in the most unscrupulous manner.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+Those born in the dates I have given, or who have the Mount of the Sun
+large, are most inclined to suffer with pains, palpitations, and trouble
+of the heart, head, and ears; with inflammation of the eyes, kidneys, and
+swellings and injuries to the feet.
+
+
+MOUNT OF THE SUN (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is found born
+between January 21st and February 18th, and for the seven days following.
+
+In this case they are far more successful when managing for others than
+for themselves.
+
+They are usually found most active in their plans towards the relief of
+all distress and for what they believe to be the public good.
+
+They are also often as a class found in governmental positions, or as
+leaders of some party or section of public opinion. Usually they take the
+part of the "under dog," and cause themselves to be greatly abused and
+disliked by the richer and more powerful classes.
+
+They seldom attract wealth as do those of the Positive type, who are
+usually lucky in money, and when they do they are inclined to impoverish
+themselves in their efforts to help those around them, or in the
+execution of their philanthropic plans for the good of the poorer
+classes.
+
+In strange apparent contradiction to this, these people are usually
+excellent in business and in their financial plans, but again it is more
+for others than for themselves. Many of them make fortunes for others and
+keep the merest pittance for their own homes.
+
+As a rule, they find great pleasure in public ceremonies, and meetings of
+all kinds. They love theatres and all places where large numbers of
+people congregate, and when wound up to the occasion they can display
+great eloquence, power of argument, and influence in debates. They rarely
+hold the positions they win for the run of their careers, they seem to
+play the role of the moment, and when that is passed they just as quickly
+retire into obscurity or into a quiet private life, and often end their
+days in the most unusual or unheard-of places.
+
+Quite the reverse of the Positive type, these people seldom if ever
+commit suicide; on the contrary, they can endure any kind of martyrdom or
+suffering. They are buoyed up with the feeling they have done their duty
+to their fellow beings, and this feeling seems to sustain them against
+all disappointments, or losses or attacks on their name.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These children of the Negative period of the Sun suffer mostly with the
+stomach and internal organs, also with poor circulation of blood, loss of
+natural heat, and with liver and kidney complaints.
+
+They are also prone to have accidents to their bones, especially to
+limbs, knees, and ankles.
+
+Very dry climates and plenty of sunlight is their greatest safeguard
+against all their maladies.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MERCURY AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of Mercury is found under the base of the fourth finger (Plate
+VI., Part II.). On a good hand it is a favourable Mount to have, but on a
+hand shewing evil tendencies, especially mental, it increases the bad
+indications.
+
+It seems to relate more to the mind than anything else. It gives
+quickness of brain, wit, thought, eloquence. It also relates to
+adaptability in science and commerce, but if evilly afflicted, it denotes
+mental excitability, nervousness, lack of concentration, trickiness in
+business, and everything that is unreliable in character.
+
+This Mount should always be considered with the kind of Line of Head
+found on the hand.
+
+With a Line of Head long and well marked, it increases all the promise of
+mental aptitude and success, but with a weak, badly marked, or irregular
+Head Line, it augments all its weak or bad indications.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (POSITIVE)
+
+This Mount can be considered positive when the subject is found to be
+born between the dates of May 21st and June 20th, and until the 27th of
+that month, but during the last seven days its influence is considered
+dying out and not so strong.
+
+People born in this period are represented in the Zodiac by the symbolism
+of the twins. It is a curious fact that all persons born in this part of
+the year are singularly dual in character and temperament. One side of
+their nature may, in fact, be described as perpetually pulling against
+the other, and although nearly always possessed with unusual
+intelligence, they often spoil their lives by lack of continuity in their
+plans and in their purpose.
+
+They seldom seem to have a fixed idea of what they really want. They
+change their plans or their occupations at a moment's notice, and unless
+they chance to be very happily married, they are just as uncertain in
+marriage.
+
+They are the most difficult of all classes to understand. In temperament
+they are hot and cold in the same moment, they may love passionately with
+one side of their nature and just as quickly dislike with the other.
+
+They are very critical, and especially notice small faults or mannerisms
+in others, and they can express their views with a sarcasm that is as
+cutting as it is clever.
+
+In all business dealings or affairs where a subtle, keen mentality is
+useful, they can out-distance all rivals, provided they are sufficiently
+interested to enter into the competition.
+
+They are excellent in diplomacy and are gifted talkers, but they usually
+leave their listeners at the end of their conversation no wiser than they
+were at the beginning.
+
+If taken as they are and with their moods, they are the most delightful
+people imaginable, but one must never expect them to be the same to-day
+that they were yesterday.
+
+They believe that they are the most truthful persons in the world, and so
+they may be at the moment they are telling the story, but to them moments
+seem entire lives, and so in a day or a week the same story may have a
+totally different colouring.
+
+None of these people will probably admit this to be true of his
+character, but a little study will convince anyone that it is a fairly
+accurate description of this subject's chief characteristics.
+
+Mental work, especially the class of mental work that requires quickness
+of wit and change, appeals to them more than any other. They make clever
+actors, barristers, and a certain class of public speakers, also
+diplomatists, stock brokers, company promoters, or inventors of new
+methods in business. In all careers that require keenness of brain, they
+can attain success, provided they have developed a sufficient amount of
+will power and continuity of purpose to stick long enough to any one
+thing.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+Everything that can affect the nerves and the nervous system especially,
+afflicts these people.
+
+Indigestion caused by nervous worry or anxiety, catalepsy, paralysis,
+afflictions of the tongue, stammering, insomnia, vivid dreams; to all
+such things they are specially liable. They are also inclined towards
+delicacy of the throat and bronchial tubes, and particularly to trouble
+with the nose and eyes.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount may be considered negative when the persons are born between
+August 21st and September 20th, and until the 27th, but these last seven
+days of this period are not so marked, but take more from the
+characteristics of the incoming sign.
+
+People belonging to this negative type of the Mount of Mercury have all
+the good points of the positive class, and even some added in their
+favour. For example, they stick longer and with more continuity to
+whatever study or career they adopt. They have hardly the quickness or
+the brilliancy of the first type, but they have a more solid, plodding
+course of action, and as a general rule they make more out of their
+lives.
+
+They are also more materialistic and practical in their views of life,
+but they analyse and reason everything from their own way of thinking
+outwards towards others. If they see a thing is right, it is right to
+them, and for this reason they are often found doing exactly the opposite
+from what one would expect.
+
+Women born in this period are especially curious puzzles. They are either
+extremely virtuous or the direct opposite, either extremely truthful and
+conventional or the reverse; but whether good or bad, they are all a law
+unto themselves, and in all things they usually think of themselves
+first.
+
+People born in this period often abandon their husbands or their children
+just because they think they ought to do so. They also are liable to
+change their religious views half way through life, or from the most
+conventional suddenly become the reverse. In the same way women who have
+commenced their career by leading unconventional lives, may just as
+suddenly become religious and enter some extremely severe order or
+community.
+
+Again, as in the positive type, it is the Line of Head that must be
+carefully considered if one should endeavour to form an estimate of what
+they will eventually become.
+
+If it be clear and straight, their best qualities will, as a rule, come
+to their rescue; but if weak or poorly marked, it is more than likely,
+especially with this class, that the evil side of the nature will in the
+end predominate.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These people are more open to mental suggestion as far as health is
+concerned than any other class.
+
+If they think they are ill it is quite sufficient that they are so, and
+they can become cured in exactly the same manner.
+
+In reality they have excellent constitutions, except when they are ruined
+by taking drugs and medicines.
+
+As they always imagine that they have something the matter, they are
+invariably the willing prey of quack doctors and every new cure that is
+advertised.
+
+They can hardly pass a chemist's shop without buying something, and if
+they sit next to a doctor at a dinner table, they are certain to walk off
+with some prescription.
+
+Their greatest fault is that they will persist in talking to everyone of
+their supposed ailments or afflictions, for the slightest ache, pain, or
+anything that concerns them, has the most exaggerated importance in their
+mind.
+
+On the contrary, Nature can do more for these people than for any other
+class of humanity. Peace of mind, a country life, and plenty of fresh air
+will banish all their ills and ailments into oblivion.
+
+But, if badly mated, or living in unhappy surroundings, their health
+quickly breaks up, and if they cannot make a change into happier
+conditions, then no medicine in all the world can help them.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF THE MOON AND ITS MEANING
+
+The Mount of the Moon, or as it is also called the Mount of Luna, is
+found on the base of the hand under the end of the Line of Head (Plate
+VI., Part II.).
+
+This Mount relates to everything that has to do with the imaginative
+faculties, the emotional artistic temperament, romance, ideality, poetry,
+change of scenery, travel, and such like.
+
+This Mount may be considered positive when it looks high or
+well-developed, and also when the subject is found to be born between the
+dates of June 21st and July 20th, and until July 27th.
+
+People who belong to this positive class are gifted with strong
+imagination which tinges everything they do or say. They are intensely
+romantic, but idealistic in their desires, and have not that passionate
+or sensual nature that is given by the Mount of Venus on the opposite
+side of the palm.
+
+As a rule they have the inventive faculties well developed, and succeed
+in inventions and in all new ideas in whatever careers they may have
+entered.
+
+Even business people born in this period are remarkable for their
+originality, and the inventive manner in which they will tackle the most
+practical affair.
+
+They are, however, inclined to speculate or gamble even with their
+chances, also in stocks, business or, in fact, anything in which they are
+engaged.
+
+Although their imagination is large, they often achieve great success and
+make money in business. Some great financiers and heads of large
+organisations have been born in this period and have also had the Mount
+of Luna very highly developed on their hands.
+
+It has been said "that what one sees in one's dreams one shall gain in
+reality," but the fact remains that imaginative people have been found
+among the most successful of all classes. Imagination may be another name
+for Inspiration.
+
+People born in this period are seldom hide-bound by any rule of thumb or
+set convention. They love what is new in everything, and perhaps for this
+reason they love travel and change, and generally see the greater part of
+this planet before they voyage over the last river of all.
+
+Change in every way affects their careers as it also does their lives.
+Even the successful members of this period have more ups and downs than
+almost any other class.
+
+They rarely, however, give in to the blows of Fate. Their imagination
+probably helps them through, and they seldom remain down or down-hearted
+for long.
+
+Inventors, a large number of artists, musicians, and composers are found
+among people of this type, but almost without exception they have a love
+of mystic and occult things, and their dreams and visions are tangible
+and clear.
+
+These Children of the Moon owe much to the influence of their planet that
+they are even more magnetic and successful when the Moon appears in the
+heavens. Even their health appears to change and become better under her
+benign influence, and they should always be advised to commence their
+plans or operations when their planet is to be seen illuminating the
+skies.
+
+That the Moon plays an important role in the affairs of this earth cannot
+for a moment be doubted. Recent discoveries are every day revealing more
+and more that her strange magnetic influence has a power almost beyond
+belief in its effect upon the growth of vegetables, and even inanimate
+things.
+
+There are other thinkers besides those interested in occult subjects who
+have noticed the effect of this planet on mundane things. If the Moon can
+affect vegetables, eggs, and the growth of chickens, as it is proved to
+do, how much more easily and wonderfully it must affect the grey matter
+of the human brain, which is the most subtle and mysterious essence of
+all.
+
+People born in the period I have mentioned should be most careful of
+those with whom they associate, because they are extraordinarily
+sensitive to the magnetism of others.
+
+They should, if possible, avoid marrying early in life unless they are
+absolutely sure they have met their affinity. These natures both change
+and develop rapidly, and they have a strong tendency to "grow away" from
+those with whom they associate in early life. It is the same with
+partners in business; they should be as much as possible "on their own"
+or, if partnerships are made, they should not be of a binding or
+restricting order, and provision should always be made for the
+partnership to be dissolved when it has become irksome.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These Children of the Moon are chiefly inclined towards all watery
+ailments and inflammatory diseases. In early life they are prone towards
+having water on the brain, gastric and dysentery attacks, and later in
+life, inflammation of the lungs and chest, pleurisy, and dropsy.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF THE MOON (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount is considered negative when it appears very flat on the hand,
+and it may also be taken as negative when people are found to be born
+between the dates of January 21st and February 20th, and in a minor
+degree, until about February 27th.
+
+People born between these dates have good mental powers, but their
+imaginative faculties are seldom as much in evidence as is so strongly
+the case with the positive period.
+
+These persons, on the contrary, are good and quiet reasoners-out of
+problems and matters relating to the organisation of business, and are
+also excellent in all forms of government work. They make splendid heads
+of departments and rise to any responsibility very quickly and easily.
+
+They are high-minded and have very decided views on love, duty, and
+social life. They make great efforts to do good to others, but as a rule
+their best work is done towards helping the masses more than individuals.
+
+They are extremely kind-hearted and love to give a helping hand when they
+can, but at the same time they have an unfortunate knack of making many
+bitter enemies, and when holding government positions they are most
+bitterly attacked by the opposition press. Their work seldom receives
+its proper recognition and reward until they have passed from their
+sphere of influence, or have left this world of mistrust and ingratitude.
+
+They generally make excellent speakers, but more from "plain speaking,"
+in a particular way of their own.
+
+As a rule they espouse the unpopular cause and take the part of the under
+dog in the fight.
+
+They make devoted and loyal friends once their friendship is aroused, but
+at the same time they are extremely sensitive and easily wounded by those
+they care for.
+
+They are strongly inclined to be religious and generally bring their
+religious views into all they do. They are in danger of becoming too
+fanatical, and when opposed, they become extremely obstinate, dogmatic,
+and hard to manage.
+
+Heavy responsibility for others suits them best of all, especially if
+such responsibility lies in the form of government work, or in some
+position of management.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+These people usually worry themselves into bad health. They overwork
+themselves and bring on nervous breakdowns, palpitation and weakness of
+the heart, and often paralysis. They suffer with the nerves of the
+stomach, acidity of the blood, rheumatism, liver complaints, and gout.
+They are particularly liable to meet with accidents to the feet, ankles,
+and limbs.
+
+They should be very guarded when travelling by water, for they seldom get
+through life without sooner or later experiencing grave danger of
+drowning.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF VENUS AND ITS MEANING
+
+The portion of the palm under the base of the Thumb and inside the Line
+of Life is called the Mount of Venus (Plate VI., Part II.).
+
+When well-formed and not too large, it denotes a desire for love and
+companionship, the desire to please, worship of beauty in every form, the
+artistic and emotional temperament, and it is usually very prominent in
+the hands of all artists, singers, and musicians.
+
+This Mount, the science of Physiology teaches, covers one of the most
+important blood vessels in the palm, viz., the "Great Palmer Arch." If
+this loop or arch is large, it indicates a plentiful supply of blood and
+strong active circulation; consequently, the health is more robust. It is
+found that persons possessing this Mount well developed, being in active
+strong health, are naturally more full of passion than those individuals
+in poor health, and who, in consequence, have this portion of the hand
+either flat or poorly developed. Hence, when this Mount is large it has
+been considered to show passion and larger sensuality than when flat,
+flabby, or non-developed.
+
+This Mount is therefore called Positive when high or large, and Negative
+when small or flat.
+
+With the rest of the hand normal, this Mount well shaped is an excellent
+sign to have, as it denotes magnetism and attraction of one sex to the
+other, but if found together with vicious or abnormal signs in the hand,
+it increases those tendencies.
+
+When considered with the birth date, as alluded to in the former
+chapters, it helps to throw considerable light on characteristics that
+might otherwise be overlooked.
+
+The student may consider it Positive when the subject is born between
+April 20th and May 20th, and in a minor way until May 27th, the chief
+characteristics of this period being as follows:
+
+These persons have a curious dominating power over others, and are found
+rather inclined to be too dogmatic in their opinions, and also often too
+unyielding and tyrannical. They are considered stiff-necked and
+obstinate, but the strange thing is that when they love they become the
+most abject slaves of all to the object of their devotion, and they will
+consider no sacrifice too great for that one being who holds or attracts
+their affection.
+
+They are hospitable and generous, and especially love to entertain their
+friends. They make wonderfully good hosts, have great taste about food,
+and love to give excellent dinners.
+
+They dress with great taste, and are generally considered richer than
+they really are, and they can make a good show on very little.
+
+They are impulsive in their likes and dislikes, rather too frank and
+outspoken, quick in temper, and when their blood is up they have no
+restraint on what they say.
+
+Their passion or temper is, however, quickly over, and when the storm is
+passed they are most regretful for the wounds their temper may have
+caused.
+
+These types are most easily influenced by their surroundings, and become
+morbid and depressed when they are forced to live in gloomy and
+uncongenial conditions.
+
+Neither the man nor woman born in this period should marry early, for
+their first attempt is usually a mistake. They are so independent in
+character that, especially if they marry early and find their mistake,
+they lead unconventional lives and get severely criticised in
+consequence.
+
+They are inclined to be very jealous when their affections are roused,
+especially if the peace of the home is in any way disturbed.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+People born in this period have usually short or round-shaped nails which
+indicate a tendency to suffer with complaints of the throat and nose.[8]
+They also suffer, as a rule, with pains in the head and ears, swellings
+in the neck, and have a tendency towards tumours, appendicitis, and other
+internal troubles, chiefly relating to the intestines.
+
+[8] _See_ Chapter on Nails, page 136.
+
+
+THE MOUNT OF VENUS (NEGATIVE)
+
+This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is born between
+the dates of September 21st and October 20th, and in a minor way until
+October 27th, and with people born in this period it is seldom found so
+prominent. The fact is, that the affections these subjects possess may
+be just as intense, but more mental than physical.
+
+Their love is spiritual rather than sensual, and they crave more for soul
+companionship than for that of the physical senses.
+
+Of course there are exceptions to all rules, but these exceptions can be
+easily seen by watching if the Mount of Venus is large with people born
+in this period.
+
+All mental characteristics rule, however, very strongly. Those born in
+this latter period have keen intuition and a mental balance of all things
+not given to the other class. They have presentiments and psychic
+experiences, dreams, clairvoyance, and such like, which they often spoil
+by their reasoning faculties, and they endeavour to answer all problems
+through the medium of their mind or mental faculties.
+
+In love they are nearly always unhappy. They cannot "let themselves go,"
+like the Positive Venus type. They hesitate and miss their opportunities
+whilst they think or reason, and so love goes by and often leaves them
+nothing but regret. They should be advised to act more on their first
+impressions and intuition, and take the opportunities that Fate throws in
+their way.
+
+They occupy themselves very much with all mental questions concerning
+their fellow beings. They are often found studying Law, but more with the
+desire of improving it for others than for their own personal advantage.
+
+They have a great desire for knowledge, and often spend their lives in
+studying abstruse subjects, but always weighing and balancing each point
+in the most conscientious manner. They make excellent doctors, judges,
+lawyers, but more as masters of some particular branch than that of
+gaining worldly advantage.
+
+
+HEALTH
+
+The people born in this period are inclined to suffer from lack of
+physical strength, exhaustion of the nerves, depression of spirits,
+melancholia, intense feeling of loneliness, and such like. Also severe
+headaches, pains in the back, loins, and kidneys; just as in the case of
+those of the other period of this Venus sign they have a great tendency,
+especially the women, to suffer from internal ailments, and often undergo
+severe operations.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+
+ADVICE TO THE STUDENT. THE BEST MEANS TO MAKE CASTS OR TAKE IMPRESSIONS
+OF THE HANDS
+
+I would strongly advise students of this subject to make casts of hands
+in plaster of Paris, wax, or any other suitable material, in order to
+make a library or collection, both for their own private study, and also
+as a valuable record of their work.
+
+Before I read any hands professionally, I had some thousands of casts,
+impressions on paper, and photographs of hands in my possession, and I
+found that I derived the most valuable aid from being able to analyse and
+study their shapes and markings at my leisure.
+
+In making casts I would advise the very finest plaster of Paris to be
+used. When the plaster is worked up to the proper consistency, it is
+necessary to rub a fine oil into the hand before bringing it into contact
+with the plaster, as otherwise the hair may stick and so cause trouble
+and annoyance.
+
+Dental wax heated in hot water and made very soft is also an excellent
+material to make moulds from, especially as it does not make a mess, and
+is very little trouble to employ.
+
+The great disadvantage of making a collection of casts arises from the
+large space that such a collection will eventually occupy. To avoid this
+the student can also make a library of impressions of hands on paper, and
+keep them marked and numbered in a series of albums or scrap-books that
+may easily be obtained at any stationer's.
+
+The best means of taking these impressions is to obtain a small gelatine
+roller used by printers for fine work, such as die stamping, a tube of
+printer's ink, and a small sheet of glass to roll the ink out until it
+covers the surface of the roller in an even way.
+
+The roller may then be passed over the surface of the palm, the hand
+pressed firmly down on a smooth sheet of white paper, and with a little
+practice, most excellent impressions can easily be obtained.
+
+When the impression is dry it can be dated, numbered, and placed in an
+album for reference.
+
+In order to remove the black ink from the hand, powdered washing soap,
+well brushed into the hand with a nail brush, and a little hot water is
+all that will be found necessary.
+
+These impressions taken with printer's ink are far better than those
+taken by smoking a sheet of paper by camphor, or by a candle, or any
+other means.
+
+The best time for examining hands is during the day, first because the
+light is better and, above all, because the circulation of the blood does
+not redden the entire palm as it does at night, and the finer lines can
+consequently easily be detected.
+
+As I described earlier in these pages, the right and left hands should be
+examined together to note what difference there may be in the shape and
+position of the lines, but the markings on the right hand are the only
+ones to be relied on.
+
+Lastly, do not be for ever on the lookout for faults and failings in the
+subject whose hands you may be examining, remember no one is perfect, and
+that faults and failings may in the end be as stepping stones "by which
+we rise from our dead selves to higher things."
+
+
+  Transcriber's notes:
+    P(ix)  d'Arpentigny corrected to D'Arpentigny
+    P10    dveloped corrected to developed.
+    P76    forshadows corected to foreshadows
+    P63    Removed extraneous comma.
+    P130   Period added at the end of a paragraph.
+    P132   Added "is called the Finger of" instead of " to clarify.
+    P135   Period added before a capital The.
+    P142   decribed corrected to described.
+    P158   Extra opening parenthesis removed.
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Palmistry for All, by Cheiro
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PALMISTRY FOR ALL ***
+
+***** This file should be named 20480.txt or 20480.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/0/4/8/20480/
+
+Produced by Barbara Tozier, Bill Tozier, Christine D. and
+the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
+http://www.pgdp.net
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
diff --git a/20480.zip b/20480.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8886152
--- /dev/null
+++ b/20480.zip
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5f3ba56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #20480 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/20480)